Ford Motor Company Chief Executive Jim Farley said Wednesday that the United States is sliding into what he called a “huge crisis” in the skilled trades, arguing in a CNN interview that the country has neglected the mechanics, electricians and factory workers it depends on while pouring its attention into artificial intelligence.

Farley pointed to his own industry to make the case. He said there are roughly 400,000 open jobs for automotive technicians, positions paying from about $50,000 for entry-level workers to as much as $150,000 for experienced professionals. Those jobs remain difficult to fill even as vehicles become increasingly sophisticated and wages continue to rise.

The shortage extends well beyond automobile repair.

Farley said the nation lacks enough plumbers, electricians and skilled manufacturing workers, with few young people entering trades that traditionally passed from one generation to the next. He has spent the past year describing these occupations as the “essential economy”—the workers who build, maintain and repair the infrastructure Americans rely on every day.

Citing the Aspen Institute, Farley said the essential economy contributes roughly $12 trillion to U.S. gross domestic product. He estimates America is currently short approximately 600,000 manufacturing workers, 500,000 construction workers, in addition to the 400,000 automotive technicians already needed.

What makes the warning particularly striking is its timing.

Farley has become one of corporate America’s most outspoken executives warning that artificial intelligence could eliminate large numbers of white-collar office jobs over the coming decade, particularly entry-level administrative and programming positions that many young workers have historically used to launch their careers.

At the same time, however, the AI revolution is creating an enormous demand for the very skilled trades the country is struggling to supply.

According to Goldman Sachs Research analysts Hongcen Wei, Daan Struyven and Samantha Dart, U.S. data-center electricity demand is expected to climb from 31 gigawatts in 2025 to 41 gigawatts in 2026, before reaching 66 gigawatts in 2027—nearly doubling within two years.

Those same analysts warned that labor shortages and supply-chain constraints remain the biggest obstacles preventing projects from staying on schedule.

After accounting for those risks, Goldman estimates only about 60% of planned data-center capacity scheduled for next year will actually become operational on time, falling to roughly 50% over a two-year period.

The shortage has already been documented across the construction industry.

The Information Technology and Innovation Foundation reported in November 2025 that the United States was short approximately 439,000 construction workers, most in highly skilled positions such as electricians and pipefitters, while more than 400 data centers were simultaneously under development nationwide.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics projects approximately 80,000 electrician job openings annually over the next decade, while roughly 20,000 union electricians retire every year, leaving the workforce unable to replenish itself fast enough.

Electricians sit at the center of the challenge.

The International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers (IBEW) estimates electrical systems account for between 45% and 70% of the total cost of constructing a modern data center. That highly specialized work cannot easily be accelerated or handed to inexperienced workers.

The financial stakes continue to grow.

McKinsey & Company estimates cumulative worldwide investment in data centers could reach $6.7 trillion by 2030, while global AI-related capital expenditures are projected to exceed $750 billion during 2026 alone.

The shortage is already delaying projects.

Oracle, which is building data-center capacity for OpenAI, pushed portions of its construction schedule from 2027 into 2028, with labor shortages cited as one contributing factor, according to Bloomberg. Oracle disputes that characterization and says its projects remain on schedule.

Meanwhile, Google committed $15 million to the Electrical Training Alliance to expand the pipeline of qualified electricians, reflecting how seriously major technology companies now view workforce availability.

Farley also challenged decades of conventional career advice.

He argued that American families have convinced their children that a traditional four-year college degree represents the only path to a successful career, dismissing that assumption as “total bologna.”

Many parents, he said, continue steering children toward software engineering positions paying around $170,000 annually while overlooking skilled HVAC technicians earning roughly $97,000 in careers that are significantly more difficult to automate or outsource.

Ford has invested directly in changing that perception.

The company funds technician scholarship programs through its nationwide dealer network and has established training centers designed to prepare future mechanics and skilled workers. Farley has also pointed to his own family, noting his son spent last summer working as a fabricator in North Carolina instead of taking additional college classes.

For households, the consequences are becoming increasingly visible.

When there are too few skilled tradespeople, vehicle repairs take longer, home repairs become more expensive, construction slows, and housing costs remain elevated because projects cannot be completed quickly enough.

Electricity bills may also feel the impact.

As AI data centers consume a growing share of the nation’s power grid, their contribution to peak summer electricity demand is projected to increase from roughly 4.1% in 2025 to approximately 8.5% by 2027, placing additional upward pressure on electricity prices in many regions.

The picture that emerges is one of the central paradoxes of the AI economy.

While technology companies continue investing hundreds of billions of dollars into artificial intelligence, one of the industry’s greatest constraints is neither capital nor computing power—it is a shortage of skilled human workers.

The jobs exist.

The wages are competitive.

And as the chief executive of one of America’s largest manufacturers continues to warn, the country is running short of the people willing—and trained—to do them.

JBizNews Desk | Dearborn, Michigan
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

India has emerged as a shelter for global investors rattled by sharp swings in artificial-intelligence stocks, with the NSE Nifty 50 posting steadier returns than most emerging-market rivals through the first half of 2026 and foreign money beginning to flow back. Through June, the Nifty 50 outpaced the MSCI Emerging Markets Index by its widest margin since November, while foreign investor outflows slowed to their lowest level in four months—a shift that has prompted several strategists to rethink a market they had largely written off earlier in the year.

The irony is that India’s recent strength stems largely from what it lacks. For much of 2026, the country’s limited exposure to major AI companies weighed on investor interest as global capital poured into technology-heavy markets such as South Korea and Taiwan, home to many of the semiconductor manufacturers driving the artificial intelligence boom. Now, with those same AI-related investments swinging sharply on every headline about spending, valuations and earnings, India’s relative lack of exposure has become an advantage rather than a weakness. During the first half of the year, the Nifty 50 experienced daily moves of 1% or more far less frequently than most major emerging-market indexes, offering investors a level of stability that has become increasingly valuable.

The broader economic backdrop has improved as well. A stronger Indian rupee, declining oil prices and lower commodity costs have eased inflation concerns while improving the country’s growth outlook. That combination of more stable prices, resilient economic growth and lower market volatility has strengthened the investment case for India and helped distinguish it from many other emerging markets.

Oil prices remain an important part of the story. India imports most of its crude oil, making the economy particularly sensitive to fluctuations in global energy prices. The recent decline in oil prices following earlier spikes tied to geopolitical tensions in the Middle East has provided meaningful relief by reducing inflationary pressures, improving corporate profit margins and giving policymakers greater flexibility.

Monetary policy remains an important variable. The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) kept its benchmark interest rate unchanged at 5.25% in early June while lowering its growth forecast and modestly raising its inflation outlook. The cautious stance suggests policymakers remain unwilling to declare victory over inflation despite improving economic conditions. Investors positioning India as a relatively safe destination are effectively betting that the RBI can continue controlling inflation without significantly slowing economic growth.

Corporate earnings now become the next major test. Investors are closely watching results from Tata Consultancy Services (TCS), India’s largest information-technology services company, scheduled to report later this week. Analysts will be looking to see whether lower operating costs and steady domestic demand translate into stronger earnings. As one of India’s largest technology companies, TCS could also offer important clues about how artificial intelligence may affect the country’s massive outsourcing industry, where automation presents both opportunities and long-term competitive challenges.

For business leaders and investors, the appeal of India increasingly comes down to diversification. The renewed interest is not based on expectations that India will dominate the artificial intelligence revolution. Instead, investors are seeking exposure to one of the world’s largest equity markets whose performance is less dependent on the handful of mega-cap AI companies that have increasingly driven—and disrupted—global stock markets. At a time when a single earnings report from a technology giant can move markets worldwide, an economy supported more by domestic consumption than by semiconductor manufacturing offers a different risk profile.

That does not make India immune from global uncertainty. The rupee could weaken, oil prices could climb again if geopolitical tensions escalate, and a severe downturn in global technology stocks would almost certainly spill into emerging markets as well. Even so, the investment case has become increasingly clear. In a year dominated by both the excitement and volatility surrounding artificial intelligence, India is offering investors something increasingly difficult to find: stability.

JBizNews Desk | Mumbai
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Chinese Foreign Minister Wang Yi told one of Europe’s most prominent business families that China is open for their investment, using a meeting in Stockholm to pitch deeper economic cooperation at a time when President Donald Trump’s tariff disputes have strained relations with several U.S. allies.

According to a statement from China’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Wang met Jacob Wallenberg, chairman of Swedish investment company Investor AB, on Saturday and welcomed Swedish and broader European businesses to expand cooperation with China for what he described as mutual benefit.

“Investing in China means investing in the future,” Wang said, noting that the Wallenberg family was among the first European business groups to invest in China following the country’s economic opening during the 1970s and 1980s.

The timing is significant.

Wang’s visit to Sweden is part of a week-long tour of Denmark, Sweden, Finland, and Norway—countries that were among those targeted earlier this year by the Trump administration’s tariff threats.

In January, President Trump threatened a 10% tariff on imports from Denmark and seven other European nations, including Sweden, Norway, and Finland, as part of his campaign to acquire Greenland, warning the tariffs could rise to 25%.

The eight governments responded with a joint statement saying the threats “undermine transatlantic relations and risk a dangerous downward spiral.”

Into that environment stepped China’s top diplomat, presenting Beijing as a cooperative economic partner rather than a competitor.

The messaging has been consistent.

Earlier in Copenhagen, Wang said China and Europe are “partners, not rivals,” arguing that cooperation—not confrontation—should define the relationship. Chinese state media has increasingly portrayed what it calls “transatlantic turmoil”—including U.S. tariffs and disputes over Greenland—as an opportunity for China to attract greater European investment and business.

The implication for European executives is difficult to miss: while Washington threatens additional trade barriers, Beijing is offering expanded access to one of the world’s largest consumer markets.

Whether U.S. tariff policy ultimately pushes European business toward China remains less clear.

The Trump administration’s tariff program has become one of the broadest in decades. After the U.S. Supreme Court struck down the administration’s emergency-powers tariffs in February—forcing refunds estimated at $166 billion collected from more than 330,000 businesses—the administration replaced them with a universal 10% tariff under different statutory authority through late July, while President Trump has suggested raising that rate to 15%.

Separate tariffs on steel, aluminum, copper, and automobiles remain as high as 50%. The average effective U.S. tariff rate reached approximately 11.8% in April, among the highest levels in more than a century.

Those policies have already reshaped global trade flows.

U.S. imports from China declined sharply during the first half of last year as tariffs took effect. In response, China has accelerated efforts to expand exports into other markets, particularly Europe. For many European companies, the business calculation is evolving: if exporting to the United States becomes more expensive and unpredictable, China’s market and manufacturing ecosystem may appear relatively more attractive.

That is the audience Wang Yi was targeting in Stockholm.

The picture, however, remains more complicated than Beijing suggests.

Europe has spent several years pursuing a strategy of “de-risking” its relationship with China by tightening foreign-investment screening, imposing tariffs on Chinese electric vehicles, and raising concerns about Chinese industrial overcapacity. European governments generally welcome investment while remaining cautious about increasing dependence on China, particularly in strategically sensitive industries.

The European Union and China only recently established a new trade and investment consultation mechanism, reflecting an effort to manage tensions rather than fundamentally realign their relationship.

Despite current tariff disputes, the transatlantic economy remains by far the world’s largest commercial partnership. Trade between the European Union and the United States totaled approximately €1.68 trillion during 2024, a level of economic integration that cannot easily be replaced.

The broader challenge for Washington may therefore be less about companies relocating to China than about geopolitical influence.

A tariff strategy intended in part to counter China’s economic rise also risks creating diplomatic openings that Beijing can exploit. When Wang Yi tells European executives that China offers stability and predictability, he is reinforcing an argument made more persuasive by ongoing trade disputes between the United States and its closest allies.

For businesses, the lesson centers on leverage.

Tariffs can reduce trade deficits and strengthen negotiating positions, but imposing trade barriers on allies also increases their incentive to diversify economic relationships elsewhere. China is betting that if Washington continues treating close partners as trade adversaries, more European investment and commercial activity will gradually shift eastward.

Whether that strategy succeeds will depend less on Beijing’s diplomatic outreach than on how the United States manages its economic relationships with the allies China is now actively courting.

JBizNews Desk | Stockholm
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Governments and organizations under international sanctions moved roughly $104 billion through cryptocurrency in 2025, a nearly sevenfold increase that made sanctions evasion the single largest driver of illicit digital-asset activity, according to the 2026 Crypto Crime Report published by blockchain analytics firm Chainalysis. The firm found that total illicit crypto flows reached approximately $154 billion for the year, up 162% from 2024, with the surge driven overwhelmingly by state and state-linked actors seeking to maintain access to global markets despite Western sanctions.

The report, released earlier this year and reinforced by a parallel study from analytics firm TRM Labs, points to a structural shift rather than a one-time spike. Chainalysis concluded that cryptocurrency is no longer a fringe workaround for sanctioned governments but has become a core component of their financial infrastructure, supporting international trade settlements, weapons procurement and cross-border money transfers. Roughly 84% of illicit transaction volume flowed through stablecoins—digital tokens pegged to traditional currencies and valued for maintaining price stability while funds move across borders.

Russia sits at the center of the findings. Chainalysis identified a ruble-backed stablecoin known as A7A5, which processed approximately $93.3 billion in transactions in less than one year, effectively serving as a settlement network for sanctioned Russian businesses. The activity was linked to the cryptocurrency exchange Garantex and its successor, Grinex—entities that the U.S. Department of the Treasury’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) has sanctioned alongside a Kyrgyz-issued token and a network of associated companies. According to the report, when one exchange is shut down, operators increasingly establish a replacement. Grinex was created by former Garantex personnel after law enforcement action disrupted the original platform.

Iran’s use of cryptocurrency appears more operational. The report found that networks associated with the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) accounted for more than half the value flowing into Iranian cryptocurrency services during the second half of 2025, with total transfers reaching approximately $3 billion. The funds were used to support regional proxy groups while facilitating arms and oil transactions. North Korea experienced its largest cryptocurrency theft year on record, stealing more than $2 billion, including approximately $1.5 billion during a single cyberattack against the Bybit exchange—the largest crypto theft reported to date. Investigators concluded that the proceeds helped finance the regime’s weapons programs.

For the broader cryptocurrency industry, the findings present two competing narratives. Supporters point out that illicit transactions still represent less than 1% of total cryptocurrency activity and argue that public blockchains are inherently transparent, allowing investigators to trace transactions in ways impossible with cash. That transparency has fueled demand for compliance software from firms such as Chainalysis and TRM Labs, which now sell blockchain monitoring tools to governments, banks and digital-asset exchanges.

The headline figures nevertheless present a significant challenge for an industry still working toward mainstream financial acceptance. A $104 billion sanctions-evasion network is precisely the type of statistic that strengthens the resolve of regulators and makes traditional financial institutions more cautious about working with cryptocurrency firms. It raises compliance expectations—and compliance costs—for legitimate exchanges and stablecoin issuers, which increasingly face pressure to identify sanctioned wallets, monitor transactions and freeze suspicious assets or risk losing access to the traditional banking system. Enforcement has likewise evolved, with OFAC, the European Union, and the United Kingdom’s sanctions authorities increasingly identifying specific cryptocurrency wallet addresses directly in their sanctions lists.

The role of stablecoins deserves particular attention from the business community. As dollar-backed digital tokens move closer to mainstream financial adoption, the report’s conclusion that stablecoins now carry the majority of illicit transaction volume places issuers in a difficult position. Their future growth depends on being viewed as safe, regulated financial products closely connected to the banking system, yet those same characteristics also make them attractive tools for sanctioned governments seeking efficient cross-border payments.

The findings also arrive against an active geopolitical backdrop. With global energy markets already under pressure from conflict involving Iran, the report’s conclusion that Tehran increasingly relies on cryptocurrency to move oil revenue and finance regional proxy groups underscores how digital assets have become an important pressure valve for governments facing international sanctions. For banks, exchanges and payment companies, the message is increasingly clear: the primary illicit-finance risk surrounding cryptocurrency is no longer dominated by scams and ransomware attacks. It is increasingly driven by nation-states—and measured in the tens of billions of dollars.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

New York City has committed more than $1 billion to fully reconstruct the century-old Riegelmann Boardwalk at Coney Island, a project city officials describe as both an economic-development engine and a defense against rising seas—even as fresh questions surface this week about how long residents will have to wait. The commitment was announced by the New York City Economic Development Corporation (NYCEDC) and the New York City Department of Parks and Recreation, with NYCEDC President and CEO Andrew Kimball calling it exactly the kind of investment the neighborhood deserves, and Parks Commissioner Iris Rodriguez-Rosa describing it as preparing the boardwalk to safely welcome visitors for another 100 years.

The scope is comprehensive. The plan calls for rebuilding the entire 2.7-mile boardwalk “from piles to topside,” replacing structural pilings, decking and utilities while elevating sections to improve storm protection. The project also includes renovations to restrooms, lifeguard stations and shade pavilions. The city plans to partner with a design-build team, with funding extending through 2032. A separate $42 million project will renovate the adjacent Abe Stark Sports Center and its ice rink, an investment business leaders hope will attract visitors during the winter months and transform Coney Island into more of a year-round destination.

That year-round strategy is central to the business case. Coney Island remains one of Brooklyn’s busiest public attractions, drawing millions of tourists and local visitors annually while supporting an economy built around amusement parks, restaurants, food vendors and small businesses that depend heavily on seasonal foot traffic. Extending the visitor season could provide a meaningful boost to businesses ranging from the famous hot dog stands to the rides operating inside the historic amusement district.

The boardwalk reconstruction is also part of a much larger redevelopment initiative. Under the Coney Island West plan, New York City intends to add approximately 1,500 new homes, with roughly one-quarter designated as affordable housing, alongside new ground-floor retail space and additional public parking on city-owned property. Officials say the combined investment will create years of construction work, new housing opportunities and permanent jobs. For contractors, engineers, suppliers and firms specializing in resilient coastal infrastructure, the billion-dollar project represents a significant pipeline of future business, particularly for minority- and women-owned businesses that frequently participate in public infrastructure projects.

There is, however, an important catch. The New York City Department of Parks and Recreation told CBS News that its carpentry crews already perform repairs on the landmark boardwalk five days a week between April and November, maintaining a structure made up of more than one million wooden boards that constantly require replacement. Local residents—including one who launched a petition calling for faster repairs—argue that the full reconstruction remains years away. Current estimates place the project in the research and design phase through at least 2027, with construction beginning afterward. For many residents dealing with deteriorating boards, exposed nails and structural wear, funding the project and completing the work remain two very different things.

The financing also carries political significance. The $1 billion commitment was secured during the final capital budget approved under former Mayor Eric Adams, meaning responsibility for executing the project now rests with the current administration. Large public infrastructure projects in New York have historically faced delays between funding announcements and groundbreaking, and with community planning and design work still ongoing, the boardwalk’s timeline leaves considerable room for slippage.

Another issue remains unresolved: what the rebuilt boardwalk should actually look like. Longtime business owners and neighborhood advocates want the historic wooden surface preserved, arguing that its traditional appearance forms part of Coney Island’s identity and visitor appeal. City planners have explored more durable materials and selective elevation to improve storm resilience and reduce future maintenance costs. The final design decision will influence not only the boardwalk’s appearance but also its long-term operating expenses.

For now, the headline remains straightforward: New York has committed more than $1 billion to completely rebuild one of Brooklyn’s best-known landmarks while tying the investment to new housing, infrastructure improvements and economic development. The real test will be whether the city can move from planning documents to active construction before the aging boardwalk deteriorates further under the millions of visitors who continue to use it each year.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Russia is spending enormous sums to build its own version of SpaceX, and the early results have been messy. The effort is led by Dmitry Bakanov, who has run the country’s state space corporation, Roscosmos, since February 2025. His job, in plain terms, is to drag Russia’s once-proud space program back into the top tier. So far the climb has been steep.

The clearest sign of trouble came from Russia’s answer to Starlink, the internet-from-space network owned by Elon Musk. The Russian system is called Rassvet, which means “Dawn.” On March 23, the private aerospace firm Bureau 1440 launched the first 16 operational Rassvet satellites into orbit aboard a Soyuz-2.1b rocket from the Plesetsk Cosmodrome. The company, part of IKS Holding, described the launch as a transition from testing to building a commercial service.

Then one of those satellites failed. One of the spacecraft launched in March suffered an apparent thruster failure and burned up in the atmosphere on June 6. Bureau 1440 confirmed the loss in a report published June 9, saying 15 of the 16 satellites from the March deployment remain in orbit and that the network’s capabilities were not affected. Losing a satellite only months into a flagship program is not the start Moscow wanted.

The gap with SpaceX is difficult to overstate. SpaceX has more than 10,000 Starlink satellites in low-Earth orbit and began launching the network roughly six years ago. Russia placed its first operational group of 16 satellites into orbit only this spring. Analysts say Rassvet will need at least 250 satellites before it can function as a reliable broadband network. Bureau 1440 plans to have 156 satellites in orbit by the end of 2026 and expand the constellation to about 900 satellites by 2035.

Money is not the obstacle. The Russian federal budget has earmarked 102.8 billion rubles, about $1.26 billion, for Rassvet, while Bureau 1440 plans to invest another 329 billion rubles, roughly $4 billion, of its own funds through 2030. President Vladimir Putin has praised the project, saying it can compete with Starlink and eventually surpass it in certain markets.

There is also a military urgency behind the effort. In February 2026, Ukraine said unauthorized Starlink terminals used by Russian forces had been deactivated following coordination with SpaceX, disrupting Russian communications and drone operations. A domestically controlled satellite network would remove that vulnerability. Rassvet satellites are also designed to function as space-based 5G stations and support drone operations that are more difficult to jam.

The satellite network is only half of Bakanov’s challenge. The other is rockets. For decades Russia relied on reliable but expendable Soyuz launch vehicles, discarding used stages after every mission. SpaceX changed the economics of spaceflight by landing and reusing the first stage of its Falcon 9, dramatically lowering launch costs. Roscosmos is now attempting to follow the same model.

Bakanov has openly acknowledged the influence of Musk’s approach. In an interview with business newspaper RBC, he said reusing a rocket’s first stage instead of discarding it delivers significant cost savings. Russia’s answer is the Amur-SPG, a methane-fueled reusable rocket designed to replace the Soyuz-2. Roscosmos hopes each launch will cost about $22 million, well below the roughly $50 million it assigns to a Falcon 9 mission, with a first stage engineered for multiple flights.

The challenge is timing. As of January, Roscosmos expected the Amur-SPG to be completed around 2030—roughly 15 years after Falcon 9 first achieved a successful booster landing. Bakanov has said the immediate priority is proving the first stage can safely return and land. Roscosmos has already completed methane engine fire tests and selected landing sites in Russia’s Sverdlovsk region. Even Elon Musk, years ago, publicly suggested Russia should pursue full rocket reusability or risk developing technology that would already be outdated.

The full picture came into sharper focus this week as fresh reporting on Russia’s roughly $60 billion space revival highlighted how far the country still trails the industry leader. While Moscow counts its first operational satellites and conducts engine tests, SpaceX had completed 671 Falcon 9 and Falcon Heavy launches as of July 2, with 668 full mission successes. The ambition inside Roscosmos is real, and so is the funding. Whether Dmitry Bakanov can close a lead measured in thousands of satellites and hundreds of launches remains the question hanging over every ruble Russia spends.

JBizNews Desk | Moscow
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Tesla Inc. told buyers on Thursday that a bigger, three-row version of its best-selling SUV is finally on sale in the United States. In a post on its own social media channels, Tesla said customers in the U.S. and Puerto Rico can now order the Model Y Long Wheelbase — badged the Model Y L — with first deliveries expected in September.

The stretched SUV is built for families who found the regular Model Y too small in the back. It adds about 7 inches of total length and 6 inches between the front and rear wheels, and it swaps the standard car’s tight middle bench for a roomier two-seat-per-row layout. The result is a six-seat vehicle with captain’s chairs in the second row and a third row that adults can actually use. Tesla rates it at 325 miles of range and a 0-to-60 time of 4.4 seconds.

The price is the headline for most shoppers. The Model Y L arrives first as a fully loaded “Launch Series” that starts at $61,990, or about $63,380 once the mandatory delivery charge is added. That makes it the most expensive Model Y on sale — roughly $4,000 more than the $57,990 Model Y Performance and about $22,000 above the cheapest standard Model Y at $39,990.

That sticker surprised some in the auto business. Watchers had expected a U.S. price near $54,000, based on the roughly $4,000 premium the longer version carries over the standard car in China. Instead, Tesla reached for the top of the range. To soften the cost, the company is throwing in one year of Full Self-Driving (Supervised), one year of free Supercharging, one year of Premium Connectivity, and free choice of paint, interior color, and wheels for Launch Series orders.

Tesla is using a familiar playbook here. It often opens a new model with a loaded, higher-priced version to capture the most eager buyers first, then rolls out cheaper trims later. Whether more affordable Model Y L configurations follow will decide how competitive the vehicle really is against rivals.

And the rivals are real. The three-row electric family SUV, once a thin corner of the market, is now crowded. The Kia EV9 starts at $54,900 with up to 304 miles of range. The Hyundai Ioniq 9 starts at about $58,955 with up to 335 miles. Both undercut the Model Y L on price, which means Tesla is asking families to pay more for its badge and its Supercharger network at the exact moment Korean automakers are proving they don’t have to.

The bigger SUV also fills a hole in Tesla’s own lineup. The company has wound down its larger Model S sedan and Model X SUV in the U.S., leaving no roomy, more-than-five-seat option for shoppers who need one. The Model Y L steps into that gap. Third-row legroom of about 33 inches is now in the same range as gas-powered midsize SUVs like the Ford Explorer and Hyundai Palisade, according to figures Tesla provided.

Production is already running at Giga Texas in Austin, so this is a U.S.-built vehicle rather than an import. The longer Model Y first launched in China last summer, where it quickly became a hit, and later reached Australia, Malaysia, and other Asian markets. Tesla Chief Executive Elon Musk had said in August 2025 that U.S. production wouldn’t begin until roughly the end of 2026 — so the Thursday launch lands ahead of that earlier timeline.

The new model comes as Tesla’s overall numbers are improving. The company also said Thursday it delivered 480,126 vehicles worldwide in the second quarter, up 24.9% from the same period a year earlier. It was the second straight quarter of growth after a 6.3% rise in the first quarter. The Model Y remains the top-selling electric vehicle in the U.S., and research firm Cox Automotive reported that one of every three EVs sold in the country in the first quarter was a Model Y.

For everyday buyers, the takeaway is straightforward. Families who liked the idea of a Tesla but needed a real third row finally have one, with the range and quick acceleration the brand is known for. The catch is the price. At nearly $62,000 before options, the Model Y L is a premium buy in a segment where two well-reviewed competitors now cost thousands less. Tesla is betting there is enough pent-up demand — and enough loyalty to its charging network — to make that premium stick. The order books opened Thursday; the first driveways won’t see the vehicle until fall.

JBizNews Desk | Austin, Texas
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. stocks opened higher Monday, July 6, in the first session after the July 4 holiday weekend, with the Dow Jones Industrial Average climbing past 53,000 for the first time as semiconductor shares rebounded and oil prices slid. The S&P 500 rose 0.5% shortly after the opening bell, while the Nasdaq Composite added 0.7%, and the Dow gained 105 points, or 0.2%, exceeding 53,000 for the first time. The gains built on a strong prior week and came against a busy backdrop: a soft June jobs report that has traders rethinking the Federal Reserve’s next move, falling crude as Middle East supply recovers, and President Donald Trump ringing the opening bell from the Oval Office to promote his new Trump Accounts program.

The clearest signal for households came from the labor market. The Labor Department reported last week that the U.S. economy added just 57,000 jobs in June, the fewest in four months and well below forecasts of about 110,000, with the unemployment rate at 4.2%. Under Fed Chair Kevin Warsh, the central bank has been weighing whether to raise interest rates again this year to hold down inflation, an unusual stance at a time when much of the world is cutting. The weak hiring number cooled those bets: futures now imply roughly a 50% chance of a September rate hike, down from about 66% before the report.

Politics shared the stage with the numbers. Trump rang the opening bell Monday at both the New York Stock Exchange and the Nasdaq from the Oval Office, using the moment to showcase Trump Accounts, which give children a $1,000 government seed contribution and have drawn more than 6 million family sign-ups. Overseas, Iran held the main procession of Ayatollah Ali Khamenei’s funeral in Tehran, and the Russia-Ukraine war escalated ahead of a NATO summit this week, though neither rattled the early tone.

At the open, the Dow traded just above 53,000 after climbing nearly 2% last week. The S&P 500 sat near 7,520 and the Nasdaq Composite pushed higher on the back of chips. The technology sector led the way, with the Technology Select Sector SPDR ETF up more than 2%.

Market movers

Chip equipment makers led the rally on fresh Wall Street calls. Lam Research sat at the top of the S&P 500, up more than 4%, after Morgan Stanley raised its price target, while Applied Materials and KLA Corporation each rose just under 4% on target hikes from the same firm. ASML Holding, the Dutch chip-gear giant, gained about 4% after Bernstein lifted its price target by more than 30% to $2,300.

Memory and testing names ran with them. Western Digital jumped about 10% and Teradyne climbed 8%, with Marvell Technology and Oracle also higher. In premarket trading, Universal Display gained 8% and Element Solutions rose 6.5%.

The day’s biggest surge came from a power-and-AI deal. TeraWulf jumped more than 16% after Anthropic signed a 20-year agreement to use its Kentucky data center, a roughly 400-megawatt project expected to generate more than $19 billion in revenue over the initial term, with first power slated for the second half of 2027. Comcast rose about 0.5% after its U.K.-based Sky agreed to buy rival ITV’s television business. SpaceX, which went public June 12, gained about 1% to $163.75 ahead of its addition to the Nasdaq-100 before Tuesday’s open.

Not everything rose. Icon PLC fell 6%, Loar Holdings dropped 3.5% and Honeywell declined 2% in premarket trading.

Commodities and volatility

Oil kept sliding, easing pressure at the pump. West Texas Intermediate traded near $68 a barrel, down on the day, while Brent held around $71.50. Prices are falling as commercial shipping recovers through the Strait of Hormuz and the prospect of more OPEC+ supply raises the risk of a glut. Gold stayed firm as a safe harbor, trading above $4,100 an ounce Monday, supported by the weak jobs data and lower oil. Wall Street’s fear gauge, the VIX, hovered near 16, a calm reading that signals little stress in the market.

The day ahead

Trading is light on company news this Monday after the holiday, but the week fills up quickly. SpaceX officially joins the Nasdaq-100 before Tuesday’s open, the same day Samsung Electronics releases preliminary second-quarter earnings. Investors will also track the NATO summit and any signal from Fed officials on whether June’s soft hiring changes the rate debate. For now, the market’s message is steady: record highs on the Dow, a rebound in the chips that have driven this year’s gains, and cheaper oil taking some heat out of inflation worries.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Researchers at Tel Aviv University’s Gray Faculty of Medical and Health Sciences have identified a mechanism by which cancerous tumors can redirect a normal immune system process to support tumor growth, a discovery they say could lead to new treatment strategies that restore the immune system’s ability to fight cancer. 

The study was led by Dr. Merav Cohen and doctoral students Roi Balaban and Ori Moskowitz and was published in the journal Science Immunology

The research focused on macrophages, immune cells responsible for removing damaged and dead cells from the body. While this process normally helps maintain healthy tissue and prevent inflammation, the researchers found that within cancerous tumors it can instead change the behavior of the immune cells in ways that promote tumor development. 

To investigate the process, the team developed a new technology called Effero-seq, which tracks changes in immune cells after they engulf dead cells. Using the method, the researchers found that macrophages that consumed dead cancer cells underwent what they described as “reprogramming,” activating genes associated with tumor growth. 

Study finds how tumors hijack immune defenses

The team used a melanoma model to examine the effects of the altered immune cells. They found that macrophages that had consumed dead cancer cells encouraged the formation of new blood vessels inside tumors. The additional blood vessels supplied tumors with oxygen and nutrients, allowing them to grow more rapidly.

The researchers also found that these macrophages became less responsive to signals that normally trigger anti-cancer immune activity. 

The researchers expanded the study by analyzing data from patients with uveal melanoma, a form of eye cancer. They found that patients whose tumors showed higher expression of immune cells carrying the genetic signature identified in the study generally had lower survival rates. 

According to Dr. Cohen, the findings offer new insight into how tumors influence the immune system to support their own growth. 

“The better we understand these mechanisms, the better equipped we will be to develop treatments that block them and restore the immune system’s ability to fight cancer,” she says.

“This research points to a new and promising therapeutic target, one that focuses not only on the cancer cells themselves, but also on the processes that enable them to thrive.” 

This post was originally published on here

Blackstone Inc.’s data center arm QTS is walking away from what would have been the largest data center campus on earth. In a withdrawal notice filed at the Virginia Supreme Court on Thursday, July 2, lawyers for QTS told the court the company had decided to terminate the Digital Gateway project and pull its associated filings. The move ends a years-long legal fight over a 2,100-acre site in Prince William County and hands a clear defeat to the developer and its parent, private equity giant Blackstone.

The project, known as the Prince William Digital Gateway, was enormous. Plans called for up to 37 data center buildings and more than 22 million square feet of computing space along Pageland Lane, next to Manassas National Battlefield Park about 35 miles west of Washington. At full build-out it would have been the biggest data center complex in the world—a footprint roughly twice the size of New York’s Central Park, with power needs rivaling a small city.

QTS, which was developing the land alongside Compass Datacenters, said the decision came after careful consideration. The company noted the project had cleared years of planning, analysis, and public review, and had been approved by the Prince William Board of County Supervisors. QTS said the campus would have delivered tens of billions of dollars in capital investment, along with local tax revenue and thousands of construction and permanent jobs for the county.

The dispute goes back to December 2023, when the county board—then led by Chair Ann Wheeler, a Democrat who backed data centers—approved the rezoning after a marathon 27-hour public hearing at which more than 400 people spoke. Opponents sued almost immediately, arguing the county broke state and local rules governing public notice requirements and rushed the vote through before a new, more skeptical board took office.

The courts agreed. Last August, Prince William Circuit Court Judge Kimberly Irving ruled the rezonings void because of improper public notice. On March 31, the Virginia Court of Appeals unanimously upheld that decision. Two lawsuits drove the challenge, one led by the Oak Valley Homeowners Association and another by the American Battlefield Trust, a preservation group focused on the nearby Civil War site.

One by one, the project’s backers dropped out. Prince William County withdrew from the appeal in April under Chair Deshundra Jefferson, a Democrat and longtime data center critic, followed by co-developer Compass Datacenters. That left QTS as the last party still fighting. The company had filed its appeal to the Virginia Supreme Court on April 30, just hours before the deadline, but has now abandoned it.

“Truth and accountability prevailed today,” said Chap Petersen, the attorney representing local residents and the American Battlefield Trust. The Coalition to Protect Prince William County, which organized much of the opposition, told supporters that the rule of law and the common man had prevailed. Mac Haddow, president of the Oak Valley Homeowners Association, had earlier called the litigation something that never should have happened.

The fight was costly for taxpayers. Prince William County spent close to $2 million defending the rezoning before its board reversed course—a figure opponents repeatedly cited as public money spent against the county’s own residents.

The collapse is more than a local zoning story. It comes as the data center industry faces growing public resistance across the country. Communities from Virginia to the Midwest have pushed back on the strain these facilities place on power grids, water supplies, and electricity bills. In a June report, the U.S. Energy Department projected total U.S. electricity demand would rise about 2.15% in 2026, driven largely by a roughly 5% increase in commercial demand tied to data center growth.

The timing also fuels a broader debate over whether the AI infrastructure boom has run ahead of real demand. This week, reports that Meta Platforms was exploring ways to market excess computing capacity rattled investors already worried about overbuilding. A retreat of this size by a Blackstone subsidiary—on a flagship project it defended for years—does little to quiet those concerns.

For Blackstone, which manages more than $1.27 trillion in assets and has made data centers a centerpiece of its infrastructure and real estate strategy, the loss is a reminder that community opposition has become a meaningful business risk. Land deals, permits, and court challenges can now derail projects that once appeared certain to move forward. Several landowners who had signed agreements with QTS are already seeking to exit their contracts. The company says it remains committed to the region—but for the Digital Gateway, the project is over.

JBizNews Desk | Prince William County, Virginia
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

On Thursday, July 2, 2026, Blue Owl Capital told shareholders in two investor letters that it would again cap quarterly withdrawals at 5% from its two largest private credit funds, after clients asked to pull far more cash than the funds would release. The letters, signed by Blue Owl co-president Craig Packer and fund president Logan Nicholson, marked the second straight quarter that the firm’s flagship credit funds drew the heaviest exit requests in the industry.

Across the wider market, the numbers are stark. Investors sought to withdraw billions from non-traded private credit funds in the second quarter, and because most vehicles limit redemptions to 5% of net assets each quarter, roughly $14 billion of investor money is now stuck behind those limits, according to data from Robert A. Stanger & Co. The private credit market these funds sit inside is worth about $1.8 trillion.

Here is how the cap works. When a fund lets only 5% of shares out but 17% of investors want to leave, everyone who asked gets paid a slice — roughly 29 cents for every dollar requested — and has to line up again next quarter. There is no guarantee the rest gets paid if the exit requests stay high.

At Blue Owl, investors in the roughly $34 billion Blue Owl Credit Income Corp., one of the largest funds of its kind, asked to pull 18.8% of their shares, or about $3.6 billion, in the second quarter. That was down from $4.2 billion three months earlier. The firm’s smaller Blue Owl Technology Income Corp. saw requests for 38.1% of shares, or about $1.1 billion. Together the two funds faced $4.7 billion in withdrawal requests, below the $5.3 billion they saw in the first quarter.

Packer and Nicholson told investors the flagship fund was in no danger of a forced sale. “OCIC does not need to sell a single private loan to satisfy the tender offer,” they wrote, noting that 90% of the fund’s investors chose to stay and that the fund has taken in $1.2 billion of new money this year.

Blue Owl was not alone. Blackstone capped withdrawals at 5% on its $79 billion Blackstone Private Credit Fund after requests reached 10%. Cliffwater limited its $33 billion Cliffwater Corporate Lending Fund to 5% after investors asked to redeem about 17% of shares, tightening from a 7% cap a quarter earlier. Apollo Global Management capped its $26 billion Apollo Debt Solutions fund at 5% after requests hit nearly 17%, or $2.4 billion. In Europe, Switzerland’s Partners Group restricted its $8.6 billion Global Value fund to 5%, though it said it honored every request in full and still pulled in $275 million of fresh money.

What is driving the exits is fear, not yet losses. Private credit funds are big lenders to software companies, which make up roughly a quarter of these portfolios, and investors worry that artificial intelligence tools that write their own code will eat into those borrowers’ revenue. Fund managers say the loans themselves are still performing. Blue Owl told investors there is a “meaningful disconnect” between the public alarm over private credit and what it sees inside its own book.

The money at stake belongs largely to wealthy individuals who bought into so-called semi-liquid funds over the past few years, drawn by higher yields than they could get in public markets in exchange for giving up easy access to their cash. Many are now learning that the “semi” in semi-liquid does real work. Some of the current wave, managers say, is simply backlogged demand from investors who were blocked by caps in the prior quarter and are trying again.

For the firms that run these funds, the stakes are their share prices and their standing with the wealth-management channel that feeds them new clients. Blue Owl stock has fallen about 56% over the past year, though it rose roughly 6% after Thursday’s letters suggested the redemption wave may be easing — the combined $4.7 billion in requests came in below the prior quarter. Blackstone, Ares Management, KKR and Apollo shares all fell sharply in early June as the caps piled up.

Whether the pressure fades or feeds on itself is the open question. Goldman Sachs has projected that private credit funds could shrink by $45 billion to $70 billion over the next two years if retail investors keep pulling out. For now, the funds are holding the line at 5%, betting that steady loan payments and slowing requests will outlast the storm.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Iran turned the funeral procession of Ayatollah Ali Khamenei through Tehran on Monday, July 6, into a mass call for revenge against the United States and Israel, with the day’s defining image a billboard showing President Donald Trump with a bullet pointed at his head. Mourners pelted it with stones as they passed beneath, and leaders of Hezbollah and other allied militant groups marched among the crowds. As the largest gathering of the week filled the streets, Iran’s military spokesman said on state media that the armed forces were on full alert, had used the ceasefire to sharpen their capabilities and had updated their “target bank,” warning that any new attack would draw a harsher response than before.

The revenge message ran straight from the top of Iran’s military and government. Army commander-in-chief Major Gen. Amir Hatami told broadcaster IRIB that Khamenei’s death had hardened Iran’s resolve to avenge him. The Supreme National Security Council said in a weekend statement that the country’s message was resistance against its enemies and vengeance for its slain leader. Crowds chanted that their one word was revenge.

Delegations from Hezbollah, the Iranian-backed Lebanese group, marched in the procession alongside Hamas, the Houthis and Kataib Hezbollah — the network Tehran calls its “Axis of Resistance.” Mourners waved Hezbollah’s yellow flags and the red flags that signal revenge in Shiite tradition. On Sunday, Iranian Parliament Speaker Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf met senior Hezbollah officials, including Mohammed Fenish, and called the group’s role in the war a “historic turning point,” according to state news agency IRNA.

Much of the anger was aimed squarely at Washington. Beyond the stoned billboard, women in black chadors held red placards reading “KILL TRUMP” in English, an effigy of Trump was strung up along the route, and a eulogist called for the president’s death from the stage. Placards also targeted Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu, Vice President JD Vance and War Secretary Pete Hegseth. Iran has repeatedly denied plotting to kill Trump. Israeli Defense Minister Israel Katz answered that Khamenei had been killed because he led a plan to destroy Israel, and that any Iranian leader who tried again would meet the same end.

Khamenei, who ruled Iran for nearly 37 years, was killed on February 28 at age 86 in a U.S.-Israeli airstrike at the start of the war. Four members of his family died in the same strike. Their coffins were driven Monday on a truck decorated to resemble the grating around a Shiite shrine, moving toward Azadi Tower as fire hoses misted water over the crowds in the heat.

For business, the story runs through the Strait of Hormuz, the narrow waterway that carries much of the world’s oil. Iran paused its talks with the United States for the funeral week, and Trump said he was giving Tehran time off from the negotiations. That pause matters to energy markets, because the war shut most shipping through the strait earlier this year and drove crude sharply higher before a fragile ceasefire reopened the route.

Prices have since fallen back toward pre-war levels. By the end of last week Brent crude was near $72 a barrel and West Texas Intermediate was around $68, both close to where they traded on February 27, the day before the war began. Oil was heading for a fourth straight weekly loss as tankers returned to the strait and the war premium drained out of prices.

Supply is loosening too. OPEC+ agreed Sunday to raise output by 188,000 barrels a day, its fifth straight increase since the war began. Saudi Arabia and the United Arab Emirates have brought exports back close to pre-war levels, lifting combined flows through the strait above 10 million barrels a day. Citigroup expects Brent to keep sliding toward $60 a barrel by year-end as shipping normalizes and Chinese buying softens.

The calm is easily rattled. Tracking data showed at least eight tankers turning back at the strait on Saturday after trying to slip through by hugging the Omani coast, a sign captains remain wary. Maritime authorities describe traffic as steady but not yet growing, and the strait’s security is expected to come up at this week’s NATO summit.

Iran’s government is using the vast turnout, which officials say could reach 15 to 20 million and would rank as the country’s largest state funeral, to project strength while its new leader stays out of sight. Khamenei’s son and successor, Mojtaba Khamenei, who took over in March and is believed to have been wounded in the strike that killed his father, has not appeared in public. The procession continues this week from Qom into the Iraqi cities of Najaf and Karbala before Khamenei is buried Thursday in Mashhad. Netanyahu is expected in Washington to meet Trump as early as next Monday, a session likely to shape whether the ceasefire — and oil’s calm — holds.

JBizNews Desk| Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

EasyJet said on Sunday it has agreed in principle to a takeover by Castlelake, the U.S. investment firm, capping weeks of resistance with a cash deal that values the British budget airline at £5.23 billion.

The Minneapolis-based private credit firm offered £6.90 per share in cash, giving the airline an equity value of about £5.2 billion, or £5.5 billion on a fully diluted basis. In its statement, EasyJet said its board concluded the fifth proposal had reached a level it “would be minded to recommend” to shareholders after reviewing the offer with its advisers.

The agreement followed weeks of negotiations. Castlelake first approached the airline on May 29 with an offer of 560 pence per share, gradually increasing the bid to 690 pence. EasyJet rejected the earlier proposals, calling them “highly opportunistic” and arguing they undervalued the company. Even after turning down a £4.93 billion offer last month, the airline agreed to provide limited commercial information so discussions could continue.

The timing proved significant. Castlelake launched its bid as EasyJet faced higher jet fuel costs and softer travel demand following the U.S.-Iran war and disruptions to shipping through the Strait of Hormuz. The airline’s shares closed Friday at 558.2 pence, roughly 20% below the takeover price, making the offer increasingly attractive despite the board’s earlier resistance.

Not all investors are convinced. Some shareholders had hoped for at least £7 per share, raising questions about whether the final proposal will receive enough support. The companies have extended the UK’s “put up or shut up” deadline until 5 p.m. London time on August 3, allowing additional time to finalize the transaction.

To satisfy European airline ownership rules limiting non-EU control, Castlelake structured the bid with EU-based partners, including Brookfield, along with aviation executives Mark Breen and Peter Bellew. Bellew, a former EasyJet chief operating officer, left the airline in 2022. Castlelake said it intends to invest in the carrier’s long-term growth and fleet modernization.

For travelers, ownership changes rarely affect flights immediately, but they can reshape an airline over time. Private equity owners often streamline operations, adjust route networks and renegotiate aircraft purchases, decisions that ultimately influence ticket prices, schedules and expansion plans. As one of Europe’s largest low-cost carriers, EasyJet’s future strategy could affect millions of passengers.

The proposed acquisition also adds to concerns over the shrinking number of major companies listed on the London Stock Exchange. If the deal closes, EasyJet would become another well-known British company to leave the public market, continuing a trend that has drawn growing attention from UK policymakers seeking to strengthen London’s position as a global financial center.

JBizNews Desk | London
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump made 327 individual stock purchases on April 8, 2025, worth as much as $12.8 million, one day before he announced a pause on his sweeping tariffs and sent the market into one of its largest single-day rallies on record, according to his annual financial disclosure filed Monday with the U.S. Office of Government Ethics. The purchases, detailed in an analysis published Thursday, centered on the mega-cap technology stocks that had been hit hardest by his trade plan.

The buying spree focused on some of the world’s largest publicly traded companies. Trump purchased between $100,001 and $250,000 worth of shares in Apple, Alphabet, Amazon, Microsoft, and Nvidia on April 8, alongside investments in scores of other companies, according to the disclosure.

The timing has drawn attention. On April 2, Trump unveiled broad new tariffs he called “Liberation Day” tariffs, triggering a sharp four-day market selloff. Then, on the morning of April 9, he posted on social media that it was a “GREAT TIME TO BUY!!!” before announcing a 90-day pause on most of the tariffs later that day. The S&P 500 surged nearly 10%, one of its strongest single-day performances on record, while many of the technology companies Trump had purchased rebounded sharply.

The financial disclosure spans more than 900 pages and covers Trump’s financial activity throughout 2025. According to the analysis, April 8 ranked as his 11th-busiest trading day of the year—more than five times his average daily buying activity of approximately 62 transactions.

Federal ethics laws require executive branch officials, including the president, to disclose securities transactions exceeding $1,000 within 45 days. However, disclosure forms report transactions in broad dollar ranges rather than exact purchase prices and do not indicate whether the trades were executed personally or through professionally managed investment accounts.

The disclosure comes during another week in which Trump’s public statements coincided with market-moving developments. On Thursday, he posted “Thank you Micron!” on Truth Social after Micron Technology announced a $250 million commitment to support Trump Accounts, the new federal savings program for children. Earlier financial disclosures showed Trump already owned shares of Micron, meaning the company’s stock gains increased the value of his personal holdings.

The White House has consistently maintained that Trump’s assets are held in a trust managed by his children and that appropriate safeguards exist to prevent conflicts of interest.

Nevertheless, the disclosures have renewed debate among ethics experts over presidents owning actively traded securities while making policy decisions capable of moving financial markets.

Craig Holman, a government affairs lobbyist with the watchdog organization Public Citizen, said senior government officials possess unique access to economic information while also holding the power to influence financial markets, creating what he described as opportunities for potential self-enrichment.

Earlier ethics disclosures released in May also showed Trump actively buying and selling shares of major technology companies including Nvidia, Microsoft, Amazon, and Meta Platforms during the first quarter of 2026. Some of those transactions occurred near significant government actions affecting the companies, including an Nvidia purchase roughly one week before the U.S. Commerce Department approved certain AI chip exports to China.

Beyond Trump’s personal investments, the disclosures underscore how closely financial markets have tracked policy decisions throughout his second term. Tariff announcements, trade negotiations, export restrictions and regulatory actions have repeatedly triggered large swings across stock, bond and commodity markets, increasing investor attention on both government policy and executive communications.

For the companies involved, presidential attention can create both opportunities and challenges. Public endorsements may boost investor confidence, while tariffs, export controls and other policy decisions can significantly influence corporate earnings, supply chains and stock prices.

For Wall Street, the latest disclosure adds another layer to an ongoing question that has defined much of Trump’s second term: how investors should value companies and manage risk when government policy—and the individual directing much of it—can move markets in a matter of hours.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) is scheduled to release its June Consumer Price Index (CPI) on Tuesday, July 14, at 8:30 a.m. Eastern, giving Americans a fresh look at how quickly the cost of everyday goods and services continues to rise. Economists and investors are watching the report closely because it could influence the Federal Reserve’s next decision on interest rates and provide another snapshot of how inflation is affecting households across the country.

The June report follows a stronger-than-expected reading in May, when consumer prices rose 4.2% from a year earlier and 0.5% from the previous month. Rising costs for energy, shelter and food accounted for much of the increase, reinforcing concerns that inflation remains well above the Federal Reserve’s long-term 2% target.

Early forecasts suggest inflation may ease only slightly.

The Federal Reserve Bank of Cleveland’s Inflation Nowcasting Model estimates June’s annual inflation rate could come in at approximately 3.96%, still close to 4% and well above the level policymakers would like to see before considering significant interest-rate reductions.

Although inflation has moderated from its highest levels several years ago, prices remain elevated across many household essentials.

Consumers continue paying more for groceries, electricity, insurance, housing and many everyday services. While gasoline prices have stabilized in recent weeks, higher energy costs earlier this year continue working their way through the economy, affecting transportation, manufacturing and retail prices.

Tariffs on imported goods have also added pressure in several sectors, contributing to higher prices on selected consumer products, electronics and manufactured goods.

The inflation report carries enormous significance because it directly influences monetary policy.

Federal Reserve officials closely monitor CPI data when deciding whether to raise, lower or maintain interest rates. Higher inflation generally encourages the Fed to keep borrowing costs elevated, while evidence of sustained price stability increases the likelihood of future rate cuts designed to support economic growth.

The timing is especially important.

Recent labor market data suggested hiring has slowed, prompting some investors to anticipate eventual interest-rate reductions later this year. However, another stronger-than-expected inflation report could complicate that outlook by encouraging policymakers to remain cautious until inflation shows clearer signs of returning toward target.

The report also affects millions of Americans beyond financial markets.

Inflation influences wage negotiations, retirement planning, Social Security cost-of-living adjustments and the purchasing power of household incomes. When prices continue rising faster than wages, families experience reduced buying power even if paychecks increase.

Economists will pay particular attention to core inflation, which excludes the more volatile food and energy categories. Core CPI often provides a clearer picture of underlying inflation trends because it removes short-term swings caused by weather, commodity prices and geopolitical events.

Housing costs will also remain under close scrutiny.

Shelter expenses continue representing one of the largest contributors to overall inflation, while insurance premiums, healthcare costs and other service-sector prices have remained stubbornly elevated compared with many goods.

For businesses, Tuesday’s report may help shape planning decisions for the remainder of the year.

Companies continue balancing higher labor costs, elevated borrowing expenses and changing consumer demand as they determine pricing strategies, hiring plans and future investment decisions.

For consumers, the report provides another measure of how quickly everyday living costs continue changing. Although inflation has slowed from its historic highs, prices remain significantly above pre-pandemic levels, leaving many families continuing to adjust household budgets.

Financial markets are expected to react quickly once the report is released Tuesday morning, with investors evaluating whether the new data increases or decreases the likelihood of future Federal Reserve action.

Regardless of the final number, the June CPI report will remain one of the most closely watched economic releases of the month because it offers one of the clearest indicators of the nation’s financial health and the direction of interest rates in the months ahead.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Labor Department reported on Thursday that U.S. employers added just 57,000 jobs in June, well short of the roughly 115,000 economists had expected, while May’s gain was revised down to 129,000 and the unemployment rate slipped to 4.2%. On an ordinary day, a hiring miss that large would knock stocks lower. Instead, the Dow Jones Industrial Average pushed to a fresh record high ahead of the July 4 holiday, and Wall Street barely blinked.

That reaction has become the defining habit of 2026. One shock after another — a soft labor report, a war in the Middle East, a sudden sell-off in chip stocks — keeps landing, and the market keeps shrugging it off and grinding higher. As the second half of the year begins, the biggest banks are now telling clients to expect more of the same.

Goldman Sachs is among the most confident. Strategist Ben Snider raised the firm’s year-end target for the S&P 500 to 8,000 from 7,600, roughly 7% above where the index trades now. His team lifted its earnings forecast to $340 per share for 2026, a 24% jump from last year, and to $385 for 2027. Snider expects companies tied to artificial intelligence spending to account for about half of that profit growth.

Goldman is not alone. Deutsche Bank also carries an 8,000 target for the index, and Morgan Stanley sits in the same camp of firms projecting a 17% full-year gain. The common thread in their notes is that corporate earnings, not cheap money, are powering this rally — a point that matters for anyone whose retirement savings or pension is tied to these benchmarks.

The first-half scorecard explains the confidence. Over the six months through June, the Dow climbed 8.9%, its best start to a year since 2021. The broad S&P 500 rose 9.6%, the tech-heavy Nasdaq Composite gained 12.8%, and the small-cap Russell 2000 surged nearly 22% — its strongest first half since 1991. The S&P 500 also posted its best quarter since 2020.

The engine has been artificial intelligence. Semiconductor stocks jumped more than 80% in the first half, with Micron up more than 260% for the year. But the run has grown wobbly. In late June and early July, investors began cashing out of the highest fliers. Micron and Sandisk each fell more than 10% in a single session, Applied Materials slid sharply, and Caterpillar, an AI-infrastructure winner, pulled back almost 7%.

That rotation is why Thursday’s record on the Dow leaned on steadier names. Apple and Microsoft did much of the lifting, and defensive corners of the market — utilities, health care, and consumer staples — outperformed as money moved out of technology. It is a quieter, more cautious version of the same bull market, but a bull market still.

The Federal Reserve backdrop helps explain why weak jobs numbers no longer scare investors. Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh, speaking Wednesday at a European Central Bank conference in Portugal, said inflation risks have eased substantially, though he cautioned that “prices are too high.” With hiring cooling, traders are reading the data as a reason for the Fed to hold rates steady or cut them, rather than raise them — an outcome the market prefers.

Not everyone is convinced the good times can last. Stock valuations sit near record highs by some measures, and skeptics warn the AI boom echoes the dot-com bubble of the late 1990s. Christopher Harvey, chief equity strategist at CIBC Capital Markets, sees a more modest gain of about 8.8% this year and points to strains in credit markets and doubts about whether AI spending will ever pay off. Bank of America is more cautious still, with a target closer to 7,100. Their warning is simple: the bet only works if corporate earnings keep beating expectations. If profits disappoint, richly priced stocks have little cushion.

Geopolitics remains the wild card. U.S. and Iranian officials resumed talks in Doha this week, and President Donald Trump told reporters that progress toward Iranian denuclearization was “moving along well.” Oil settled around $69 a barrel for WTI crude, easing back toward pre-war levels — a relief for consumers and for companies that depend on fuel and shipping costs.

U.S. markets were closed Friday, July 3, for Independence Day and reopen Monday. The real test of Wall Street’s conviction arrives with second-quarter earnings season, which kicks off in mid-July. If corporate America delivers the profits the bulls are counting on, the path toward 8,000 stays open. If it stumbles, the market’s long streak of shrugging off bad news may finally be put to the test.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump reported a $10.71 million licensing fee from Amazon’s film studio in a federal financial disclosure released Tuesday, a filing that put a hard dollar figure on one of the most striking business turnarounds of his second term: his shift from sworn enemy of Jeff Bezos into a close commercial partner.

The payment came from Amazon MGM Studios for “Melania,” the documentary about the first lady that the studio licensed in early 2025. Trump’s disclosure, a mandatory annual filing, listed the fee as part of more than $2.2 billion in total 2025 revenue, roughly double what he reported the year before. Most of that income came from the family’s cryptocurrency ventures, but the Amazon line drew attention because of who signs the checks.

Amazon paid about $40 million to acquire “Melania” and spent a reported $35 million marketing it, unusually large sums for a documentary that took in only $16.6 million at the global box office. Senator Elizabeth Warren called the price “bribery in plain sight.” Bezos rejected that, saying customer demand rather than politics drove the purchase and that it looked like a sound business decision.

The numbers land as a new book details how far the two men have traveled. In “Regime Change,” New York Times correspondents Maggie Haberman and Jonathan Swan recount that in July 2017 Trump asked aides whether the government could break up Amazon, cursed Bezos by name, and vented about The Washington Post, which Bezos owns. Former aide Anthony Scaramucci described the scene.

By this year, the hostility was gone. Haberman and Swan write that at a dinner after the 2024 election, Bezos told Trump the Post was his “worst investment” and complained that its business managers would not listen to him. Trump, who had long refused to believe Bezos could not steer the paper’s coverage, said he eventually came around: he doubted the billionaire in his first term, then believed him.

For Bezos, staying close to the White House is not sentiment. It is protection for his most valuable government business. His rocket company, Blue Origin, depends on federal contracts and competes directly with Elon Musk’s SpaceX. The U.S. Space Force awarded Blue Origin roughly $2.3 billion in national security launch work, and the company holds a $3.4 billion NASA contract to help build a lunar lander for the Artemis moon program. Amazon itself paid Blue Origin about $1.8 billion last year to launch satellites for its Project Kuiper broadband network. Blue Origin flew its heavy New Glenn rocket for the first time in January 2025 but still lags SpaceX, which launches far more often — a gap that makes federal goodwill valuable.

That web of contracts helps explain why Bezos has courted a president who once threatened his companies. After Trump’s feud with Musk erupted in 2025, Bezos spoke with the president directly and Blue Origin executives met with White House Chief of Staff Susie Wiles, pressing for more work. Bezos also donated $1 million through Amazon to Trump’s inauguration and sat in the front row as the president was sworn in.

The shift has been costly at The Washington Post. The paper lost more than $100 million in a single year, and in February 2026 it cut about a third of its staff, closing its sports desk, books coverage and several foreign bureaus. Bezos had already redirected the opinion section to focus on personal liberties and free markets, a change that triggered resignations and mass subscriber cancellations. Publisher Will Lewis stepped down after the layoffs, and finance chief Jeff D’Onofrio was named interim publisher and chief executive.

Bezos has defended the moves as business decisions rather than political ones. Critics, including former Post editor Martin Baron, argue the opposite, saying fear of retaliation against Amazon and Blue Origin pushed Bezos to soften the paper.

For companies watching Washington, the arc carries a plain lesson. A president who once floated using antitrust law to break up the country’s largest online retailer now counts its founder as an ally, and that founder’s studio, rocket firm and satellite network all do business shaped in part by federal decisions. The Amazon fee is a small slice of Trump’s income, but it is a visible marker of how commercial and political interests have merged at the top of American business.

Whether the alliance holds is another question. Trump’s relationships with billionaires have proven changeable, as his public rupture with Musk showed. For now, Bezos remains inside the tent, his contracts intact and his newspaper reshaped.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

On Thursday, July 2, 2026, the Government of Canada announced that Prime Minister Mark Carney will refer Alberta’s proposal for a new West Coast oil pipeline to the federal Major Projects Office, formally advancing a line built to carry Canadian crude past the United States to buyers in Asia. Standing beside Alberta Premier Danielle Smith in Calgary, Carney called it an approach that gives businesses the certainty they need to build.

The project, labeled the West Coast oil pipeline, would move more than 1 million barrels of oil a day from Bruderheim, Alberta, northeast of Edmonton, to the Roberts Bank marine terminal in Delta, British Columbia, just south of Vancouver. From there, tankers would ship the crude to Asian markets. The route closely follows the existing Trans Mountain corridor, allowing the partners to avoid opening British Columbia’s northern coast, where an oil tanker ban remains in force.

Alberta’s submission package puts the cost between C$35.2 billion and C$43.7 billion, including contingency. The province says it has already spent C$18.3 million on planning.

Who builds it and who pays. The ownership group brings together the federally owned Trans Mountain Corporation, the Alberta Petroleum Marketing Commission, and Calgary-based Pembina Pipeline Corporation (TSX: PPL). Canada and Alberta would be the majority owners, splitting the bulk of the project between Trans Mountain and the Alberta commission. Pembina would hold a 10% economic interest through construction, with an option to increase its stake by another 10% once the pipeline enters service.

Pembina made clear it is not putting money at risk yet. The company said it will retain full discretion over any final investment decision and will not commit its own capital before that decision is made. Scott Burrows, President and Chief Executive Officer of Pembina, called the project a once-in-a-generation opportunity to build nation-scale energy infrastructure. The company has targeted September to finalize definitive agreements.

Why it matters for the economy. Carney has set a goal of doubling Canada’s non-U.S. exports over the next decade. More than 90% of Canadian energy exports currently go to the United States, forcing Canadian heavy crude to sell at a discount because it has limited access to other markets. A second Pacific export route, in addition to the Trans Mountain Expansion that entered service in 2024, would give producers greater bargaining power and could narrow that price discount, increasing revenue for both energy companies and governments.

The government estimates construction could support approximately 140,000 jobs at peak activity, including about 45,000 in Alberta and 70,000 in British Columbia. Once operational, the project is expected to support roughly 50,000 direct and indirect jobs annually.

Getting British Columbia on board. Earlier Thursday, Carney appeared in Vancouver with British Columbia Premier David Eby to announce a separate agreement the Prime Minister said could unlock more than C$200 billion in new investment, with British Columbia serving as the “linchpin.” Ottawa pledged to maintain the northern oil tanker ban, compensate British Columbia for environmental risks if the project proceeds, and assume financial responsibility for potential spill liabilities. Eby said the agreement does not obligate him to support the pipeline but confirmed the province would not challenge a federally approved project in court.

The pipeline proposal is paired with a second agreement. On the same day, Canada, Alberta, and the Oil Sands AllianceCanadian Natural Resources Limited, Suncor Energy, Cenovus Energy, Imperial Oil, and ConocoPhillips—signed a memorandum of understanding supporting the Pathways carbon capture and storage project, which aims to reduce oil sands emissions by 16 million tonnes annually. Companies meeting those targets would see carbon compliance costs increase more gradually. Final agreements are expected later this fall.

Not everyone is convinced the economics justify the investment. No private company has offered to finance and build the project independently, leaving the federal and Alberta governments responsible for most of the cost. Janetta McKenzie of the Pembina Institute—an environmental policy organization unrelated to Pembina Pipeline—said the lack of private investment raises legitimate questions, arguing that expanding existing infrastructure would likely cost less than building a new line. Federal Conservative Leader Pierre Poilievre criticized Carney for maintaining the northern tanker ban and argued the private sector should build the project without government ownership.

For now, the referral to the Major Projects Office formally starts the federal review process. Ottawa plans to decide by October 1, 2026, whether to designate the pipeline a national-interest project under the Building Canada Act, while Indigenous consultations begin immediately. Smith, who has said Alberta should double oil production to 8 million barrels per day over the next 10 to 15 years, called the proposal transformational infrastructure that would generate lasting wealth for Canada.

JBizNews Desk | Calgary, Alberta
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The race to commercialize quantum computing reached another milestone Thursday as IQM Quantum Computers made its public market debut, but investors gave the Finnish technology company a cautious welcome.

Shares of IQM fell about 3.4% on their first day of trading on the Nasdaq, after the company completed a $1.8 billion merger with a special-purpose acquisition company (SPAC). The company now trades under the ticker IQMX, becoming the first European quantum computing company listed on a major U.S. exchange.

Trading was volatile throughout the session.

The stock dropped as much as 7.5% before recovering some losses to close lower, underscoring the uncertainty surrounding valuations for companies operating in one of the world’s newest and most promising technologies.

IQM reached the public market through a merger with Real Asset Acquisition Corp., a SPAC created to acquire a private business. The transaction valued the Finnish company at approximately $1.8 billion before additional capital was raised.

The deal generated roughly $233 million in new funding through the merger and a related private investment. Following the transaction, IQM expects to hold more than $450 million in cash, giving the company significant resources to continue developing its technology.

Quantum computing is an expensive business.

Building quantum computers requires specialized equipment operating at temperatures close to absolute zero, along with years of intensive research and engineering before commercial returns can be realized.

Unlike many startups, IQM already has paying customers.

The company develops complete quantum computing systems—including hardware, software, and cloud-based access—and serves research institutions and national computing centers such as VTT Technical Research Centre of Finland and Germany’s Leibniz Supercomputing Centre.

According to the company, it has built more than 30 quantum computers, delivered 18 systems to customers, and expanded its customer base from eight paying clients in 2024 to 22 during 2025.

Even so, the business remains in its early stages.

IQM generated approximately $36 million in annual revenue during its latest fiscal year and has yet to report a profit. Chief Executive and co-founder Jan Goetz has argued that IQM stands apart from many competitors because it is already delivering working machines rather than simply pursuing laboratory research.

One disclosure in the company’s prospectus drew particular attention.

IQM warned investors that large-scale commercial adoption of quantum computing may never occur. While similar risk disclosures appear throughout the industry, the unusually direct language highlighted the uncertainty that still surrounds the technology despite growing investor enthusiasm.

The company enters a rapidly expanding market.

Several quantum computing companies have pursued public listings during 2026, many through SPAC mergers. Rival Infleqtion debuted on the New York Stock Exchange earlier this month, while companies including Pasqal of France and Xanadu Quantum Technologies of Canada have also announced plans to access public markets.

Investors remain cautious after the previous SPAC boom in 2021, when many highly valued startups later struggled to meet expectations.

Competition is also intense.

IQM’s superconducting technology competes directly with systems being developed by IBM, Google, and publicly traded Rigetti Computing, while rivals including IonQ, D-Wave, and Quantinuum are pursuing different quantum computing architectures.

Government investment continues to accelerate the sector.

President Donald Trump has signed executive actions intended to strengthen U.S. leadership in quantum technology, while the U.S. Department of Energy has set a goal of deploying a scientifically useful, fully reliable quantum computer by 2028.

IQM has already established a research center in Maryland and installed a quantum computer at Oak Ridge National Laboratory, giving the Finnish company an expanding presence in the American market.

For investors, the opportunity is significant—but so is the risk.

Quantum computing has the potential to transform industries ranging from pharmaceutical research and advanced materials to cybersecurity and artificial intelligence. Yet meaningful commercial adoption could still take years, and companies like IQM continue investing heavily while generating relatively modest revenue.

Thursday’s subdued market debut suggests Wall Street remains optimistic about quantum computing’s long-term promise while remaining cautious about how quickly that promise will translate into profits.

The company also began trading in Helsinki, maintaining a home-market listing alongside its new U.S. shares. For now, IQM has capital, customers, and ambitious growth plans—but investors are still deciding what that future is worth.

JBizNews Desk | Helsinki

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

New York City’s government moved into full emergency footing this week after the National Weather Service (NWS) warned that heavy rain and thunderstorms would sweep the region from Sunday evening through Monday night, raising the risk of flash flooding across the five boroughs. Mayor Zohran Kwame Mamdani activated the city’s Flash Flood Emergency Plan and, together with New York City Emergency Management (NYCEM), urged residents and workers to prepare for a wet, disrupted start to the week, according to a release from the mayor’s office.

The NWS flagged the Monday morning commute — roughly 4 a.m. to 10 a.m. — as the most dangerous stretch, when the heaviest downpours were expected to collide with rush hour. Forecasters said most of the tri-state area could see 2 to 3 inches of rain, with 4 inches or more possible in spots. Fox meteorologist Mike Woods warned that rain could briefly fall at rates near 3 inches an hour, enough to overwhelm storm drains and turn streets into standing water within minutes.

For a city that runs on its morning rush, the timing was costly. Millions of New Yorkers depend on subways, buses and roads to reach work, and flash flooding regularly disrupts all three at once — stranding commuters, delaying deliveries and forcing shops to open late or not at all. City officials advised people to limit travel, build in extra time and stay off flooded roads.

Mamdani said crews had spent the weekend clearing catch basins, inspecting flood-prone neighborhoods and reaching out to residents in basement apartments, and asked New Yorkers to do their part. “Limit travel if you can, plan for delays and take these warnings seriously,” the mayor said, urging people to head inside at the first sign of thunder or rising winds.

The city staged its response across every borough. The New York Police Department (NYPD) Tow Truck Task Force was positioned in all five boroughs to pull stranded vehicles off flooded roads, while a Downed Tree Task Force stood ready to clear debris from high winds. The Department of Environmental Protection (DEP), Department of Sanitation (DSNY) and Department of Transportation (DOT) worked to clear catch basins in neighborhoods that flood easily. Specialized emergency teams were placed on standby for rapid deployment.

Officials singled out basement and ground-floor apartments as the highest-risk spots, echoing hard lessons from past storms when fast-rising water trapped residents below street level. Outreach teams contacted people in those units to make sure they had a plan. NYCEM Commissioner Christina Farrell said flash flooding can develop quickly and turn dangerous with little warning, and asked residents to prepare ahead of the Monday rush.

The economic stakes go beyond a rough commute. New York’s low-lying areas are packed with small businesses — restaurants, delis, salons and street-level retail — that can lose inventory, equipment and a full day of sales when water pours in. Basement-level storage and mechanical rooms are especially vulnerable, and repeated flooding has pushed up insurance costs and repair bills for landlords and shop owners across the outer boroughs.

The storm also lands during a stretch of extreme weather that has strained the city’s aging drainage system, which was built for a gentler rainfall pattern than the intense, fast-moving downpours now hitting more often. Each major storm renews pressure on City Hall to invest in flood barriers, expanded catch basins and better warning systems — costly projects that compete for limited budget dollars.

Relief, of a sort, is on the way, though it brings its own challenge. Forecasters said the rain should clear after Monday, with temperatures climbing back toward 90 degrees by Friday and a heat advisory likely to follow. That swing from flooding to heat is the kind of back-to-back weather stress that raises energy demand, strains the power grid and adds costs for businesses running air conditioning and refrigeration.

City officials urged New Yorkers to sign up for Notify NYC emergency alerts by texting NYC to 692-692 and to check real-time conditions before heading out. For businesses, the advice was simpler: plan for a slow, wet Monday, protect ground-level inventory, and give workers and customers room to arrive late.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Lockheed Martin, the world’s largest defense contractor, has pulled ahead in the race to buy Ultra Maritime, a naval-defense specialist, in a deal worth about $3.5 billion, CNBC reported Monday, citing people familiar with the talks. The discussions were still going on, and an agreement could be announced as soon as this week. None of the companies involved has confirmed the deal publicly.

Ultra Maritime is owned by the private-equity firm Advent International. Investment banks Guggenheim and JPMorgan are advising on the sale. The business builds much of the hardware navies use to hunt submarines: sonar buoys that can spot torpedoes and enemy subs, radar, electronic-warfare gear, and torpedo-defense countermeasures. Its main customers are the U.S. Navy and Britain’s Royal Navy.

For Lockheed, the logic is straightforward. The company already sells sensors, sonar and combat systems to navies through its Rotary and Mission Systems division. Buying Ultra Maritime would bolt a specialized underwater-warfare maker onto a business already pointed at the same customers — at a moment when the Pentagon and its NATO allies are spending heavily to track submarines beneath the world’s oceans.

Money is a big reason this asset is drawing a crowd. Ultra Maritime’s revenue is on track to reach roughly $784 million in 2026, up from about $494 million in 2023, after Advent poured close to $170 million into new products over three years. The unit employs around 2,000 people across the “Five Eyes” nations — the United States, United Kingdom, Canada, Australia and New Zealand — that share military intelligence.

The business also has a foot in the door of newer technology. Last year Ultra Maritime teamed up with Anduril Industries, the fast-growing defense startup, to build next-generation anti-submarine systems that pair self-driving underwater drones with Ultra’s sensors. That kind of work fits the direction the U.S. government has been pushing, as officials lean on big contractors to make more weapons faster.

Advent built the wider Cobham Ultra group through two large British takeovers: the roughly £4 billion purchase of defense group Cobham in 2019, followed by the £2.6 billion buyout of Ultra Electronics two years later. Ultra Maritime is seen as one of the more valuable, harder-to-replace pieces of that collection, which is why it has attracted competing offers. Advent put the unit up for sale earlier this year, at one point seeking more than £3 billion, or about $4 billion.

Lockheed has not locked up the deal. Other bidders in the United States and Europe remain part of a competitive auction, and a rival could still come in with a richer offer. The identities of the other bidders have not been disclosed.

If the deal happens, it would rank among Lockheed‘s bigger recent purchases, and Wall Street will want to know how the company plans to pay for it. Lockheed carries a stock-market value of roughly $110 billion to $125 billion and has generated strong free cash flow, which it has historically used — along with borrowing — to fund smaller “bolt-on” acquisitions. Investors will be watching whether a $3.5 billion check changes the company’s plans for dividends or share buybacks.

A deal this size would also face government review on both sides of the Atlantic. Because Ultra Maritime has British roots and supplies the Royal Navy, any sale would likely be examined under the U.K.’s National Security and Investment Act, which lets British officials review or block foreign takeovers of sensitive defense firms. In the United States, the cross-border nature of the technology and customers could draw scrutiny from the Committee on Foreign Investment in the United States, known as CFIUS. Either review could stretch out the timeline for closing.

The report landed at a busy stretch for Lockheed and its chief executive, James Taiclet, who recently met with President Trump alongside other defense-industry leaders as the administration presses contractors to ramp up production. The company is scheduled to report second-quarter earnings on July 23, an event where management could be pressed on the status of the Ultra Maritime talks.

Investors have already reacted. Lockheed shares jumped about 4.6% last Thursday after the first reports of its lead in the bidding, then slipped in later trading. The stock has climbed roughly 13% so far in 2026, helped by rising defense budgets across NATO members since Russia’s invasion of Ukraine.

For everyday readers, the takeaway is less about submarines than about where defense dollars are flowing. Governments rattled by conflicts in Europe and the Middle East are pouring money into weapons makers, and the biggest contractors are using that cash to swallow smaller, specialized rivals. Deals like this one help decide which companies control the technology militaries will buy for the next decade — and which shareholders, workers and towns benefit from the spending.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A father says his family of five is able to eat at Chick-fil-A for under $45 using a DIY sandwich “hack,” though menu prices vary by location amid concerns across the country about affordability due to rising costs.

Jeff Johnson, a worship pastor at an Atlanta church and a podcast host, told his social media followers that it is cheaper to purchase nuggets and buns than to purchase chicken sandwiches for himself, his wife and his three children.

“I have a hack for every dad who’s always saying, ‘Why are we spending so much money at Chick-fil-A,'” Johnson said in a June 26 Instagram video.

“Instead of everybody ordering their fried chicken sandwich and their meal, here’s what we just did and what we have been doing, and y’all need to know about this.”

CHICK-FIL-A EXPANDS ITS ‘GHOST KITCHEN’ MODEL WITH NEW DELIVERY-ONLY STORE IN FLORIDA

Johnson explained that he ordered 30 nuggets, which were just over $17, and buttered buns for everyone, which were 25 cents each.

The camera then pans over to a family member’s sandwich, which shows a bun with several nuggets inside.

Even with added sides and drinks, Johnson’s hack helps reduce the cost for families attempting to budget their meals.

“Everyone’s happy, dad’s happy. We have saved so much money. I’m just telling you, you can eat for under $45 at Chick-fil-A as a family of five if you do what I’m saying,” Johnson said.

Prices vary by restaurant, but individual Chick-fil-A chicken sandwiches often cost about $5 to $6 before sides, drinks and tax.

The commenters on his video were shocked by his hack and appreciative of the advice.

“Chick-fil-A is expensive. Good advice dude. Appreciate it,” one person wrote.

“Did not need to know about the 30 nuggets for $17 as a single person,” another jokingly added.

CHICK-FIL-A LAUNCHES FIRST EVER NON-CHICKEN KIDS MEAL NATIONWIDE

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Let me know when you get a cease and desist letter from @chickfila,” a third user joked.

“Get some pickles on the side. Gotta have that pickles,” another user said, referring to the pickles that typically come on a classic chicken sandwich.

This post was originally published here

New Jersey entered one of the busiest days of the July Fourth holiday weekend on Sunday with thousands of homes still without electricity, major commuter rail disruptions and a global FIFA World Cup audience descending on MetLife Stadium, creating a costly test of the state’s infrastructure just as it welcomed visitors from around the world.

State health officials said Sunday that the prolonged heat wave’s suspected death toll had risen to at least 22, up from 19 a day earlier, according to New Jersey Department of Health spokesperson Dalya Ewais. Health Commissioner Dr. Raynard Washington said many victims were found inside homes without air conditioning, highlighting the dangers of extended power outages during extreme temperatures.

The combination of severe weather, record heat and one of the world’s biggest sporting events placed extraordinary pressure on utilities, transportation systems and local businesses, many of which were expecting one of the strongest weekends of the summer tourism season.

The largest share of the outages remained on the system operated by FirstEnergy’s Jersey Central Power & Light (JCP&L). According to New Jersey’s outage tracker, roughly 90,000 JCP&L customers remained without power Sunday, accounting for the majority of approximately 124,000 outages statewide. Morris County was among the hardest-hit areas, with more than 30,000 homes and businesses still in the dark.

JCP&L spokesman Chris Hoenig said crews had restored electricity to more than 230,000 customers by Saturday night but warned that the most heavily damaged areas could remain without service until Thursday, a worst-case estimate. More than 1,000 foresters and utility workers continued clearing fallen trees, replacing damaged utility poles and restringing power lines across the region.

The widespread damage was caused by intense thunderstorms that swept through New Jersey on Friday evening, bringing wind gusts of up to 71 miles per hour. Thousands of trees fell onto roads, homes and utility lines, while debris blocked transportation corridors across northern and central New Jersey.

The storms also crippled NJ Transit, the backbone of commuter and event transportation throughout the region. President and CEO Kris Kolluri said crews lost approximately 60 trees along rail lines while catenary wires and signal systems sustained significant damage in just a 20-to-30-minute period.

Repair crews worked around the clock to restore service before the start of the new workweek. The Montclair-Boonton and North Jersey Coast lines reopened Sunday morning, but service on the Morris & Essex and Gladstone Branch lines remained suspended as emergency repairs continued.

The timing presented an enormous operational challenge because NJ Transit serves as the primary transportation provider for thousands of fans attending the 2026 FIFA World Cup. Sunday’s Round of 16 match between Brazil and Norway at MetLife Stadium, temporarily renamed New York New Jersey Stadium for the tournament, was expected to draw another international crowd after weeks of record tournament attendance.

For transportation officials, restoring reliable rail service was about more than moving commuters. The World Cup represents one of the largest international events ever hosted by the region, and agencies including NJ Transit, Amtrak, the Port Authority of New York and New Jersey, and the Metropolitan Transportation Authority have spent years coordinating operations to showcase the area’s transportation network to millions of visitors.

Businesses also felt the impact of the prolonged disruptions. Restaurants, supermarkets, convenience stores and other retailers faced spoiled refrigerated inventory, reduced customer traffic and canceled holiday plans. Hotels, entertainment venues and tourism operators had to navigate transportation delays while accommodating thousands of visitors arriving for World Cup festivities.

Utility restoration efforts also carry significant financial costs. Emergency crews have been working 16-hour shifts in near-100-degree temperatures, requiring substantial overtime while utilities continue replacing damaged infrastructure. Those storm recovery expenses can ultimately affect future operating costs and infrastructure investment decisions.

Many residents are also reconsidering investments in backup generators and other emergency preparedness equipment, echoing the sharp increase in generator demand that followed Hurricane Sandy in 2012.

Weather forecasts called for cooler temperatures during the coming week, offering some relief to utility crews and residents still waiting for power to be restored. Even so, the holiday weekend exposed the growing challenge of maintaining reliable electric and transportation infrastructure as New Jersey continues hosting the 2026 FIFA World Cup through the July 19 final.

For businesses counting on tourism, hospitality and consumer spending, the lesson was clear: major international events can generate enormous economic opportunities, but only if the infrastructure supporting those visitors can withstand increasingly frequent severe weather and record demand.

JBizNews Desk | New Jersey
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A new peer-reviewed study of 38 college students found that writing with artificial intelligence takes more mental effort than writing without it, not less — a conclusion that challenges a common assumption as businesses invest billions of dollars in AI tools and employee training. The research, led by Abram Anders, associate professor of English and the Jonathan Wickert Professor of Innovation at Iowa State University, was published in the journal Computers and Composition and detailed by Iowa State on Monday, June 15.

Anders and co-author Emily Dux Speltz, an assistant professor in the Department of Humanities and Communication at Embry-Riddle Aeronautical University, tracked 38 undergraduates from 22 different majors across two semesters in an experimental course called “AI and Writing.” Students completed structured assignments, then wrote reflections documenting how their thinking changed while working with tools such as OpenAI’s ChatGPT and Anthropic’s Claude.

Most students entered the course expecting AI to do much of the work for them. Instead, they discovered something different. “Writing with AI doesn’t take the work out of writing,” Anders said. “It changes it.”

That finding carries implications well beyond the classroom. As Microsoft, Google, OpenAI, and Anthropic compete to bring AI writing tools into offices around the world, and employers devote significant resources to training their workforces, the study suggests the technology shifts work rather than eliminating it. AI can generate polished text quickly, but the responsibility for judgment, accuracy, and decision-making remains with the user.

Anders put it directly. “AI only handles the surface-level writing, and the real heavy lifting — idea formation, judgment, revision strategy, and quality control — remains with the student writer,” he said. Replace “student” with “employee,” and the finding applies just as easily to today’s workplace.

The researchers identified three ideas students had to understand before AI became a productivity tool rather than a shortcut. The first is that writing with AI is an experiment, not a vending machine. A single vague prompt rarely produces useful work. The second is that strong results depend on the user’s own expertise. Writers must understand a subject well enough to recognize when AI gets facts wrong or produces weak analysis. The third is that the human writer—not the software—must remain responsible for the meaning, direction, and purpose of the final product.

One of the study’s most striking findings involves what the researchers call the “fluency trap.” AI often produces writing that sounds confident, polished, and authoritative even when it is shallow, misleading, or entirely false. Because the writing appears professional, many users instinctively trust it without carefully verifying the information.

Anders and Dux Speltz found that many students initially approached AI much like a search engine, entering a prompt and accepting whatever answer appeared. To challenge that mindset, the course included an exercise called “Create a Fluent Hallucination,” in which students deliberately generated believable but completely false AI content, including fabricated events and invented sources. The exercise was designed to demonstrate firsthand how convincing incorrect information can appear when produced by generative AI.

The lesson extends well beyond education. Businesses increasingly rely on AI to draft emails, marketing materials, reports, proposals, contracts, customer communications, and internal documents. If employees fail to verify AI-generated information, polished errors can quickly become expensive mistakes.

The workforce implications run even deeper. Rather than eliminating effort, the study concludes that AI shifts effort toward the aspects of work that are most difficult to automate: defining problems, exercising judgment, evaluating evidence, making decisions, and revising toward a clear objective. For employers calculating the return on AI investments, that complicates the simple assumption that AI automatically reduces labor. While software may produce a first draft in seconds, organizations still need skilled employees capable of directing, evaluating, and improving that output.

The research also reshapes how writing ability should be viewed in hiring and workforce development. Anders and Dux Speltz argue that as AI becomes embedded in academic, professional, and everyday communication, success will require more than knowing how to operate the software. Workers will need a stronger understanding of how writing and thinking work together.

“AI changes the workflow, but it doesn’t change the fact that writing is thinking,” Anders said. “Students still have to make decisions, set direction and shape meaning.”

The authors are careful not to overstate their conclusions. The study does not claim AI made participants better writers. Instead, it examined how students described changes in their thinking throughout the course. The researchers acknowledge that additional studies involving larger groups are needed to determine whether those changes produce lasting improvements in writing quality. The findings also reflect the experiences of a relatively small group of 38 students.

Even so, the practical message is difficult for employers to ignore. Students who embraced the three core concepts became more deliberate, more skeptical, and more thoughtful in how they used AI. Those who viewed the technology as a shortcut generally produced shortcut-quality work.

As companies continue investing billions in AI software and employee training, the study suggests the biggest competitive advantage will not come from having access to AI—it will come from having employees who know how to question it, guide it, and improve what it produces. AI may generate the first draft in seconds, but the research indicates that critical thinking, sound judgment, and subject expertise remain the qualities that ultimately determine the quality of the final work.

JBizNews Desk | Ames, Iowa

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Oil and gas tankers resumed sailing through the Strait of Hormuz on Sunday, July 5, after an alarming series of unexplained U-turns raised fresh fears that one of the world’s most important energy chokepoints could be disrupted again. The reversals were not caused by bad weather or mechanical problems. Instead, ship operators are navigating an active military threat, with Iranian forces continuing to harass commercial vessels, warnings that parts of the waterway remain mined, and captains weighing intelligence reports, crew safety and soaring insurance costs before committing to the passage.

Despite those dangers, ship-tracking data from Kpler and updates from the Joint Maritime Information Center showed that at least six oil and gas tankers successfully transited the U.S.-protected shipping lane along Oman’s coast on Sunday. The number is likely higher because many vessels are now sailing with their tracking transponders switched off to reduce the risk of being identified. Two smaller tankers instead chose a route closer to the Iranian shoreline.

The renewed traffic followed a tense weekend during which at least eight ships approaching the Strait of Hormuz abruptly turned back before completing the transit. While no official explanation has been released for those individual reversals, maritime security experts say captains are making real-time decisions based on military threats, intelligence warnings and the risk that a single drone, missile or mine strike could endanger crews and shut down one of the world’s busiest energy corridors.

The improving traffic is already benefiting American drivers. According to AAA, the national average for regular gasoline stood at $3.81 per gallon on Sunday, down nearly 50 cents from a month ago and well below the spring peak of $4.56 reached on May 21. Patrick De Haan, head of petroleum analysis at GasBuddy, said 38 states have now fallen below $4 per gallon, providing welcome relief during the busy Independence Day travel period.

About one-fifth of the world’s oil and liquefied natural gas normally passes through the Strait of Hormuz. The near-shutdown earlier this year pushed Brent crude above $100 per barrel, but prices have since dropped below $72 as exports steadily recover.

Saudi Arabia has restored crude exports to roughly 90% of pre-war levels, while the United Arab Emirates is shipping more than 3.9 million barrels per day, aided by a pipeline that bypasses the strait. Total oil flows through Hormuz have climbed above 10 million barrels per day, although that remains below the roughly 20 million barrels that moved before the conflict.

Analysts at HSBC say markets have shifted from worrying about shortages to concerns over excess supply, particularly as China has reduced imports. The U.S. Energy Information Administration expects global production and trade to take until early 2027 to fully recover because of damage to regional infrastructure.

Despite improving traffic, the danger has not disappeared. Iran’s Persian Gulf Strait Authority continues to insist that vessels use routes it designates, while the Joint Maritime Information Center said Sunday that Iranian forces are still harassing commercial ships and warned that parts of the strait remain mined.

For businesses, the reopening of this vital shipping lane is already lowering transportation and fuel costs. But traders remain focused on every tanker entering and leaving the Gulf, knowing that a single security incident could quickly send oil and gasoline prices sharply higher again.

JBizNews Desk | Oman
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A disappointing June jobs report, fresh insight from the Federal Reserve, a sharp pullback in semiconductor stocks and the unofficial start of earnings season are poised to shape Wall Street this week. Investors will be looking for answers to three critical questions: Is the economy slowing enough to change the Fed’s next move? Can technology stocks regain their momentum? And are American consumers still spending despite growing economic uncertainty?

The Bureau of Labor Statistics reported Thursday, July 2, that American employers added just 57,000 jobs in June — less than half of what economists expected — signaling that hiring has slowed significantly entering the second half of 2026. While Wall Street wrapped up a strong first half of the year, markets turned more volatile after the report, setting the stage for a week that could determine the market’s next move.

A Labor Market Losing Momentum

June’s hiring total came in well below the roughly 115,000 jobs economists had expected, and the agency revised April and May payrolls lower by a combined 74,000 jobs. The unemployment rate edged down to 4.2% from 4.3%, but much of that decline reflected fewer Americans participating in the labor force, with the participation rate falling to 61.5%, its lowest level since March 2021.

The weakness was concentrated in leisure and hospitality, which lost 61,000 jobs after softer-than-normal seasonal hiring. Health care, social assistance and professional services accounted for much of the month’s job growth. Average wages climbed 3.5% over the past year, remaining ahead of inflation but reflecting one of the slowest hiring environments in recent months.

For everyday Americans, the report presents a mixed picture. A softer labor market could reduce pressure on the Federal Reserve to keep borrowing costs elevated, offering potential relief for mortgages, auto loans and credit cards. At the same time, slower hiring means fewer job opportunities and less leverage for workers seeking higher pay.

All Eyes Turn to the Federal Reserve

Investors’ attention now shifts to the Federal Reserve’s June meeting minutes, scheduled for release on Wednesday, July 8, at 2 p.m. Eastern. The minutes are expected to provide additional insight into how Chair Kevin Warsh and fellow policymakers view inflation, economic growth and the path for interest rates after leaving policy unchanged at their last meeting.

Following the weaker-than-expected jobs report, traders sharply lowered expectations for another rate increase, making every word of the Fed’s discussion especially important. Investors will be searching for clues about how concerned officials remain over inflation, which has continued to run above the central bank’s long-term 2% target.

Technology Stocks Face an Important Test

The market’s biggest leadership group also enters the week under pressure.

Semiconductor and artificial intelligence shares suffered one of their toughest stretches of 2026, with the PHLX Semiconductor Index falling more than 12% over two trading sessions. The selloff followed reports that OpenAI was in talks to sell a 5% stake to the U.S. government and comments from Meta indicating it may begin selling excess computing capacity, raising new questions about the pace of AI spending.

Several industry leaders moved sharply lower. Micron fell 7%, Applied Materials dropped roughly 10%, and Tesla declined about 8% despite reporting strong vehicle deliveries.

Not all of the money left the market.

Instead, investors rotated into larger, more defensive companies. The Dow Jones Industrial Average climbed to another record high, helped by a nearly 5% gain in Apple, as investors favored established companies with stable earnings and reliable cash flow.

This week’s key question is whether buyers return to the semiconductor sector that fueled much of this year’s rally or continue shifting toward more traditional, dividend-paying companies.

A Strong First Half Faces Its First Major Test

Despite the recent volatility, U.S. markets remain on solid footing after posting one of their strongest first halves in years.

The Dow gained 8.9%, its best first-half performance since 2021. The S&P 500 advanced 9.6%, the Nasdaq climbed 12.8%, and the Russell 2000 surged nearly 22%, marking its strongest first half since 1991.

Energy prices also provided support. West Texas Intermediate crude slipped back below $70 per barrel as tensions in the Strait of Hormuz eased, helping lower gasoline prices and reducing fuel costs for consumers, airlines and freight companies.

Earnings Season Begins With a Look at the Consumer

Corporate earnings now take center stage.

Delta Air Lines headlines the week’s calendar when it reports results before the opening bell on Friday, July 10. Wall Street expects approximately $1.44 in earnings per share on roughly $17.72 billion in revenue, making the report one of the first major indicators of whether Americans continue to spend aggressively on travel.

Earlier in the week, investors will also hear from PepsiCo, Levi Strauss and WD-40, offering additional insight into consumer demand for everything from food and clothing to everyday household products.

Together, the reports should provide one of the clearest early readings on the health of the American consumer and the broader economy.

The coming week isn’t simply about stock prices. It’s about whether hiring continues to cool, whether the Federal Reserve is preparing to shift course, whether consumers remain willing to spend, and whether technology can reclaim its leadership of the market. The answers could shape not only Wall Street’s next move, but also the economic outlook for businesses and families across the country.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Large employers in New Jersey will soon face a new annual fee if significant numbers of their workers receive health coverage through Medicaid instead of employer-sponsored insurance, creating a new business expense that could cost some companies millions of dollars each year.

Gov. Mikie Sherrill signed the measure Tuesday night as part of the state’s $60.7 billion budget, which took effect Wednesday. State officials estimate the new program will generate approximately $145 million annually.

The law creates what New Jersey calls the Employer Healthcare Assistance Contribution.

Companies with 50 or more employees or dependents enrolled in Medicaid will be required to pay an annual assessment based on how many workers rely on the government-funded health program.

The fee starts at $325 per person for employers with 50 to 249 Medicaid enrollees and rises to $725 per person for companies with 500 or more employees or dependents receiving Medicaid benefits.

State officials have identified large retailers, warehouse operators, and major employers such as Amazon, Walmart, and Target as examples of businesses the law is designed to affect.

During its first year, New Jersey estimates the assessment will apply to roughly 700 to 750 companies.

Sherrill said the policy is intended to ensure that profitable employers contribute more toward healthcare costs when large portions of their workforce rely on taxpayer-funded insurance.

The governor argued that the additional revenue will also help reduce financial pressure on hospitals and emergency rooms, where uncompensated care often creates higher healthcare costs throughout the system.

The new assessment comes as New Jersey prepares for significant changes to Medicaid funding.

State officials project that revisions made under the federal tax-and-policy legislation signed last year by President Donald Trump could eventually remove more than 300,000 New Jersey residents from Medicaid while reducing hospital funding by an estimated $3.3 billion annually.

Assemblyman Avi Schnall, a Democrat representing Ocean County, supported the legislation, noting that New Jersey expects Medicaid spending to total approximately $26 billion during the coming fiscal year.

Business organizations strongly opposed the measure.

The New Jersey Business and Industry Association (NJBIA) called the assessment one of the most concerning provisions included in the new state budget.

Christopher Emigholz, the organization’s Chief Government Affairs Officer, said many employers will be penalized for circumstances they cannot fully control because companies often do not know which employees receive Medicaid benefits.

He also warned the assessment could complicate hiring decisions, particularly for businesses employing seasonal and part-time workers.

Supporters of the legislation included provisions intended to address those concerns.

Temporary, seasonal, and part-time employees are exempt from the assessment, and the law prohibits employers from making hiring or firing decisions based on a worker’s Medicaid status.

Several of the companies expected to be affected also criticized the measure.

A Walmart spokesperson said targeted employer taxes ultimately increase costs throughout the economy, raising prices on groceries and other everyday necessities for consumers.

Amazon responded by highlighting its recent $1 billion investment to increase wages and reduce healthcare costs for warehouse employees and delivery drivers, adding that affordable health coverage is available to entry-level workers.

New Jersey is not the first state to pursue this approach.

Massachusetts briefly imposed a similar employer assessment beginning in 2018, while Maryland’s 2006 law targeting Walmart was later struck down by the courts after conflicting with federal employee benefits law.

New Jersey lawmakers say their version was drafted differently in an effort to avoid the same legal challenges.

Other states are already considering similar policies.

Lawmakers in California have directed state officials to study comparable employer assessments, while policymakers in Connecticut, Colorado, Oregon, and Washington have proposed related legislation.

Much of the renewed interest follows federal Medicaid changes that the nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office estimates could leave more than 10 million Americans without health insurance by 2034.

For employers, the practical impact is immediate.

Beginning with the current fiscal year, qualifying businesses operating in New Jersey will face a new healthcare-related expense tied directly to employee Medicaid enrollment. If additional states adopt similar programs, large national employers could see those costs spread well beyond New Jersey.

JBizNews Desk | Trenton, New Jersey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Satellite television provider Dish DBS filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection on Tuesday, its parent company EchoStar Corporation announced, after a delayed $23 billion sale of wireless airwaves to AT&T left the company unable to pay off bonds that were coming due.

The filing was made in the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of Texas, in Houston. In a statement, EchoStar said the move was a prepackaged restructuring — a bankruptcy planned in advance with creditors — backed by holders of more than 88% of Dish DBS bonds. The company said the goal is to restructure its debt quickly and exit court protection before the end of the third quarter of 2026.

At the center of the trouble is a $2 billion block of 7.75% senior secured notes that matured on July 1. Dish DBS could not repay them because the money it was counting on — proceeds from selling wireless spectrum to AT&T — has not arrived. EchoStar agreed last year to sell nationwide 3.45 GHz and 600 MHz spectrum licenses to AT&T for about $23 billion, but the deal has been held up by what the company called unforeseen delays as it awaits regulatory approval.

Charlie Ergen, the chairman and chief executive who co-founded EchoStar and recently returned to lead it through the crisis, framed the filing as a step forward rather than a collapse. He said the company has been “at the forefront of telecommunications for over 45 years” and that the moves would position the business for a stronger future. He added that EchoStar is operating as usual throughout the process.

Importantly, the bankruptcy is limited to the Dish DBS and Dish Wireless corporate entities. EchoStar said its consumer brands — Dish TV, Sling TV, Boost Mobile, Gen Mobile and Hughes — are not part of the filing and will keep operating normally, with no changes to service, employees or vendor payments. Customers, in other words, should see nothing different.

The company that is filing has been under pressure for years. EchoStar, which merged with Dish in 2024, has been struggling to manage roughly $25 billion in debt. Its pay-TV business is shrinking fast: Dish now has about 5 million satellite subscribers and Sling TV about 2 million, down sharply from its peak. In the first three months of 2026 alone, the company lost roughly 177,000 net subscribers, and pay-TV revenue fell more than $260 million from a year earlier, to $2.26 billion.

The bankruptcy also marks a retreat from Dish’s expensive bet on wireless. The restructuring is expected to help wind down Dish Wireless’s facilities-based 5G network — the network the company built to become a fourth national wireless carrier alongside AT&T, Verizon and T-Mobile. That ambition, once encouraged by federal regulators to boost competition, has now given way to selling the underlying airwaves to a rival.

For AT&T, the stalled deal is a complication but also an opportunity. Acquiring EchoStar’s spectrum would give the carrier a large block of valuable airwaves to expand its network, and the delay appears tied to regulatory review rather than a collapse of the agreement. Once the sale closes, EchoStar says it will use the proceeds to repay most of its debt, which would clear the path out of bankruptcy.

The case is being handled by law firm White & Case, with Houston partner Charles Koster leading, while FTI Consulting serves as financial advisor. EchoStar shares, which trade on the Nasdaq under the ticker ECHO, rose 0.4% in after-hours trading following the news — a sign investors viewed the prepackaged filing as an orderly cleanup rather than a surprise.

The filing closes a difficult chapter for Ergen, who spent years trying to reinvent Dish from a fading satellite-TV operator into a wireless player. An earlier attempt to merge with rival DirecTV fell apart, leaving the spectrum sale to AT&T as the company’s main route to raising cash. With that deal delayed and a major bond payment due, bankruptcy became the tool to buy time. If the AT&T transaction finally closes, EchoStar could emerge in the third quarter with far less debt — and a business built around wireless airwaves and streaming rather than the satellite dishes that made it famous.

JBizNews Desk | Houston
© JBizNews.com. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Crude oil settled near its lowest level since before the Iran war even as a Washington research group warned that Tehran has quietly continued building an underground complex that could one day house a nuclear enrichment facility.

West Texas Intermediate closed near $69 a barrel Friday while Brent crude hovered around $72, roughly where both benchmarks traded on February 27—the day before Israeli and U.S. strikes on Iran ignited the conflict. The last time WTI futures closed below $70 was on Feb. 27. Prices have steadily retreated as commercial shipping resumed through the Strait of Hormuz and traders increasingly bet the fragile ceasefire will hold.

The warning came from the Institute for Science and International Security, a Washington-based nonprofit that monitors nuclear activity using commercial satellite imagery. The organization said images captured in late June show continued excavation and construction at Pickaxe Mountain, a heavily fortified site in Iran’s Zagros Mountains, located just south of the heavily damaged Natanz uranium enrichment complex.

Spencer Faragasso, a senior fellow at the Institute, wrote on X that excavation at the site has continued since at least 2020 and appears designed to preserve Iran’s nuclear capabilities if negotiations with Washington fail. According to the Institute’s analysis, the underground tunnels appear large enough to house an enrichment facility. Inspectors from the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) have not been granted access to the site.

Faragasso argued that if Iran is negotiating in good faith, halting construction at Pickaxe Mountain would be an obvious confidence-building measure. Continued excavation, he said, raises fresh questions about Tehran’s long-term intentions.

The report carries significant implications for energy markets because the nuclear dispute remains the central issue behind the recent conflict. The Islamabad Memorandum, signed remotely by President Donald Trump and Iran’s president on June 17, calls for preserving the status quo while broader negotiations continue. The Institute argues that continuing construction at a suspected nuclear site would conflict with that objective. If confirmed, the activity could strengthen opposition to the agreement in both Washington and Jerusalem and quickly return geopolitical risk to oil markets.

For now, traders are looking beyond the report.

Commercial shipping through the Strait of Hormuz has climbed back above 10 million barrels per day, while Saudi Arabia has restored crude exports to roughly 90% of pre-war levels. The United Arab Emirates has also returned exports to more than 3.9 million barrels per day, using both the Strait of Hormuz and its bypass pipeline network. Combined with emergency reserve releases, those supply increases have transformed a market that faced severe shortages only months ago into one with considerably more available oil.

The next major test could come within days.

Al Arabiya reported that the next round of U.S.-Iran negotiations is expected to begin in Pakistan on July 11, with discussions expected to focus on Iran’s nuclear program, economic sanctions, and frozen Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) assets. Neither Washington, Tehran, nor Pakistan has formally confirmed the meeting date.

The difference between earlier forecasts and today’s market tells the broader economic story. The U.S. Energy Information Administration (EIA) had projected Brent crude would average approximately $105 per barrel during June and July if disruptions in the Strait of Hormuz continued. Instead, oil prices have remained more than $30 below those projections as shipping resumed much faster than expected. That reversal has prevented the sharp increases in gasoline and diesel prices many economists feared heading into the busy July Fourth travel season.

For businesses that rely heavily on fuel—including trucking companies, airlines, manufacturers, and shipping firms—the decline has provided welcome relief after Brent briefly surged above $118 per barrel during the height of the conflict.

That relief, however, depends almost entirely on the ceasefire holding and negotiations continuing.

If evidence mounts that Iran has continued expanding a secret underground nuclear facility while talks proceed—or if the expected July negotiations break down—the geopolitical risk premium could return to oil markets quickly. Any renewed tensions in the Middle East would likely ripple through fuel prices, transportation costs, global supply chains, and ultimately the prices consumers pay for everyday goods.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

America’s southern border is becoming one of the federal government’s biggest construction and technology projects, creating billions of dollars in new business for defense contractors, surveillance companies, and infrastructure builders.

According to U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP), the agency is rapidly expanding what officials describe as a “smart wall” along the U.S.-Mexico border using money from a $46 billion border security fund approved by Congress last year.

The funding, included in the sweeping 2025 tax-and-spending law, has turned border security into one of the fastest-growing areas of federal contracting.

CBP Commissioner Rodney Scott said the agency is currently completing approximately six miles of new border barrier each week, while Homeland Security Secretary Markwayne Mullin said the first major phase of the new system is expected to be completed around this time next year.

Unlike earlier border barriers, the new system combines 30-foot steel fencing with advanced surveillance technology, including artificial intelligence, radar, motion sensors, high-resolution cameras, and autonomous surveillance towers capable of monitoring vast stretches of the border without requiring agents on site.

As of mid-June, CBP reported completing another 74 miles of border barrier since President Donald Trump returned to office. During congressional testimony earlier this year, Commissioner Scott said the agency expects to complete approximately 250 miles of new barriers by the end of September.

For private industry, the project represents a multibillion-dollar opportunity.

Among the biggest beneficiaries is Anduril Industries, the defense technology company founded by Palmer Luckey.

Its AI-powered autonomous surveillance towers have become a centerpiece of the new border strategy. Equipped with cameras, sensors, and artificial intelligence capable of distinguishing between people, animals, and vehicles, the towers operate around the clock using solar power.

The 2025 legislation directs CBP to deploy autonomous surveillance towers throughout the border system, with another 95 towers already scheduled for installation.

Being designated as a formal government “program of record” provides Anduril with a long-term stream of federal business while strengthening its position across the defense industry.

Several other companies are also securing major contracts.

Elbit Systems of America, the U.S. subsidiary of the Israeli defense company, continues supplying surveillance equipment, while technology firm Sintela is installing underground fiber-optic sensing networks capable of detecting movement beneath the surface and feeding real-time information into artificial intelligence systems.

According to Sintela CEO Magnus McEwen-King, the company’s technology can follow terrain across forests, mountains, and riverbanks while providing continuous monitoring over large geographic areas.

The spending extends well beyond technology.

Building roughly six miles of fencing every week creates steady demand for steel, heavy construction equipment, engineering firms, skilled labor, transportation providers, and maintenance contractors. CBP is also expanding hiring efforts to support the growing border infrastructure.

In Texas, contractors are additionally installing large floating barriers in portions of the Rio Grande, creating another market for specialized marine barrier manufacturers.

The construction boom comes as illegal border crossings have fallen to their lowest levels in decades following broader immigration enforcement policies implemented by the Trump administration.

Supporters argue the decline provides an opportunity to permanently strengthen border security infrastructure, while critics question whether taxpayers are receiving sufficient value from such a large investment.

Josh Sewell, Director of Research and Policy at the nonpartisan watchdog Taxpayers for Common Sense, has called for stronger oversight before additional billions are committed, pointing to previous government border technology projects that ran significantly over budget.

Meanwhile, local advocacy groups continue expressing concerns about increased surveillance and environmental impacts in sensitive border regions, including parts of Big Bend National Park.

For businesses, however, the outlook remains clear.

With billions of dollars already appropriated and major contracts continuing to be awarded, the federal government’s smart wall initiative is becoming a long-term source of revenue for defense technology companies, construction firms, engineering contractors, surveillance manufacturers, and suppliers across multiple industries.

As work accelerates, the project is evolving into one of the largest infrastructure and technology investments currently underway anywhere in the United States.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

American families are refusing to abandon their summer vacations, but they are aggressively cutting how much they spend to make the trips happen, according to a survey conducted by YouGov and fielded between June 16 and June 21, 2026. The poll of 783 U.S. parents of children under 18 found that 63% already had a family trip planned for the season, while only 27% said they would not travel at all — even as the cost of a getaway climbed sharply.

The pressure on household budgets is easy to see. Airfare in May ran 27% higher than a year earlier, according to inflation data from the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics. Hotel rates and attraction prices have also risen. Yet rather than cancel, most families are making smaller compromises to protect the trip itself.

The most common money-saving move was choosing a closer or cheaper destination, cited by 25% of parents with summer plans. Only 6% canceled a vacation outright, and another 5% switched to a different spot. More than one in five families — 21% — said they were using airline miles or hotel points to help cover the cost. Nearly two-thirds ranked overall price among their three biggest factors when picking where to go.

Spending levels showed how families are budgeting. About half of those traveling expected to spend between $1,000 and $5,000, while 13% planned to spend $5,000 to $10,000, and just 4% expected to top $10,000. The pattern points to households stretching dollars rather than splurging.

Other recent surveys tell the same story. A poll of 5,000 Americans conducted by Talker Research for the fintech firm Current found that 37% would not travel at all this summer, with most of that group saying they simply could not afford a trip. That survey pointed to the rise of “staycations,” “quietcations” and “micro-breaks” as budget-friendly substitutes. Erin Bruehl, vice president of communications at Current, said the trends reflect how practical Americans have become with their money, adding that instead of giving up on travel, people are being smarter about it.

Consulting firm PwC, in its summer spending poll, found that 71% of U.S. adults planned to spend the same or more on summer travel than last year, suggesting demand remains sturdy at the top of the market even as lower-income families pull back. A separate report from NerdWallet, conducted by The Harris Poll, put average summer travel spending on flights and lodging at $3,940 per traveler and estimated that more than 120 million Americans would spend over $475 billion on those costs.

How families are paying is its own economic signal. The NerdWallet survey found that 84% of summer travelers would use credit cards for at least some costs, and while most planned to pay the balance quickly, nearly a quarter said they would carry it. About 17% said they would lean on buy now, pay later services to fund the trip, a sign that some households are borrowing to preserve a summer tradition.

For the travel industry, the numbers cut two ways. Airlines, hotels and theme-park operators are still filling seats, rooms and gates, but a growing share of their customers are trading down — driving less far, staying fewer nights, and choosing value destinations over marquee ones. That behavior supports revenue while squeezing the premium spending that resorts and airlines count on.

The shift is also reshaping where the money lands. Regional attractions, drive-to beach towns, state parks and mid-priced hotels stand to gain as families skip expensive flights. Gas stations, roadside restaurants and campgrounds benefit from the move toward road trips. Meanwhile, credit card issuers and buy now, pay later lenders are capturing a larger slice of vacation spending as families finance trips they will not postpone.

The broader takeaway for the consumer economy is resilience with a catch. Families are treating summer travel as close to essential, refusing to cancel even when prices bite. But they are funding it through points, debt, shorter trips and cheaper destinations — a pattern that keeps travel demand alive while quietly shifting billions of dollars toward the lower-cost corners of the market.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SpaceX is preparing to take on some of the biggest names in American telecommunications, signaling that its Starlink satellite business may soon compete directly with AT&T, Verizon, and T-Mobile in what has become one of the company’s boldest expansion plans to date.

The strategy was outlined by SpaceX President Gwynne Shotwell during the company’s late-June initial public offering roadshow, where she told investors that Starlink intends to move beyond providing satellite internet service and become a direct competitor in the U.S. wireless market. The comments, first reported by the Financial Times, represent the clearest indication yet that SpaceX plans to challenge a communications industry valued at roughly $1.6 trillion.  

The announcement comes only weeks after SpaceX’s blockbuster public debut.

The company began trading on the Nasdaq on June 12 under the ticker SPCX, raising nearly $86 billion and reaching a valuation exceeding $2 trillion, making it one of the largest initial public offerings ever completed. Much of that value is tied to Starlink, which has rapidly evolved into the company’s largest revenue generator.

According to figures presented during the roadshow, Starlink generated approximately $11.4 billion of SpaceX’s $18.7 billion in total 2025 revenue. As of March 31, the satellite internet service counted 10.3 million active subscribers across more than 160 countries, reflecting its rapid global expansion over the past several years.  

Until now, Starlink’s primary business has focused on providing high-speed internet service to homes, businesses and remote locations where traditional broadband is unavailable or unreliable. The company has also worked behind the scenes with established wireless carriers, including supporting T-Mobile’s satellite messaging service designed to provide connectivity in areas without cellular coverage.

That approach could soon change dramatically.

Rather than serving as a technology partner, SpaceX now appears ready to market wireless service directly to consumers, placing it in direct competition with carriers that each serve well over 100 million subscribers nationwide.  

A major piece of that strategy fell into place earlier this year.

In May, the Federal Communications Commission approved SpaceX’s acquisition of approximately 65 megahertz of nationwide mid-band wireless spectrum from EchoStar. Owning licensed spectrum is considered essential for operating an independent mobile network and gives SpaceX a foundation it previously lacked.

Even so, industry analysts caution that the approval is only one step in a much longer process. The licenses are not expected to fully transfer until late 2027, and SpaceX’s spectrum holdings remain significantly smaller than those controlled by the nation’s three largest wireless providers. Analysts also note that competing in densely populated urban markets will still require extensive ground infrastructure that SpaceX has yet to build.  

Wall Street remains divided over how disruptive Starlink could ultimately become.

Some analysts see the company fundamentally reshaping the communications industry.

Oppenheimer analysts have argued that SpaceX has the potential to disrupt the broader $1.6 trillion communications market, projecting Starlink could eventually reach 15 million U.S. subscribers by 2030.

Others remain more cautious.

David Barden of New Street Research said SpaceX currently lacks sufficient spectrum to operate a fully competitive nationwide mobile network on its own. He also pointed to the continuing technical challenges of delivering reliable high-capacity service in major metropolitan areas, where conventional cellular networks still possess significant advantages.

Recent usage data supports some of that skepticism. T-Mobile Chief Executive Srini Gopalan recently said satellite traffic currently represents only an extremely small portion of activity on the company’s network, with usage concentrated primarily in national parks and other remote areas beyond traditional cell coverage.  

The competitive threat has already prompted an unusual response from the wireless industry.

In May, AT&T, Verizon, and T-Mobile reached an agreement in principle to create a joint venture that would combine spectrum resources to expand satellite-to-phone services. Analysts viewed the timing of the announcement—coming just weeks before the SpaceX roadshow—as evidence that the nation’s largest carriers view Starlink as a credible long-term competitor rather than simply a niche provider serving rural customers.

The competition may not stop there.

Amazon is also developing its own direct-to-device satellite communications service through its low-Earth orbit satellite network, creating another potential challenger for traditional wireless companies in the years ahead.  

For consumers, satellite-based mobile technology could eventually expand wireless coverage into rural communities and other underserved areas where building conventional cellular towers has long been expensive or impractical.

Industry experts caution, however, that satellite systems still cannot match the capacity and speed of traditional ground-based cellular networks in densely populated cities. As a result, satellite connectivity is expected to complement existing networks for the foreseeable future rather than replace them entirely.  

What distinguishes SpaceX from many previous telecommunications challengers is the company’s ability to control nearly every part of its operation.

SpaceX designs and builds its own satellites, launches them aboard its own rockets and now possesses licensed wireless spectrum that could support a future nationwide mobile network. That level of vertical integration gives the company advantages that previous competitors lacked and could allow it to expand more rapidly if it decides to pursue consumers directly.  

Whether Starlink ultimately becomes a full-scale wireless carrier remains uncertain, but one message from the company’s leadership is already clear: SpaceX intends to play a much larger role in the future of mobile communications, and the nation’s largest telecom companies are preparing accordingly.

JBizNews Desk | Hawthorne, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved.

Finding an apartment is getting a little more expensive again this summer, but renters are still in a better position than they were a year ago thanks to a record wave of new construction that continues to keep prices in check.

According to Apartment List’s July National Rent Report, released this week, the national median rent rose 0.4% in June to $1,385 per month, marking the fifth consecutive monthly increase. The report says the gain is typical for the busy summer moving season, when demand rises and landlords generally have greater pricing power.

Even so, the broader trend remains favorable for renters.

National median rent is still 1.2% lower than it was in June 2025, a decline of roughly $17 per month, and remains 4% below its mid-2022 peak, or about $57 less. Despite that easing, rents are still approximately 21% higher than they were at the start of 2021, reflecting the lasting impact of the pandemic housing boom.

The biggest reason prices have remained relatively soft is supply.

The apartment construction boom peaked in 2024, when developers delivered more than 600,000 new apartments in large multifamily buildings—the highest annual total since 1986. That unprecedented surge gave renters more choices and forced landlords to compete more aggressively for tenants.

Now the market is beginning to tighten.

Apartment List said the national multifamily vacancy rate stands at 7.2%. Vacancy reached a record high in February but has started to decline for the first time in more than four years, suggesting the large inventory of newly completed apartments is gradually being absorbed.

Apartments are also leasing a bit faster. Properties are now spending about 30 days on the market, one day less than in May.

The report also found that annual rent growth has improved for two straight months after reaching its weakest level on record in April, based on Apartment List’s data dating back to 2017. While rents remain lower than a year ago, those year-over-year declines are becoming smaller.

Housing conditions continue to vary widely across the country.

Among major metropolitan areas, San Antonio now has the softest rental market, with median rents down 5% from a year ago as Texas continues adding new apartment supply. Austin follows closely with rents down 4.3%.

At the opposite end of the spectrum, San Francisco recorded the strongest annual increase, with median rents rising 7.4% over the past year.

The regional differences reflect where builders have been most active.

Most of the annual rent declines are concentrated across the South and Mountain West, while much of the Northeast, Midwest, and parts of the West Coast continue seeing rent increases.

Among the nation’s 56 metropolitan areas with more than one million residents, 30 posted lower rents than a year ago, but 51 experienced month-over-month increases during June, highlighting the normal seasonal strength in the rental market.

The report also carries broader economic implications.

Housing remains one of the largest monthly expenses for American households and is a major component of inflation. Slower rent growth helps reduce pressure on consumers while also easing one of the Federal Reserve’s most closely watched inflation measures as policymakers continue evaluating future interest-rate decisions.

The trend is equally important for apartment owners and developers.

After accelerating construction through 2023 and 2024, many builders have sharply reduced new projects. If that slowdown continues while today’s excess supply is absorbed, landlords could regain greater pricing power beginning in 2027.

For now, however, vacancy rates remain elevated and the record pipeline of recently completed apartments continues to give renters more leverage than they have enjoyed in several years.

The bottom line is that rents are following their normal summer pattern by moving higher, but the largest apartment-building boom in decades has prevented another major surge in housing costs. How long that continues will depend on how quickly today’s supply is absorbed—and how much developers slow future construction.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump said Thursday that he expects Elon Musk to donate shares of SpaceX to a new government-backed savings program for American children known as Trump Accounts, a move that could become one of the program’s highest-profile corporate contributions.

Speaking during an interview with CNBC in the Oval Office, Trump said he believes Musk will join other business leaders who have already pledged support for the initiative.

Asked whether Musk would participate, Trump replied that he thinks he will, pointing to recent commitments from Micron Technology and Dell Technologies founder Michael Dell as examples of corporate backing for the program.

Trump Accounts are a new type of tax-advantaged investment account for Americans under the age of 18. Congress created the program last summer as part of a Republican spending package, and the U.S. Treasury Department is preparing to launch it in the coming days in partnership with Bank of New York Mellon and Robinhood.

The goal is to help children begin building long-term savings, with funding coming from the federal government and, in some cases, voluntary contributions from private companies.

A contribution from SpaceX would immediately become one of the program’s most closely watched investments because the aerospace company is among the world’s most valuable businesses and only recently began trading publicly under the ticker SPCX.

Nothing has been finalized.

According to Semafor, which first reported the discussions, the Trump administration has talked with SpaceX about making a contribution, but it remains unclear whether Musk has agreed or what form any donation would ultimately take. SpaceX shares slipped about 0.3% in overnight trading following that report.

The potential donation also reflects the improving relationship between Trump and Musk.

Musk spent roughly $300 million supporting Trump’s successful 2024 presidential campaign before serving as head of the administration’s cost-cutting Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE) as a temporary government employee.

The relationship later deteriorated after Musk publicly criticized a Trump-backed spending bill, prompting an equally public response from the president.

Since then, however, tensions have eased.

The two were seen together at a memorial service for conservative activist Charlie Kirk last fall, and Musk later accompanied Trump’s delegation during a trip to China in May. A SpaceX stock donation would represent another public sign that the two have rebuilt their political and professional relationship.

The story also carries significant business implications.

SpaceX holds billions of dollars in federal defense and space contracts, while the administration has recently defended Musk’s artificial intelligence company, xAI, in ongoing litigation. That overlap between government policy and Musk’s business interests has fueled renewed scrutiny from both supporters and critics.

For American families, the practical question is what assets Trump Accounts will eventually hold.

If major corporations such as SpaceX, Micron, and others contribute shares, millions of children could begin investing at a young age through ownership in some of the country’s fastest-growing companies. Supporters argue that could encourage long-term wealth creation, while critics contend it blurs the line between public policy and private corporate influence.

For SpaceX, the donation could also make business sense.

Placing shares into millions of long-term investment accounts would broaden ownership while reducing the number of shares actively traded in the market. Some retail investors have already noted that SPCX has experienced notable volatility since its public debut as investors continue debating the company’s valuation.

Musk has consistently rejected claims that government assistance built his businesses.

He recently argued that federal incentives received by SpaceX and Tesla represented less than 2% of the companies’ total value, disputing criticism that government support played a central role in their success.

For now, the proposed donation remains Trump’s expectation rather than a finalized agreement. As the Trump Accounts program launches in the coming days, investors, families, and Washington policymakers will be watching closely to see whether that expectation ultimately becomes a formal transfer of SpaceX shares.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Families planning to celebrate Independence Day this weekend will likely notice a familiar trend at the grocery store: the traditional backyard cookout is more expensive than ever.

According to the American Farm Bureau Federation’s 2026 Summer Cookout Cost Survey, released Thursday, the average cost of a classic Fourth of July meal for 10 people has climbed to a record $73.82, an increase of 4%, or $2.90, compared with last year. The survey, which has tracked holiday food prices since 2016, puts this year’s average meal at about $7.38 per person, making it the highest Fourth of July cookout cost since the organization began conducting the annual survey.  

The biggest reason for the increase is beef.

The survey found that two pounds of ground beef now cost an average of $14.06, up 73 cents, or 5.5%, from a year ago. It is the highest beef price recorded since the Farm Bureau began measuring the annual holiday basket.

Faith Parum, an economist with the American Farm Bureau Federation, said ranchers are still rebuilding the nation’s cattle herd following years of drought and rising production expenses. Smaller cattle supplies have kept beef prices elevated, making hamburgers—one of the centerpieces of many Fourth of July celebrations—the largest contributor to this year’s higher grocery bill.  

Other cookout favorites also became more expensive.

Chicken breasts increased 3.5% to $8.06 for two pounds, while three pounds of pork chops climbed 4.7% to $14.79. Fresh strawberries posted one of the largest jumps, rising 12.4% to $5.27 for two pints. The Farm Bureau attributed that increase in part to frost damage in Florida earlier this year, along with higher labor, fuel and transportation costs.

Pork and beans recorded the largest percentage increase among all items surveyed, rising 13.8% to $3.06. Not every grocery item moved higher, however. Ingredients used to make homemade potato salad fell 17.8% to $2.91, helped largely by lower egg prices after last year’s avian influenza-related spike eased. Potato chips also slipped slightly in price.  

Retailers are already seeing consumers adjust to the higher prices.

Stew Leonard, president and chief executive of the grocery chain Stew Leonard’s, said customers are increasingly choosing less expensive cuts of meat and swapping premium proteins for more affordable options as beef prices continue climbing. Families are also preparing more side dishes from scratch and simplifying beverage purchases to keep overall holiday spending under control.

Those changing shopping habits are also influencing what supermarkets are stocking and promoting heading into one of the busiest grocery weekends of the year.  

While shoppers are paying more at the checkout counter, the Farm Bureau noted that the increase looks somewhat different when adjusted for inflation.

Overall U.S. inflation measured 4.2% during the 12 months ending in May, meaning the 4% increase in the cookout basket generally tracked with broader consumer price increases. When calculated using inflation-adjusted dollars, the Farm Bureau estimated this year’s cookout costs roughly $22.03 in 1982-84 purchasing power—virtually unchanged from $22.06 a year ago and still below the inflation-adjusted peak reached in 2022.

In other words, consumers are spending more actual dollars, but the purchasing power required to buy the traditional meal has changed very little over the past year.  

Location also plays a significant role in what families pay.

The Western United States recorded the highest average cookout cost at approximately $80 for 10 people, more than $6 above the national average. Western shoppers paid the most for several key items, including ground beef, chicken, hamburger buns and cheese.

The Northeast remained the least expensive region, with an average cost of $71.35, followed closely by the Midwest at $71.45 and the South at $72.08.  

Another estimate suggests some families may spend considerably more depending on their menu.

The Wells Fargo Agri-Food Institute, using a broader basket that includes additional foods and beverages, estimated that a more complete backyard barbecue for 10 people could cost approximately $161, or about $16 per guest.  

The survey arrives as Americans continue balancing household budgets amid concerns about the broader economy. Questions surrounding consumer spending have grown following a weaker June jobs report and a shrinking labor force, while grocery inflation continues to remain elevated.

The Farm Bureau also pushed back against the common perception that higher grocery prices automatically translate into larger profits for farmers. According to the organization, after accounting for production expenses, farmers receive less than six cents of every food dollar, with the overwhelming majority covering processing, packaging, transportation and retail costs before food reaches consumers.  

For millions of Americans preparing to gather with family and friends this Fourth of July, the tradition remains unchanged. What has changed is the price of filling the grill, as beef costs continue driving holiday grocery bills to their highest level on record.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved.

The 2026 FIFA World Cup has shattered soccer’s all-time attendance record, with packed stadiums across the United States, Canada and Mexico drawing unprecedented crowds and delivering a major economic boost to host cities. A total of 4,644,549 fans passed through the turnstiles during the group stage that concluded late last month, filling 99.7% of available seats and averaging 64,508 spectators per match, according to FIFA. The total surpassed the previous group-stage attendance record of about 3.6 million, set when the United States hosted the tournament in 1994.

“This is a true reflection of our fans’ love for the beautiful game,” FIFA President Gianni Infantino said as the group stage wrapped. With the knockout rounds now underway and the July 19 final approaching, the crowds continue to grow. The tournament also set a single-day attendance record of 426,834 spectators on June 25, while fans from 210 countries and territories have attended matches so far.

For host cities, those record crowds are translating into significant business activity. Card spending across the tournament’s 16 host cities climbed 5.4% from a year earlier between June 10 and June 28, while spending by out-of-town visitors surged 17.4%, according to the Bank of America Institute. Hotels, restaurants, bars, retailers and rideshare companies have all benefited from the influx of visitors, while FIFA fan festivals in cities from Philadelphia to Los Angeles have attracted millions more who never entered a stadium.

The concession numbers tell their own story. During the group stage alone, fans purchased more than 2.8 million beers, 300,000 hot dogs and nearly one million bottles of water inside stadiums, according to FIFA. More than three million supporters also signed up for digital Fan IDs, giving organizers and sponsors direct access to one of the largest global sports audiences ever assembled.

Attending the tournament has not come cheaply. On FIFA’s official ticketing platform, seats for the 104-match tournament have ranged from about $60 to nearly $11,000, with prices fluctuating based on demand. For the championship match at MetLife Stadium outside New York, premium seats reached roughly $33,000, while resale tickets for marquee knockout matches were listed near $20,000 on StubHub. Fans following their teams from city to city have reported spending anywhere from about $2,500 for a single destination trip to as much as $150,000 for premium hospitality packages covering multiple matches.

The travel boom has been uneven across the hospitality industry. A report from FCM Consulting found hotel rates in 13 of the 16 host cities climbed at least 80% compared with last year. Rooms in Guadalajara that averaged about $90 last summer were going for $511, while Boston averaged roughly $611 a night and Houston about $205. Before kickoff, however, the American Hotel & Lodging Association reported that roughly 80% of host-city hotels were seeing bookings below expectations, with many operators citing visa delays and geopolitical uncertainty that discouraged some international travelers. Domestic visitors have made up much of the attendance.

The excitement on the field continues to keep stadiums full. The U.S. Men’s National Team faces Belgium in the Round of 16 on Monday in Seattle, though it will be without leading scorer Folarin Balogun, who is suspended after receiving a red card in the victory over Bosnia and Herzegovina. Mauricio Pochettino’s squad is seeking its first World Cup quarterfinal appearance since 2002, while defending powers led by stars including Kylian Mbappé remain among the favorites to win the tournament.

For businesses, every sold-out match brings another wave of customers. FIFA, which operates as a nonprofit and reinvests tournament revenue into developing the sport, estimates in a study prepared with the World Trade Organization that the World Cup will generate $80.1 billion in global economic activity, including $30.5 billion in the United States alone. Whether host cities ultimately realize lasting economic gains will be debated long after the final whistle, but for now the numbers are unmistakable: stadiums are packed, businesses are bustling, and the 2026 FIFA World Cup has already made attendance history.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Bitcoin sank below $59,000 this week, its weakest level since September 2024, capping a brutal stretch that has cut the price in half despite a Washington that has never been friendlier to digital assets. On Wednesday, Citigroup slashed its 12-month Bitcoin target to $82,000 from $112,000 and its Ethereum target to $2,240 from $3,175, blaming vanishing demand, a wall of fund outflows and stalled crypto legislation.

The drop is striking because it comes under a president who campaigned as crypto’s champion. President Donald Trump promised to make the United States the crypto capital of the world, installed regulators friendly to the industry, and backed efforts to write digital assets into federal law. Yet Bitcoin has fallen roughly 50% from its record high of about $126,000, reached in October 2025, and the coins that rode Trump’s endorsement into the mainstream are now leading the market lower.

The clearest culprit is money leaving the exchange-traded funds that were supposed to make crypto safer and more mainstream. U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs lost about $4.5 billion in June, according to industry fund-flow data, marking their worst month since launching in early 2024 and pushing total 2026 flows into negative territory for the first time. Those funds were major buyers on the way up. Now the same mechanism is working in reverse, amplifying each new wave of selling.

Citigroup analysts outlined the shift in their research note. The bank cut its assumption for net ETF inflows over the coming year to zero, down from an earlier forecast of $10 billion, warning that the pipeline of new institutional money has largely dried up. One reason, the bank said, is that the CLARITY Act—legislation designed to provide regulatory certainty for institutional crypto investors—remains stalled in the Senate. In a more pessimistic scenario involving continued fund outflows and a weakening economy, Citi sees Bitcoin falling to approximately $53,000.

Investor confidence also took a hit from an unexpected source.

Strategy, formerly known as MicroStrategy, which built its reputation on continuously accumulating Bitcoin, sold a portion of its holdings for the first time since 2022. Executive Chairman Michael Saylor previously indicated the company might sell assets to cover dividend obligations and demonstrate financial flexibility if necessary. Even so, the move unsettled investors who had viewed Strategy as Bitcoin’s most unwavering corporate supporter. The company remains the world’s largest corporate Bitcoin holder, owning approximately 843,700 coins.

The broader economic backdrop has done little to help.

The Federal Reserve, under Chair Kevin Warsh, has maintained benchmark interest rates in the 3.50% to 3.75% range, keeping financial conditions relatively tight and making speculative assets such as cryptocurrencies less attractive. At the same time, investor enthusiasm has shifted toward artificial intelligence, with much of Wall Street’s risk capital flowing into semiconductor companies, AI infrastructure and data centers instead of digital assets.

The weakness extends beyond Bitcoin.

Ethereum has fallen to around $1,600, its lowest level since April 2025, while many smaller cryptocurrencies have suffered even steeper losses. The Crypto Fear & Greed Index, a closely watched measure of investor sentiment, has dropped to 11, deep inside “extreme fear” territory. Blockchain data also indicates that more than half of all Bitcoin currently in circulation is being held at a loss, a condition that has historically appeared only during periods of severe market stress.

For everyday investors, the lesson remains familiar.

Political support and favorable headlines do not override the basic forces that ultimately drive financial markets: interest rates, investor demand and capital flows. A supportive White House may have provided the cryptocurrency industry with greater legitimacy and regulatory access, but it cannot create buyers or eliminate the effects of higher borrowing costs.

Some analysts believe Bitcoin is approaching a market bottom and argue that much of the recent selling has already been priced in. Others warn that if the $58,000 support level fails, the next leg lower could come quickly.

What appears increasingly clear is that cryptocurrency’s direction over the remainder of 2026 will depend less on politics than on market fundamentals—whether ETF inflows return, whether the Federal Reserve begins easing monetary policy, and whether investors regain confidence in digital assets.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Currys Chief Executive Alex Baldock warned Thursday that supplies of fans and portable air conditioners are becoming “tight” ahead of another forecast heatwave in the United Kingdom, after a surge in demand during recent record temperatures emptied shelves across much of the country.

Speaking alongside the electronics retailer’s annual financial results, Baldock said cooling products had been “flying off the shelves” and that the company was working aggressively to replenish inventory before another period of unusually hot weather expected next week.

The demand surge has been extraordinary.

Currys reported that sales of electric fans increased nearly 3,000% during the most recent heatwave weekend compared with the previous week, while portable air-conditioner sales jumped approximately 330%. The company said its nationwide buying power has allowed it to secure more inventory than many competitors, although supplies remain under pressure as temperatures continue climbing.

Currys operates approximately 691 stores across the United Kingdom and the Nordic region, making it one of Europe’s largest consumer electronics retailers.

The comments came as the company reported stronger financial results for the year ended May 2.

Annual revenue increased 6% to £9.2 billion, while pre-tax profit climbed 23% to £153 million. Comparable sales at established UK stores rose 3%, outperforming many competitors in a retail environment that has remained challenging for discretionary spending.

Company executives credited growth across several categories, including coffee machines, artificial intelligence-enabled laptops, repair services, installation services and business sales.

The annual results also mark Baldock’s final earnings report before leaving Currys later this year to become Chief Executive of Boots, one of Britain’s largest pharmacy and health-and-beauty retailers.

The cooling-equipment shortage reflects a broader shift in consumer behavior across Britain.

For decades, air conditioning remained relatively uncommon in British homes because summers were generally mild. However, repeated periods of record-breaking heat have transformed cooling equipment from an occasional purchase into a mainstream household necessity.

Retailers throughout the UK have reported customers lining up to purchase portable air conditioners and fans whenever temperatures spike, creating supply shortages that manufacturers often struggle to replenish quickly.

Industry analysts say climate change is gradually reshaping seasonal retail demand, turning cooling products into an increasingly important sales category that can produce dramatic revenue swings within days.

Baldock also highlighted broader cost pressures facing retailers.

He warned that inflation remains a concern, pointing to continued global demand for semiconductor chips driven partly by artificial intelligence data-center construction. Although Currys said it has secured supplies of computers and mobile phones through at least September, the company expects supply-chain pressures to remain an ongoing challenge.

The chief executive also renewed calls for government reforms involving business rates and tax treatment for low-value imported goods sold through overseas online marketplaces, arguing that domestic retailers continue facing an uneven competitive environment.

For consumers, Baldock offered simple advice: shoppers needing fans or portable air conditioners should not wait until temperatures peak.

With inventories already tightening before the next forecast heatwave arrives, delaying purchases could leave consumers facing fewer choices—or empty shelves—as demand accelerates once temperatures begin rising again.

JBizNews Desk | London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Nearly a week after two powerful earthquakes devastated Venezuela’s northern coast, rescue crews are still struggling to reach victims—not because of a lack of equipment, but because many of the cranes, excavators, and heavy machines needed to clear debris have run out of fuel.

According to Venezuela’s National Assembly, the death toll climbed to 3,000, with more than 11,200 people injured and tens of thousands still unaccounted for. Rescue operations remain concentrated in La Guaira, one of the hardest-hit regions.

The fuel shortages have added a painful irony to the disaster.

Despite possessing the world’s largest reported oil reserves, Venezuela has been unable to keep enough gasoline flowing to support emergency recovery efforts. Government machinery has reportedly sat idle while families and volunteers searched collapsed buildings by hand.

The two earthquakes struck within seconds of one another on June 24, measuring 7.2 and 7.5 in magnitude, with epicenters in Yaracuy state west of Caracas. The second and stronger quake released roughly three times the energy of the first, bringing down aging apartment buildings and damaging communities across the northern coast.

Satellite imagery indicates nearly 60,000 buildings were damaged or destroyed.

The United Nations estimates the disaster caused between $4.7 billion and $8.7 billion in physical damage—equal to roughly 4% to 8% of Venezuela’s economy. UN agencies also estimate that as many as 6.8 million people could require shelter, medical care, food, or clean water.

Ironically, the country’s oil infrastructure largely survived.

State-owned energy company PDVSA said major refineries, including El Palito, Amuay, and Cardón, escaped significant earthquake damage, while crude production in the Orinoco Belt continued operating.

Instead, officials say the fuel shortages stem from years of underinvestment that left Venezuela unable to refine enough gasoline for domestic demand, forcing the country to depend on imports and fuel rationing. Once the earthquakes struck, that fragile supply chain quickly broke down.

Public frustration has continued to grow.

Many survivors accused the government of responding too slowly, forcing neighbors to rescue victims before heavy equipment arrived. PDVSA and private distributor Domegas said they are also inspecting natural gas systems serving roughly 600,000 households around Caracas to identify leaks caused by the earthquakes.

The emergency response is unfolding under Venezuela’s new political leadership.

Following the capture of former President Nicolás Maduro in January, the United States has backed the country’s new government while overseeing much of Venezuela’s oil revenue.

About 2,000 U.S. service members are assisting with search-and-rescue operations, according to U.S. Southern Command commander Gen. Francis Donovan. President Donald Trump has also pledged American assistance, describing the earthquakes as catastrophic.

International rescue teams from Ecuador, Spain, the Netherlands, Jordan, and Argentina joined local crews during the early days of the response. While many foreign teams have begun winding down operations, rescuers continue searching for survivors.

A three-year-old boy was pulled alive from the rubble in La Guaira on June 30, while crews continue efforts to rescue a 44-year-old man trapped beneath the parking garage of a shopping mall, supplying him with food, water, and medicine.

For businesses, the disaster strikes at a critical moment.

Since Maduro’s removal, the United States has eased sanctions on PDVSA, Venezuela has adopted a new oil law, and crude production has begun recovering. The country produced approximately 1.16 million barrels of oil per day in May, with PDVSA targeting 1.37 million barrels per day by the end of 2026.

Now, billions of dollars needed to rebuild homes, highways, ports, power systems, and public infrastructure may compete directly with efforts to expand oil production and revive the broader economy.

The World Food Programme has requested $50 million to feed up to 500,000 people during the next three months, while the World Health Organization warns that already strained hospitals face growing risks of disease outbreaks.

For now, one of the world’s largest oil-producing nations continues confronting a basic obstacle to recovery: getting enough fuel to power the machines needed to save lives. Until fuel supplies improve, much of the work in La Guaira will continue one shovel at a time.

JBizNews Desk | Caracas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Target will replace the Ulta Beauty shops inside more than 600 of its stores with a new in-house concept called Target Beauty Studio, launching this fall, the retailer’s Chief Merchandising Officer Cara Sylvester said this week. The move ends a five-year shop-in-shop partnership that expires in August 2026 and marks one of Target’s biggest beauty strategy changes in years.

The Ulta Beauty at Target partnership launched in 2021, giving shoppers access to a curated selection of prestige beauty brands inside Target stores while allowing Ulta to expand its reach without opening standalone locations. Last August, both companies announced they had mutually agreed not to renew the partnership when it expires this summer.

Customers will still be able to shop Ulta Beauty locations inside Target stores through August. Those who have linked their Ulta Beauty Rewards and Target Circle accounts will continue earning rewards on eligible purchases until the partnership officially ends.

Rather than replacing Ulta with another retailer, Target is investing heavily in its own beauty business.

The new Target Beauty Studio will feature more than 80 prestige, global and emerging beauty brands, including approximately 60 brands that have never before been available at Target. The retailer also plans to introduce exclusive product launches available only through Target while expanding beauty-focused Target Circle offers and testing new staffing models designed to improve customer service.

Executives say the goal is to transform beauty into a destination category inside Target stores, creating a shopping experience that encourages discovery while making prestige beauty products more accessible to mainstream consumers.

The move reflects beauty’s growing importance to Target’s business.

While discretionary spending has slowed across many retail categories, beauty products have remained comparatively resilient, with shoppers continuing to spend on skincare, cosmetics, fragrances and personal care even as they reduce purchases elsewhere. Industry analysts have repeatedly identified beauty as one of retail’s strongest-performing categories over the past several years.

The strategy also changes the competitive landscape.

For Ulta Beauty, the partnership helped expand brand awareness and reach millions of Target shoppers. For Target, ending the agreement means transforming a former partner into a direct competitor.

Ashley Helgans, retail analyst at Jefferies, said the transition increases the likelihood that Target becomes a stronger competitor to Ulta as it expands its own prestige assortment and introduces exclusive products.

The announcement also comes during a period of leadership change at Target.

The company is now led by Chief Executive Officer Michael Fiddelke, making the beauty initiative one of the first highly visible merchandising strategies under the retailer’s new leadership. Analysts have suggested improving the in-store shopping experience will be critical as Target works to reverse softer customer traffic while competing more aggressively with both specialty beauty retailers and online marketplaces.

Retail analyst David Bellinger of Mizuho Securities previously wrote that Target’s execution challenges—including staffing levels and in-store operations—likely contributed to the companies’ decision not to extend the Ulta partnership. The success of Target Beauty Studio will therefore serve as an early test of whether Target can independently deliver a premium beauty experience.

Competition within prestige beauty has become increasingly intense.

Alongside Ulta’s standalone stores, Sephora continues expanding through its partnership with Kohl’s, while department stores, specialty retailers and online beauty companies continue investing heavily in premium cosmetics and skincare. Winning customer loyalty increasingly depends on exclusive products, knowledgeable staff and personalized shopping experiences rather than simply carrying well-known brands.

For shoppers, the transition means one final opportunity to visit the existing Ulta Beauty shops before they disappear in August. Beginning this fall, customers will instead find Target Beauty Studio locations offering a broader selection of brands, dozens of new products and a shopping experience designed entirely by Target.

Whether that strategy keeps existing customers—or persuades new ones to choose Target over Ulta, Sephora and other beauty retailers—will become one of the retail industry’s most closely watched merchandising experiments over the coming year.

JBizNews Desk | Minneapolis, Minnesota

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The 2026 FIFA World Cup, billed as the biggest gambling event in history, has become a record-breaking stretch for the companies that let Americans trade on the outcome. Kalshi cleared more than $31 billion in notional trading volume in June, up more than 70% from $17.9 billion in May, according to user-collected data on Dune Analytics, while rival Polymarket posted a record $10.8 billion on its international platform. The figures, tallied as the tournament reached its knockout rounds over the July 4 weekend, are the clearest sign yet that event-contract exchanges have moved from a crypto curiosity to mainstream finance.

Kalshi has kept daily trading volume above $1 billion nearly every day since the tournament kicked off on June 11, the first World Cup expanded to 48 teams. Polymarket’s international platform handled more than $10.8 billion in June, while its U.S.-regulated platform processed more than $3.5 billion, up from $1.77 billion a month earlier, as traders poured into contracts tied to individual matches, tournament winners and player propositions.

The surge has also produced a new competitor. Rothera, an event-contract exchange formed as a joint venture between trading firm Susquehanna International Group and Robinhood, launched in June and immediately generated more than $2 billion in trading volume after Robinhood began routing certain World Cup contracts through the platform. According to Bank of America, Rothera already accounts for about 7% of the U.S. prediction-market industry.

Retail investors have concentrated heavily on the U.S. national team. Traders have placed more than $64 million on Kalshi and $122 million on Polymarket wagering that the United States will win the tournament, despite both exchanges assigning only low single-digit probabilities—approximately 4.3% on Kalshi and 3% on Polymarket. Team USA faces Belgium in the Round of 16 on Monday night, a match expected to generate another surge in trading activity.

The largest individual market remains the tournament champion. Kalshi’s World Cup Winner contract has attracted more than $832 million in trading volume, with roughly 35% of money backing France, the tournament favorite. Both exchanges have aggressively promoted the event to attract new customers. Polymarket offered a prize worth up to $2 million for anyone submitting a perfect knockout-stage bracket, while Kalshi prominently featured World Cup trading in the title of its mobile application.

Trading data also suggests users are holding positions rather than simply placing short-term wagers. Kalshi’s open interest—the value of active contracts awaiting settlement—has climbed above $1 billion for the first time. Polymarket’s open interest sits just below $400 million, elevated but generally consistent with recent months. Bank of America estimates Kalshi has averaged roughly $125 million in trading volume per World Cup match, with parlays accounting for about one-third of that activity, while controlling nearly 80% of the U.S. sports prediction-market sector.

The industry’s rapid growth is unfolding alongside an important legal battle.

More than a dozen states have challenged Kalshi and Polymarket, arguing the companies are operating unlicensed sports betting businesses. The exchanges, supported by the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC), maintain that event contracts fall under federal commodities law rather than state gaming regulations. CFTC Chairman Michael Selig has criticized state enforcement actions against federally regulated exchanges and warned the agency is prepared to defend its jurisdiction in court. Legal experts believe the dispute could ultimately reach the U.S. Supreme Court.

The industry’s handling of unprecedented sports-related trading volume is also attracting attention beyond regulators.

Asaf Meir, chief executive of market-integrity firm Solidus Labs, which works with Kalshi, described the World Cup as a proving ground at a time when regulators, institutional investors and Wall Street firms are evaluating whether prediction markets can expand well beyond sporting events into elections, economic data and other real-world outcomes.

The tournament concludes on July 19 at MetLife Stadium in New Jersey.

By then, the platforms will not only have crowned a World Cup champion—they will also have established a public track record that could influence how far prediction markets are allowed to expand into mainstream finance.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has closed its four-year investigation into reports of unexpected braking in Tesla vehicles, concluding there was no demonstrated pattern of crashes or significant safety risk that would justify a recall. The decision ends one of the agency’s longest-running reviews of Tesla’s driver-assistance technology and removes another regulatory overhang for the electric-vehicle maker as it continues expanding its software-driven autonomous driving capabilities.

The investigation, formally known as Preliminary Evaluation PE22002, covered approximately 695,000 Tesla Model 3 and Model Y vehicles from the 2021 and 2022 model years. It was launched in February 2022 after hundreds of owners reported sudden, unexplained braking while using Autopilot, Full Self-Driving, or Traffic-Aware Cruise Control, a phenomenon that became widely known as “phantom braking.”

Drivers reported vehicles unexpectedly slowing by 10 to 20 miles per hour over one to three seconds, often while traveling at highway speeds and with no visible obstacle ahead. Many owners said the sudden deceleration startled surrounding motorists and created the potential for rear-end collisions.

Consumer complaints rose rapidly during the investigation. NHTSA had received 99 reports by the end of 2021, a figure that climbed to 314 complaints by the time regulators formally opened the probe in early 2022.

After reviewing years of field data, software updates and customer reports, NHTSA concluded that the braking events presented only a low demonstrated safety risk. The agency said it found no crashes, injuries or fatalities directly linked to the reported incidents throughout the investigation.

One of the agency’s most significant findings was the dramatic decline in complaints following Tesla’s software updates.

According to NHTSA, reported phantom-braking incidents fell from their 2022 peak to just 45 complaints during 2024, 19 complaints in 2025, and only three reports during the first half of 2026. Regulators said the trend closely followed a series of over-the-air software updates Tesla released beginning in 2022 to improve how its driver-assistance systems interpret surrounding traffic conditions.

Unlike traditional automakers that often require dealership visits for repairs, Tesla routinely distributes software improvements remotely to vehicles already on the road. Regulators noted that approach appeared to significantly reduce the frequency of reported braking events without requiring a physical recall.

NHTSA also examined the technology behind the issue.

Investigators found the complaints coincided with Tesla’s 2021 transition from radar-and-camera sensor fusion to a camera-only “Tesla Vision” system. By eliminating forward radar and relying entirely on cameras and artificial intelligence, Tesla adopted an approach that differs from many competing autonomous-driving developers.

According to the agency, the vision-only system occasionally misinterpreted certain driving situations, resulting in unnecessary braking events. Although NHTSA stopped short of declaring the design defective, its report represents one of the clearest acknowledgments by a federal regulator that Tesla’s transition away from radar played a role in the complaint pattern.

The broader debate over autonomous driving technology continues throughout the automotive industry.

While Tesla argues that cameras combined with advanced artificial intelligence ultimately provide safer and more scalable autonomous driving than radar-based systems, several competitors continue relying on combinations of cameras, radar and lidar sensors to create redundant safety layers.

The closure of the phantom-braking investigation does not end Tesla’s regulatory scrutiny.

NHTSA emphasized that closing a preliminary evaluation does not mean a safety defect never existed and retains the authority to reopen the investigation if future evidence warrants additional action. Tesla also continues facing legal challenges outside the United States, including a 2025 class-action lawsuit in Australia involving similar phantom-braking allegations.

The decision follows several other recent regulatory developments involving Tesla. NHTSA recently closed its investigation into power-steering failures affecting approximately 376,000 Model 3 and Model Y vehicles after Tesla addressed the issue through a software update. Regulators have also concluded a separate review involving roughly 2.5 million vehicles equipped with Tesla’s remote vehicle movement feature.

Other investigations remain ongoing, including NHTSA’s special crash investigation into a Tesla Model 3 that struck a home in Katy, Texas, while operating with advanced driver-assistance technology.

For Tesla, the closure of the phantom-braking investigation removes another potential legal and financial risk as the company continues expanding autonomous driving features across its vehicle lineup. Coming on the same day Tesla reported stronger-than-expected quarterly deliveries, the regulatory decision provides another measure of reassurance for investors as the company pushes further toward a software-centered future.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth built a plan last month to pull more American troops out of Europe, then dropped it before announcing it. The Pentagon’s chief spokesman, Sean Parnell, said Thursday that Hegseth made sure his message lined up with President Donald Trump‘s goals and did not want to crowd the president’s room to decide.

Hegseth had been planning to fly to Brussels in June to tell NATO’s top military chiefs that the United States was readying fresh troop cuts on the continent, according to people familiar with the matter cited by the Wall Street Journal. The cuts would have gone beyond two moves already made this year: the canceled deployment of an armored brigade to Poland and the earlier withdrawal of an infantry brigade from Romania.

That plan was scrapped after Hegseth shared it with Secretary of State Marco Rubio, who also serves as Trump’s national security adviser, and other senior officials. Instead of the bombshell, Hegseth used his June 18 speech in Brussels to announce a review of American forces in Europe that could take up to six months.

The episode shows the Trump administration has not settled on how fast or how deep it wants to cut in Europe. There are roughly 80,000 U.S. troops on the continent now.

The back-and-forth is familiar. In May, the Pentagon said it would withdraw about 5,000 troops from Germany after German Chancellor Friedrich Merz criticized Trump’s handling of the war with Iran. Weeks later, Hegseth canceled an armored brigade’s rotation to Poland — a move that caught even Trump off guard. Trump then reversed it on Truth Social, saying he would send 5,000 troops to Poland instead, citing his ties to Polish President Karol Nawrocki.

Congress has tried to slow the cuts. Under the 2026 defense budget law, the Pentagon cannot keep troop levels in Europe below 76,000 for more than 45 days without first notifying and certifying its plans to lawmakers. Republican and Democratic members of the armed services committees have complained they were not consulted on the earlier moves.

The direction, though, is set. A Pentagon defense strategy issued in January said the United States would trim its presence in Europe to focus more on the western Pacific and the Western Hemisphere, with the goal of handing European nations the main job of defending their own continent. On Thursday, Trump wrote on social media that the U.S. spends more on NATO than any other country and gets no benefit from it.

Troop levels and allied spending will be front and center next week when Trump meets NATO leaders in Ankara, Turkey. Alliance officials are hoping the summit shows unity and support for Ukraine, but they fear friction with Trump will steal the spotlight. Officials are also weighing whether to scrap a planned 2027 summit in Albania, according to Reuters.

For business, the story is about who pays and who builds. NATO members agreed in June 2025 to lift defense spending toward 5% of GDP by 2035, a huge jump from the old 2% target. Consulting firm McKinsey estimates European core defense spending could reach about €800 billion—roughly $912 billion—by 2030.

That money is lifting Europe’s arms makers. Shares of Germany’s Rheinmetall, Britain’s BAE Systems, Italy’s Leonardo, France’s Thales, and Sweden’s Saab have climbed sharply since Russia invaded Ukraine in 2022, driven by growing order books. The Stoxx Europe Aerospace & Defence index cooled somewhat this year as investors questioned whether prices had run too far ahead of actual deliveries.

There is a catch for American firms. Much of Europe’s new spending is being steered toward European factories. Under the European Union’s SAFE loan program, the bloc wants 55% of weapons purchases coming from European or Ukrainian makers by 2030. That threatens to shut out U.S. contractors that have long dominated European sales, even as Washington pushes allies to spend more.

At home, Hegseth has said the United States will invest $1.5 trillion in defense in its 2027 budget. But the uncertainty over troop levels—plans floated, then pulled—has unsettled allies and some leading Republicans, who worry the stop-and-start approach will damage the alliance and encourage Russia.

For now, the pace of any pullback is on hold pending the six-month review. The Ankara summit will offer the next signal of where Trump wants it to go.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) is preparing to require most aircraft flying in U.S. civilian airspace to carry technology that allows pilots to see nearby aircraft in real time, according to reporting this week. The proposed rule follows the January 2025 midair collision near Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport that killed 67 people and is intended to reduce the risk of similar accidents by giving flight crews an additional layer of situational awareness.

FAA Administrator Bryan Bedford has directed agency officials to draft the proposal, according to people familiar with the effort, although the agency emphasized that no final decision has yet been made. If adopted, the mandate would represent one of the most significant cockpit safety upgrades for commercial and general aviation since the FAA required aircraft to broadcast their locations using ADS-B Out technology.

At the center of the proposal is ADS-B In (Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast In), a cockpit system that allows pilots to receive the positions of nearby aircraft on an electronic display while also providing audible traffic alerts. Unlike ADS-B Out, which transmits an aircraft’s location to air traffic controllers and other aircraft, ADS-B In gives pilots a direct view of surrounding traffic, allowing them to identify potential conflicts even before receiving instructions from controllers.

The National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB) has recommended broader adoption of ADS-B In for nearly two decades. Following its investigation into January’s fatal collision over the Potomac River, the board renewed that recommendation, concluding the technology could provide pilots with valuable additional warning during rapidly developing situations.

The January 29 accident involved a regional jet operating as an American Airlines flight and a U.S. Army Black Hawk helicopter. According to the NTSB’s preliminary findings, the helicopter was neither broadcasting its position through ADS-B Out nor equipped with ADS-B In. While the regional jet was transmitting its location, it lacked the ability to receive traffic information from surrounding aircraft. Investigators estimated that if the airliner had been equipped with ADS-B In, its pilots may have had approximately one minute to identify the approaching helicopter rather than only 19 seconds before impact.

Congress has debated legislation addressing the issue since the crash but has yet to produce a unified solution. The House approved the ALERT Act, while the Senate advanced separate legislation known as the ROTOR Act. The two proposals differ on implementation timelines and which aircraft would ultimately be required to install the technology.

Rather than waiting for Congress to reconcile the legislation, the FAA appears prepared to move forward through its own regulatory authority. Officials have reportedly discussed shortening or bypassing portions of the traditional federal rulemaking process because of the safety implications.

The proposal carries significant financial implications for the aviation industry.

For major commercial airlines, upgrading existing avionics to support ADS-B In is expected to be relatively modest because most fleets already carry modern ADS-B Out equipment. The greater challenge falls on the nation’s general aviation community.

Industry estimates suggest retrofitting older privately owned aircraft could cost anywhere from approximately $10,000 to $50,000 per aircraft, depending on the equipment installed. Some aircraft owners may determine those costs exceed the value of older airplanes, potentially leading to early retirements rather than upgrades.

The United States has more than 30,000 aircraft potentially requiring retrofits but only a few hundred certified repair stations capable of performing the installations. Aviation groups have also warned of a shortage of qualified aircraft mechanics, noting the median age of FAA-certified mechanics now stands at approximately 54 years, raising concerns about whether enough skilled technicians will be available if thousands of aircraft require upgrades simultaneously.

While aircraft owners could face higher costs, avionics manufacturers may benefit substantially.

Companies including Garmin and Honeywell are expected to see increased demand for cockpit display systems, surveillance equipment and installation services if the mandate is approved. Airlines may also accelerate fleet modernization plans, while business aircraft operators could increasingly favor newer aircraft already equipped with advanced avionics.

The proposal reflects a broader international trend toward enhanced aircraft surveillance and collision-avoidance technologies. Aviation regulators worldwide continue evaluating additional safety measures as global air traffic returns to record levels following the pandemic.

The effort has also highlighted differences between aviation regulators. Administrator Bedford previously suggested the FAA would avoid imposing a mandate without congressional approval, citing compatibility issues involving hundreds of commercial aircraft and proposing that less expensive tablet-based traffic displays might provide an interim solution. That position drew criticism from NTSB Chair Jennifer Homendy, who has urged the FAA to require permanent cockpit-based traffic awareness systems.

The FAA is expected to publish a formal proposal in the coming months. If finalized, the first compliance deadlines could take effect as early as 2027 for commercial airlines, followed by phased implementation for general aviation.

For airlines, aircraft manufacturers, avionics suppliers and private aircraft owners, the proposal signals that the next major investment in aviation safety may soon become a regulatory requirement rather than an operational choice.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics reported Thursday that the U.S. labor force participation rate fell to 61.5% in June, its lowest level since March 2021 and, setting aside the pandemic period, the lowest in 50 years, matching a level last seen in June 1976. The decline helped push the unemployment rate down to 4.2%, but largely because hundreds of thousands of Americans stopped looking for work rather than finding new jobs.

At first glance, the June employment report appeared mixed. Employers added just 57,000 jobs, well below economists’ expectations of 115,000, and down from a downwardly revised 129,000 jobs in May. At the same time, the unemployment rate declined to its lowest level in a year. A closer look at the household survey, however, tells a very different story.

According to the report, the U.S. labor force shrank by approximately 720,000 people during June, while the number of Americans classified as not participating in the labor force increased by more than 830,000. Household employment—a separate measure from the payroll survey—fell by 507,000, while the employment-to-population ratio declined to 59%, its lowest level since October 2021.

Many economists said those numbers provide a more accurate picture of current labor-market conditions than the headline unemployment rate.

Dan North, Senior Economist for North America at Allianz, said the labor force participation rate—not the unemployment rate—is the figure demanding the most attention, describing June’s decline as unusually large both on a monthly and yearly basis.

Mike Reid, Head of U.S. Economics at RBC, characterized the report as a “massive exodus” from the labor force, suggesting the decline reflects a combination of retirements, discouraged workers abandoning their job searches and broader demographic changes.

Heather Long, Chief Economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, noted it was especially striking to see roughly 720,000 Americans stop looking for work during the same month that the leisure and hospitality sector also lost jobs.

What makes June’s report particularly noteworthy is who exited the workforce.

Rather than older Americans nearing retirement, much of the decline occurred among prime-age workers, those between 25 and 54 years old—a demographic that historically maintains the strongest attachment to the labor market. Some economists cautioned that monthly household survey data can be volatile and subject to future revisions. Nevertheless, the latest figures continue a longer-term trend that has seen labor force participation remain well below its peak of more than 67% reached around the year 2000.

For businesses, the implications are significant.

A shrinking labor force reduces the number of available workers, making it more difficult for employers to fill open positions while placing upward pressure on wages and hiring costs. At the same time, fewer people earning paychecks ultimately means less consumer spending—the primary engine of the U.S. economy.

Separate data released by Challenger, Gray & Christmas showed U.S. employers announced the highest number of layoffs for the month of May since 2020, with companies citing artificial intelligence as a contributing factor in roughly 40% of announced job cuts. The figures suggest automation continues reshaping hiring decisions across multiple industries.

For the Federal Reserve, June’s employment report adds another layer of complexity to an already difficult economic outlook.

Slower hiring and declining labor force participation argue against further interest-rate increases, with some economists saying the data strengthens the case for the Fed to hold rates steady. Seema Shah, Chief Global Strategist at Principal Asset Management, said the report challenges recent expectations that the labor market had regained momentum while easing pressure on policymakers to tighten monetary policy further.

At the same time, inflation remains above the Federal Reserve’s long-term 2% target, leaving policymakers balancing signs of a cooling labor market against continued concerns over elevated prices. Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh, who described labor conditions as “steady” earlier this week, now faces another closely watched employment report that complicates the central bank’s policy decisions.

The next monthly employment report is scheduled for August 7, when investors, businesses and policymakers will be watching closely to determine whether June’s sharp decline in labor force participation proves to be a temporary anomaly—or a sign that America’s workforce is entering a more prolonged slowdown.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A violent line of thunderstorms tore across New Jersey Friday evening and left more than 230,000 homes and businesses without electricity, according to restoration updates from Jersey Central Power & Light (JCP&L), the FirstEnergy subsidiary serving much of northern and central New Jersey. By Saturday afternoon, the utility said crews had restored power to nearly 80,000 customers, leaving about 150,000 still without service—roughly 95,000 in northern New Jersey and 55,000 in the central part of the state.

Public Service Electric & Gas (PSE&G), New Jersey’s largest electric utility, also reported widespread storm damage. As of Saturday morning, the company said it had restored power to 138,000 customers since extreme heat began on July 1, with powerful winds toppling trees, power lines, and approximately 165 utility poles throughout its service territory.

“We know being without power is challenging, particularly in hot weather,” said Paul Toscarelli, PSE&G’s Vice President of Electric Operations, adding that additional line crews were working throughout the Independence Day holiday weekend to restore service as quickly as possible.

The storm was driven by intense straight-line winds rather than a tropical system or widespread tornado outbreak. Dan Zarrow, chief meteorologist for New Jersey 101.5, said the combination of extreme heat and humidity fueled wind gusts exceeding 70 miles per hour in some locations.

JCP&L spokesman Chris Hoenig said the storm swept across virtually the utility’s entire service territory from north to south, leaving few communities untouched. Morris County and Monmouth County sustained the greatest damage, accounting for more than 90,000 outages at the height of the storm.

The timing could hardly have been worse. Communities across New Jersey were preparing for one of the busiest holiday weekends of the year when widespread outages forced the cancellation of Independence Day celebrations, including Summit’s fireworks at Soldiers Memorial Field. Restaurants, grocery stores, retailers, and other small businesses lost valuable holiday sales while many also faced spoiled inventory after prolonged power failures. JCP&L established free water and ice distribution sites for customers left without electricity during the dangerous heat.

Behind the storm damage sits a larger business story involving the region’s electrical grid.

PJM Interconnection, which manages the electric grid serving New Jersey and 12 other states along with the District of Columbia, reported electricity demand climbing to roughly 163 gigawatts on Thursday as the Northeast heat wave pushed heat index values above 110 degrees across portions of the Mid-Atlantic. That demand came within striking distance of PJM’s all-time record of 165,563 megawatts, established during the summer of 2006.

To help maintain reliability, the U.S. Department of Energy issued emergency orders under the Federal Power Act. Energy Secretary Chris Wright authorized PJM to temporarily operate certain power plants beyond normal environmental restrictions and, if necessary, require large industrial customers—including major data centers—to switch to backup generators during emergency conditions. Facilities drawing at least 50 megawatts of electricity can be directed to move onto backup generation within 15 minutes if the grid becomes critically stressed.

It marked the third time during 2026 that federal emergency authority has been used to support PJM’s electrical system.

The strain also drove electricity prices sharply higher. Wholesale electricity prices in portions of PJM exceeded $2,000 per megawatt-hour on Thursday, while the region’s Western Hub benchmark settled near $1,223, almost three times the level seen during comparable summer demand periods a year earlier. Businesses on demand-based utility rates and consumers with variable-rate electricity plans face the greatest exposure to those price spikes.

PJM officials say the long-term driver behind rising electricity demand is no longer a mystery.

The grid operator projects that approximately 30 of the next 32 gigawatts of expected electricity demand growth through 2030 will come from expanding data centers, which require enormous amounts of power to support artificial intelligence, cloud computing, and digital infrastructure. PJM’s latest capacity auction produced a record clearing price of $333.44 per megawatt-day, significantly increasing the future cost of guaranteeing sufficient generating capacity across the region.

Those higher costs ultimately flow through to utility customers, helping explain why New Jersey lawmakers recently advanced legislation requiring large data centers to bear a greater share of future electric infrastructure costs.

The immediate concern, however, remains restoration efforts.

PSE&G warned that additional thunderstorms could move through New Jersey on Sunday, creating the possibility of new outages while crews continue repairing damage from Friday night’s storms. By early Sunday, FirstEnergy’s outage maps showed the number of customers without electricity gradually falling toward 90,000, although the company cautioned that complete restoration would require several more days because of the widespread damage.

For New Jersey residents and business owners, utility officials continue urging customers to avoid downed power lines, minimize refrigerator openings to preserve food, monitor official outage maps, and prepare for continued restoration work as crews race to rebuild the electric system during one of the hottest stretches of the summer.

JBizNews Desk | New Jersey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The biggest fireworks show the country has ever attempted lit up the sky over the National Mall in the early hours of Sunday, July 5, after storms forced organizers to evacuate the crowd and push President Trump’s speech past 11 p.m. Saturday. Freedom 250, the White House-backed group organizing America’s 250th birthday celebrations, said the display featured roughly 850,000 pyrotechnic effects launched from 10 sites across the National Mall and West Potomac Park, along with eight barges on the Potomac River.

The company behind the display was Pyrotecnico, a fifth-generation, family-owned fireworks company based in New Castle, Pennsylvania. Company President Rocco Vitale told CBS News that his 75-person crew spent months planning the event, using GPS-synchronized firing systems to coordinate what he described as the largest production his company has ever attempted.

While organizers promoted the display as the biggest in history, Guinness World Records had not officially verified a new world record as of Sunday. Guinness measures the number of fireworks successfully detonated, while Freedom 250’s announced figure referred to total pyrotechnic effects, making the two measurements different. The current Guinness record remains 810,904 fireworks, set in Bocaue, Philippines, during a 2016 New Year’s celebration.

Severe thunderstorms nearly derailed the celebration. Heavy rain and lightning moved through Washington Saturday evening, prompting the U.S. Secret Service to temporarily evacuate thousands of spectators from the National Mall into nearby museums and federal buildings before allowing them to return later in the evening.

President Donald Trump arrived after the weather delay and delivered his Independence Day remarks shortly after 11 p.m. He thanked members of the U.S. military, celebrated America’s founding ideals, and urged support for his SAVE America Act before the fireworks display began.

Earlier in the day, organizers canceled the scheduled Independence Day parade because of dangerous heat, with temperatures reaching approximately 102 degrees. Federal officials said 86 people received medical treatment during the event, while 34 were transported to local hospitals, including several suffering from heat-related illnesses.

Beyond the spectacle, the event highlighted growing economic pressures facing the fireworks industry. Nearly all consumer fireworks sold in the United States are imported from China, and tariffs have significantly increased costs for distributors and municipalities.

Pyrotecnico and other fireworks companies have acknowledged raising prices to offset higher import costs. Across the country, numerous cities and towns reduced, postponed, or canceled Independence Day fireworks because of rising expenses. Some communities relied on emergency fundraising campaigns to keep long-standing July 4 traditions alive.

The contrast was striking. While Washington staged an unprecedented national celebration, many smaller communities scaled back displays because they could no longer afford them.

Neither Freedom 250, the National Park Service, nor the U.S. Department of the Interior disclosed the total cost of the Washington production.

Industry experts estimate the fireworks alone likely cost between $6 million and $7 million, before labor, transportation, permitting, security, and setup expenses. Public federal records show the Department of the Interior previously obligated approximately $1.5 million for National Mall fireworks planning under an earlier contract, though officials have not released final costs for this year’s expanded celebration.

Vitale said Pyrotecnico anticipated trade disruptions well in advance by building inventory and sourcing fireworks from multiple countries, including the United States, Italy, Spain, and other international suppliers.

Weather also disrupted Independence Day celebrations elsewhere. Severe storms interrupted a July 4 concert in Philadelphia, while New York City’s Macy’s Fourth of July Fireworks proceeded despite several small fires that briefly broke out on the Brooklyn Bridge during the event.

Whether Guinness ultimately certifies a new world record or not, Washington delivered one of the largest and most ambitious fireworks displays ever produced. The celebration showcased both America’s 250th anniversary and the growing financial challenges facing an industry increasingly affected by global supply chains, tariffs, and rising production costs.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump used his Independence Day address on the National Mall on Saturday to declare the United States victorious over Iran, telling a storm-battered crowd that American forces had wiped out Tehran’s entire navy “in a moment.” Speaking at the Salute to America celebration marking the country’s 250th anniversary, Trump said the U.S. had destroyed 159 Iranian ships and declared the nation “stronger, freer, richer, safer, and prouder than ever before.”

The claim is Trump’s, and it goes beyond what his own government has publicly confirmed. The White House said U.S. forces used air and naval superiority to destroy Iran’s naval infrastructure, putting the count at 155 to 159 vessels. The Pentagon, however, has described the military operation as a blockade of Iranian ports combined with a limited number of maritime interceptions rather than the destruction of an entire fleet. Independent reporting has not corroborated the 159-ship figure, with one Pentagon briefing citing 13 vessels that were deterred rather than sunk. Earlier in the conflict, defense officials told Congress that clearing mines from the Strait of Hormuz could take as long as six months—a timeline that contrasts with declarations of a complete military victory.

Trump devoted only a brief portion of his speech to Iran.

“They’re dying to settle. They want to settle so badly,” he said of Iran’s leadership. “We gave him a week off for a funeral because we’re nice.”

The comments referenced the temporary pause the administration placed on U.S.-Iran negotiations, which have continued for weeks through mediators from Qatar and Pakistan. The conflict began on Feb. 28, and has since moved into a fragile ceasefire following a June 17 memorandum of understanding establishing a negotiating window covering Iran’s nuclear program and other unresolved issues.

Much of the address revisited themes Trump introduced a night earlier at Mount Rushmore, where he framed the upcoming midterm elections as a battle against what he called a “resurgence of the communist menace,” describing communism as a direct threat to American liberty while linking the issue to immigration. On the National Mall, he returned to those themes while criticizing Democrats ahead of the 2026 elections.

The evening itself unfolded under difficult conditions.

Washington remained under an extreme heat alert, with the heat index approaching 105 degrees, before severe thunderstorms forced the U.S. Secret Service to evacuate portions of the National Mall shortly before the program. Some attendees left entirely while others later returned and underwent a second round of security screening. The remaining military flyovers scheduled for the evening were canceled because of the weather.

Earlier in the day, however, spectators watched performances by the U.S. Navy Blue Angels and the U.S. Air Force Thunderbirds, while the Qatari-donated Boeing aircraft currently serving as Air Force One conducted a ceremonial flyover before storms moved into the area. Organizers proceeded with what they described as the nation’s largest-ever fireworks celebration.

Elsewhere, a separate incident unfolded in New York City, where a fire broke out on the Brooklyn Bridge during the Macy’s Fourth of July Fireworks display. The FDNY classified the incident as a rubbish fire, reporting no injuries.

Despite the administration’s declaration of victory, the most immediate economic effects of the Iran conflict have become visible not on the battlefield but at gas stations across the country.

Crude oil prices have retreated to roughly the levels seen before the conflict began, with West Texas Intermediate trading near $69 per barrel, while the national average price for gasoline declined to approximately $3.83 per gallon, according to AAA, nearly 50 cents lower than one month earlier as commercial shipping through the Strait of Hormuz continued recovering. U.S. financial markets, closed for the Independence Day holiday, are scheduled to reopen Monday.

Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu also added a diplomatic development to the day, announcing plans to visit the United States in the near future following Trump’s decision to pause negotiations with Iran for one week. Trump has indicated that any final decision formally ending the conflict would be made jointly with Netanyahu.

Attention now shifts from military operations to diplomacy.

The negotiating framework established last month provides both governments with a limited window to resolve the conflict’s most difficult outstanding issues, including Iran’s nuclear program and long-term security arrangements in the Persian Gulf.

Saturday’s Independence Day speech declared the war won.

The negotiations now underway will determine whether that declaration becomes a lasting reality.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Department of the Treasury began depositing a one-time $1,000 into the investment accounts of eligible American children on Saturday, July 4, as the program branded Trump Accounts officially opened for contributions, according to Treasury’s launch announcement and confirmation from Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent. Starting July 4, 2026, eligible children began receiving the $1,000 pilot program contribution from the Treasury, deposited directly into their Trump Account.

The email landing in parents’ inboxes over the weekend — subject line “Benjamin received $1,000 from the U.S. Department of the Treasury” — signals that the money families were promised is now moving. The Trump administration on Saturday launched the new investment accounts for millions of American children, pairing the one-time federal deposit for eligible babies with the opportunity for families and employers to contribute additional funds over time.

The accounts, created under the One Big Beautiful Bill Act that President Donald Trump signed on July 4, 2025, work like a retirement account for children. All U.S. children under 18 with a valid Social Security Number can have a Trump Account. The federal $1,000 seed contribution, however, is more limited. It is available to children born between Jan. 1, 2025, and Dec. 31, 2028, who are U.S. citizens with a valid Social Security number.

Uptake has been heavy. More than 6 million Trump Accounts have been opened for children under 18, according to the Treasury Department. Of those, about 1.4 million qualify for the $1,000 federal pilot contribution. That leaves tens of millions of eligible children still unenrolled, and parents can still claim the money.

How to Get the $1,000 if You Haven’t Applied Yet

There is no cost to open an account, and families have plenty of time. Parents who have not yet enrolled can submit IRS Form 4547 any time before their child turns 18 to open the account and elect into the $1,000 pilot program.

IRS Chief Executive Officer Frank J. Bisignano said the process was intentionally designed to be simple.

“Families with eligible children born between 2025 and 2028 just need to check the box on a form to stake their claim for the $1,000 contribution. It’s that simple.”

Form 4547 can be filed with a tax return or submitted directly through TrumpAccounts.gov. After enrollment, families should download the Trump Accounts app to activate and manage the account.

For parents who enrolled earlier, the activation email is the final step. Families should look for an email confirming that their election to open a child’s Trump Account has been processed and prompting them to complete activation. Once activation is complete, the $1,000 is invested and appears in the account.

Watch for Scams

The Treasury Department is warning families that scammers are targeting the program’s rollout.

Official activation emails come only from no-reply@TrumpAccounts.Treasury.gov, while legitimate follow-up communications arrive through the official app or from email addresses ending in @trumpaccount.com.

Treasury’s guidance is straightforward:

“If you receive a call or text about a Trump Account, do not respond, it is likely a scam.”

Where the Money Goes

Once deposited, the funds are invested automatically.

Treasury selected the State Street SPDR Portfolio S&P 500 ETF (SPYM) as the default investment for all accounts. The fund tracks the S&P 500 Index and carries an expense ratio of just 0.02%.

The accounts are administered by Bank of New York Mellon and Robinhood, and the money generally remains invested until the child turns 18, when the account converts into a traditional IRA.

Families can contribute substantially more than the government’s initial deposit. Parents may contribute up to $2,500 per year in pretax income, while combined annual contributions from all sources are capped at $5,000, excluding contributions from governments and charitable organizations.

Free Money on Top of the Federal Seed

A growing list of employers has agreed to match the federal contribution for employees’ children.

Companies including Micron, SoFi, Charter Communications, BNY, BlackRock, Robinhood, Charles Schwab, Uber, JPMorgan, and Chipotle have announced plans to match the $1,000 federal deposit for eligible employees’ children. Parents should check with their employer to see whether a matching benefit is available.

Private philanthropy is also helping families whose children fall outside the federal eligibility window. A $6.25 billion pledge from billionaire technology entrepreneur Michael Dell and his wife, Susan Dell, will fund a $250 contribution for children age 10 and younger living in ZIP codes with a median family income of $150,000 or less.

For parents, the practical takeaway is straightforward: if the $1,000 has not yet appeared, file IRS Form 4547 through TrumpAccounts.gov, download the official app, and check whether an employer offers a matching contribution.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Antwerp World Diamond Center, the trade body for one of the world’s oldest diamond hubs, presented an elaborate diamond-encrusted gold ring for President Donald Trump on Sunday, June 28, during an “America 250” celebration in Brussels marking the 250th anniversary of U.S. independence. Isidore Mörsel, the center’s president, handed the ring to Bill White, the U.S. ambassador to Belgium, to pass along to the president. The gift arrived months after the Antwerp diamond trade won relief from U.S. import tariffs.

The ring is not subtle. It carries 321 diamonds, 56 sapphires, 13 emeralds and six rubies set in 18-karat gold, roughly the size of a watch face. Dozens of diamonds spell out two large letter “T”s beside the Stars and Stripes, along with the years 1776 and 2026. More stones form the numbers 45 and 47—marking Trump’s two terms—in the shape of the Superman logo. A diamond-winged eagle grips a ruby shield and an emerald olive branch beneath the phrase “250 YEARS USA.” Inside, the band is engraved, “Crafted in Antwerp for Donald John Trump.”

In a prerecorded video shown at the Brussels event, Trump thanked the designers. “A very special thank you to my friends from Antwerp for the magnificent Freedom 250 ring,” he said.

The center turned to David Gotlib, an Antwerp jeweler whose cufflinks can sell for more than $17,000, to make the piece. Neither Gotlib nor the diamond center would place a value on the ring. Two independent jewelers estimated it at between $25,000 and $35,000. Paris- and London-based consultant Alexander Levinson estimated the cost at $25,928, while David Saad, a third-generation jeweler in Canada, valued it between $33,000 and $35,000. Both said roughly half the cost reflected the gemstones and gold, with the remainder representing craftsmanship.

The timing is what draws attention. Belgium’s diamond sector spent much of last year struggling under Trump’s sweeping tariffs. In September, the Antwerp World Diamond Center announced it had secured a zero percent import tariff on the more than $2 billion in polished diamonds Antwerp exports to the United States each year. A spokesperson for the center later said it had provided input to the European Commission during tariff negotiations with the United States but did not directly lobby the Trump administration.

Mörsel described the ring as a symbol of that relationship.

“May this ring serve as a lasting reminder that true partnerships, like the finest natural diamonds, are formed under pressure, endure the test of time, and shine brightest when built on trust,” he said.

The gift also arrives amid continuing debate over what a sitting president may accept. U.S. presidents have broad discretion to receive gifts from private individuals and organizations, while gifts from foreign governments are restricted under the Constitution’s Emoluments Clause unless approved by Congress. Because the ring came from an industry organization rather than the Belgian government, it falls outside that constitutional prohibition.

Personal gifts are expected to appear on the president’s annual financial disclosure. Trump’s latest filing listed a $250,000 sculpture depicting him after the 2024 assassination attempt in Butler, Pennsylvania, along with 10 tickets to the upcoming FIFA World Cup final in New Jersey from FIFA President Gianni Infantino, valued together at about $15,000. Several ethics experts told the Associated Press that the president has departed from the long-standing White House tradition of declining many personal gifts.

The ring is modest compared with some recent gifts. Its estimated value is only a fraction of the roughly $400 million aircraft Qatar donated, which Trump directed be converted into a future Air Force One.

The Brussels celebration itself drew more than 8,000 attendees. Ambassador Bill White said he raised more than $5.5 million from corporate sponsors, including Lockheed Martin and Northrop Grumman, to help fund the event. Musician Alexis Wilkins performed the U.S. national anthem.

Antwerp’s diamond trade has long been closely associated with the city’s Orthodox Jewish community, which for generations played a central role in diamond cutting and trading. Today, the industry is far more international, with Indian-owned companies accounting for much of the trade, while the Antwerp World Diamond Center represents the broader Belgian diamond industry rather than any single community.

For Antwerp, the message was straightforward. After a difficult year, one of the world’s oldest diamond centers wanted to celebrate restored access to its largest export market—and it did so with a ring made from the product that built its global reputation.

JBizNews Desk | Brussels

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Federal officials ordered thousands of people off the National Mall on Saturday evening, cutting short one of the most heavily promoted tourism events in Washington’s history as severe thunderstorms rolled toward the capital just hours before President Donald Trump was set to speak. The National Park Service issued a weather evacuation alert around 7:15 p.m., asking fireworks visitors to seek shelter and follow directions from park rangers, law enforcement personnel and other event staff.

“The safety of our guests, performers, and staff is our top priority,” Freedom 250 spokesperson Danielle Alvarez said in a statement. “Due to approaching severe storms, Freedom 250, United States Secret Service, United States Park Police, National Park Service, the Federal Emergency Management Agency, and all public safety partners are asking all guests to evacuate event grounds and seek temporary shelter in a nearby building.”

The order landed at the worst possible moment for a city that has spent the better part of a year betting on this weekend. Thousands attending the Great American State Fair and other areas around the National Mall were told to leave, and organizers steered them into federal buildings pressed into service as shelters. Visitors were directed to the Department of Commerce, Department of Education, Department of Agriculture, the Internal Revenue Service building, the Ronald Reagan Building, and several Smithsonian museums. The Internal Revenue Service building at 1111 Constitution Ave. NW reached occupancy capacity.

For Washington’s hospitality industry, the disruption arrived on a day that was supposed to cap a banner run. More than two dozen hotels rolled out DC250 packages this summer hoping to attract overnight guests, with luxury properties reporting record bookings. Visitors to the District pump more than $11.4 billion into the local economy each year and generate $2.3 billion in local tax revenue, while roughly 50 million visitors were expected to spend money in the city around the anniversary celebrations. Elliott Ferguson, who leads the city’s tourism arm, had called the administration’s slate of 250th events a clear positive for the industry.

The storms followed a punishing stretch of heat that had already forced cancellations. Washington’s National Independence Day Parade was called off late Friday night. Todd Marcocci, president of Under The Sun Productions, which oversaw the parade, said the decision came after consultation with the National Park Service, the D.C. government and Freedom 250, the nonprofit organizing the anniversary celebrations. The cancellation followed the hottest July 3 Washington had experienced in decades, as Reagan National Airport reached 102 degrees Friday afternoon, breaking a record for the date that had stood since 1966. Among those affected were 80 students from the Grand Island Senior High marching band in Nebraska, who had traveled specifically to perform.

Organizers moved quickly to salvage the night. Freedom 250 announced around 9:10 p.m. that the gates would reopen at 9:45 p.m., with President Trump scheduled to deliver remarks around 11 p.m. before the fireworks display. “Rain or shine, the American people deserve a celebration worthy of our nation’s historic 250th birthday,” the group said, adding that a little rain would not diminish the celebration. The president struck the same note on social media, saying he would not let rain stop the celebration.

The logistics of restarting a secured event of this scale were significant. The Secret Service said its security screening areas would reopen shortly and that everyone who had evacuated would need to go through screening again. Two law enforcement sources told CBS News the Secret Service had dismantled its magnetometers to protect them from storm damage, meaning tens of thousands of returning guests required new security screening before the program could resume.

The weekend’s disruptions came against a broader tourism picture that was already mixed heading into the nation’s 250th anniversary. U.S. travel spending is forecast to reach a record $1.37 trillion in 2026, driven primarily by domestic travelers. At the same time, international arrivals to the United States fell 5.5% in 2025 from the previous year, and industry groups have promoted America’s 250th, the Route 66 centennial, and the FIFA World Cup as major opportunities to reverse that trend. Booking data showed visitors increasingly making shorter, event-focused trips to Washington rather than week-long vacations, with vacation-rental analysts reporting that the city’s average length of stay has declined as travelers build itineraries around specific anniversary events.

That made a smooth, nationally televised Fourth of July celebration even more valuable for the businesses counting on it, from downtown hotels to vendors operating at the Great American State Fair. A storm-delayed marquee event does not erase a year of reservations, but for an industry leaning heavily on one holiday weekend to showcase America’s 250th birthday, the severe weather served as an unwelcome reminder that even the biggest celebrations remain at the mercy of the forecast.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

This Fourth of July marks the 250th anniversary of the founding of the U.S., and while Americans around the country are celebrating the occasion, it also serves as an opportunity to reflect on what helped make the U.S. the world’s largest economy and the reasons it’s still a great place to invest.

Joseph P. Quinlan, head of CIO market strategy for Merrill and Bank of America Private Bank, authored a piece breaking down the 10 reasons as to why the firm is bullish on the long-term prospects of investing in America.

Here’s a look at Quinlan’s 10 reasons to celebrate America on the nation’s 250th birthday.

“Think of our economy as a hydra-headed superpower, leading the world in such diverse activities as aerospace, agriculture, finance, energy, technology, healthcare, education and numerous other industries,” Quinlan said.

BANK OF AMERICA’S LEGACY OF BUILDING THE AMERICAN DREAM

He noted that while the U.S. has just over 4% of the world’s population, it accounts for about one-quarter of all global gross domestic product (GDP), with measures like economic output and per capita income far surpassing emerging countries like China and India.

“Never have so few people produced so much output, creating so much wealth,” Quinlan added.

The U.S. stands in contrast to many of history’s leading world powers by virtue of having friendly neighbors and vast oceans on its flanks, Quinlan said. He said that the U.S. is in “one of the most favorable geographic positions on Earth” and noted how the Great Plains, Mississippi River system and Great Lakes offer space for farming, waterways for commerce and reserves of freshwater that are unmatched around the world.

“At a time when water scarcity, food security, energy supplies and geopolitical tensions are increasingly important, America’s geographic advantages are becoming more valuable – not less,” he noted.

AMERICA 250: BLACKROCK’S LARRY FINK SAYS LONG-TERM INVESTING CAN PERFORM A KIND OF ‘CIVIC MIRACLE’

“America’s economic metabolism is different from the rest of the world. No country creates and destroys as manically as America,” Quinlan wrote, noting that since 2010, about 40% of the companies in the Fortune 500 list have either gone bankrupt, been acquired or ceased operations.

He cited Census Bureau data showing that nearly 6 million new businesses have been formed in the U.S. over the last 12 months – a record high and well above the average of the last decade – as evidence that the country’s “startup itch has only grown stronger in the past few years.”

Quinlan noted that investors move their capital to where it’s treated the best, which shows that “global investors continue to favor the U.S.”

“At last count, the amount of foreign capital invested in the U.S. was around $50 trillion, according to the U.S. Department of Commerce. Bullish on America, the U.S. investment stakes of foreigners have increased nearly five-fold since the start of the century,” he wrote. “No country in the world has been at the receiving end of so much foreign capital this century.”

BELOVED PIZZA CHAIN TURNS AMERICA’S 250TH BIRTHDAY INTO SUMMER-LONG CELEBRATION

The global economy is spurred by intellectual property and brands, and Quinlan noted the U.S. is home to nine of the world’s top 10 global brands in 2026, according to BrandZ.

“These brands are more than commercial success; they are expressions of American soft power,” he wrote, saying they demonstrate how “American culture, technology and business extends far beyond its borders.”

The U.S. military is the most capable in the world and serves as a critical backstop to America’s economic strength through deterrence and the ability to respond to aggression, while it also brings economic benefits amid the backdrop of geopolitical threats from countries like China and Russia.

“America’s defense leadership is not merely a strategic asset – it is also an important economic advantage, supporting innovation across aerospace, cybersecurity, AI and advanced manufacturing,” Quinlan wrote.

MCDONALD’S BRINGING BACK FRIED APPLE PIE TO CELEBRATE AMERICA’S 250TH BIRTHDAY

The entrepreneurial culture of risk-taking in the U.S. has helped the country maintain its edge in tech innovation despite China’s economic rise, Quinlan said, adding that the market cap of firms like Nvidia, Google-parent Alphabet, and Apple are larger than many countries’ economic output.

“America is the largest market in the world for research and development spending and, in terms of AI, investment in AI in the U.S. is light years ahead of most of Europe and the rest of the world,” he said.

Quinlan wrote that U.S. colleges and universities are among its greatest assets, with the Quacquarelli Symonds World University Rankings’ top 100 placing 26 in the U.S., including four of the top five and eight of the top 20.

“Many of the world’s most innovative companies were founded or co-founded by immigrants who first arrived in America as students. Talent follows opportunity, and opportunity still flows disproportionately toward the U.S.,” he noted.

BANK OF AMERICA CARDHOLDERS CAN VISIT 250 MUSEUMS FREE DURING JULY 4 WEEKEND

“Predictions of the dollar’s demise have become a recurring feature of modern finance. Yet the greenback remains the world’s dominant reserve currency, the primary medium of global trade and finance, and the ultimate safe-haven during periods of crisis,” Quinlan wrote.

He added that the dominance of the dollar has given the U.S. what has historically been known as an “exorbitant privilege” that manifests itself in the ability to borrow, invest and transact that few nations can rival, and that, for the time being, “there remains no credible global substitute to the buck.”

Economic competitiveness allows countries to adapt, innovate, bring in talent and drive growth – all categories that Quinlan said the U.S. is among the world leaders in, adding that the U.S. is “positioned to remain among the world’s most competitive economies.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Summing it all up: At 250 years old, America remains the world’s leading economic, financial, technological and military power,” Quinlan wrote. “The entrepreneurial DNA of 1776 continues to run strong through our nation – think the willingness to take risks, challenge conventions, attract talent, and reinvest itself. That’s worth celebrating.”

This post was originally published here

A record 72.2 million Americans were expected to travel at least 50 miles from home during the Independence Day holiday period, according to AAA, setting a new record despite gasoline prices remaining well above last year’s levels. The forecast, released by AAA on June 17, projected more travelers than last year’s record 71.8 million, highlighting continued consumer demand for summer vacations even as travel costs increased.

Stacey Barber, Vice President of AAA Travel, said the number surpassed last year’s record even as the pace of growth slowed.

“For many Americans, traveling the week of July 4th is tradition,” Barber said. She added that while travel growth is beginning to level off, Americans are still hitting record numbers on the roads, in the skies, and at sea.

The travel period spans nine days, from Saturday, June 27, through Sunday, July 5. AAA developed the forecast with S&P Global Market Intelligence, using economic data including employment, household wealth, gasoline prices, and airline and hotel bookings.

The overwhelming majority of travelers chose to drive. AAA projected 61.4 million people would travel by car, representing about 85% of all holiday travelers. That is virtually unchanged from last year’s 61.3 million, despite significantly higher gasoline prices.

On Thursday, the national average price for regular gasoline stood at $3.84 per gallon, according to AAA. That was more than 20% higher than the same period last year. Prices, however, have fallen sharply in recent weeks, down from $4.29 a month earlier and well below the May 21 peak of $4.56, when fuel costs surged during the conflict with Iran.

“Overall, gas prices remain the highest they’ve been in four years, but the downward trend since late May is welcome news during the busy summer driving season,” AAA said.

Fuel prices continue to vary widely across the country. Hawaii has the highest statewide average at $5.47 per gallon, followed by California at $5.39 and Washington at $5.07. Among the least expensive states are Indiana at $3.10, Texas at $3.35, and Oklahoma at $3.36.

Even with gasoline costing more than last summer, driving remains the most affordable option for many families, particularly those traveling with children. That has helped keep road-trip numbers steady while other travel expenses have climbed.

Air travel remained relatively flat. AAA expected 5.85 million people to fly during the holiday period, a 0.2% increase from last year and roughly 8% of all travelers. The average domestic round-trip airfare reached about $830, approximately 5% higher than a year earlier, based on booking data. Popular routes to destinations such as Chicago and Denver experienced some of the largest price increases.

The fastest-growing segment of holiday travel is neither automobiles nor airplanes. AAA projected 4.93 million travelers would use buses, trains, or cruise ships, a 5.3% increase from last year. Cruise vacations account for much of that growth, as more families choose trips that bundle transportation, accommodations, and meals into a single price.

Based on booking data, the most popular domestic destinations included Seattle, Orlando, Anchorage, Miami, and New York City. AAA said Seattle ranked as the nation’s most popular destination this Independence Day.

For motorists, timing proved critical. Transportation analytics company INRIX projected the heaviest congestion during the second weekend of the holiday period. On Saturday, June 27, traffic was expected to be worst between noon and 5 p.m. INRIX recommended departing before 10 a.m. whenever possible. Travelers returning home on Sunday, July 5, were advised to leave before 11 a.m., with the most severe congestion expected from noon until 6 p.m.

Rental cars also remained in strong demand. Hertz expected Thursday, July 2, to be its busiest pickup day of the holiday period. According to the company, Orlando, Denver, Boston, Los Angeles, and New York City ranked among the busiest rental markets based on advance reservations. AAA also reported that domestic rental-car prices were running roughly 10% higher than last year.

The broader picture is a travel market that has settled into a more sustainable pattern after several years of rapid post-pandemic growth. The increase from 71.8 million to 72.2 million travelers represents another record, although the gains are more modest than the double-digit increases seen in previous years.

That resilience sends an important signal for businesses that rely on holiday travel, including hotels, restaurants, airlines, cruise operators, and gasoline retailers. Consumers have largely absorbed higher airfares and fuel costs without abandoning vacation plans. For many families, the holiday trip remains a priority, even if they trim spending elsewhere to make it happen.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The world’s largest money manager just committed $100 million to something that has nothing to do with the stock market. On March 11, BlackRock announced Future Builders, a five-year program funded by The BlackRock Foundation to train 50,000 Americans as electricians, plumbers, HVAC technicians and ironworkers. “Throughout our history, tradespeople have built our country,” said BlackRock Chairman and CEO Larry Fink. The surprise is not the size of the check. It is what the check says about how many of America’s biggest companies are now thinking about hiring—and why.

For much of the last five years, the loudest debate in corporate hiring centered on diversity goals. Many companies set targets to increase representation among their workforces. Today, many of those employers are changing course. The new emphasis is simpler: hire the person with the skills to do the job. Many companies have reduced or eliminated hiring targets tied to demographic representation while placing greater weight on skills and qualifications.

The change did not happen on its own. On January 21, 2025, President Donald Trump signed Executive Order 14173, restricting diversity programs within the federal government and warning that employment practices favoring one group over another could face legal scrutiny. A follow-up executive order issued on March 26, 2026, expanded that focus to federal contractors by restricting certain diversity-related activities. Many corporate legal departments responded by reviewing and revising hiring policies.

The shift can be seen across some of America’s largest employers. In January 2025, Meta told employees it was ending several programs designed to increase hiring from underrepresented groups. Janelle Gale, Meta’s vice president of people, said the legal landscape surrounding those programs had changed. Google also dropped aspirational hiring goals for underrepresented groups, reduced parts of its diversity organization, and removed certain diversity commitments from its annual reports.

Replacing many of those hiring targets is an approach known as skills-based hiring. Instead of relying heavily on college degrees or other traditional credentials, employers increasingly evaluate whether applicants possess the specific skills required for the job. More companies are removing four-year degree requirements and emphasizing practical experience and demonstrated ability. Roughly 85% of employers now report using some form of skills-based hiring, up from 81% a year earlier. The goal is to broaden the talent pool while selecting candidates based primarily on their ability to perform the work.

One distinction is important. Expanding the applicant pool is not the same as setting hiring targets. Companies continue to recruit broadly and encourage qualified applicants from many backgrounds to apply. The key difference is that many employers now say the final hiring decision is increasingly based on demonstrated skills and qualifications rather than meeting representation goals.

That brings the story back to BlackRock’s investment in skilled trades. The company is not alone. Lowe’s has committed $250 million to workforce training, while Meta has pledged $115 million toward similar efforts. AT&T says it needs more skilled trades workers as part of its five-year, $38 billion expansion of high-speed fiber infrastructure supporting artificial intelligence. Google has committed $15 million alongside the Electrical Training Alliance to help prepare electricians for growing demand.

The reason is straightforward. Larry Fink has warned that the United States faces a shortage of electricians and other skilled trades as artificial intelligence drives a nationwide construction boom in data centers and energy infrastructure. Licensed electricians, plumbers, HVAC technicians, and ironworkers cannot be produced overnight. Training takes years, and many of these occupations already offer salaries that can reach six figures.

Another important point is often overlooked. These hiring changes are separate from supplier diversity programs. Many major corporations continue spending heavily with minority- and women-owned businesses through supplier initiatives. Google and AT&T, for example, each spend at least $1 billion annually with certified minority- and women-owned suppliers as members of the Billion Dollar Roundtable. While hiring practices have evolved at many companies, supplier diversity programs remain a significant part of corporate procurement strategies.

Viewed together, the trend reflects a broader shift in corporate workforce planning. Legal developments, labor shortages, and the growing demand for specialized skills are leading many employers to place greater emphasis on practical ability while investing billions of dollars to train the workforce they expect to need over the next decade.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

When JPMorgan Chase & Co. told securities regulators on June 25 that Marianne Lake would retire, it closed one of Wall Street’s longest-running guessing games — who would eventually replace Chief Executive Jamie Dimon. What that filing did not spell out in plain dollars is how much Lake carries out the door. Drawn from the stock awards listed in the bank’s own regulatory disclosures and its most recent proxy statement, the figure lands near $50 million in unvested shares that will keep vesting on schedule even after she is gone.

That money is not a parting gift. It is pay Lake already earned in past years, handed to her as restricted stock that had not fully vested when she announced her exit. Big banks structure senior pay this way on purpose. A large slice of each year’s compensation comes as stock that vests slowly, over three to five years, so that leaving early usually means walking away from a pile of unvested shares.

Lake does not lose hers. Companies like JPMorgan build in what is often called a qualifying retirement provision. Employees who hit certain age and length-of-service marks are allowed to keep their unvested awards, which continue vesting on the original timetable rather than being canceled. Lake, who joined the bank in 1999 and spent more than 25 years there, clears those thresholds. So the roughly $50 million stays hers, paid out over the coming years as each grant reaches its vesting date.

Her situation stands apart from the four executives who are staying. In the same June 25 disclosure, JPMorgan handed new one-time retention awards to the leaders it wants to keep in place through any future handoff at the top. Doug Petno and Troy Rohrbaugh, both just named co-presidents, each received awards valued at $30 million. Mary Erdoes, who runs asset and wealth management, and Jennifer Piepszak, the chief operating officer, each received $20 million. Those grants are entirely restricted stock that vests after three years, and only if the bank achieves an average return on tangible common equity of at least 12% between 2026 and 2028. The recipients also must remain employed throughout the period.

Because Lake is the one leaving, she receives none of those new retention awards. Her payout consists of the older stock she had already accumulated, protected by the retirement rules rather than by any fresh deal.

The backdrop is the race to run the largest bank in the United States. Lake served as JPMorgan’s chief financial officer from 2013 to 2019, then led consumer lending, and in 2024 became sole CEO of consumer and community banking, the division that oversees the bank’s branches, credit cards, and home and auto lending. For years she was viewed as one of the leading candidates to succeed Dimon, and had she been selected she would have become the highest-ranking woman in American corporate life, running a bank with nearly $5 trillion in assets.

Her retirement came as Doug Petno and Troy Rohrbaugh emerged as the bank’s leading internal succession candidates. Petno, 61, now serves as sole chief executive of the commercial and investment bank, while Rohrbaugh, 56, takes over Lake’s former consumer and community banking division. Both now occupy the tier immediately below Dimon, 70, who has said he expects to remain chief executive for about three more years before likely staying on as chairman to advise his successor.

The timing surprised parts of Wall Street. Several bank analysts said they had long assumed Lake would ultimately become chief executive, and Bloomberg described her departure as abrupt. People familiar with her plans say she is expected to take a senior position at another company rather than retire from business altogether.

The leadership changes arrived alongside a broader capital plan. A day earlier, following the Federal Reserve’s annual stress test results, JPMorgan’s board authorized a new $50 billion share repurchase program beginning July 1 and increased the quarterly dividend by 10%, to $1.65 a share from $1.50, starting in the third quarter.

For everyday readers, Lake’s payout offers a look at how the top of American banking compensates its executives. The headline figure may sound like a reward for losing the CEO race. In reality, it represents deferred compensation earned over many years and preserved under retirement provisions available to long-serving executives. The bank is using fresh performance-based stock grants to retain the leaders it wants to keep while allowing a departing veteran to collect compensation she had already earned. Lake leaves after more than a quarter-century with the stock she accumulated along the way—and with her name still linked to one of Wall Street’s most closely watched succession stories.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Governor Mikie Sherrill signed New Jersey’s new state budget late Tuesday, putting a record $60.7 billion spending plan into law just before the state’s midnight constitutional deadline, her office said. It is the first budget of her term, and she cast it as a plan built around one idea: making the state more affordable for the people who live there.

The budget totals about $60.743 billion, the largest in New Jersey history, and took effect Wednesday, July 1. Sherrill said the plan holds down costs for families without raising taxes on individual residents, pointing to housing, health care and property taxes as the pressures she wanted to ease.

For most households, the piece that matters most is property tax relief. The budget sets aside more than $4.1 billion for it — the biggest such commitment the state has ever made. That includes roughly $2.19 billion for the ANCHOR rebate program, $345 million for Senior Freeze, and $756 million for Stay NJ, the newer program aimed at helping seniors stay in their homes.

Families with children also get a bump. The budget raises New Jersey’s Child Tax Credit by 25% for three tax years, so a household that received the top credit of $1,000 will now get $1,250. Commuters benefit too: the plan puts nearly $1.1 billion toward NJ Transit operations, an increase of $235 million, or about 28%, and directs $12.4 billion to public schools.

Sherrill also used the budget to show fiscal restraint. It includes a full $7.3 billion pension payment — the sixth year in a row the state has paid its full share, and, her office said, the first time in decades a governor has fully funded the system in a first year. The plan keeps a surplus of just over $6 billion and cuts the state’s structural deficit to about $1.35 billion, down from more than $3 billion when she took office in January.

How to pay for all of it is where the fight is. Much of the new revenue comes from businesses. The budget counts on $4.82 billion from the Business Alternative Income Tax, $4.08 billion from the Corporation Business Tax, and $814 million from the Corporate Transit Fee charged to the state’s largest companies. It also adds a new assessment requiring employers to ask workers whether they or family members are on Medicaid.

Business leaders objected fast. Michele Siekerka, president and CEO of the New Jersey Business & Industry Association, said the state’s employers are “still under attack,” noting that nearly all of the budget’s revenue-raisers land on business in a state that already ranks among the worst in the nation for business taxes. Siekerka did credit the plan for funding the New Jersey Manufacturing Extension Program and for money tied to Sherrill’s push to cut red tape for companies.

Republicans said the budget spends too much and breaks a campaign promise. State Senator Michael Testa said it spends more taxpayer money than ever while asking families to accept the same broken promises. Assemblyman Mike Inganamort said Sherrill vowed as a candidate not to raise taxes, and argued this budget does. The spending bill passed the Assembly 58-20 and the Senate 26-14, with a single Republican crossing over in each chamber.

Some of the sharpest criticism was about process. Alongside the main plan, lawmakers approved a separate $358.8 million supplemental bill in the final hours — its largest single piece a low-interest loan of about $105 million to help Jersey City close a large hole in its own budget. Sherrill had campaigned against exactly these kinds of last-minute add-ons, and good-government groups said the closed-door process fell short of the transparency she promised.

The senior program drew complaints too. To keep Stay NJ affordable, the state lowered income limits and trimmed benefits for higher-earning retirees, dropping the program’s cost from about $1.2 billion to roughly $742 million. Chris Widelo of AARP New Jersey said the final plan fell short of what seniors had been counting on, though earlier pushback is credited with softening deeper cuts Sherrill first proposed.

Now the work shifts to delivery. State Treasurer Aaron Binder said the plan keeps New Jersey on disciplined footing while protecting schools and pensions. Residents will start to feel the effects over the coming months as rebate checks, credits and program changes take hold — and as the state watches Washington, where officials warn that federal funding cuts could force harder choices in next year’s budget.

JBizNews Desk | New Jersey
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


European stocks closed at a record high on Friday, July 3, extending their rally to a fourth consecutive week after weaker-than-expected U.S. employment data reinforced expectations that the Federal Reserve could begin easing monetary policy sooner than previously expected. The pan-European Stoxx 600 rose 0.69% to a fresh record close, capping its strongest weekly performance in about a month as gains broadened well beyond technology shares.

The move followed Thursday’s U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics report showing the American economy added 57,000 jobs in June, well below the 115,000 economists had expected and down sharply from May’s downwardly revised 129,000. The weaker labor market data eased concerns that the Fed would need to keep interest rates higher for longer, lifting investor sentiment across global markets.

Germany’s DAX led Europe’s major indexes, climbing 0.85% to another record high. Italy’s FTSE MIB gained 0.77%, while France’s CAC 40 added 0.48%. London’s FTSE 100 also ended the session higher as investors rotated into economically sensitive sectors.

The shift marked an important change in market leadership. While technology companies have fueled much of this year’s rally, Friday’s gains spread across industrials, financials, banks, and other cyclical sectors, suggesting investors are becoming more confident that lower borrowing costs could support broader economic growth. Utilities also outperformed, rising 1.78%, reflecting continued demand for defensive investments alongside renewed optimism about the economy.

Several developments added to the positive tone. Investors increasingly believe the European Central Bank may delay additional interest-rate increases as inflation continues to moderate across the eurozone. Germany’s governing coalition reached agreement on a package of tax, labor, and pension reforms, while stronger-than-expected Chinese services sector data improved confidence in global growth before European markets opened.

Among individual stocks, French biotechnology company Abivax led the Stoxx 600, rising as much as 7.7% before closing roughly 6.7% higher after raising €767.1 million ($874.1 million) through an expanded share offering to help fund U.S. development of its inflammatory bowel disease treatment, obefazimod. In Frankfurt, Siemens advanced 1.2% after Kepler Cheuvreux upgraded the stock to “hold” from “reduce.” European defense companies also gained as investors anticipated increased military spending following Russia’s latest large-scale strike on Ukraine. Earlier in the week, banking shares outperformed after UniCredit advanced on developments surrounding its bid for Commerzbank, while Deutsche Bank also posted strong gains.

Commodities and Volatility

Gold rose as investors sought traditional safe-haven assets following the weaker U.S. employment report, while the U.S. dollar headed for its largest weekly decline in nearly three months, making dollar-denominated commodities more attractive for overseas buyers. Oil prices were little changed, with Brent crude trading near $71.76 a barrel and West Texas Intermediate around $68.41, as traders continued monitoring the fragile ceasefire between the United States and Iran. U.S. financial markets remained closed for the Independence Day holiday, reducing trading volumes worldwide.

Investors now turn their attention to upcoming European purchasing managers’ surveys and the next round of U.S. economic data for fresh clues on the outlook for interest rates. For now, Europe’s rally appears to be broadening beyond a handful of technology companies into a wider range of industries—a sign that investor confidence is becoming increasingly widespread rather than concentrated in a few market leaders.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Nearly half of Americans cannot say what the country’s 250th anniversary actually celebrates, according to a national survey the Cato Institute released on Thursday, just two days before the Fourth of July. The poll, written by Cato polling director Emily Ekins, found that 46% of adults did not know the milestone marks the adoption of the Declaration of Independence on July 4, 1776. Just over half, 53%, answered correctly.

The survey was designed by the Cato Institute and conducted by Morning Consult, which interviewed 2,253 American adults online on June 25 and 26. The margin of error is approximately two percentage points.

The incorrect answers varied widely. 8% believed the anniversary marks the ratification of the U.S. Constitution, which came years later. 6% thought it commemorates America’s victory in the Revolutionary War, 5% said the nation’s first presidential election, and 3% believed it marks the Pilgrims’ arrival at Plymouth Rock.

The knowledge gap was greatest among younger Americans. Among Gen Z, roughly ages 18 to 26, 61% could not identify what the 250th anniversary commemorates, while only 39% answered correctly.

Ekins said the findings reveal an interesting contradiction. Americans may know relatively little about the nation’s founding, yet they continue to feel deeply connected to it. The survey found 86% are grateful to be Americans and 79% say they are proud to be American. 76% hold a favorable view of the country’s founding, while 70% believe its founding principles remain important today.

That pride, however, is not always matched by civic knowledge. 58% of respondents did not know the primary purpose of the U.S. Constitution is to establish and limit the powers of the federal government, with only 41% answering correctly. 57% could not identify the principal reason the American colonies sought independence from Britain, while 43% correctly cited taxation without representation and the lack of political representation. One historical fact most Americans did know was that George Washington served as the nation’s first president, correctly identified by 77% of respondents.

For the business community, the survey also highlights changing economic attitudes. Americans continue to view capitalism more favorably than socialism, 52% to 37%. Yet younger generations are moving in a different direction. Among Gen Z, 53% view socialism favorably compared with 45% who view capitalism favorably. Nearly as many young adults also expressed favorable views of communism (38%) as capitalism.

Those attitudes are beginning to influence politics. The survey found that the label “Democratic Socialist” makes 39% of Americans more likely to support a candidate and 40% less likely. Among Democrats (61%) and Gen Z (51%), however, the label provides a clear political advantage.

Americans also continue to connect the nation’s prosperity to its founding institutions. 82% said the Constitution played an important role in making the United States a wealthy country. Respondents most frequently credited America’s success to limited government under the Constitution, free markets and capitalism, and a culture of hard work.

At the same time, many expressed concern about the country’s future. 56% fear the United States could cease to be a free nation within the next fifty years, a concern shared by majorities of both Republicans and Democrats. 57% believe America has already drifted from its founding principles. When asked what poses the greatest threat to the republic, respondents pointed to government corruption, politicians ignoring the Constitution, and excessive concentration of political power.

Despite those concerns, Americans continue to support the nation’s constitutional system. 61% prefer power to remain divided among the branches of government even if it slows decision-making. 72% believe presidents should obey Supreme Court rulings even when they disagree with them, and 58% say no political party should hold too much power.

The findings arrive as communities, businesses, nonprofits, museums, and civic organizations prepare for a year of America 250 celebrations expected to generate significant tourism, sponsorship opportunities, and retail spending through 2026.

The survey also underscores why the Historic Morris Katz President Collection legacy of Holocaust survivor Morris Katz carries renewed significance to help educate the next generation.

Having endured the horrors of Nazi tyranny before finding refuge in the United States, Katz understood the value of freedom in a way few Americans ever could. The assassination of President John F. Kennedy profoundly affected him. He viewed it as a personal attack on the nation that had given him liberty, hope, and a new beginning. Inspired to honor America’s democracy, Katz spent the next six years creating The Presidential Collection, an extraordinary series of paintings depicting every President of the United States as a tribute to the office of the presidency, the Constitution, and the enduring ideals of American freedom.

At a time when nearly half of Americans cannot identify what the nation’s 250th anniversary commemorates, Katz’s work serves as more than an artistic achievement. It is a reminder that freedom is never guaranteed. It must be understood, appreciated, protected, and passed from one generation to the next.

As America celebrates its 250th birthday, The Presidential Collection stands not only as a tribute to the nation’s leaders, but also as a powerful educational legacy—one created by a man who experienced life without freedom and dedicated his talent to honoring the country that restored it.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Kuaishou Technology is seeking to raise approximately $2 billion for its rapidly growing Kling AI business, a move that would value one of China’s fastest-growing artificial intelligence platforms as competition intensifies in the global race to build next-generation AI video tools.

People familiar with the fundraising said the company is in discussions with investors about financing that would support the continued expansion of Kling AI, whose text-to-video technology has quickly gained attention among businesses, content creators, advertisers and filmmakers. The fundraising comes as demand for generative AI continues to surge worldwide, with companies investing billions of dollars in new computing infrastructure and advanced AI models.

Launched in 2024, Kling AI allows users to generate highly realistic videos from written prompts or still images. The platform has rapidly become one of China’s leading competitors to AI video systems developed by OpenAI, Google, Runway, Pika, and other global developers racing to commercialize generative video technology.

The proposed financing reflects growing investor confidence that AI-generated video could become one of the fastest-growing segments of the broader artificial intelligence industry. Businesses are increasingly adopting the technology to create marketing campaigns, training materials, product demonstrations, entertainment content and social media videos while reducing production costs and shortening development time.

Kuaishou, one of China’s largest short-video platforms, is leveraging its existing ecosystem of creators and advertisers to accelerate Kling AI’s adoption. By integrating generative AI tools directly into its platform, the company hopes to provide businesses and creators with faster ways to produce high-quality video content while expanding revenue opportunities beyond traditional advertising.

Industry analysts say AI video has become one of the most competitive areas of artificial intelligence, requiring enormous investments in computing power, specialized chips and data centers. Companies developing advanced video-generation models face significant costs for training increasingly sophisticated systems while competing to improve realism, editing controls and production quality.

The reported $2 billion fundraising would provide Kling AI with additional capital to expand research, acquire computing capacity and scale its commercial operations as demand for AI-generated video continues to rise across Asia and international markets.

The fundraising also highlights China’s determination to remain competitive in artificial intelligence despite export restrictions affecting access to some advanced semiconductor technology. Chinese technology companies have accelerated domestic AI development while investing heavily in homegrown models capable of competing with leading Western platforms.

For investors, the financing underscores how AI companies continue attracting substantial capital despite broader economic uncertainty. Since the emergence of generative AI, global investment has increasingly shifted toward companies building foundation models, AI infrastructure and specialized applications capable of serving enterprise customers.

As businesses around the world adopt artificial intelligence at an accelerating pace, AI-generated video is expected to become an increasingly important tool across marketing, education, entertainment, e-commerce and corporate communications. The competition among developers is likely to intensify as companies race to improve quality, lower costs and expand commercial adoption.

If completed, the financing would rank among the largest recent investments in a standalone AI video platform, further demonstrating that investors continue to view generative artificial intelligence as one of the technology sector’s most significant long-term growth opportunities.

JBizNews Desk | Hong Kong

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Meta Platforms surprised investors on Thursday by announcing plans to begin leasing excess artificial-intelligence computing capacity to outside businesses, a move that immediately rattled semiconductor stocks around the world and raised new questions about the future pace of AI infrastructure spending. The announcement helped trigger a sharp selloff in chipmakers from Wall Street to Asia, as investors reassessed whether the largest technology companies may eventually need to purchase fewer high-end AI processors than previously expected.

The new business would allow Meta to rent unused graphics processing unit (GPU) capacity and other AI infrastructure to outside companies, effectively transforming a portion of the massive computing network it has built for its own artificial-intelligence operations into a commercial cloud service. The strategy would place Meta into more direct competition with established cloud providers, including Amazon Web Services, Microsoft Azure, and Google Cloud, while creating a new revenue stream from billions of dollars in AI infrastructure already deployed.

The market reaction was swift.

Shares of several semiconductor companies fell sharply following the announcement as investors questioned whether demand for AI chips could eventually slow if major technology companies begin sharing excess computing capacity instead of continually purchasing additional hardware. Memory-chip makers Micron Technology and SanDisk each fell roughly 10%, while the selling quickly spread to overseas markets.

The impact was particularly severe in South Korea, where the benchmark Kospi index plunged 7.89%. Semiconductor giants SK Hynix dropped 14.57%, while Samsung Electronics lost 9.06%, helping drive one of the country’s steepest stock market declines in years. Japan also joined the selloff, with technology shares falling sharply as investors reduced exposure to semiconductor companies across the region.

The announcement comes as technology companies continue investing hundreds of billions of dollars to build artificial-intelligence data centers capable of supporting increasingly sophisticated AI models. Since the launch of generative AI, demand for advanced processors—particularly graphics chips used to train and operate large language models—has fueled one of the strongest investment cycles the semiconductor industry has ever experienced.

Meta has been among the largest contributors to that spending boom, investing aggressively in AI servers, networking equipment and next-generation computing infrastructure to support products including Meta AI, recommendation algorithms and future AI-powered services across Facebook, Instagram and WhatsApp.

By commercializing excess capacity, Meta could improve returns on those investments while offering businesses access to advanced AI computing without requiring them to build expensive infrastructure themselves.

Industry analysts said the announcement does not necessarily signal a collapse in demand for AI chips. Instead, it reflects the next stage of the AI economy, where companies seek to generate revenue from the enormous computing resources they have already built. As artificial intelligence adoption expands across corporate America, demand for rented computing power may grow just as rapidly as demand for physical chips.

Even so, investors remain sensitive to any indication that the unprecedented pace of AI infrastructure spending could begin to moderate. Semiconductor manufacturers have enjoyed record profits as cloud providers raced to acquire advanced processors, particularly high-performance chips used for AI model training.

The broader business implications extend beyond the chip industry. If successful, Meta’s cloud-leasing strategy could create a new competitor in enterprise AI infrastructure while giving startups, developers and corporations another option for accessing powerful computing resources. Greater competition could eventually reduce AI computing costs and accelerate adoption across industries ranging from healthcare and finance to manufacturing and education.

For now, however, Thursday’s announcement served as a reminder that even the strongest technology sectors remain vulnerable to shifts in investor expectations. The AI revolution continues to expand rapidly, but Wall Street is increasingly focused not only on how much companies spend, but also on how efficiently they monetize those investments.

Whether Meta’s move becomes a new industry trend or simply another business line for the social media giant remains to be seen. What is already clear is that a single strategic announcement was enough to send shockwaves through global semiconductor markets.

JBizNews Desk | Menlo Park, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK — As Americans gather this Fourth of July to celebrate nearly 250 years of independence, fireworks will illuminate the skies, flags will line neighborhoods, and families will honor the freedoms that define the nation.

For Morris Katz, those freedoms were never simply part of an annual celebration.

They were the reason he had a second chance at life.

A Holocaust survivor who immigrated to the United States in 1949, Katz viewed America as the country that restored everything tyranny had tried to destroy—freedom, opportunity, dignity, and hope. Those ideals became the foundation of an extraordinary career that blended artistic innovation, entrepreneurship, education, and patriotism into a legacy that continues to inspire decades later.

One of his most celebrated works was a portrait of President John F. Kennedy, which was displayed in more than 100 museums across the United States. Katz believed art had the power to unite Americans during moments of triumph and tragedy alike.

Then came November 22, 1963.

As television and radio broadcasts announced that President Kennedy had been assassinated, Katz made a decision that would occupy the next six years of his life.

Having survived the Holocaust and witnessed the devastating consequences of hatred and dictatorship, he saw Kennedy’s assassination as more than the loss of a president. To him, it represented a personal attack on the democratic ideals and freedoms that had given him refuge in America.

Rather than respond with despair, he responded with purpose.

Within minutes of hearing the news, Katz committed himself to creating a lasting tribute to the presidency and to the nation he loved. Over the next six years, he meticulously painted every President of the United States in the traditional Old Master style, devoting approximately 200 hours to each portrait. The result became The Presidential Collection, spanning from George Washington through George H.W. Bush—a tribute not only to America’s presidents, but also to the principles of liberty, democracy, leadership, and public service that define the nation.  

For Katz, the Collection was never intended to be simply an art exhibit.

It was a message.

He believed future generations should understand the blessings of freedom, appreciate the sacrifices made by those who built and defended the nation, and recognize that the presidency represents an institution larger than politics. His hope was that Americans, regardless of party or background, could find common ground through a shared appreciation of the country’s history and democratic ideals.

That vision remains especially relevant as the nation approaches its 250th anniversary.

A stronger closing that ties directly to today’s civic values would be:

Long before creating The Presidential Collection, Morris Katz had already earned international recognition as one of the world’s most sought-after artists. A two-time Guinness World Record holder who surpassed Pablo Picasso as the world’s most prolific artist and was recognized as the world’s quickest painter, Katz was also selected from more than 500 artists to create the official portrait commemorating Pope Paul VI’s historic visit to the United States, with millions of reproductions distributed worldwide. According to a feature in Newsmax Magazine, his privately held Presidential Collection is valued at more than $250 million, yet Katz never offered it for sale. When he was offered $50,000 for his original portrait of President John F. Kennedy shortly after completing it—a remarkable sum at the time—he declined, saying simply, “It represents my freedom.” That conviction inspired the Holocaust survivor to devote the next six years to creating The Presidential Collection as his lasting gift to America. At a time when the values of freedom, patriotism, civic responsibility, and respect for our nation’s history are more important than ever, his message continues to inspire new generations to appreciate the extraordinary blessings of the United States and the leaders who helped shape it.

Recognizing the Collection’s educational value, the New Jersey Commission on Holocaust Education, working with the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce, made The Presidential Collection available as a statewide educational resource, distributing materials to chief school administrators, charter schools, Renaissance School Project leaders, principals, teachers, and guidance counselors to support instruction in American history, patriotism, Holocaust education, leadership, and civic responsibility.   The initiative encourages educators to use the Collection as a gateway for classroom discussions about democracy, national unity, civic responsibility, and the values that continue to shape the United States.  

The Collection’s educational message has since reached thousands of schools, helping students connect the lessons of history with the responsibilities of citizenship.

Its influence also extended far beyond classrooms.

Millions of Presidential Collection postcards featuring Katz’s artwork were distributed throughout the United States and internationally, becoming treasured keepsakes and highly sought-after collectibles. Today, many remain in private collections, preserving a unique artistic record of the American presidency for historians, educators, and collectors alike.

The legacy continues through the Morris Katz Foundation, whose Morris Katz Legacy Award recognizes leaders whose service reflects the principles Katz devoted his life to preserving. Honorees include U.S. Ambassador to Israel Mike Huckabee, Israeli President Isaac Herzog, Congressman Josh Gottheimer for introducing the HEAL Act to strengthen Holocaust education, and Congressman Chris Smith, whose decades of leadership included authoring legislation establishing the U.S. Ambassador-at-Large to Monitor and Combat Anti-Semitism while advancing human rights and religious freedom.

For the business community, Katz’s life also illustrates how enduring enterprises are built.

He transformed personal gratitude into intellectual property, educational programming, collectibles, exhibitions, and a globally recognized brand whose impact continues long after his lifetime. His story demonstrates that the strongest businesses are often driven not only by innovation, but by purpose.

As Americans celebrate another Independence Day, Morris Katz’s greatest masterpiece may not be the paintings themselves.

It may be the timeless message behind them—that freedom is never guaranteed, democracy depends on each generation to protect it, and gratitude for the opportunities America provides can inspire a legacy that endures for generations.

To view The Presidential Collection, visit www.MorrisKatz.org.

For information regarding exhibitions, educational programs, or licensing opportunities, contact Art@MorrisKatz.org.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com | All Rights Reserved

Britain’s competition regulator has opened an initial review of the proposed combination involving Paramount Global and Warner Bros. Discovery, launching another regulatory hurdle for a deal that could reshape the global media and streaming industry.

The U.K. Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) said it is assessing whether the transaction could substantially reduce competition in the United Kingdom across television broadcasting, streaming services, film distribution and advertising markets. The review marks the first phase of Britain’s merger process and will determine whether the proposal requires a more extensive investigation.

The proposed combination would unite some of the world’s best-known entertainment brands under one corporate umbrella. Together, the companies control major television networks, film studios, sports rights and streaming platforms, including CBS, Paramount Pictures, Showtime, HBO, CNN, Warner Bros. Pictures, Discovery, Max, and numerous international television channels.

Regulators are expected to focus on whether the combined company could gain excessive bargaining power when negotiating with cable operators, streaming distributors and advertisers, while also examining how the merger could affect consumers through pricing, programming choices and future competition in streaming.

The review comes as traditional media companies continue searching for greater scale to compete against technology giants including Netflix, Amazon Prime Video, Disney+, Apple TV+, and YouTube, all of which continue investing billions of dollars annually in original programming and global distribution.

Industry analysts say consolidation has become increasingly attractive as media companies struggle with declining cable television subscriptions and rising costs associated with producing premium content. Combining operations could allow companies to reduce expenses, eliminate overlapping businesses and strengthen negotiating leverage with advertisers and distributors.

The CMA said it is inviting comments from interested parties before determining whether the transaction raises sufficient competition concerns to warrant a more detailed Phase 2 investigation. Such reviews can examine market concentration, consumer impact, licensing arrangements and the potential effects on future innovation.

The United Kingdom is not the only jurisdiction reviewing major media consolidation. Large cross-border transactions typically require approval from regulators in multiple countries, including the United States and the European Union, before they can proceed.

Investors are closely watching the regulatory process because approval timelines often influence both financing and integration plans. While some large media mergers have ultimately received approval after agreeing to certain conditions, others have faced lengthy investigations or required companies to divest assets to address competition concerns.

For businesses across the entertainment industry, the outcome could influence future licensing negotiations, advertising markets and streaming competition. Content producers, television distributors and technology companies will also be watching closely, as further consolidation among legacy media companies could reshape the competitive landscape for years to come.

The CMA has not yet indicated when it expects to complete its initial review or whether the proposed transaction will advance to a more comprehensive investigation.

JBizNews Desk | London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Freddie Mac reported Thursday, July 2, that the average rate on a 30-year fixed mortgage eased to 6.43%, its lowest level in seven weeks, down from 6.49% a week earlier. The dip, published in the company’s weekly Primary Mortgage Market Survey, offers a modest bit of relief to homebuyers heading into the heart of the summer buying season, though it lands against a murky outlook for where rates go next.

Sam Khater, Freddie Mac’s chief economist, said the decline coincides with purchase demand that has continued to edge higher, calling it an encouraging sign as prospective buyers respond to small improvements in affordability. The 15-year fixed mortgage also slipped, averaging 5.79%, down from 5.84% the prior week. A year ago, the 30-year rate averaged 6.67% and the 15-year stood at 5.80%, meaning today’s 30-year loan is cheaper than it was last summer while the 15-year is roughly flat.

It helps to understand what the number is. The Freddie Mac survey is a weekly average, built from thousands of loan applications submitted Monday through Wednesday and released each Thursday. Because it smooths results over several days, it can lag the sharper swings seen in daily rate trackers. On the same day the survey showed a seven-week low, some daily lender data pointed the other way, with Zillow-sourced figures putting the typical 30-year purchase rate closer to 6.66%, up slightly from the day before. The takeaway is that rates have been hovering in a narrow band around the mid-6% range, and the weekly average happened to catch the softer end of it.

The bigger question is direction, and here the signals conflict. The drop follows a weak June jobs report released Thursday by the Bureau of Labor Statistics, which showed the economy added just 57,000 jobs, well below the roughly 113,000 expected, with the unemployment rate easing to 4.2%. Softer hiring can pull bond yields and mortgage rates lower, and it revived some hope that the Federal Reserve might hold steady or eventually cut. But the Fed has been signaling the opposite. At its June meeting, policymakers struck a hawkish tone, with a majority indicating a rate increase may still be needed later this year to fight inflation that remains well above the central bank’s 2% target, running near 4.2% in the most recent reading. Fed Chair Kevin Warsh has urged markets to watch the incoming data rather than lean on the central bank for guidance.

For the housing market, even small moves in rates matter. Every quarter-point shift changes a buyer’s monthly payment and, at the margin, decides whether some households can qualify at all. After a long stretch of thin inventory and stretched affordability, homebuilders and real-estate brokerages have been counting on steadier borrowing costs to bring hesitant buyers off the sidelines. Lower rates also tend to lift refinancing, giving existing homeowners a chance to trim payments, and can free up household cash for spending elsewhere in the economy, from furniture and appliances to home improvement.

The affordability picture remains tight even with the dip. Home prices in much of the country are still near record highs, and a rate in the mid-6% range keeps monthly costs far above where they sat during the ultra-low-rate years earlier this decade. That combination has kept many would-be sellers in place, unwilling to trade a cheap existing mortgage for a costlier new one, which in turn has limited the supply of homes for sale.

For now, buyers get a small opening. Whether it widens depends on the tug-of-war between a cooling labor market, which argues for lower rates, and stubborn inflation and a cautious Fed, which argue for higher ones. With the survey collected before the holiday weekend and the next reading due in a week, borrowers weighing a purchase or refinance face the same advice housing economists have offered all year: shop multiple lenders, since quotes can vary enough to save thousands over the life of a loan.

JBizNews Desk | McLean, Virginia

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Amazon is accelerating the global rollout of its Project Kuiper satellite internet network, expanding its challenge to SpaceX’s Starlink as the battle to provide high-speed broadband from space enters a new phase. The company said it is preparing additional satellite launches and expanding ground infrastructure as it works toward building a constellation capable of serving consumers, businesses and governments worldwide.

Project Kuiper is Amazon’s multibillion-dollar effort to deploy more than 3,200 low-Earth orbit satellites, creating a global broadband network designed to bring high-speed internet to underserved and remote communities. The initiative represents one of Amazon’s largest long-term infrastructure investments outside its core retail and cloud-computing businesses.

The company has already begun launching operational satellites and says customer service will expand as more spacecraft are placed into orbit. Amazon plans to use multiple launch providers—including United Launch Alliance (ULA), Blue Origin, Arianespace, and SpaceX—to rapidly build out the constellation over the coming years.

The race is being driven by surging global demand for reliable broadband connectivity. Low-Earth orbit satellite systems offer significantly lower latency than traditional satellite internet, making them attractive not only for rural households but also for airlines, shipping companies, emergency responders, energy producers and governments seeking resilient communications infrastructure.

Amazon is entering a market currently dominated by SpaceX’s Starlink, which has already deployed thousands of satellites and serves customers across dozens of countries. Starlink has become an increasingly important communications platform for businesses, consumers and government agencies, particularly in areas where traditional fiber or wireless networks remain unavailable.

Amazon believes its extensive cloud infrastructure through Amazon Web Services (AWS) provides a competitive advantage. Company executives have said Kuiper customers will benefit from direct integration with AWS, allowing businesses to combine satellite connectivity with cloud computing, artificial intelligence, data storage and enterprise applications.

Industry analysts estimate the global satellite broadband market could generate tens of billions of dollars annually over the next decade as demand for always-on connectivity continues to grow. Competition is also expected to intensify as governments increasingly view satellite communications as critical infrastructure for economic development and national security.

Building a global satellite network, however, requires enormous capital investment. Beyond manufacturing thousands of satellites, operators must finance repeated rocket launches, construct worldwide ground stations and continually replace satellites as they reach the end of their operational lives.

Amazon has committed billions of dollars to Project Kuiper, viewing the initiative as a long-term growth opportunity that complements its broader technology ecosystem. The company has also introduced customer terminals designed to provide affordable internet access for homes, businesses and public institutions.

For investors, Project Kuiper represents another example of Amazon using its financial scale to enter a market with substantial long-term potential, even if profitability remains years away. While the division is unlikely to materially affect near-term earnings, analysts believe satellite broadband could eventually become another major business alongside Amazon’s retail, logistics, advertising and cloud operations.

As launches continue and customer deployments expand, the competition between Project Kuiper and Starlink is expected to reshape the global broadband market, bringing faster internet access to millions of people while opening new opportunities for enterprise communications around the world.

JBizNews Desk | Seattle

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Department of Agriculture is launching a major effort to boost domestic fertilizer production, announcing $500 million in new funding to help build and expand fertilizer manufacturing plants across the United States.

Agriculture Secretary Brooke Rollins unveiled the initiative Wednesday, saying the program is designed to strengthen America’s fertilizer supply chain, reduce dependence on foreign suppliers, and help lower one of farmers’ biggest operating expenses.

The new initiative, known as the Fertilizer Investment and Expansion for Long-Term Domestic Supply (FIELDS) program, will provide grants ranging from $15 million to $150 million for projects that expand U.S. fertilizer production capacity. Companies receiving awards must provide matching funds, with financing coming through the Commodity Credit Corporation. Applications will remain open for 45 days.

The announcement comes after years of volatility in fertilizer prices.

Global fertilizer costs surged following Russia’s invasion of Ukraine and climbed again during recent Middle East conflicts that disrupted energy markets and international shipping. Since fertilizer production depends heavily on natural gas and other energy inputs, higher fuel prices quickly translate into higher costs for farmers.

Those higher costs eventually reach consumers.

Fertilizer is one of the largest expenses involved in producing corn, wheat, soybeans, fruits, and vegetables. It also affects livestock producers because grain is a major component of animal feed. When fertilizer becomes more expensive, food production costs rise throughout the agricultural supply chain, ultimately contributing to higher grocery prices.

Rollins said the new program is intended to accelerate construction of facilities that can produce fertilizer domestically rather than relying on imported supplies.

She contrasted the new initiative with a previous USDA fertilizer program, saying earlier efforts funded numerous projects but resulted in relatively few completed facilities. The new program, she said, will place greater emphasis on projects that are financially sound, construction-ready, and capable of bringing additional production online quickly.

Federal officials say applications will be evaluated based on project readiness, financing, market demand, execution capability, and measurable benefits for American agriculture.

The initiative also reflects a broader shift in U.S. industrial policy.

In recent years, Washington has increasingly treated products such as semiconductors, pharmaceuticals, critical minerals, and agricultural inputs as strategic industries that deserve domestic investment. Policymakers argue that relying too heavily on foreign suppliers leaves the country vulnerable during wars, trade disputes, and other global disruptions.

Alongside the fertilizer announcement, the Environmental Protection Agency introduced a separate challenge program offering up to $30 million in prize funding to encourage development of alternatives to traditional chemical crop desiccation methods used before harvest.

For farmers, however, the immediate focus remains fertilizer affordability.

Building new production facilities will take time, and the matching-fund requirement means private companies must commit substantial capital alongside the federal investment. Even under an accelerated timetable, new plants are unlikely to begin producing fertilizer overnight.

Still, agricultural organizations welcomed the announcement as a step toward improving long-term supply security and increasing competition within the domestic fertilizer market.

For consumers, the program represents an investment aimed at stabilizing food production costs over the coming years. While it will not immediately lower grocery prices, increasing domestic fertilizer production could reduce future price spikes caused by overseas conflicts or supply disruptions.

The success of the initiative will ultimately depend on how quickly projects move from applications to construction and eventually into commercial production. If successful, the program could help strengthen one of the most important links in America’s food supply chain while reducing dependence on imported fertilizer for years to come.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The body of Iran’s slain Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei was laid in state at Tehran’s Grand Mosalla Mosque on Friday, July 3, opening six days of ceremonies that Iranian officials are portraying as a demonstration of national resolve following the recent war with the United States and Israel. Parliament Speaker Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf described the funeral as a renewal of the nation’s commitment to the ideals of the 1979 Islamic Revolution, calling on supporters to continue what he described as Iran’s path of resistance.

Iranian authorities said Khamenei, 86, was killed alongside several members of his family during a joint U.S.-Israeli strike on his compound on February 28, the opening day of the conflict.

State television broadcast images from inside the mosque showing five flag-draped caskets arranged before mourners. Iranian officials said one of the smaller coffins held Khamenei’s one-year-old granddaughter, who they say also died in the strike. Authorities estimate that as many as 20 million people could attend the funeral processions beginning Saturday, potentially exceeding the estimated 10 million who gathered for the 1989 funeral of Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini, the founder of the Islamic Republic.

Several foreign delegations arrived in Tehran to pay their respects, including Dmitry Medvedev, deputy chairman of Russia’s Security Council, and He Wei, vice chairman of China’s National People’s Congress. Officials from Pakistan, Iraq, India, Turkey and several other countries also attended, underscoring Iran’s continued diplomatic relationships despite months of conflict and international pressure.

Questions remain over the public role of Mojtaba Khamenei, the late supreme leader’s son and designated successor. Iranian officials have said he was injured in the February strike and has not appeared publicly since, communicating only through occasional written statements. His absence has fueled speculation among diplomats and investors over how Iran’s next leadership chapter will unfold.

The funeral comes as Washington has begun easing some economic restrictions on Iran following a diplomatic framework reached last month. Under the Islamabad Memorandum of Understanding, signed June 17 by President Donald Trump and Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian, the United States agreed to temporarily ease sanctions on Iranian oil exports, release certain frozen Iranian assets as negotiations continue, support reconstruction planning, and reopen commercial navigation through the Strait of Hormuz.

On June 22, the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) issued a temporary license allowing Iranian crude exports through August 21, 2026, while negotiations continue.

The agreement leaves several of the most contentious issues unresolved, including Iran’s stockpile of enriched uranium, its ballistic missile program, and support for regional proxy groups. On July 1, Ghalibaf reiterated that international inspectors would not be permitted to enter bomb-damaged nuclear facilities.

Some analysts believe the conflict has reinforced the Iranian leadership’s belief that its confrontational strategy succeeded. Narges Bajoghli, an associate professor at the Johns Hopkins School of Advanced International Studies, said the government’s survival following months of military confrontation has strengthened support among some Iranians for its long-standing policy of resistance.

For global markets, the greatest concern remains the Strait of Hormuz, through which roughly 20% of the world’s oil supply passes.

Iranian officials have indicated they are considering imposing transit fees on commercial shipping beginning in mid-August. U.S. Middle East envoy Steve Witkoff has urged Tehran to abandon the proposal during indirect negotiations mediated by Qatar and Pakistan. Meanwhile, Iran’s Khatam al-Anbiya military command warned this week that vessels failing to follow approved transit routes could face military action.

Oil markets have remained relatively calm despite the uncertainty. On Friday, Brent crude traded near $71.76 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate hovered around $68.41, reflecting investor expectations that the ceasefire will continue to hold.

Even so, higher energy costs continue to affect consumers, with U.S. gasoline prices remaining significantly above year-ago levels following months of disruption across Middle Eastern shipping routes.

Speaking Thursday, U.S. Ambassador to the United Nations Michael Waltz warned that President Trump’s patience “is not unlimited,” accusing Tehran of threatening global commerce through repeated disruptions in the Strait of Hormuz.

Formal negotiations are expected to pause during the funeral period before resuming later this month. Iran has announced that Khamenei’s body will travel to Qom, followed by Najaf and Karbala in Iraq, before his burial in Mashhad on July 9.

As diplomatic talks resume and the deadline for Iran’s proposed Hormuz transit policy approaches, governments and financial markets alike will be watching whether the ceasefire evolves into a lasting agreement—or another period of renewed confrontation.

JBizNews Desk | Tehran

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The body of Iran’s slain Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei was laid in state at Tehran’s Grand Mosalla Mosque on Friday, July 3, opening six days of ceremonies that Iranian officials are portraying as a demonstration of national resolve following the recent war with the United States and Israel. Parliament Speaker Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf described the funeral as a renewal of the nation’s commitment to the ideals of the 1979 Islamic Revolution, calling on supporters to continue what he described as Iran’s path of resistance.

Iranian authorities said Khamenei, 86, was killed alongside several members of his family during a joint U.S.-Israeli strike on his compound on February 28, the opening day of the conflict.

State television broadcast images from inside the mosque showing five flag-draped caskets arranged before mourners. Iranian officials said one of the smaller coffins held Khamenei’s one-year-old granddaughter, who they say also died in the strike. Authorities estimate that as many as 20 million people could attend the funeral processions beginning Saturday, potentially exceeding the estimated 10 million who gathered for the 1989 funeral of Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini, the founder of the Islamic Republic.

Several foreign delegations arrived in Tehran to pay their respects, including Dmitry Medvedev, deputy chairman of Russia’s Security Council, and He Wei, vice chairman of China’s National People’s Congress. Officials from Pakistan, Iraq, India, Turkey and several other countries also attended, underscoring Iran’s continued diplomatic relationships despite months of conflict and international pressure.

Questions remain over the public role of Mojtaba Khamenei, the late supreme leader’s son and designated successor. Iranian officials have said he was injured in the February strike and has not appeared publicly since, communicating only through occasional written statements. His absence has fueled speculation among diplomats and investors over how Iran’s next leadership chapter will unfold.

The funeral comes as Washington has begun easing some economic restrictions on Iran following a diplomatic framework reached last month. Under the Islamabad Memorandum of Understanding, signed June 17 by President Donald Trump and Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian, the United States agreed to temporarily ease sanctions on Iranian oil exports, release certain frozen Iranian assets as negotiations continue, support reconstruction planning, and reopen commercial navigation through the Strait of Hormuz.

On June 22, the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) issued a temporary license allowing Iranian crude exports through August 21, 2026, while negotiations continue.

The agreement leaves several of the most contentious issues unresolved, including Iran’s stockpile of enriched uranium, its ballistic missile program, and support for regional proxy groups. On July 1, Ghalibaf reiterated that international inspectors would not be permitted to enter bomb-damaged nuclear facilities.

Some analysts believe the conflict has reinforced the Iranian leadership’s belief that its confrontational strategy succeeded. Narges Bajoghli, an associate professor at the Johns Hopkins School of Advanced International Studies, said the government’s survival following months of military confrontation has strengthened support among some Iranians for its long-standing policy of resistance.

For global markets, the greatest concern remains the Strait of Hormuz, through which roughly 20% of the world’s oil supply passes.

Iranian officials have indicated they are considering imposing transit fees on commercial shipping beginning in mid-August. U.S. Middle East envoy Steve Witkoff has urged Tehran to abandon the proposal during indirect negotiations mediated by Qatar and Pakistan. Meanwhile, Iran’s Khatam al-Anbiya military command warned this week that vessels failing to follow approved transit routes could face military action.

Oil markets have remained relatively calm despite the uncertainty. On Friday, Brent crude traded near $71.76 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate hovered around $68.41, reflecting investor expectations that the ceasefire will continue to hold.

Even so, higher energy costs continue to affect consumers, with U.S. gasoline prices remaining significantly above year-ago levels following months of disruption across Middle Eastern shipping routes.

Speaking Thursday, U.S. Ambassador to the United Nations Michael Waltz warned that President Trump’s patience “is not unlimited,” accusing Tehran of threatening global commerce through repeated disruptions in the Strait of Hormuz.

Formal negotiations are expected to pause during the funeral period before resuming later this month. Iran has announced that Khamenei’s body will travel to Qom, followed by Najaf and Karbala in Iraq, before his burial in Mashhad on July 9.

As diplomatic talks resume and the deadline for Iran’s proposed Hormuz transit policy approaches, governments and financial markets alike will be watching whether the ceasefire evolves into a lasting agreement—or another period of renewed confrontation.

JBizNews Desk | Tehran

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Rivian Automotive reported Thursday from its headquarters in Irvine, California, that it delivered 12,194 electric vehicles during the second quarter while producing 12,613 vehicles at its manufacturing plant in Normal, Illinois, outperforming both its own guidance and Wall Street expectations. The stronger-than-expected performance prompted the company to raise its full-year 2026 delivery outlook, sending Rivian shares up as much as 13% in Thursday trading and giving investors fresh optimism that the electric vehicle maker may finally be gaining momentum after a prolonged period of slowing demand and heavy losses.

The company said second-quarter deliveries exceeded its previously issued guidance of 9,000 to 11,000 vehicles, while also surpassing analyst estimates that generally ranged between 10,500 and 11,000 vehicles. Encouraged by the stronger quarter and its production schedule for the remainder of the year, Rivian increased its expected 2026 deliveries to between 65,000 and 70,000 vehicles, compared with its earlier forecast of 62,000 to 67,000. The revised guidance raises the midpoint of Rivian’s annual outlook by roughly 3,500 vehicles, representing an increase of approximately 5.5%.

The results mark an important milestone for Rivian, whose stock has struggled over the past year as investors questioned whether demand for premium-priced electric vehicles could remain strong in an environment of higher interest rates, increased competition and slowing consumer spending. Prior to Thursday’s rally, Rivian shares had fallen nearly 13% over recent months as concerns mounted over the pace of EV adoption across the broader industry.

Company executives attributed the improved performance to steady demand across several product lines, including Rivian’s R1T electric pickup, R1S sport utility vehicle, and its Electric Delivery Van, originally developed for Amazon, one of Rivian’s largest investors and commercial customers. The company also began customer deliveries of its long-awaited R2 SUV during June, a launch viewed by analysts as one of the most important milestones in Rivian’s history.

The R2 is expected to play a central role in Rivian’s long-term growth strategy. With an introductory starting price of $57,990, the new model is designed to appeal to a broader range of consumers than the company’s larger and more expensive R1 lineup. Lower-priced versions are expected to follow in the coming years, potentially allowing Rivian to compete more directly with mass-market electric vehicles while expanding its customer base beyond early adopters and luxury buyers.

Chief Financial Officer Claire McDonough has previously indicated the company expects to deliver between 20,000 and 25,000 R2 vehicles during the year. Production began at Rivian’s Illinois manufacturing facility in April, with customer deliveries commencing in June. To reach the midpoint of its newly increased annual guidance, Rivian would need to deliver roughly 45,000 additional vehicles during the second half of the year.

Beyond vehicle sales, Rivian is also positioning itself for future growth through autonomous driving technology. The company recently announced that Uber plans to invest up to $1.25 billion as part of a partnership to deploy robotaxis based on Rivian’s R2 platform. Initial deployment is expected to begin in 2028, with plans eventually calling for between 10,000 and 50,000 autonomous vehicles over the following years. The agreement gives Rivian another potential revenue stream beyond traditional vehicle manufacturing as the race to commercialize autonomous transportation accelerates.

The announcement came during a busy day for the electric vehicle industry. Tesla reported quarterly deliveries of 480,126 vehicles, beating expectations even as investors sent its shares lower on concerns over profitability. At the same time, Lucid Group reported weaker-than-expected results and announced a leadership restructuring under new Chief Executive Officer Silvio Napoli, underscoring the widening gap between companies gaining momentum and those still struggling to establish sustainable growth.

For Rivian, Thursday’s report represents one of its strongest operational updates in recent quarters and suggests management’s production plans are beginning to translate into improved sales performance. Still, investors remain focused on whether the company can narrow losses, improve margins and generate positive cash flow as it scales production.

Those questions may begin to receive answers when Rivian reports its full second-quarter financial results on July 30, when investors will receive updated information on profitability, operating expenses, cash reserves and the company’s progress toward becoming a financially sustainable automaker.

While challenges remain across the electric vehicle industry, Rivian’s stronger deliveries, higher guidance and successful launch of the R2 provide the clearest indication yet that the company may be entering a more stable phase of growth.

JBizNews Desk | Irvine, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Treasury Department and Goldman Sachs Asset Management announced Thursday that Goldman will become one of the first major financial firms to participate in the new Trump Accounts savings program, offering professionally managed investment portfolios designed for children. The partnership expands a centerpiece of the Administration’s effort to encourage long-term investing by giving young Americans an opportunity to begin building wealth early in life.

The Trump Accounts program was created under recently enacted federal legislation and provides eligible newborns with a government-funded investment account intended to grow over decades through the financial markets. Families can make additional voluntary contributions, while participating financial institutions manage the investments under federal guidelines.

Goldman Sachs Asset Management said it will offer several low-cost diversified investment options through the program, allowing parents to select portfolios designed to match different levels of investment risk and long-term growth objectives. Company officials said the funds will emphasize broad market diversification and long-term investing rather than short-term trading.

Treasury officials said expanding participation by major investment firms is critical to giving families access to a competitive range of investment products while keeping management fees low. Goldman joins a growing list of financial institutions expected to participate as the program rolls out nationally.

Supporters say the initiative could significantly improve long-term financial security by allowing investment returns to compound over nearly two decades before beneficiaries reach adulthood. Financial planners have long argued that beginning to invest early—even with relatively modest amounts—can dramatically increase lifetime savings because of compound growth.

Under the program, accounts remain in the child’s name and are professionally managed until the beneficiary reaches the age specified under federal law. Withdrawals are generally restricted to approved purposes, including higher education, purchasing a first home, starting a business, or other qualifying long-term financial goals.

Administration officials have described the program as an effort to encourage broader participation in capital markets while helping families build assets across generations. Treasury officials said they expect additional banks and investment companies to announce participation in the coming months.

For Goldman Sachs, the partnership represents another expansion of its wealth management and consumer investment business. While the firm has traditionally focused on institutional investors and high-net-worth clients, recent years have seen Goldman broaden its offerings to reach a wider range of individual investors through digital investment platforms and retirement products.

Business groups welcomed the announcement, saying greater access to professionally managed investment accounts may improve financial literacy while encouraging long-term saving habits among younger generations.

The program’s success will ultimately depend on participation by families, market performance over time, and the number of financial institutions offering competitive investment options. If widely adopted, the accounts could channel billions of dollars into long-term investments while giving millions of children an early start toward building financial assets.

As implementation continues, investors and financial institutions alike will be watching how quickly families enroll and whether additional asset managers join what could become one of the country’s largest long-term savings initiatives.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The United States will not renew the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement (USMCA) in its current form, setting in motion a series of annual reviews that could reshape North America’s trading relationship over the next decade. The announcement, made Wednesday by U.S. Trade Representative Jamieson Greer, follows the treaty’s first mandatory joint review by the three member nations and opens the door to renegotiating key provisions of one of the world’s largest free trade agreements.

Although the decision does not terminate the agreement, it begins a process under the treaty’s sunset clause that requires the United States, Canada and Mexico to meet every year to determine whether the pact should continue unchanged. Unless all three countries eventually agree to renew it, the agreement would expire in 2036.

The USMCA, which replaced the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) in 2020, governs approximately $2 trillion in annual trade and serves as the foundation for deeply integrated supply chains spanning the three countries. The agreement covers everything from automobiles and agriculture to manufacturing, energy, digital trade and intellectual property.

In a statement issued following Wednesday’s virtual review, Ambassador Jamieson Greer said the United States would continue working with both Mexico and Canada to address what Washington considers shortcomings in the agreement, particularly persistent U.S. trade deficits with its two largest trading partners. Greer emphasized that while the agreement remains fully in force, the Administration believes significant improvements are needed before committing to another sixteen-year extension.

A senior administration official said President Donald Trump chose not to grant an automatic renewal, arguing that existing trade imbalances and unresolved market-access issues should first be addressed through additional negotiations.

The review process was built directly into the USMCA during negotiations in 2019. Under the agreement’s sunset clause, the three governments were required to conduct their first formal review after six years. If all parties agreed, the treaty could have been extended another sixteen years, through 2042. Instead, the United States chose to move into the annual-review process.

Importantly for businesses, there are no immediate changes to tariffs, customs procedures or existing trade rules. Goods qualifying under USMCA continue moving across North American borders under the same provisions that existed before Wednesday’s announcement.

Officials in both neighboring countries sought to reassure businesses that cross-border commerce would continue uninterrupted.

Mexican Economy Minister Marcelo Ebrard said Ambassador Greer informed both Mexico and Canada that Washington was not prepared to grant the automatic extension. Instead, the three governments will continue meeting annually while pursuing additional negotiations. Ebrard stressed that companies should expect no immediate operational changes and said the vast majority of trade between Mexico and the United States would continue under existing USMCA rules.

Canadian Trade Minister Dominic LeBlanc likewise said Canada remains committed to strengthening the agreement while urging Washington to address U.S. tariffs affecting Canadian steel, aluminum, automobiles and lumber, issues that continue to generate friction between the longtime trading partners.

The industries with the most at stake are automotive manufacturing and industrial production.

For decades, automakers have built highly integrated North American supply chains that allow engines, transmissions, electronics and thousands of other components to cross U.S., Canadian and Mexican borders multiple times before a finished vehicle reaches consumers. Those investment decisions were made with the expectation of long-term trade certainty.

Business groups warn that shifting to annual reviews could make companies more cautious when deciding where to build factories, expand production, hire workers or invest billions of dollars in future manufacturing projects. While the agreement remains in place today, yearly uncertainty surrounding its future could influence corporate planning throughout the region.

Industry organizations urged all three governments to reach a long-term resolution as quickly as possible.

Matt Blunt, President of the American Automotive Policy Council, said U.S. automakers are encouraged that negotiations will continue and expressed hope for a durable agreement that preserves North America’s manufacturing competitiveness.

Business Roundtable President Joshua Bolten also called on the three governments to work expeditiously toward extending and strengthening the agreement, arguing that long-term certainty benefits businesses, workers and consumers across the continent.

Trade data illustrates why the Administration is seeking changes. According to the U.S. Bureau of Economic Analysis, the United States recorded a goods trade deficit of approximately $46 billion with Canada and about $197 billion with Mexico last year.

Greer has indicated the Administration wants to negotiate additional bilateral protocols addressing automotive rules of origin, manufacturing content requirements and measures designed to prevent goods produced outside North America from benefiting indirectly from USMCA preferences.

For now, businesses across the continent can continue operating under existing rules. However, the agreement governing one of the world’s largest trading relationships is once again open for negotiation, ensuring that trade policy will remain a major issue for manufacturers, exporters, investors and supply-chain managers for years to come.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Tesla reported from its Austin, Texas headquarters on Thursday that it delivered 480,126 vehicles worldwide during the second quarter while producing 451,758 vehicles, comfortably beating Wall Street expectations. Despite the stronger-than-expected delivery numbers, shares of Elon Musk’s electric-vehicle maker fell about 7% as investors shifted their attention to profitability and margins ahead of the company’s earnings report later this month.

Tesla’s deliveries easily surpassed both the company’s internal consensus estimate of 406,024 vehicles and the 406,600 average forecast compiled by StreetAccount. Deliveries also increased 34% from the first quarter, when Tesla delivered 358,023 vehicles, bringing the company close to its all-time quarterly record.

The company’s core lineup continued to dominate sales. The Model 3 sedan and Model Y SUV accounted for 467,762 deliveries, representing roughly 97% of all vehicles sold during the quarter. The remaining 12,364 vehicles, including the Cybertruck and other premium models, made up the balance.

Tesla’s fast-growing energy storage business also remained a bright spot. The company deployed 13.5 gigawatt-hours of battery storage during the quarter, up sharply from 9.6 gigawatt-hours a year earlier. Although the figure came in slightly below analysts’ expectations of approximately 13.8 gigawatt-hours, the energy division continues to generate significantly higher margins than Tesla’s automotive business and has become an increasingly important contributor to overall earnings.

So why did the stock fall despite the strong delivery numbers?

Analysts pointed to the gap between production and deliveries. Tesla delivered approximately 28,000 more vehicles than it produced, indicating the company reduced existing inventory rather than meeting demand solely through new production. While lowering inventory is generally viewed positively, investors typically place greater value on sustained demand supported by ongoing factory output.

The shares had also rallied ahead of the report, leaving little room for additional upside after the delivery announcement.

Attention now turns to July 22, when Tesla will release its full second-quarter financial results after markets close. Investors will be watching closely for average selling prices, operating margins, and profitability—figures that will determine whether the rebound in deliveries translated into stronger earnings.

Tesla cautioned that quarterly deliveries and energy deployments should not be viewed as indicators of financial performance, noting that earnings depend on multiple additional factors.

Regionally, Europe showed signs of recovery following a difficult start to the year, when consumer backlash tied to Musk’s political activity contributed to weaker registrations across Germany, France, and Scandinavia. China also improved following the launch of the refreshed Model Y, although intense competition from BYD and other domestic manufacturers continues to pressure pricing.

North America remained more challenging as buyers increasingly shifted toward hybrid vehicles while the expiration of the federal electric vehicle tax credit weighed on fully electric vehicle demand.

For Tesla, the second quarter suggests its core automotive business may be stabilizing after two consecutive years of declining annual sales. Whether that recovery proves sustainable—and whether it can occur without sacrificing the industry-leading margins that once defined the company—will become much clearer when Tesla reports earnings later this month.

JBizNews Desk | Austin, Texas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


The European Court of Justice, the European Union’s highest court, ruled Thursday that Alphabet and its Google unit must pay a €4.1 billion ($4.67 billion) antitrust penalty, dismissing the company’s final appeal and confirming that Google illegally used its Android mobile operating system to block competition. The ruling, in case C-738/22 P, is final, leaving Google with no further avenue to challenge the fine.

The case began in 2018, when the European Commission imposed what was then a record €4.34 billion antitrust penalty against Google. In 2022, the EU’s General Court reduced the fine to €4.1 billion, and Google appealed. On Thursday, judges in Luxembourg upheld the lower court’s decision, confirming that Google abused its dominant market position through Android.

According to the Commission, Google required smartphone manufacturers using Android to pre-install Google Search, the Chrome browser, and the Google Play Store as a condition for licensing key Google services. Regulators also found the company discouraged manufacturers from using alternative versions of Android, limiting competition and reducing consumer choice across the smartphone market.

Android powers the overwhelming majority of smartphones worldwide outside Apple’s ecosystem, making the Commission’s findings especially significant for app developers, device manufacturers, and competing search providers.

Google defended its business practices following the ruling. A company spokesperson said the decision overlooks Google’s investments in keeping Android open, interoperable, and free for manufacturers while arguing that the operating system has expanded—not limited—consumer choice and helped thousands of developers and businesses across Europe.

Consumer advocates welcomed the decision. Agustín Reyna, Director General of the European Consumer Organization, said dominant technology companies cannot use their market power to prevent competition or restrict consumer choice. The case was one of the defining enforcement actions led by former EU Competition Commissioner Margrethe Vestager, whose portfolio is now held by Teresa Ribera.

Beyond the financial penalty, legal experts say the decision further strengthens Europe’s aggressive approach toward regulating Big Tech. The ruling complements the European Union’s Digital Markets Act, legislation designed to prevent dominant digital platforms from using their market position to disadvantage competitors before lengthy antitrust cases become necessary.

Google also faces mounting legal pressure elsewhere. Earlier this week, a Swedish court ordered the company to pay approximately $1.5 billion in damages to price-comparison service PriceRunner, now owned by Klarna, over anti-competitive practices.

Despite the regulatory setbacks, Alphabet continues investing heavily in artificial intelligence infrastructure. The company recently announced plans to spend $40 billion constructing three major data centers in Texas as it competes with rivals including OpenAI and Anthropic in the race to expand AI computing capacity.

Alphabet shares traded about 1% lower following Thursday’s ruling, suggesting investors had largely anticipated the outcome. While the financial impact on Alphabet is manageable given its size, the decision sends another clear message that European regulators intend to maintain strict oversight of the world’s largest technology companies.

JBizNews Desk | Luxembourg

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump on Thursday defended his family’s sprawling business interests and his children’s commercial activity, waving off conflict-of-interest concerns days after a federal ethics filing showed he earned more than $1.4 billion from cryptocurrency ventures last year. Speaking from the Oval Office, Trump said the presidency reaches so deeply into the economy that almost anything his children do could be cast as a conflict. “If they buy an energy efficient truck, they have inside information,” he said. Trump added that he tells his children to “stay away” from anything that could look improper, but said they were running businesses long before he entered politics.

The remarks followed the release Tuesday of Trump’s annual financial disclosure by the U.S. Office of Government Ethics. The 927-page report — nearly 700 pages longer than his prior filing — showed the president collected more than $1.4 billion connected to digital assets in 2025, his first year back in the White House. That figure made crypto, not real estate, his single largest source of income. The interview aired on CNBC and was conducted by anchor Joe Kernen.

The disclosure listed roughly $635 million in royalties from a licensing deal tied to his $TRUMP meme coin, launched days before his second inauguration. It also showed more than $500 million from World Liberty Financial, the crypto venture Trump co-founded in 2024 with his sons Eric Trump and Donald Trump Jr. His youngest son, Barron Trump, is listed with the firm as well.

Trump’s older, traditional businesses still produced heavy income. The filing reported about $122 million from Trump Doral, $77.5 million from Mar-a-Lago, and $39 million from another property. The president also disclosed more than $80 million in income from legal settlements with media companies including ABC, CBS, Meta, YouTube and X, plus millions in book and merchandise royalties.

For companies watching Washington, the more consequential thread was Trump’s growing willingness to take direct government stakes in private firms. Pressed on a report that the government could take a 5% stake in OpenAI, Trump sidestepped the question and instead pointed to Intel, the struggling chipmaker. The administration announced an $8.9 billion investment in Intel common stock last August, handing the government a 10% stake. Trump said he told the company he could solve its problems but wanted “10% of the company.”

That approach — an administration trading help for equity — is reshaping how executives think about federal involvement in their industries. It arrives alongside a heavy trade agenda. The administration said Wednesday it would not renew the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement for another 16 years, a move that keeps the pact alive for a decade but triggers annual reviews that could reopen major terms. A senior official said Trump’s main concern is the trade deficits the United States runs with Canada and Mexico.

Trump also used the interview to stress that he does not want an economic downturn on his record. He invoked former president Herbert Hoover, who led the country into the Great Depression, and blamed him for raising interest rates and taxes. “I don’t want to be Herbert Hoover,” Trump said, casting himself as focused on growth and low borrowing costs.

The president returned repeatedly to the economy’s political stakes. His war with Iran, which began in February, remains in a fragile ceasefire, and Trump has argued that instability in the Middle East is itself a market risk. He repeated a claim that Iran will buy American farm goods as part of a potential peace deal, an assertion Tehran has denied.

Critics say the disclosure underscores how tightly the president’s personal wealth is now tied to industries his administration regulates, particularly crypto, where the White House is pushing Congress to pass new market rules. A representative for the Trump Organization said the filing showed a company with valuable assets, substantial liquidity and a conservative balance sheet, and called the nearly 1,000-page report a sign of transparency.

For businesses, investors and lobbyists, the combined message from the disclosure and the interview is that the lines between Trump’s policy agenda and his family’s commercial interests remain blurred — and that the administration is comfortable operating in that gray zone as it takes equity in companies, rewrites trade deals and leans on the Federal Reserve to keep rates in check.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A global shortage of memory chips has grown severe enough that Apple is pursuing suppliers it would normally avoid. According to reporting published Wednesday, July 1, by Bloomberg, the iPhone maker is seeking approval to purchase memory chips from two Chinese semiconductor companies that appear on a U.S. Pentagon blacklist, as the artificial intelligence boom continues to tighten global supplies and drive up costs.

The companies are ChangXin Memory Technologies (CXMT) and Yangtze Memory Technologies (YMTC), two of China’s largest memory-chip manufacturers. Apple is reportedly exploring the use of their memory products in devices sold within China while lobbying the Trump administration, including the Commerce Department and the White House, for permission to move forward.

The effort reflects just how strained the global memory market has become.

Demand for advanced memory chips has exploded as technology companies race to build artificial intelligence data centers. Massive orders from AI developers have absorbed much of the world’s available supply, leaving fewer chips for smartphones, tablets, laptops, and other consumer electronics.

Industry analysts estimate DRAM memory prices climbed roughly 60% during 2025 and could rise another 30% to 40% during 2026, with shortages expected to continue well into 2027.

Apple has already begun passing some of those higher costs to consumers.

Earlier this year, the company increased prices on several MacBook models by between $100 and $300 while raising prices on selected iPads, HomePods, and Apple TV products. Although iPhone prices have remained unchanged, analysts say the continuing memory shortage could place additional pricing pressure on future devices if supply conditions fail to improve.

For consumers, the story extends well beyond Apple.

Memory chips are essential components inside virtually every modern electronic device. When prices rise, manufacturers throughout the technology industry face higher production costs, increasing the likelihood of more expensive laptops, smartphones, gaming systems, servers, and other connected products.

The shortage also highlights the growing impact of artificial intelligence on everyday consumers.

While AI investment has fueled record profits for many technology companies, it has also redirected enormous quantities of advanced semiconductors away from traditional consumer products. The same chips powering AI servers are competing with manufacturers building devices used by millions of households every day.

Apple’s negotiations also underscore the increasingly complex relationship between business and geopolitics.

Both CXMT and YMTC have been identified by the Pentagon as companies with alleged ties to China’s military. Although purchasing products from those companies is not automatically prohibited under every circumstance, Apple is seeking clear guidance from U.S. officials before moving ahead, hoping to avoid future regulatory complications or political backlash.

Some industry analysts believe Apple’s objective is not necessarily to lower costs but simply to secure an additional source of supply.

Supply-chain analyst Ming-Chi Kuo has noted that China’s own demand for memory chips already exceeds domestic production, suggesting Apple may gain only limited cost savings even if approval is granted. Instead, adding another supplier could reduce the risk of production delays as the global shortage continues.

For investors, the situation demonstrates how artificial intelligence is reshaping the technology supply chain in unexpected ways. Companies that manufacture memory chips have become some of the biggest beneficiaries of the AI boom, while device makers face mounting pressure from rising component costs.

For consumers, the takeaway is straightforward. As long as demand for AI infrastructure continues to outpace memory production, the cost of many electronic devices is likely to remain under upward pressure. Apple’s willingness to seek approval to purchase chips from previously avoided suppliers illustrates just how tight the global market has become.

The AI revolution may be transforming business, but it is also making the everyday technology Americans rely on more expensive—and even the world’s most valuable company is searching for new ways to secure the components it needs.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

South Korea’s benchmark Kospi index suffered one of its sharpest declines in years on Thursday, closing down 655.32 points, or 7.89%, at 7,648.09, after a broad selloff in global semiconductor stocks triggered panic selling across Asia. The steep decline pushed the index back below the 8,000 level and briefly activated an automatic trading halt on the Korea Exchange, underscoring how heavily the country’s stock market has become tied to the fortunes of its semiconductor industry.

Leading the losses were South Korea’s two largest chipmakers. SK Hynix plunged 14.57%, while Samsung Electronics fell 9.06%, wiping billions of dollars off their combined market value in a single trading session. Together, the two companies now account for roughly half of the Kospi’s total weighting, meaning sharp swings in either stock can significantly move the entire market.

The selling began overnight in the United States after another wave of weakness swept through technology and semiconductor shares on Wall Street. Investors were particularly unsettled after Meta Platforms announced plans to enter the cloud-computing leasing business by renting excess artificial-intelligence computing capacity to outside customers. The move raised fresh questions about whether the largest technology companies may begin slowing or reshaping the massive spending that has fueled the AI infrastructure boom.

The concerns quickly spread throughout the semiconductor sector. In U.S. trading, memory-chip makers including Micron Technology and SanDisk each lost about 10%, setting the tone for heavy selling when Asian markets opened Thursday.

South Korea felt the impact more than most markets because of the extraordinary concentration of its benchmark index. According to Zavier Wong, a market analyst at eToro, Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix together now represent approximately 50% of the Kospi’s total market capitalization, nearly double their combined weighting from the end of last year. That concentration has made South Korea’s stock market increasingly dependent on the performance of the global semiconductor industry and, more recently, on investor sentiment surrounding artificial intelligence.

Foreign investors led Thursday’s selling, unloading more than 5 trillion won—approximately $3.7 billion—worth of South Korean equities. Domestic retail investors stepped in aggressively to purchase shares, helping absorb some of the selling pressure, but were unable to prevent the broader market from posting one of its worst declines in recent memory. During the afternoon session, exchange officials activated a sidecar, an automatic mechanism that temporarily pauses certain program trades during periods of extreme volatility.

The losses spread quickly throughout Asia. In Japan, memory-chip producer Kioxia, now one of the country’s largest technology companies, fell more than 13%, helping drag the Nikkei 225 down 2.47%. South Korea’s technology-heavy Kosdaq index also suffered heavy losses, falling 6.74%.

Despite the sharp decline, several market analysts argued that Thursday’s rout appeared driven more by profit-taking after months of extraordinary gains than by any deterioration in the industry’s long-term fundamentals.

Fabien Yip, market analyst at IG, said many investors chose to lock in profits following the remarkable rally semiconductor shares have enjoyed during the global AI boom. While valuations have risen dramatically, demand for advanced memory chips used in artificial-intelligence servers continues to remain strong.

In fact, South Korea’s semiconductor industry continues to invest aggressively in future production. Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix together are planning to invest an estimated $520 billion in four new semiconductor manufacturing complexes across South Korea over the coming years. On Thursday, SK Hynix Chief Executive Kwak Noh-jung reaffirmed the company’s plans to invest approximately 100 trillion won, or about $64 billion, in domestic facilities, including construction of a major new fabrication plant expected to begin next year.

Research firms also remain optimistic about the industry’s longer-term outlook. Just one day before the selloff, Morningstar raised its fair-value estimates for both Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix. Analyst Jing Jie Yu said the current memory-chip cycle continues to outperform earlier expectations, citing tight supply conditions, resilient demand for AI hardware, and growing numbers of long-term supply agreements between chip manufacturers and major technology companies.

For South Korea, where semiconductors remain the country’s largest export industry, Thursday’s market decline served as another reminder of how closely the nation’s economy has become linked to the global race to build artificial intelligence infrastructure. While investor sentiment can change quickly, the country’s largest technology companies remain central players in one of the world’s fastest-growing industries.

JBizNews Desk | Seoul

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The world’s biggest sporting event may also give America’s job market an unexpected boost.

According to a new forecast from Goldman Sachs, the FIFA World Cup could add approximately 40,000 jobs to the June U.S. employment report as millions of visitors travel across the country for matches, increasing demand for hotels, restaurants, transportation, entertainment, and retail workers.

The estimate comes just ahead of Thursday’s closely watched June employment report, one of the most important economic releases of the month and a key indicator for the Federal Reserve as it evaluates the strength of the U.S. economy.

Economists surveyed by Dow Jones expect employers to have added roughly 115,000 jobs during June, down from 172,000 in May. Goldman Sachs, however, believes the World Cup could temporarily lift payroll growth closer to 140,000, with roughly 40,000 of those jobs directly tied to tournament-related hiring.

The investment bank based its analysis on payroll information from Homebase, a workforce management platform serving thousands of small businesses nationwide.

The hiring surge has been concentrated in the tournament’s host cities, where restaurants, hotels, stadiums, retailers, and transportation companies have expanded staffing to accommodate millions of domestic and international visitors.

According to Goldman, hiring in the 11 U.S. World Cup host cities declined only 1.2% from a year earlier, compared with a 3.5% decline across non-host markets. Hospitality employment increased nearly 9.5% in those cities as businesses added workers to meet the surge in customer demand.

For local businesses, the tournament represents one of the largest short-term economic opportunities in years.

Hotels require additional housekeeping and front desk employees. Restaurants need more servers, cooks, bartenders, and managers. Airports, transit systems, rideshare companies, retailers, security firms, and entertainment venues have all expanded staffing as visitors continue arriving from around the world.

While the hiring boost is meaningful, economists caution that much of it will likely prove temporary.

Goldman expects the World Cup’s impact to diminish significantly in July before turning slightly negative in August as many seasonal positions disappear after the tournament concludes. That means some of June’s hiring strength may simply reflect jobs being pulled forward rather than long-term employment growth.

For Federal Reserve policymakers, that distinction matters.

A stronger-than-expected payroll report driven by temporary sporting-event hiring does not necessarily indicate a stronger underlying economy. Economists will closely examine wage growth, labor-force participation, and private-sector hiring to determine whether job creation remains healthy after removing the World Cup effect.

The tournament is also expected to generate billions of dollars in additional economic activity through tourism, hotel stays, restaurant spending, transportation, shopping, and entertainment. Those benefits extend well beyond employers, supporting thousands of small businesses across host cities while generating higher tax revenues for local governments.

The final match will be played in the New York–New Jersey region later this month, placing one of the nation’s largest economic markets at the center of the global event.

For businesses, the World Cup provides a welcome burst of consumer spending during the summer travel season. For economists, however, it also creates a temporary distortion that must be separated from broader labor-market trends.

When Thursday’s employment report is released, investors will be looking beyond the headline number to determine whether hiring remains fundamentally strong—or whether part of the gain simply reflects the economic impact of the world’s biggest soccer tournament.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

David Troostwyk, Vice President of the London Diamond Bourse, this week called on the presidents of the world’s diamond bourses to elect Ahmed Bin Sulayem as the next President of the World Federation of Diamond Bourses (WFDB) when the trade gathers for the 41st World Diamond Congress in Singapore from July 12–15. Troostwyk, who is standing for Vice President on the same slate, said the decisions made at this Congress will shape the direction of the nearly 80-year-old organization for years to come.

Held once every three years, the Congress brings together the federation’s 24 member bourses, and this year’s gathering includes the election of a new leadership team. Current President Yoram Dvash and the Executive Council are stepping down after completing two terms spanning six years—a period marked by the COVID-19 pandemic, the rapid rise of lab-grown diamonds, conflict in the Middle East, new U.S. tariffs, and the sale of De Beers. Troostwyk credited the outgoing leadership with helping stabilize the industry, strengthening support for the Natural Diamond Council, and welcoming Botswana and Angola as affiliate members.

Troostwyk said the federation was originally established after the Second World War to create a trusted international framework for the diamond trade. Its mission was to establish common trading standards for rough and polished diamonds, promote ethical business practices, resolve disputes, and represent the industry with one unified voice.

The foundation of that system, he noted, has always been trust. Members of affiliated bourses could confidently trade with one another knowing they all operated under the same code of conduct. Violations carried significant consequences, including expulsion from a local bourse and exclusion from the federation’s worldwide trading network.

That framework also helped create the World Diamond Council in 2000, which played a leading role in developing the Kimberley Process to combat conflict diamonds. Working alongside the International Diamond Manufacturers Association, the federation also helped establish internationally recognized grading terminology while enforcing ethical standards and disclosure rules for synthetic diamonds.

Although manufacturing has shifted toward Asia and digital trading has reduced reliance on traditional trading floors, Troostwyk argued that the need for a trusted international network has only grown stronger as governments increase compliance, sanctions, sourcing, and traceability requirements.

His preferred candidate is Ahmed Bin Sulayem, Executive Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of the Dubai Multi Commodities Centre (DMCC) and Chairman of the Dubai Diamond Exchange.

Over the past two decades, Bin Sulayem has transformed Dubai into one of the world’s leading diamond trading hubs. According to the campaign statement, DMCC has expanded from just 28 member companies in 2003 to more than 26,000 businesses representing 180 countries, employing over 90,000 people, including approximately 1,400 companies involved in precious stones. Today, the Dubai Diamond Exchange ranks among the largest diamond exchanges globally.

Bin Sulayem is also widely recognized for his leadership in global diamond governance. He has chaired the Kimberley Process three times, most recently serving as its Custodian Chair in 2025, where he championed blockchain-based digital certification and supported the establishment of a permanent Kimberley Process Secretariat in Botswana.

Troostwyk said Bin Sulayem’s relationships with African producer nations, Indian manufacturing centers, retailers across Asia, the Gulf, Europe, and North America, together with his experience working alongside governments and civil society, uniquely position him to lead the federation through an increasingly complex regulatory environment.

The proposed leadership slate includes Bin Sulayem as President, Troostwyk as Vice President, and Molefi Letsiki as Treasurer.

Troostwyk built his career without a family diamond business, founding the advisory firm Salotro and digital trading platform CiviGem while helping modernize the London Diamond Bourse during his presidency through expanded education programs and diversified revenue initiatives.

Letsiki, the son of a diamond polisher, is Founder and Director of Molefi Letsiki Diamonds, described in the campaign statement as the world’s first majority Black-owned De Beers Sightholder. He also serves as President of the Diamond, Gem and Jewellery Association of Southern Africa, is a member of the WFDB Executive Council, and serves as a World Diamond Council Ambassador. His election would further strengthen representation for African producing nations following the federation’s expanded relationship with Botswana and Angola.

All three candidates have also been involved with the Young Diamantaires, a next-generation industry organization originally launched as a WFDB initiative by Executive Council member Rami Baron before becoming an independent non-profit. The organization has organized educational visits to diamond mines, industry tours in Surat, and helped build a science laboratory for a school in an African mining community. Troostwyk described the group’s development as an example of the federation investing in the industry’s future leadership.

The business challenges facing the industry remain significant. Growing competition from lab-grown diamonds, softer global demand, and increasingly strict regulations governing Russian-origin goods continue to pressure prices, margins, and employment throughout the mining, manufacturing, and retail sectors.

Troostwyk argued that a modernized federation committed to promoting the value of natural diamonds will be essential to protecting the industry and the businesses that depend on it. The final decision now rests with the presidents of each member bourse gathering in Singapore.

The 41st World Diamond Congress will be held alongside the Singapore International Jewelry Expo, featuring discussions on African supply, Asian demand, geopolitics, and the next generation of industry leadership.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A major change in health coverage took effect Wednesday, July 1, and two of the country’s largest retailers are stepping in to help seniors make sense of it. For the first time, Medicare has begun covering obesity drugs through a temporary government program, and Walmart and CVS Health are rolling out new services to help older Americans understand, access, and manage the benefit.

The coverage comes through a demonstration program known as Bridge, which allows eligible Medicare beneficiaries to receive GLP-1 obesity medications for a copay of about $50 per month. That represents a dramatic shift for millions of seniors. Popular weight-loss medications made by Novo Nordisk and Eli Lilly have largely been out of reach for older Americans living on fixed incomes, and the new program significantly expands access. The initiative, administered by the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services (CMS), is scheduled to run through the end of 2027.

The challenge is that many seniors do not yet know the benefit exists. A survey released by the Obesity Care Advocacy Network found that 82% of older Americans were unaware Medicare was beginning to cover obesity medications. Even among those who have heard about the program, determining eligibility and understanding the enrollment process can be confusing.

That is creating an opportunity for retailers with thousands of neighborhood pharmacies.

CVS Health is expanding support through its pharmacy network and MinuteClinic locations by helping patients understand coverage, navigate insurance requirements, and manage medication side effects. The company is also introducing a $49 MinuteClinic virtual visit, allowing eligible patients to speak with a licensed clinician who can evaluate them and prescribe a GLP-1 medication when appropriate.

Walmart and Sam’s Club are taking a similar approach, offering pharmacist consultations, educational materials, and assistance understanding the new Medicare benefit in stores across the country, including many rural communities where access to specialists is often limited.

For consumers, the strategy makes sense. Pharmacies are often the easiest point of entry into the healthcare system. While physician appointments may take weeks, pharmacists are available in neighborhoods every day. By helping seniors navigate a complicated new federal benefit, Walmart and CVS strengthen customer relationships while positioning themselves at the center of what could become one of the fastest-growing prescription categories in America.

The opportunity for drug manufacturers is equally significant. GLP-1 medications produced by Novo Nordisk and Eli Lilly have already transformed the pharmaceutical industry. Opening Medicare coverage to millions of beneficiaries could dramatically expand demand, especially as obesity affects more than 40% of American adults.

The program also highlights the growing debate over healthcare costs. These medications can cost hundreds of dollars each month without insurance, making widespread Medicare coverage an expensive commitment for taxpayers. Researchers also continue studying long-term outcomes, including evidence that some patients regain weight after stopping treatment, raising questions about how long coverage should continue and who should ultimately pay for it.

Another uncertainty is what happens after 2027. The Bridge demonstration was originally intended as a temporary transition before private Medicare Part D insurers assumed responsibility for broader coverage. However, several insurers declined to participate voluntarily, citing concerns about costs and program design, prompting federal officials to extend the demonstration instead.

For seniors, however, the immediate impact is straightforward. A medication that was financially out of reach for many older Americans is now available for about $50 per month for eligible beneficiaries. That could improve access to treatment for millions of people while reducing long-term health complications associated with obesity.

For Walmart and CVS, the program represents more than another prescription to fill. It is an opportunity to become trusted healthcare advisers for millions of Medicare beneficiaries at a time when pharmacies are increasingly expanding beyond dispensing medications into providing broader healthcare services.

Whether the program ultimately becomes permanent remains uncertain. Its future will depend on costs, patient outcomes, and future policy decisions. But for now, seniors have a new benefit available, and two of America’s largest pharmacy operators are racing to help them use it.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Lines are stretching for hours at gas stations across Russia, and frustration is mounting as months of Ukrainian drone attacks on oil refineries have disrupted fuel supplies across the country. Fuel rationing has now spread to multiple regions, while videos circulating on social media show motorists waiting at empty pumps and paying higher prices. President Vladimir Putin, in a rare public acknowledgment, admitted that “problems persist for both motorists and businesses,” while insisting the shortages are temporary and manageable.

The disruption is striking for one of the world’s largest oil producers.

According to multiple reports, Ukrainian forces have carried out dozens of drone attacks against Russian refineries, fuel depots, storage terminals, and other oil infrastructure since the spring. Energy analysts estimate that more than 20% of Russia’s refining capacity has been temporarily taken offline, sharply reducing domestic gasoline and diesel production.

Some of Russia’s largest refineries have suffered repeated attacks. Facilities serving the Moscow region were among those damaged, forcing repairs expected to take months. As refinery output declined, authorities introduced fuel-purchase limits in numerous regions to prevent panic buying and preserve supplies for essential industries.

Major fuel retailers have capped gasoline purchases per customer, while some local governments have implemented additional restrictions as long lines formed at filling stations. The shortages have become particularly challenging during the busy summer travel and agricultural season, when fuel demand typically reaches its highest levels.

The economic impact extends well beyond motorists.

Russia remains one of the world’s largest exporters of crude oil and petroleum products. Damage to refining infrastructure has reduced the country’s ability to process crude domestically while also complicating fuel exports, placing additional pressure on government revenues that help finance military operations.

Industry analysts say Russia may need to import certain refined fuels to stabilize domestic supplies—an unusual development for a country long considered an energy superpower. Officials are also reportedly evaluating additional restrictions on diesel exports to ensure enough fuel remains available for domestic consumers and businesses.

The disruptions have begun affecting Russia’s broader economy.

Higher wholesale fuel prices increase transportation costs for manufacturers, farmers, retailers, and freight companies, eventually filtering through to consumer prices. Economists also warn that continued fuel shortages could slow economic growth while complicating efforts by Russia’s central bank to reduce interest rates.

Agriculture faces particular challenges as harvest season accelerates. Farmers depend heavily on diesel fuel for planting, harvesting, and transporting crops, making reliable fuel supplies essential for food production.

For global energy markets, the situation remains significant.

Although Russia continues exporting large volumes of crude oil, prolonged refinery disruptions reduce flexibility within global fuel markets and increase uncertainty for buyers. Energy traders continue monitoring both refinery repairs and the possibility of additional Ukrainian strikes that could further limit production.

Ukraine has indicated it intends to continue targeting Russian energy infrastructure as part of its broader military strategy, arguing that refinery attacks reduce Russia’s ability to finance the war while disrupting military logistics.

As long as the attacks continue and damaged facilities remain under repair, analysts expect fuel shortages to persist through much of the summer.

For businesses worldwide, the developments serve as another reminder that geopolitical conflicts can quickly disrupt global energy markets and supply chains. Even one of the world’s largest oil-producing nations is discovering that damaged refining infrastructure can create shortages, higher prices, and economic uncertainty far beyond the battlefield.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

For months, rising prices have squeezed American households, driven largely by an energy shock tied to the war with Iran. Now, with oil and gas costs falling in the wake of a U.S.-Iran détente, traders on the prediction-market platform Kalshi are betting the worst is over. As reported Wednesday by CNBC, traders now see only about a 28% chance that headline inflation climbs above 4.2% this year—the annual rate recorded in May.

That 4.2% figure is increasingly viewed as the likely peak. On Kalshi, participants buy and sell contracts tied to real economic outcomes, effectively putting money behind their forecasts. These contracts settle based on the monthly Consumer Price Index released by the Bureau of Labor Statistics. The next CPI report, covering June, is scheduled for July 14.

The shift in sentiment is closely tied to energy prices. Gasoline, diesel, and shipping costs surged after the conflict with Iran disrupted traffic through the Strait of Hormuz, through which roughly one-fifth of the world’s oil normally passes. As shipping has resumed and crude oil prices have retreated from their wartime highs, inflation pressures have begun easing across the broader economy.

For American families, lower energy prices can quickly translate into lower transportation costs, reduced shipping expenses, and eventually slower price increases for groceries, consumer goods, and travel. If inflation has indeed peaked, households could begin seeing meaningful relief after months of elevated living costs.

Prediction markets are not guarantees, however. They reflect the collective expectations of traders and adjust rapidly as new information becomes available. While Kalshi has become an increasingly watched indicator of market sentiment, the official inflation data released by the government will ultimately determine whether those expectations prove accurate.

The recent inflation surge has been driven largely by what economists describe as a supply shock rather than broad-based consumer demand. Energy prices affected nearly every sector of the economy, from manufacturing to transportation. As that supply disruption fades, inflationary pressure should ease naturally—provided oil markets remain stable.

The outlook also carries implications for interest rates. Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh has indicated the central bank remains focused on returning inflation to its 2% target before considering lower interest rates. If inflation continues to cool, it could eventually give the Fed greater flexibility to reduce borrowing costs for mortgages, auto loans, and credit cards, though officials have emphasized they are not rushing to make that decision.

There are still significant risks. The ceasefire involving Iran remains fragile, and any renewed disruption in the Strait of Hormuz could quickly send energy prices—and inflation—higher again. Markets are currently betting that stability will continue, but geopolitical developments remain an important wildcard.

For consumers, the takeaway is one of cautious optimism. Markets increasingly believe the inflation spike that defined much of the spring has passed, with falling energy prices leading the improvement. The upcoming inflation reports will determine whether that optimism is justified. If current trends continue, American households may finally begin to experience sustained relief from the price pressures that have weighed on budgets throughout the year.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

New York City’s electric utility, Con Edison, spent Thursday working to keep its power grid stable as a dangerous heat wave sent temperatures to 100 degrees, the hottest conditions the city has experienced in years. The National Weather Service placed New York under an Extreme Heat Warning through the July 4 weekend, with temperatures reaching 100 degrees Thursday and remaining dangerously hot into Friday. Heat index values are expected to climb as high as 110 to 115 degrees across parts of the tri-state area.

To keep its equipment from failing under the strain, Con Edison reduced voltage by 8% in the northwest Bronx and the northern tip of Manhattan, a protective measure that affected roughly 39,600 customers in the Bronx. The company activated its Emergency Response Center earlier in the week, placed repair crews on standby, and asked customers to reduce electricity use between 2 p.m. and 10 p.m., when air-conditioning demand is at its highest.

For most New Yorkers, the power grid is invisible until it stops working. For the businesses that depend on it, a heat wave like this is a direct hit to the bottom line — and a preview of a more expensive future.

When millions of air conditioners switch on at once, the strain falls hardest on the aging network of underground cables and substations beneath the city. Con Edison says it invested a record $3.9 billion upgrading its systems across New York City and Westchester County ahead of this summer to handle the more frequent and more intense heat waves the region is now experiencing. That investment comes with a price.

The utility has proposed raising electric rates by about 11.3% and gas rates by 13.4% across New York City and Westchester, increases that would affect roughly 3.6 million residential customers and more than 368,000 commercial accounts if approved by the New York Public Service Commission. Con Edison says the increases are needed to fund reliability upgrades like those being put to the test this week. Critics argue New Yorkers already pay some of the nation’s highest energy bills. The average city household using 600 kilowatt-hours a month paid about $218.55 in 2025, up from roughly $142.51 in 2016.

Small businesses feel the impact most. Restaurants, retail stores and offices that must keep customers and employees comfortable cannot simply turn off the air conditioning. Summer electricity bills for a typical small business could increase by around 8% under the proposal, while larger commercial users could see increases closer to 10%. During triple-digit heat, keeping the lights on and the building cool is not optional — it is the cost of staying in business.

That reality has created a growing demand-response industry. Through Con Edison’s Smart Usage Rewards program, customers with smart meters can earn payments for voluntarily reducing electricity use during peak demand periods. Frank Bruckner, co-founder and CEO of Meltek, one of the utility’s demand-response partners, said nearly all customers with smart meters are eligible, yet most have never heard of the program. His company currently works with about 6,000 participants. The economic logic is simple: paying customers to reduce usage during peak hours is less expensive than operating older, less-efficient “peaker” power plants that run only on the hottest days.

The pressure extends well beyond New York. This week, Energy Secretary Chris Wright signed two emergency orders under the Federal Power Act authorizing PJM Interconnection — the grid operator serving New Jersey, Pennsylvania and 11 other states — to curtail electricity use by large power consumers, including some data centers, and allow certain power plants to operate beyond normal pollution limits through July 3. PJM forecast record electricity demand of about 166,304 megawatts for Thursday, potentially surpassing its all-time record set in 2006. Although New York operates on a separate grid managed by the New York Independent System Operator, the federal action highlights how severely the heat is straining power systems across the East Coast and how rapidly expanding energy-hungry data centers are reshaping electricity demand.

City Hall is urging conservation to reduce pressure on the grid. Mayor Zohran Mamdani asked residents and businesses to set thermostats to 78 degrees while coordinating with Con Edison and National Grid. The city also kept municipal buildings at 78 degrees, dimmed lights during peak demand, opened additional cooling centers, extended pool hours and temporarily suspended evictions for two days. While the request has drawn political criticism, reducing electricity demand during peak hours lowers the risk of outages that can cost businesses sales, disrupt operations and spoil inventory.

The forecast offers little relief before the holiday weekend. With temperatures expected to remain near 100 through Friday before gradually easing, the strain on New York’s electric grid — and on the budgets of the households and businesses that rely on it — is likely to continue through the Fourth of July.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The consequences of a landmark Supreme Court decision are now spreading across the federal government. In a 6-3 ruling issued Monday in the case known as Trump v. Slaughter, Chief Justice John Roberts and the court’s conservative majority handed President Donald Trump sweeping authority to fire the heads of independent agencies that police markets, protect consumers, and enforce workplace rules.

The decision overturns a 91-year-old precedent, Humphrey’s Executor, that since 1935 had shielded officials at agencies like the Federal Trade Commission from being removed without cause. The case arose from Trump’s firing of Rebecca Slaughter, a Democratic FTC commissioner dismissed without cause because her views did not align with the administration’s agenda. Roberts wrote that the president may remove his subordinates at will.

The ruling does not abolish these agencies, but it changes who controls them. Presidents can now pack independent commissions with members of a single party, giving the White House far more direct say over regulators that were designed to operate at arm’s length from politics. The logic extends to the National Labor Relations Board, the Merit Systems Protection Board, the Consumer Product Safety Commission, the Securities and Exchange Commission, the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, and roughly two dozen others.

For businesses and workers, these are not obscure bodies. They set the rules that govern everyday commercial life. The NLRB referees disputes between employers and unions and decides what counts as fair labor practice. The Consumer Product Safety Commission polices unsafe toys and household goods. The SEC oversees the stock trades and disclosures that underpin retirement accounts. The EEOC enforces protections against workplace discrimination. When control of these agencies shifts, the regulatory ground shifts under every company and employee they touch.

The practical effects are already visible. The NLRB has spent much of the past year effectively paralyzed after Trump removed member Gwynne Wilcox, leaving the board without the quorum it needs to issue decisions or update rules. Cathy Harris, a member of the Merit Systems Protection Board, was similarly removed. With Monday’s ruling clearing the last legal obstacle, the administration is now positioned to reshape these boards with appointees aligned to its deregulatory agenda.

For companies, the shift cuts in more than one direction. Businesses that chafed under aggressive labor or consumer-protection enforcement may welcome a lighter regulatory touch and more chances to press their case directly with newly aligned agencies. But the same volatility that lets one president reshape the boards will let the next one reverse course, raising the prospect of sharp regulatory swings every time the White House changes hands. Predictability — something businesses prize as much as any single policy — becomes harder to count on.

There was one notable exception. The court rejected Trump’s attempt to immediately fire Federal Reserve Governor Lisa Cook, preserving the central bank’s independence, at least for now. In a separate ruling, the justices held that Cook is entitled to notice and a fair opportunity to respond before any removal, and Roberts wrote that any change to the Fed’s arrangement must come from Congress, not the courts. Carving out the Fed signals the justices’ awareness that markets treat the central bank’s insulation from politics as essential to financial stability.

The dissent was sharp. Justice Sonia Sotomayor, joined by Justices Elena Kagan and Ketanji Brown Jackson, warned that the majority endorsed a theory of “total executive control” that would leave the president with far greater power than ever before, and said the decision “promises only chaos.” The concern is that regulators built to apply consistent, expert rules across administrations could become instruments that change direction with each election.

Trump celebrated on social media, calling it one of the most important rulings ever issued on presidential power. For the White House, the decision caps a long campaign to bring the so-called administrative state under tighter executive command.

For the broader economy, the takeaway is that a large slice of the federal machinery that regulates business, labor, and consumer safety is now more directly answerable to whoever holds the presidency. Companies and workers alike will be watching to see how the newly empowered administration uses that authority — and how quickly the rules they operate under begin to change.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump said Wednesday, July 1, that professional investment managers—not he—make decisions about his personal finances, responding to questions following the release of a financial disclosure that revealed one of the largest personal fortunes ever reported by a sitting U.S. president.

Speaking with reporters before boarding Air Force One at Joint Base Andrews, Trump said, “We have funds that run my money,” adding that he does not direct individual investments and benefits simply because financial markets have performed well.

His comments came one day after filing his annual financial disclosure with the U.S. Office of Government Ethics, a report that offers an extensive look into the president’s business interests, investments, licensing agreements, and cryptocurrency holdings.

According to an analysis by CNBC, the disclosure shows Trump reported at least $2.24 billion in revenue during 2025, compared with at least $622 million the previous year. At more than 900 pages, the filing is believed to be the longest presidential financial disclosure ever submitted.

A significant portion of that income came from cryptocurrency ventures.

The disclosure reports approximately $1.2 billion in crypto-related revenue, including roughly $580 million connected to World Liberty Financial, the digital asset company launched by members of the Trump family. Additional income came from licensing agreements, investment returns, golf resorts, hospitality businesses, merchandise, and digital assets associated with Trump’s expanding cryptocurrency portfolio.

The filing also lists hundreds of stock transactions involving major publicly traded companies, with individual purchases and sales valued anywhere from hundreds of thousands to tens of millions of dollars. Several trades have drawn attention because they occurred while federal agencies were simultaneously overseeing investigations or regulatory actions involving those companies.

Trump rejected suggestions that those investments present conflicts of interest.

“They invest my money. I don’t talk to them. I don’t even speak to them,” the president said, describing the arrangement as professionally managed and independent from his day-to-day responsibilities.

The disclosure nevertheless has renewed debate among ethics experts over how presidents should separate personal wealth from official duties.

Unlike traditional blind trusts used by many previous presidents, Trump’s disclosure publicly identifies many of his investments and business interests. Critics argue that because the holdings remain publicly known and several involve businesses connected to family members, questions about potential conflicts will likely continue throughout his presidency.

Supporters counter that the public disclosure itself provides transparency, allowing voters and watchdog groups to review the president’s financial interests.

The cryptocurrency holdings have attracted particular attention because the administration is simultaneously overseeing policies that could shape the future of digital assets. Federal agencies continue working on stablecoin regulation, cryptocurrency market oversight, and broader digital asset legislation, areas that could directly affect businesses connected to Trump’s reported investments.

For investors, the disclosure highlights how quickly cryptocurrency has become part of mainstream finance. Just a few years ago, digital assets represented only a small niche within global markets. Today they account for a significant share of the reported wealth of the President of the United States.

The filing also illustrates how modern presidential finances have evolved far beyond traditional salaries, investments, and real estate. Licensing agreements, digital businesses, branding partnerships, cryptocurrencies, and global business ventures now play a much larger role than they did for previous administrations.

Whether the president’s financial structure satisfies ethics concerns will likely remain the subject of continued political and legal debate. What is not disputed is the scale of the reported wealth. The disclosure provides one of the most detailed public snapshots ever released of a sitting president’s financial interests, underscoring both the complexity of modern business holdings and the growing influence of cryptocurrency in the American economy.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

One of America’s most recognizable corporate names is officially changing.

Exxon Mobil Corporation announced Wednesday that it will become ExxonMobil Holdings Corporation as part of its move to Texas, marking the company’s first formal name change since the historic Exxon-Mobil merger more than 25 years ago.

The change accompanies the company’s decision to redomicile from New Jersey to Texas, where Exxon has already based its operational headquarters for several years.

For shareholders, the transition is largely administrative.

Each existing share of Exxon Mobil stock will automatically convert into a share of the new holding company, which will continue trading on the New York Stock Exchange under the familiar ticker symbol XOM. Investors are not required to take any action.

Although the corporate name is changing, Exxon said its operations, dividend policy, management team, and business strategy remain unchanged.

The move completes a transition that has been years in the making.

While Exxon relocated its executive headquarters to Spring, Texas, near Houston, several years ago, the company’s legal incorporation had remained in New Jersey—a corporate lineage dating back to Standard Oil, which first incorporated there in the late nineteenth century.

The decision reflects a growing trend among major U.S. corporations.

Texas has aggressively positioned itself as a preferred destination for publicly traded companies by creating specialized business courts, strengthening legal protections for corporate directors, and promoting what state leaders describe as a more business-friendly regulatory environment.

Exxon joins a growing list of prominent companies—including Tesla, SpaceX, Coinbase, and several financial institutions—that have recently moved their legal headquarters to Texas.

The company said shareholders approved the reorganization during its annual meeting earlier this year, clearing the way for the legal restructuring to become effective this week.

For Exxon, the change is primarily about corporate governance rather than day-to-day operations.

A company’s state of incorporation determines which laws govern shareholder disputes, board responsibilities, mergers, and other corporate matters. Many large corporations have recently reassessed where they are legally incorporated as states compete to attract major businesses.

Industry experts say Texas has emerged as one of the strongest competitors to Delaware, which has traditionally dominated corporate incorporations for decades.

The move also carries symbolic significance.

Exxon traces its roots directly to John D. Rockefeller’s Standard Oil, making it one of the oldest and most recognizable names in American business history. Moving its legal home from New Jersey to Texas reflects the broader migration of corporate America toward states viewed as offering more favorable legal and regulatory environments.

For New Jersey, the departure represents another high-profile corporate loss, although Exxon’s operational headquarters and most executive functions had already relocated years earlier.

For investors, however, little changes.

The company’s oil and natural gas operations, refining business, dividend payments, stock ticker, and management structure all remain the same. Consumers will continue seeing the familiar Exxon and Mobil brands at service stations around the world.

The new corporate structure simply aligns the company’s legal headquarters with where it already conducts most of its executive operations.

The move highlights an increasingly competitive landscape among states seeking to attract major corporations—not through tax incentives alone, but through legal systems designed specifically for large public companies.

For Exxon, it closes one chapter stretching back well over a century while opening another firmly rooted in Texas, the center of the American energy industry.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A senior aide to Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent is moving to the Federal Reserve, a personnel change that strengthens ties between two of the nation’s most influential economic institutions.

According to a Bloomberg report published Wednesday, Samantha Schwab, principal deputy chief of staff to Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, will become an adviser to Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh. The move comes just weeks after Warsh took office as Fed chairman and begins assembling his senior leadership team.

While a single staffing change might normally attract little attention, this appointment carries added significance because of the close working relationship expected between Warsh and Bessent as they help shape U.S. economic policy.

Schwab joined the Treasury Department in January 2025 and has served as Bessent’s principal deputy chief of staff since April. She also previously worked in the White House during President Donald Trump’s first administration, giving her experience across both the executive branch and economic policymaking.

The appointment arrives as Warsh begins implementing his vision for the Federal Reserve.

After being confirmed by the Senate and taking office in May, Warsh has emphasized restoring price stability, maintaining the Fed’s independence, and gradually reducing the central bank’s enormous balance sheet that expanded during years of bond-buying programs.

The Federal Reserve’s balance sheet remains above $6 trillion, reflecting years of emergency economic support and quantitative easing following the pandemic. Warsh has long argued that the central bank became too heavily involved in financial markets and should gradually return to a narrower focus centered on monetary policy and inflation.

That philosophy closely aligns with views expressed by Treasury Secretary Bessent, making Schwab’s move particularly noteworthy.

For businesses and consumers, the relationship between the Treasury Department and the Federal Reserve matters because together they influence nearly every corner of the economy. The Treasury manages federal borrowing and fiscal policy, while the Fed controls interest rates and monetary policy. Close coordination between the two institutions can shape everything from mortgage rates and business lending to inflation and employment.

At the same time, the appointment is likely to renew discussion about the Federal Reserve’s independence.

The central bank has traditionally operated separately from the White House and Treasury to ensure monetary policy decisions remain insulated from political pressure. Critics often caution that excessive coordination between the Fed and elected officials could undermine investor confidence in the institution’s independence.

Supporters, however, argue that effective communication between the Treasury and Federal Reserve is essential during periods of economic uncertainty and can produce more consistent policymaking.

Warsh himself brings extensive Federal Reserve experience to the role.

He previously served as a Fed governor during the 2008 financial crisis before leaving the central bank in 2011. Since then, he has frequently criticized prolonged quantitative easing and argued that the Fed should maintain a smaller presence in financial markets while focusing more directly on controlling inflation.

Building an experienced advisory team is viewed as one of the first steps toward implementing that agenda.

Schwab’s background inside both the Treasury Department and the White House provides familiarity with the administration’s broader economic priorities while also giving Warsh an adviser experienced in navigating complex federal policymaking.

Although the appointment itself will not immediately affect interest rates or financial markets, it offers an early glimpse into how Warsh intends to lead the central bank and the type of advisers he wants surrounding him.

For investors, businesses, and households, the staffing decision signals that the Federal Reserve’s new leadership is moving quickly to establish its policy team as it confronts inflation, interest-rate decisions, and the long-term challenge of reducing the central bank’s balance sheet.

The appointment reinforces expectations that the Fed under Kevin Warsh will continue emphasizing price stability, disciplined monetary policy, and a gradual return to a more traditional role within the U.S. financial system.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

One of Brooklyn’s best-known retail landmarks is entering a new chapter as the former Macy’s department store on Fulton Street prepares for redevelopment following its closure as part of the retailer’s nationwide restructuring.

Located at 422 Fulton Street, the property served generations of Brooklyn shoppers and traces its roots to the iconic Abraham & Straus department store before becoming a Macy’s location. The building has long been one of the anchors of Downtown Brooklyn’s busy shopping district.

The property’s new owners plan to transform the approximately 440,000-square-foot building into a mixed entertainment destination designed to attract families and visitors, reflecting the growing shift away from traditional department store retailing toward experience-based attractions.

Real estate investors acquired the building after Macy’s sold the property as part of its broader strategy to reduce its store footprint and focus investment on its strongest-performing locations. Reports indicate the redevelopment could include major entertainment tenants, interactive attractions, dining, and other destination-oriented uses intended to increase foot traffic throughout Downtown Brooklyn.

The project reflects a nationwide transformation taking place across American retail.

As more consumers purchase everyday goods online, many former department store buildings are being repurposed into entertainment, dining, residential, office, and mixed-use developments that generate activity difficult to replicate through e-commerce.

For Downtown Brooklyn, the redevelopment offers an opportunity to reshape one of New York City’s busiest commercial corridors. While the closure of a longtime anchor retailer represents the end of an era, developers believe a destination focused on entertainment and experiences could attract new visitors and strengthen nearby businesses.

The redevelopment also aligns with Macy’s broader turnaround strategy. The company has been closing underperforming stores while investing more heavily in flagship locations, upgraded shopping experiences, and its luxury brands, including Bloomingdale’s and Bluemercury.

Company executives say concentrating resources on fewer, higher-performing stores will improve profitability while allowing Macy’s to compete more effectively in today’s rapidly changing retail environment.

For surrounding businesses, the transition presents both challenges and opportunities. Department stores traditionally generate steady customer traffic that benefits nearby restaurants, retailers, and service businesses. During redevelopment, merchants may experience reduced foot traffic, but a successful entertainment destination could ultimately attract even larger and more diverse crowds.

The project also underscores the growing importance of mixed-use development in urban retail districts. Cities across the country are increasingly converting aging retail properties into destinations that combine shopping, dining, entertainment, and community gathering spaces.

Downtown Brooklyn has experienced significant residential and commercial growth during the past decade, making the neighborhood an attractive location for large-scale redevelopment projects.

If completed as envisioned, the former Macy’s building could once again become one of Brooklyn’s busiest destinations—this time driven not by traditional department store shopping, but by entertainment, dining, and family-oriented attractions designed for a new generation of visitors.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Oil prices extended their steep decline this week as more Persian Gulf crude found its way back to market, easing the supply fears that had driven prices above $120 a barrel earlier this year. According to the U.S. Energy Information Administration, Middle East producers had cut output by more than 11 million barrels a day in May compared with pre-conflict levels — but that gap is now starting to close, and traders are selling on the expectation that the barrels are coming back.

The price action shows it. Brent crude, the international benchmark, settled at $71.57 a barrel Wednesday, down 1.9% on the day. West Texas Intermediate, the U.S. benchmark, fell to $68.58. Brent dropped roughly 21% over the past month, its worst monthly performance since March 2020, while WTI logged its steepest monthly decline since late 2021. WTI’s recent close below $70 was its first since February 27 — the day before the 2026 Iran war began.

The turning point was diplomatic. The United States and Iran struck a 14-point memorandum of understanding on June 17 to pause the fighting that had choked off the Strait of Hormuz, the narrow waterway between Oman and Iran that normally carries about a fifth of the world’s oil. As the shooting slowed, tankers that had been trapped or idling began moving again.

Saudi Arabia’s recovery is the one the market is watching most closely. Saudi Aramco is restarting crude loadings at Ras Tanura, its largest export terminal, which had sat largely idle since early March, according to vessel-tracking data showing very large crude carriers owned by Bahri moving toward the Ju’aymah loading area. That matters because reopening the strait and restarting the region’s biggest export machine are two different things.

The kingdom never fully stopped selling oil. Throughout the crisis, it rerouted around 4 million barrels a day through its East-West Pipeline to the Red Sea port of Yanbu, bypassing Hormuz entirely. Before the war, Saudi crude exports through the strait averaged about 6.3 million barrels a day in 2025 and climbed to roughly 7.1 million barrels a day in February 2026, according to figures from Argus and the Arab Center. Bringing Ras Tanura back toward those levels is the final piece of restoring full Saudi flows — and its return is a big reason prices keep softening.

Other producers are adding to the wave. Iran has said it has shipped more than 40 million barrels since the U.S. lifted its naval blockade, Iraq and Kuwait are moving to unwind wartime force-majeure declarations, and Russian exports have surged to record levels, leaving a growing pile of barrels floating at sea.

For businesses and households, cheaper crude is mostly welcome news. Lower oil feeds directly into lower gasoline and jet fuel prices, giving relief to drivers, airlines and shippers whose costs had spiked. The EIA had warned that U.S. wholesale gasoline prices could rise around 50% in 2026 if Hormuz stayed shut, so a faster supply recovery takes pressure off that forecast and off inflation more broadly.

The flip side is fiscal pain for the exporters. Every dollar off the oil price widens the budget gaps in Riyadh and across the Gulf, where governments spent the war years funding ambitious diversification plans. Analysts at Goldman Sachs have flagged war-swollen deficit estimates for Saudi Arabia well above what the kingdom had budgeted.

Not everyone agrees the slide runs much further. Haitham Al Ghais, secretary general of OPEC, told CNBC the group does not expect oil demand to peak in the foreseeable future and rejected forecasts pointing to a coming glut, saying OPEC focuses on actual numbers rather than projections. Strategists Warren Patterson and Ewa Manthey at ING said tanker traffic into the Gulf is picking up as shipowners grow more confident, a trend they called a clear headwind to any rebound in prices.

The wildcard remains the same one that has driven the market all year: whether the fragile U.S.-Iran truce holds. A durable deal keeps the barrels flowing and prices heading lower. Any fresh flare-up in the strait could reverse the slide in a matter of hours. For now, with real cargoes lining up at Saudi loading buoys, the market is betting the worst of the supply shock is over.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The cost of financing a new car in America keeps climbing to levels that would have stunned buyers just a few years ago. According to data released Wednesday by Edmunds, the average monthly payment on a new vehicle reached a record $777 during the second quarter, edging above the previous record of $773 set in the first quarter. It marks the third consecutive quarter that average monthly payments have reached a new all-time high.

The report paints a picture of buyers stretching further than ever to afford new vehicles. The average amount financed climbed to a record $44,156, while the average down payment fell 10% from a year earlier to $5,815, meaning more consumers are borrowing larger amounts while putting less money down.

Perhaps the most striking trend is the growing use of extremely long auto loans.

A record 36.5% of all financed new-vehicle purchases carried loan terms of 73 months or longer, while nearly 24% of buyers signed loans lasting 84 months or more—the equivalent of seven years. Once considered unusual, seven-year financing has become increasingly common as buyers seek to lower monthly payments enough to fit new vehicles into household budgets.

Lower monthly payments, however, come with significant long-term costs.

Longer loans increase the total amount of interest paid over the life of the loan while leaving borrowers “underwater” for years, owing more than the vehicle is worth. That can make trading in or selling a vehicle far more difficult and leaves owners financially vulnerable if the vehicle is totaled or unexpected financial hardships arise.

Several factors continue driving affordability challenges.

New vehicle prices remain near historic highs, interest rates are still elevated compared with recent years, and insurance premiums, repair costs, and maintenance expenses have all increased substantially. At the same time, many consumers continue purchasing larger SUVs, trucks, and premium trim packages that carry significantly higher price tags.

Analysts at Edmunds also warn that tariffs could place additional upward pressure on vehicle prices in the months ahead by increasing manufacturing costs for imported vehicles and automotive components.

For many households, a $777 monthly car payment now rivals a mortgage payment from just a few years ago and represents one of the family’s largest recurring monthly expenses. Combined with housing costs, groceries, childcare, and other necessities, transportation is consuming a growing share of household income.

The broader economic implications are also significant.

Auto loans represent one of the largest categories of household debt in the United States, second only to mortgages. As balances grow larger and repayment periods stretch longer, borrowers remain indebted for much greater portions of their financial lives, increasing the risk of future delinquencies if economic conditions weaken.

While used vehicles generally offer lower purchase prices, financing costs remain elevated there as well. Increased demand for affordable used vehicles has also helped support higher resale values, limiting the financial relief available to budget-conscious shoppers.

For automakers and dealerships, longer financing terms have helped maintain sales despite affordability pressures. However, industry analysts caution that extending loan maturities cannot permanently offset rising vehicle prices, and many consumers may eventually delay purchases altogether if affordability continues deteriorating.

For buyers considering a new vehicle, financial advisers recommend focusing on the total cost of ownership rather than simply the monthly payment. A lower monthly payment spread over seven years may ultimately cost thousands of dollars more in interest than a shorter loan with a slightly higher monthly payment.

The latest figures suggest America’s auto market is increasingly being driven not by what consumers want to spend, but by how far lenders are willing to stretch repayment schedules. As monthly payments and loan terms continue reaching record levels, affordability remains one of the industry’s biggest challenges heading into the second half of the year.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. stocks opened higher Thursday after the Bureau of Labor Statistics reported that the economy added just 57,000 jobs in June, well below the roughly 113,000 economists had expected. The unemployment rate slipped to 4.2% from 4.3%, even as hiring slowed—a combination investors viewed as reducing the likelihood that the Federal Reserve will need to raise interest rates in the near term.

Wall Street responded immediately. The Dow Jones Industrial Average climbed about 334 points, or 0.6%, to around 52,640, reaching a fresh intraday record. The S&P 500 gained 0.7% to approximately 7,538, while the Nasdaq Composite rose 0.9% to about 26,260. The Russell 2000 added 0.8%, and the yield on the 2-year Treasury note declined as traders priced in lower odds of another Fed rate increase.

The June report snapped a three-month stretch of stronger hiring. Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh has repeatedly said the central bank will remain data dependent, and Thursday’s numbers reinforced expectations that policymakers may be able to leave rates unchanged while continuing to monitor inflation and economic growth.

“This takes some of the pressure off of the inflation-fighting institution to hike near term,” said Bradford Smith, portfolio manager at Janus Henderson Investors.

Market movers

Tesla was among the early gainers after reporting 480,126 second-quarter vehicle deliveries, comfortably exceeding analysts’ expectations of about 406,600. Shares rose roughly 1% in early trading.

SpaceX (NASDAQ: SPCX) remained in focus ahead of its scheduled Nasdaq-100 inclusion on July 7. JPMorgan estimates the addition could generate roughly $4.3 billion in buying from passive index funds. Wedbush analyst Dan Ives initiated coverage with an Outperform rating and a $190 price target.

Defense contractor AeroVironment gained about 4% after securing a $500 million U.S. Army contract to develop counter-drone technology.

Semiconductor stocks attempted to stabilize following Wednesday’s sharp selloff. The previous session saw Micron Technology fall 10.6%, Intel lose 9%, Applied Materials decline 10%, and AMD drop 6.9% as investors questioned AI-related valuations. Early Thursday trading showed buyers cautiously returning to the sector.

Analyst outlook

Economists continue to debate the path ahead for interest rates.

Andrew Hollenhorst, chief U.S. economist at Citi, said continued moderation in employment would support additional Federal Reserve rate cuts later this year.

Meanwhile, Savita Subramanian, head of U.S. equity and quantitative strategy at Bank of America Securities, said the economy remains healthy but investors may increasingly look beyond the largest technology companies for future market leadership.

Commodities and volatility

Gold rose about 1.8% to roughly $4,155 an ounce as investors balanced slowing economic growth against lower interest-rate expectations.

Crude oil eased toward $68 a barrel, reflecting reduced concerns over Middle East supply disruptions.

The CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) fell more than 4% to around 15.9, indicating continued investor confidence and relatively calm market conditions.

Overseas, markets were weaker. South Korea’s Kospi plunged 7.9% amid renewed selling across semiconductor companies, highlighting continued concerns over global chip-sector valuations.

For now, investors are interpreting a slower pace of hiring as positive news because it lowers the likelihood of additional Fed tightening. The key question for markets will be whether the labor market is simply cooling to a sustainable pace—or beginning to weaken more significantly. As trading gets underway before the July 4 holiday, Wall Street appears focused on the prospect of steady interest rates and continued economic expansion.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Some of the biggest changes to the federal student loan system in years officially took effect Wednesday, July 1, changing how millions of future college students will borrow money and repay their loans.

The changes stem from the One Big Beautiful Bill Act and apply primarily to borrowers who take out new federal student loans beginning on or after July 1. While most current borrowers can generally remain under existing repayment programs, new borrowers face an entirely different system.

The most significant change affects repayment options.

For newly issued federal loans, several long-standing income-driven repayment plans—including SAVE, PAYE, Income-Based Repayment (IBR), and Income-Contingent Repayment (ICR)—are no longer available. Instead, new borrowers will choose between two primary repayment options.

The first is the new Repayment Assistance Plan (RAP), an income-based program that adjusts monthly payments according to earnings. Payments generally range from about 1% to 10% of a borrower’s income, with any remaining balance eligible for forgiveness after 30 years of qualifying payments.

The second option is a revised Tiered Standard Repayment Plan, which establishes repayment periods ranging from 10 to 25 years, depending on the total amount borrowed. Smaller loan balances receive shorter repayment schedules, while borrowers with larger balances receive additional time to repay.

The changes also affect graduate and professional students.

The long-standing Grad PLUS loan program, which previously allowed graduate students to borrow up to the full cost of attendance, has been eliminated for new borrowers. Graduate students now face annual and lifetime borrowing limits, while professional students—including those attending medical, dental, veterinary, and law schools—also become subject to new federal borrowing caps.

Parents will see changes as well.

Parent PLUS loans are now limited to $20,000 per year per student, with a maximum lifetime borrowing limit of $65,000 for each child. Previously, many parents could borrow up to the full cost of attendance.

Financial aid experts say the new borrowing limits may require more families to rely on savings, scholarships, employer assistance, or private student loans to cover college expenses.

Borrowers currently enrolled in the SAVE repayment program face an important transition.

Millions of borrowers participating in SAVE will eventually be required to move into one of the newly authorized repayment plans after receiving instructions from their loan servicers. Education experts recommend carefully reviewing all available options before making repayment decisions.

Current students who already borrowed before July 1 generally receive transitional protections that allow them to continue borrowing under previous rules while remaining enrolled in the same academic program. However, changing schools, switching degree programs, or taking extended breaks from enrollment could affect those protections.

The legislation also changes certain deferment and repayment provisions available to future borrowers, making it more important than ever for students to understand repayment obligations before accepting federal loans.

For families planning for college, the new rules increase the importance of financial planning.

Longer repayment periods may reduce monthly payments but can significantly increase total interest costs over the life of a loan. Lower federal borrowing limits may also require students to explore additional funding sources before enrolling.

Financial advisers recommend that prospective borrowers estimate future monthly payments, compare available repayment options, and borrow only what is necessary to complete their education.

As tuition costs continue rising nationwide, today’s changes represent one of the most significant shifts in federal higher education financing in decades and will shape how future generations of Americans pay for college.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

In June, the US market added tasks at a slower rate than anticipated.

More details will be added to this story regarding the June 2026 jobs record.

Despite rising inflation and confusion over the impact of the Iran war on the market, the U.S. economy added jobs at a constant rate in June.

According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, 57, 000 new jobs were created by employers in June, according to a report released on Thursday. That number was lower than the academics ‘ estimates from the LSEG poll, which stated that 110, 000 work had grown.

The unemployment rate dropped to 4.2 %, which is also below the 4.3 % estimate.

The payment figures for the previous two months were revised, with the previous two months ‘ reports seeing changes of 31, 000 from a gain of 179, 000 to 148, 000, and May’s report seeing a decrease from 43, 000 to 129, 000.

Up, April and May saw a decline in jobs of 74, 000 jobs compared to the previous figures.

WATCHDOG SAYS MORE SAFEGUARDS ARE NEEDED AFTER DATA RELEASE FAILURES WHILE BLS TOOK STEPS TO FIND THEM.

In June, secret paychecks added 49, 000 jobs, which is significantly below what the LSEG poll had predicted. May’s private sector job profits decreased from 120 000 to 97 000, respectively.

Authorities payments increased by 8, 000 jobs last month, while the decrease from the previous month’s increase of 52, 000 work to 32, 000 was revised.

According to economics polled by LSEG, the manufacturing industry added 3, 000 careers in June. The numbers for May were changed from 7,500 to 2, 000 tasks, respectively.

In June, the industry added 22, 000 work, which is still higher than last month’s increase in employment. That’s a slower rate than the 38, 000-per-month common increase over the previous year. Clinics added 9, 000 work to the quarter, making up the majority of the increase.

In June, 61, 000 jobs were lost for leisure and hospitality, which was a result of lower-than-expected annual hiring. Employment in the market has not significantly changed over the course of 2026.

This post was originally published here

The executive running one of BlackRock’s troubled lending funds is on his way out, a departure that lands amid mounting losses and a federal investigation. According to reporting published Wednesday by Bloomberg, Phil Tseng, chief executive of BlackRock TCP Capital Corp., is in the process of leaving the firm following months of losses on soured loans and revelations of a U.S. regulatory probe into the unit’s valuation practices.

Tseng remains an employee of the world’s largest asset manager for now, according to people familiar with the matter, though the timing of his departure and the selection of a successor have not been finalized. The fund he oversees, known by its ticker TCPC, is a business development company that provides loans to middle-market and small businesses—companies that often have limited access to traditional bank financing.

The problems have been building for months. The fund reported $35 million in markdowns during the first quarter, and in January disclosed an estimated 19% decline in net asset value, largely tied to restructurings involving e-commerce investments and the bankrupt Renovo Home Partners. Following that announcement, shares dropped more than 14%. In May, the situation escalated when executives were questioned by the Manhattan U.S. Attorney’s Office regarding how the fund valued certain private investments.

For everyday investors, the story highlights growing risks inside the rapidly expanding private credit industry. Over the past decade, major investment firms have poured hundreds of billions of dollars into direct lending, providing financing to businesses outside the traditional banking system. While those loans often produce attractive returns, they also carry higher risks when economic conditions weaken and borrowers struggle to repay.

Unlike publicly traded stocks, private loans do not trade on open markets, making their values more difficult to determine. Fund managers must estimate what those investments are worth, leaving room for judgment—and scrutiny. Regulators are now examining whether those estimates accurately reflected the true condition of the portfolio.

Because TCP Capital is publicly traded, many individual investors—including retirees seeking high dividend income—own shares. Business development companies have become popular income investments, but the recent losses serve as a reminder that higher yields typically come with higher risks. When borrowers default or require restructuring, both dividend payments and share prices can suffer.

The fund became part of BlackRock through the firm’s broader expansion into private markets. TCP Capital traces its roots to Tennenbaum Capital Partners, which BlackRock acquired in 2018. Last year, BlackRock accelerated its push into alternative investments by purchasing HPS Investment Partners in a deal valued at roughly $12 billion, making private credit an increasingly important part of the firm’s long-term strategy.

The broader private-credit industry is now facing closer examination. Some analysts have warned that years of easy lending may have masked weaker underwriting standards that only become apparent when economic conditions deteriorate. Recent losses at TCP Capital, combined with a federal investigation, are likely to intensify those concerns across Wall Street.

For small and medium-sized businesses, the health of private-credit funds matters. These lenders have become an important source of financing for companies that may not qualify for traditional bank loans. If investors become more cautious and capital becomes harder to raise, financing could become both scarcer and more expensive for businesses that rely on these funds to grow.

The developments do not suggest a broader financial crisis. BlackRock remains one of the world’s strongest asset managers, and a single troubled fund does not define the industry. Still, the combination of significant losses, a leadership change, and a federal valuation probe at a BlackRock-managed fund signals that the private-credit boom is entering a more challenging phase.

For investors, the lesson is straightforward: higher returns often come with higher risks, and as private credit continues to mature, greater scrutiny from regulators and markets alike is likely to follow.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A member of Congress is calling on the federal government to investigate the fast-growing “rent now, pay later” industry, warning that many Americans may not fully understand the fees and financing costs attached to these products.

In a letter sent Wednesday, Representative Maxwell Frost, a Florida Democrat, urged the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB) to examine companies offering rent-payment financing and determine whether consumers are being adequately protected under federal law.

“Rent now, pay later” services allow tenants to divide a monthly rent payment into several smaller installments rather than paying the entire amount on the first of the month. Companies such as Flex and Livble market the products as tools that help renters better manage cash flow between paychecks. Some financial technology companies have also begun experimenting with similar payment options for housing expenses.

Supporters say the products provide flexibility for households facing uneven income schedules or unexpected expenses. Critics, however, argue that financing an essential monthly obligation like rent can become expensive once service fees, finance charges, or late-payment penalties are added.

In his letter, Frost asked the CFPB to investigate whether renters are receiving clear disclosures regarding the true cost of these products and whether landlords or property managers are steering tenants toward specific financing services.

The congressman said his concerns are rooted partly in personal experience. Before taking office, Frost said he relied on buy-now-pay-later products while furnishing his apartment and managing living expenses, eventually accumulating debt that became difficult to repay. He said many younger Americans may face similar financial pressures without the income stability that later allowed him to eliminate those balances.

The request comes as financial technology companies continue expanding beyond retail purchases into everyday household expenses.

After transforming online shopping over the past decade, installment-payment providers are increasingly targeting recurring obligations such as rent, utilities, insurance premiums, medical bills, and other essential expenses. The growing market reflects continued pressure on household budgets as housing costs remain elevated across much of the country.

Consumer advocates caution that financing recurring bills differs significantly from financing discretionary purchases. Because rent must be paid every month, borrowers who repeatedly rely on installment plans may accumulate ongoing fees that make already expensive housing even more costly over time.

Whether the CFPB pursues a formal investigation remains uncertain.

The agency has significantly reduced enforcement activity in recent months, and officials have not publicly indicated whether they intend to review the industry’s practices. Frost acknowledged that outcome is unclear but said congressional oversight remains important as financial products continue evolving.

If regulators decline to act, Frost said he hopes the information gathered through oversight efforts could help shape future consumer-protection legislation.

For renters, financial advisers recommend carefully reviewing all fees, repayment schedules, and penalties before using any rent-financing service. While splitting rent payments may help manage short-term cash flow, consumers should compare the total cost against other available options and ensure they can comfortably meet each scheduled payment.

As financial technology companies continue expanding into housing finance, the debate over consumer protections, disclosure requirements, and regulatory oversight is likely to grow alongside the industry’s rapid expansion.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Tesla is expected to report a modest increase in second-quarter vehicle deliveries, according to analyst estimates compiled by Bloomberg, suggesting the electric vehicle maker continues to grow—but at a much slower pace than during its years of explosive expansion.

Analysts expect Tesla to report approximately 396,466 vehicle deliveries worldwide for the three months ending in June, representing roughly 3% growth from the same quarter a year ago. The company is expected to release its official delivery figures on Thursday, July 2.

If those estimates prove accurate, Tesla would post its second consecutive quarter of year-over-year delivery growth after experiencing annual declines during previous reporting periods. However, the pace remains well below the company’s historic growth rates, when quarterly deliveries routinely approached half a million vehicles.

The vast majority of Tesla’s expected deliveries continue to come from its two highest-volume models—the Model 3 sedan and Model Y crossover. Premium vehicles, including the Model S, Model X, and Cybertruck, are expected to account for only a small portion of overall deliveries.

Regional demand remains uneven.

Analysts point to stronger European sales as one of the primary drivers behind the expected increase, supported by higher fuel prices and continued demand for electric vehicles across several European markets. China is expected to remain relatively stable.

The United States, however, has become a more challenging market.

The expiration of the federal $7,500 electric vehicle tax credit has significantly increased effective purchase prices for many American consumers, reducing one of Tesla’s biggest competitive advantages and making affordability a growing concern.

The delivery report arrives as investors increasingly focus on Tesla’s future beyond automobile manufacturing.

While vehicle deliveries remain one of Wall Street’s most closely watched metrics, much of the company’s valuation is now tied to Chief Executive Elon Musk’s long-term plans involving autonomous driving, robotaxis, artificial intelligence, and humanoid robotics rather than vehicle sales alone.

Even so, vehicle deliveries remain critical because they directly influence Tesla’s revenue, profit margins, manufacturing efficiency, and cash flow.

Competition across the electric vehicle industry continues intensifying.

Traditional automakers have expanded their electric offerings, while Chinese manufacturers continue introducing lower-priced EVs across international markets. Consumers now have substantially more choices than when Tesla largely dominated the segment several years ago.

Industry analysts note that Tesla’s current product lineup also faces increasing pressure from age. The Model 3 and Model Y remain among the world’s best-selling electric vehicles, but both have been on the market for years while competitors continue launching newer designs and technologies.

Investors will receive a more complete picture later this month when Tesla reports its full second-quarter financial results, including revenue, earnings, profit margins, and guidance for the remainder of the year.

For consumers, slower growth could ultimately prove beneficial.

Increasing competition, reduced demand growth, and expanding production capacity throughout the industry may place greater pressure on manufacturers to offer discounts, incentives, financing promotions, or price reductions in order to maintain market share.

Whether Tesla exceeds or falls short of current delivery estimates will likely influence investor sentiment, but the broader story remains clear: the global electric vehicle market is entering a more mature phase where sustained rapid growth can no longer be taken for granted.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Kroger, the nation’s largest traditional supermarket operator, announced Wednesday that it has agreed to acquire Giant Eagle for approximately $1.65 billion, marking the company’s first major acquisition since its proposed merger with Albertsons was blocked by regulators.

Under the agreement, Kroger will pay approximately $1.25 billion in cash while assuming about $400 million of Giant Eagle’s existing debt. The transaction has been unanimously approved by Kroger’s Board of Directors and remains subject to customary regulatory approvals.

Founded more than 90 years ago, Giant Eagle operates nearly 200 supermarkets and several standalone pharmacies across Pennsylvania, Ohio, West Virginia, Maryland, and Indiana, generating roughly $9 billion in annual revenue. The chain has long maintained a dominant position throughout the Pittsburgh metropolitan area and is one of Pennsylvania’s largest privately held employers.

For Kroger, the acquisition significantly strengthens its presence across the Midwest and Mid-Atlantic while expanding its pharmacy business and customer loyalty programs.

“This is an outstanding strategic fit,” Kroger CEO Ron Sargent said in announcing the transaction, describing Giant Eagle as a respected regional grocer with a strong reputation for fresh food, pharmacy services, and customer satisfaction.

The companies said Giant Eagle, Market District, and the retailer’s myPerks loyalty program will continue operating under their existing brands. Giant Eagle’s headquarters will remain in Cranberry Township, Pennsylvania, and Kroger said it does not currently anticipate widespread store closures.

However, the companies acknowledged that certain stores may need to be divested in markets where competitive overlap exists in order to satisfy federal antitrust regulators. The exact number of potential divestitures has not yet been disclosed.

The transaction represents Kroger’s renewed effort to expand after its proposed $25 billion merger with Albertsons collapsed following legal challenges from federal regulators and several state attorneys general concerned about competition within the grocery industry.

The acquisition also reflects broader consolidation across the retail grocery sector as traditional supermarket chains face increasing competition from Walmart, Amazon, Costco, Aldi, and other discount retailers. Larger operating scale allows grocery companies to negotiate better prices with suppliers, invest in technology, strengthen delivery capabilities, and improve operating efficiencies.

For consumers, Kroger says those efficiencies should eventually translate into lower prices and expanded product selection. Company executives said increased purchasing power and supply-chain improvements will help fund additional investments in pricing while maintaining service levels.

Pharmacy operations also played an important role in the acquisition. Prescription customers typically visit stores more frequently than grocery-only shoppers, making pharmacy services an important driver of customer loyalty and recurring sales.

Industry analysts say the deal demonstrates that grocery consolidation is likely to continue despite heightened regulatory scrutiny. Rather than pursuing massive national mergers, companies may increasingly focus on acquiring strong regional operators that complement existing geographic footprints.

If approved, the transaction is expected to close during 2027.

For shoppers across Pennsylvania, Ohio, West Virginia, Maryland, and Indiana, the immediate impact is expected to be limited. Stores will continue operating under the Giant Eagle name while customers retain familiar loyalty programs and pharmacy services. Over the longer term, consumers will be watching whether Kroger can deliver on its promise of lower prices while preserving the local identity that has made Giant Eagle one of the region’s most recognized supermarket brands.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Oil is moving again through the world’s most important energy chokepoint, and American officials say that is quietly stripping Iran of its biggest bargaining chip. According to a U.S. official cited by Bloomberg on Wednesday, commercial shipping through the Strait of Hormuz has surged in recent weeks, with American military support helping push oil flows back above 10 million barrels per day.

The rebound follows the interim peace agreement President Donald Trump signed with Iran, which reopened a corridor that had been largely paralyzed during months of war. The official, who spoke on condition of anonymity, said the recovery in traffic has caught Tehran off guard, underscoring its now-limited ability to halt shipping through the strait while helping trigger a fresh round of attacks around the waterway as Iran tries to reassert control.

The stakes here reach directly into American wallets. Before the war, the Strait of Hormuz carried about a fifth of the world’s oil and liquefied natural gas, with roughly 20 million barrels flowing through on an average day. When Iran choked off that traffic during the conflict, crude prices spiked above $100 a barrel, gasoline jumped, and inflation reignited. Restoring the flow does the opposite: more oil reaching the market means lower prices at the pump and less pressure on the cost of everything that moves by truck, ship, or plane.

With at least 10 million barrels now getting through daily, combined with about 5 million via alternative routes, flows are approaching normal levels. That easing has already shown up in energy markets, where crude has retreated from its wartime highs. For households still absorbing the price shocks of the spring, the return of Gulf oil is the single most important factor pulling energy costs back down.

The fight now is over who controls the corridor going forward. Iran’s chief negotiator, Mohammed Bagher Ghalibaf, told state television this week that sovereignty over the strait belongs to Iran and Oman, and Tehran has signaled that some ships may eventually have to pay transit fees. The memorandum of understanding that ended the fighting provides for toll-free traffic during a 60-day negotiating period but leaves the long-term arrangement unresolved.

That question is at the center of talks this week in Qatar, where U.S. negotiators Steve Witkoff and Jared Kushner are pressing Iran to guarantee open commercial transit. Washington’s position is firm: Trump and Secretary of State Marco Rubio have said neither tolls nor maritime service fees would be acceptable in a final deal. Shippers and oil-industry officials warn that any such charges would violate international law and set a dangerous precedent, potentially inviting similar tolls on other global waterways — a cost that would ultimately filter through to consumers everywhere.

The tension remains combustible. Iran breached the truce last week with a drone attack on a Singapore-flagged container ship, setting off a wave of retaliatory strikes that left the ceasefire on shaky ground. Trump’s decision to call off further strikes and let negotiations continue reflected a clear calculation: he does not want to reignite the economic pain the war caused. The official reportedly noted that the president does not want to be remembered like Herbert Hoover, who presided over the onset of the Great Depression.

For American businesses, the practical picture is one of cautious relief. Freight and insurance costs that spiked during the blockade are easing as tanker traffic normalizes. Manufacturers and retailers that depend on stable fuel prices get some breathing room. And the broader inflation outlook improves as the energy shock that drove up prices this spring gradually fades.

Still, analysts caution that the current calm is a return to the prewar status quo, not a permanent breakthrough. As long as Iran insists on controlling the strait and Washington refuses to accept tolls, the risk of another disruption lingers. Every barrel now moving through Hormuz is a reminder of how much the American economy — from gas stations to grocery stores — depends on a narrow stretch of water half a world away staying open.

For now, the direction is favorable: more oil, lower prices, and an Iran with less leverage than it had a few weeks ago. Whether that holds will depend on talks in Qatar that remain far from settled.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

American manufacturing continued expanding in June, although at a slower pace than the previous month, while factory input costs declined sharply, offering encouraging signs that inflation pressures may continue easing.

The Institute for Supply Management (ISM) reported Wednesday that its Manufacturing Purchasing Managers Index (PMI) registered 53.3% in June, down 0.7 percentage point from May but remaining comfortably above the 50-point level that signals expansion. The report marked the sixth consecutive month of growth for the nation’s manufacturing sector.

The monthly survey, compiled from purchasing managers across hundreds of manufacturing companies, is closely watched because it provides one of the earliest snapshots of business activity in the U.S. economy. Readings above 50 indicate expansion, while readings below 50 signal contraction.

The most encouraging development came from the report’s inflation indicators.

The Prices Index, which measures what manufacturers pay for raw materials and supplies, fell sharply to 73.0 from 82.1 in May. Although prices continue to rise, the slower pace suggests inflationary pressures within the manufacturing sector are beginning to moderate after earlier spikes tied largely to higher energy and transportation costs.

Lower manufacturing costs eventually benefit consumers because factories purchase the steel, plastics, chemicals, packaging, fuel, and other materials used to produce thousands of everyday products. When those costs stabilize or decline, manufacturers face less pressure to pass higher prices on to wholesalers, retailers, and ultimately consumers.

Demand also remained healthy.

The New Orders Index stayed well above the expansion threshold, indicating manufacturers continue receiving new business despite higher interest rates and ongoing economic uncertainty. Production remained positive, while inventories increased modestly as companies rebuilt stock levels to meet expected demand.

Five of the six largest manufacturing industries reported growth during June, reflecting continued resilience across much of the industrial economy.

Employment remained the weakest component of the report.

The Employment Index improved from the previous month but remained just below the 50-point expansion mark, indicating many manufacturers continue hiring cautiously despite stronger production and new orders. Businesses appear focused on controlling labor costs while waiting for greater certainty regarding future demand.

For manufacturers, the report paints a picture of an economy that continues growing but without excessive overheating. Companies are producing more goods, receiving additional orders, and benefiting from easing cost pressures while remaining disciplined about workforce expansion.

The report also carries important implications for the Federal Reserve.

Policymakers closely monitor manufacturing costs because they provide an early indication of future inflation trends. Slower price increases, combined with a labor market that is cooling rather than accelerating, could strengthen the case for future interest-rate reductions if broader inflation continues moving toward the Fed’s long-term target.

Lower interest rates would eventually reduce borrowing costs for businesses while helping consumers through lower mortgage rates, auto loans, business financing, and other forms of credit.

For investors, the June ISM report reinforces the picture of an economy experiencing a gradual “soft landing” rather than a sharp slowdown. Manufacturing continues expanding, inflation pressures are easing, and businesses remain active even as hiring becomes more measured.

The next ISM Manufacturing Report will be released in early August and will provide investors with another important measure of whether lower factory costs continue translating into broader economic stability during the second half of the year.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

South Korea’s exports surged again in June, powered by the same force reshaping factories and stock prices across the tech world: the planet cannot get enough memory chips for artificial intelligence. The Korea Customs Service reported Wednesday that exports adjusted for working-day differences climbed 59.5% from a year earlier, one of the strongest monthly gains the trade-driven economy has logged in years.

On a raw, unadjusted basis, shipments jumped 70.9%, pushing the country’s total monthly export value above $100 billion for the first time, according to figures reported by Nikkei Asia. Imports rose 30.1%, leaving South Korea with a trade surplus of $36.1 billion for the month.

Behind those numbers are two companies that have become indispensable to the global AI boom: Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix. The two Korean manufacturers produce much of the world’s advanced memory chips, including DRAM and high-bandwidth memory used in smartphones, laptops, AI servers, and massive data centers.

As companies including Nvidia, OpenAI, and the world’s largest cloud providers race to build more artificial intelligence infrastructure, demand for those chips has surged. Semiconductor shipments from Samsung and SK Hynix reached record monthly values, helping drive Korea’s export boom.

The effects extend far beyond South Korea.

Memory chips are a critical component in nearly every modern electronic device. Strong demand has already contributed to higher costs for computers, smartphones, gaming systems, and other consumer electronics. As AI infrastructure expands worldwide, manufacturers continue competing for limited supplies of advanced memory, supporting higher prices throughout the technology supply chain.

The report also carries geopolitical significance.

South Korea remains one of America’s closest economic partners while simultaneously running a substantial trade surplus with the United States. As the Trump administration continues emphasizing trade balances, Korea finds itself balancing its strategic alliance with Washington against its growing importance as one of the world’s leading semiconductor suppliers.

For South Korea, semiconductors have become both a tremendous strength and a growing vulnerability. Chips now account for an increasingly large share of the country’s exports, making economic growth heavily dependent on continued AI investment around the world. As long as technology companies continue building new data centers, Korean exports are likely to remain strong. Any slowdown in AI spending, however, could quickly ripple through the country’s broader economy.

Industry analysts expect demand to remain elevated.

Major cloud providers continue investing billions of dollars in AI infrastructure, while shortages of advanced high-bandwidth memory are expected to persist well into next year. Both Samsung and SK Hynix continue expanding production capacity to keep pace with orders from customers developing next-generation AI systems.

The June export figures also highlight the uneven nature of today’s global economy. While many countries continue experiencing sluggish manufacturing activity, South Korea has become one of the world’s biggest beneficiaries of artificial intelligence spending. The country’s technology sector has effectively become a barometer for global AI investment.

For American businesses and consumers, the report provides another reminder that many of the essential components powering today’s AI revolution originate in South Korea. As demand continues climbing, the cost and availability of those chips will influence everything from smartphone prices to cloud-computing services and the next generation of artificial intelligence products.

The latest export data suggests that, for now, the AI investment boom remains firmly intact—and South Korea continues to be one of its biggest winners.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

French shipping and logistics giant CMA CGM Group said Wednesday, July 1, that it will acquire FedEx Supply Chain, the contract logistics division of FedEx, for $1.4 billion, significantly expanding its warehousing and distribution operations across North America.

For many readers, FedEx Supply Chain is different from the familiar FedEx package-delivery business. Instead of delivering parcels to homes and businesses, the division manages warehouses, inventory, fulfillment, and distribution for retailers, manufacturers, healthcare companies, and e-commerce businesses. Following the acquisition, the business will become part of CEVA Logistics, CMA CGM’s global logistics subsidiary.

The acquisition will nearly triple CEVA Logistics’ contract logistics footprint in North America. Once completed, the combined operation will manage approximately 150 warehouses, expanding CEVA’s regional network to more than 240 locations while bringing nearly 10,000 FedEx Supply Chain employees into the company.

The transaction represents another major step in CMA CGM’s strategy of becoming a fully integrated global logistics provider rather than simply an ocean shipping company.

Chairman and Chief Executive Rodolphe Saadé said the acquisition strengthens the company’s ability to provide customers with complete end-to-end supply chain solutions across North America, one of the world’s largest consumer markets.

For FedEx, the sale continues its effort to streamline operations and concentrate on its core transportation and parcel-delivery network.

Chief Executive Raj Subramaniam said the company remains focused on strengthening its global delivery business while simplifying its portfolio. FedEx originally acquired the logistics business—then known as GENCO—in 2015 as part of its expansion into e-commerce fulfillment.

The agreement also establishes a broader commercial partnership between the two companies.

Under the arrangement, CMA CGM will become a preferred—but not exclusive—ocean freight provider for FedEx. The companies also plan to cooperate on air cargo capacity, allowing customers greater flexibility when shipping goods internationally by sea or air.

The acquisition reflects CMA CGM’s growing investment in the United States. Earlier this year, the company announced plans to invest approximately $20 billion in U.S. logistics infrastructure, warehousing, aviation, and shipping over the next several years. Purchasing FedEx Supply Chain becomes one of the largest pieces of that expansion strategy.

For businesses, the transaction highlights the increasing importance of supply-chain infrastructure in today’s economy.

Warehousing and fulfillment centers have become critical components of modern commerce as retailers and manufacturers seek faster delivery times, improved inventory management, and greater resilience following years of global supply-chain disruptions.

Larger logistics companies also gain purchasing power, operational efficiencies, and technology advantages that can ultimately improve delivery reliability while lowering transportation costs for customers.

For consumers, those efficiencies often translate into quicker deliveries, better product availability, and potentially lower shipping costs as goods move more efficiently from factories to warehouses and ultimately to homes and businesses.

The acquisition also signals continued foreign investment in U.S. logistics infrastructure, underscoring confidence in long-term American consumer demand despite ongoing global economic uncertainty.

The transaction is expected to close later this year, subject to customary regulatory approvals.

If completed, the deal will create one of North America’s largest contract logistics platforms while further reshaping the competitive landscape for global shipping, warehousing, and supply-chain management.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The European Union says it wants to shrink its record trade gap with China. A brutal, record-breaking heat wave is pushing the numbers in the opposite direction — one portable air conditioner at a time.

Maros Sefcovic, the EU’s trade chief, told reporters this week that disputes with Beijing over trade imbalances, export controls and intellectual property must deliver “tangible results” by October. He spoke after meeting China’s Commerce Minister Wang Wentao, days after the two sides issued a rare joint statement Monday aimed at rebalancing trade and improving market access. Chinese exports to the EU “keep rising, while our market share in China keeps shrinking,” Sefcovic said, calling the trend “not sustainable.”

The timing could hardly be more awkward. As Sefcovic pressed his case in Brussels, millions of sweltering Europeans were doing the exact thing his complaint is about: buying Chinese-made cooling machines as fast as stores can stock them.

Europe is living through what forecasters are calling its worst heat wave on record. Temperatures have pushed near 40 degrees Celsius across much of the continent, Germany, Belgium and the Netherlands hit new June highs, and Spain has reported more than 200 heat-related deaths. For households that have never owned air conditioning, comfort has suddenly become a necessity.

The problem is that Europe was never built for this. In cities like Paris, historic-preservation rules often bar residents from drilling into building facades to mount a traditional unit, and professional installation frequently costs more than the appliance itself. That has left most European homes without any cooling at all — and created a wide-open market.

Chinese manufacturers spotted the gap and filled it. Their answer is the portable “split” air conditioner, which needs little or no structural work and can be set up by the buyer. Exports of portable units from China to Western Europe surged more than 70% year over year in the first five months of 2026, according to market tracker ChinaIOL, and that was before the worst of the summer heat arrived.

The broader export figures tell the same story. Chinese customs data show that in the first five months of 2026, China’s air conditioner shipments to France, the Netherlands and Belgium more than doubled from a year earlier, while exports to Spain, Portugal and Germany posted strong double-digit growth. Midea, one of China’s largest appliance makers, said its shipments to Spain and France jumped 108% from the prior year.

On the ground, the shelves are bare. Midea’s PortaSplit — a portable model designed by a European team to fit local window shapes — has sold out across Germany, Austria and Italy, with shoppers using tracking websites and AI tools to hunt down remaining stock. In Italy, monthly sales of cooling appliances and sun-protection gear doubled, and one French politician ordered Chinese-made units for schools in his district.

This is the everyday reality behind the trade fight. For a family in Paris, Berlin or Madrid deciding how to survive a 40-degree afternoon, geopolitics rarely enters the calculation. What matters is whether a product is affordable, efficient and available now. Chinese brands check all three boxes, which is exactly why Brussels is finding the imbalance so hard to reverse.

Air conditioners are only one front. Chinese electric vehicles are gaining ground too: combined European sales for the five largest Chinese-owned auto groups — SAIC, BYD, Geely, Chery and Leapmotor — rose 61% in the first five months of 2026, giving them 10.6% of the wider market. The pattern is consistent. Where European consumers have a real need, Chinese firms are meeting it faster and cheaper.

That leaves EU leaders squeezed between two goals. They want cheaper household goods for voters feeling the pinch of higher living costs, but they also want to protect European factories and jobs from a flood of subsidized imports. The European Commission, which has long accused Beijing of dumping cheap goods and over-subsidizing its companies, said after Monday’s talks that “the status quo is not an option.”

Not everyone is convinced Beijing gave much. Alicia García Herrero, chief economist at French investment bank Natixis, said China has made no real commitment on import quotas or an enforcement mechanism, dismissing the progress as “smoke” meant to head off tougher European measures. The two sides did agree to set up a working group to monitor trade flows, and Beijing offered reassurance on its export controls covering rare earths.

The deeper question is whether this summer is a one-off or the new normal. Danish investment bank Saxo Bank warned in a June report that the supply chain for portable air conditioners could tighten if demand cools after the heat wave — but noted that if extreme heat keeps returning, the units could shift from luxury to essential. If that happens, Europe’s dependence on Chinese cooling won’t fade with the weather. It will harden into a permanent line on the trade balance Brussels is trying so hard to fix.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.
:::writing

I can also generate the matching AP-style image for this story.

Indirect U.S.-Iran negotiations in Doha made “positive progress” on Wednesday, according to a statement from Qatar’s Foreign Ministry, while Vice President JD Vance said the talks were “going well” and that discussions on Iran’s nuclear program would begin soon. Qatari and Pakistani mediators held separate meetings with the U.S. and Iranian delegations, and both sides agreed to keep talking.

The upbeat words mask a harder reality. President Trump came into office promising to keep the country out of long, open-ended wars. On February 28, 2026, the U.S. and Israel began strikes against targets in Iran, and after months of fighting the two sides reached a truce. Now the risk is not a forever war but forever talks — a negotiation that could stretch on with no clean finish, keeping energy markets, shippers and American drivers guessing.

Here is where things stand. The U.S. and Iran signed an initial deal in mid-June to end the war, ease sanctions and reopen the Strait of Hormuz while nuclear talks continued. The framework was a 60-day memorandum of understanding that extended the ceasefire, lifted restrictions in the strait, and required Iran to clear all mines from the waterway within 30 days as the U.S. lifted its blockade. Negotiators later agreed to set up four working groups covering sanctions relief, nuclear affairs, reconstruction, and monitoring.

The business stakes run straight through the Strait of Hormuz, the narrow channel that carries a large share of the world’s oil. When it was in doubt, prices jumped and shipping seized up. As the deal took hold, the pressure eased. Brent crude fell to about $73.74 a barrel — its lowest since before the late-February strikes — and U.S. West Texas Intermediate settled near $70. More than 11,000 seafarers stuck in the Persian Gulf have begun to exit through the strait, according to the International Maritime Organization. That drop in oil filtered down to gas pumps and helped cool one of the biggest drivers of the past year’s inflation.

The problem for anyone trying to plan — an airline hedging fuel, a trucking firm setting rates, a family budgeting for the summer — is that none of it is settled. Key issues, including the final status of Iran’s nuclear program, remain unresolved, and a scheduled technical phase of the Switzerland talks was postponed in June. The sticking points are the hard ones. The U.S. wants Iran to accept “zero enrichment,” which Iran has rejected, and the two sides are far apart on timing — reports say Washington floated a 20-year commitment while Tehran countered with five. Iran’s lead negotiator, Mohammad Bagher Qalibaf, has insisted the Strait of Hormuz will be managed by Iran under international law, a claim that unsettles the Gulf states and shippers who depend on the route.

Iran also has a long record of stretching negotiations out. One account tied to Qalibaf described the approach bluntly, saying concessions are won through pressure rather than dialogue and that no move would come before the other side acted. That is the pattern that worries analysts: talks that never quite collapse and never quite conclude, leaving a cloud over oil and shipping for months.

There is a fresh complication. Iran’s former supreme leader has died, with funeral ceremonies planned from July 4 through July 9, and mediators said the next meeting would be scheduled after those processions. Any pause gives Tehran more room to slow-walk the process.

The cost is not only diplomatic. The Pentagon has told senators it needs roughly $80 billion, mostly to cover the U.S. campaign against Iran, on top of a broader defense spending increase Trump is seeking. That request is likely to run into resistance from lawmakers reluctant to add spending at a time of high living costs for Americans. For defense contractors, a longer standoff means steadier orders; for taxpayers, it means a bigger bill.

The most likely near-term outcome, judging by the tone out of Doha, is more of the same: cautious progress, missed deadlines and periodic flare-ups in oil prices whenever the talks wobble. That is better for businesses than open war, which is why crude has drifted lower. But it is a long way from certainty. Companies that move goods, burn fuel or set prices are learning to plan around a question that may not be answered for a long time — and a peace that, if the past is any guide, could take many more rounds to finish.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.
:::writing

Dubai’s tourism chiefs signaled this past week that the emirate intends to stick with its long-range growth plan, even as it digs out of the sharpest travel collapse in its modern history. Issam Kazim, CEO of the Dubai Corporation for Tourism and Commerce Marketing, said at DET’s first stakeholder meeting earlier this month that the emirate’s tourism and economic plans remained unchanged. “The path remains the same, which is ambitious,” he said, in comments reported Saturday, pointing to the city’s D33 economic targets.

That confidence lands at a delicate moment. Early, fragile peace talks between the United States and Iran are lifting hopes across the Gulf that the region is finally turning a corner. A preliminary peace agreement between the two countries, still a broad framework taking shape in early rounds of talks, could hand Iran’s leadership a major economic lifeline as Tehran looks to stabilize after months of war. For Dubai, a city built on outside money and constant motion, calmer waters can’t come fast enough.

The damage has been real, and much of it hit ordinary workers and businesses. The 2026 U.S.-Iran war, which began February 28 and included the temporary closure of the Strait of Hormuz, choked off the very thing Dubai depends on: people flowing through its airports, hotels and malls. Dubai International Airport recorded 18.6 million passengers in the first quarter of 2026, down from 23.4 million a year earlier, with March traffic falling by an estimated 66% from normal seasonal levels.

Hotels felt it immediately. Hotel occupancy across the Middle East fell to 48% in March from 75% in January, and Middle Eastern carriers saw international air traffic drop 61% that month, according to the International Air Transport Association. UAE hotel revenue per available room fell 53% year over year in March, according to a Barclays report, and many properties responded with steep discounts to fill rooms.

This matters far beyond five-star lobbies. Tourism contributed nearly $70 billion to the UAE economy in 2025, a record, accounting for close to 12% of national GDP, and Dubai alone welcomed more than 19 million international overnight visitors that year. When arrivals stall, the pain runs straight through housekeepers, taxi drivers, retail clerks, restaurant staff and the small businesses that feed off visitor spending. Some residents have reported salary reductions and a rising cost of living, adding pressure to the city’s consumer economy.

The government moved to cushion the blow. Dubai implemented targeted economic support measures worth 2.5 billion dirhams to stabilize tourism, hospitality, retail and small and medium-sized businesses during the crisis. Rather than lay off workers en masse, hotel operators are trying to hold their teams together. French hospitality giant Accor said it focused on retaining employees during the uncertainty, moving staff between hotels and markets, after learning during COVID that rehiring and retraining later proved far more costly.

Many owners are using the quiet stretch to renovate. Major refurbishments are underway at Burj Al Arab and Armani Hotel Dubai, with upgrades at Park Hyatt Dubai and The St. Regis Dubai, The Palm, and a well-planned refurbishment can reposition a hotel in 12 to 24 months, versus a four-to-six-year new build. The bet is simple: reopen sharper and cheaper to run just as travelers return.

The airlines are already leading the way back. Emirates has restored 96% of its global network, now serving 138 destinations across 73 countries with roughly 1,300 weekly flights, while flydubai has recovered nearly 80% of its network. More seats mean more arrivals, and bookings are starting to follow. Hotel occupancy in key tourist zones is forecast to reach 80% to 90% by summer 2026, and hotel bookings for June and July have seen a 30% spike in high-demand areas like Palm Jumeirah and Downtown Dubai.

Still, nobody in Dubai is calling this over. Accor’s regional leadership expects visitor numbers to recover before room rates climb back to pre-war highs, a reminder that filling rooms and restoring profits are two different jobs. The recovery is uneven, spending is cautious, and discounting is doing a lot of the heavy lifting.

The wildcard remains the peace process itself. The proposed framework would reopen Iran’s access to global oil markets, ease U.S. sanctions and unfreeze more than $100 billion in overseas assets—potentially the biggest shift in U.S.-Iran economic relations in decades—but banks remain wary without clear legal cover. A durable deal could reopen trade corridors and revive the traveler confidence Dubai runs on. A stumble could freeze the rebound just as it starts. For now, the city is open, discounting hard, and betting that the world comes back.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.
:::writing

If you’d like, I can also generate the matching AP-style image for this story.

President Donald Trump on Wednesday announced that fuel prices will be lowered at select gas stations in the Philadelphia area just ahead of the Fourth of July holiday, as he boasted that oil and gas prices are dropping.

On Friday, Freedom Fuel Network will be lowering gas prices at 25 stations across the Greater Philadelphia Area, according to Trump.

“As we approach America’s 250th Birthday, I am pleased to announce that a VERY smart Retailer, located throughout the Northeast, is stepping up, and wishing the People of Philadelphia a ‘Happy Birthday!'” Trump wrote on Truth Social.

Trump said Freedom Fuel Network is “taking the lead” and urged other retailers to follow.

BESSENT WARNS GAS STATIONS ‘WE’RE WATCHING’ AS TRUMP DEMANDS IMMEDIATE PRICE CUTS

“They are doing this because they love the U.S.A. We are proud to celebrate America’s 250th Birthday in the Great Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, the Birthplace of our very special, one-of-a-kind Declaration of Independence,” he wrote.

“America has never been stronger than it is now, and Gas Prices will soon be back to the Record Low Prices Americans enjoyed at the pump before our very successful ‘excursion’ in Iran. Happy Birthday America!” the president continued.

He said that fuel prices are dipping, but not at the rate he would like to see.

“Just as I promised, Oil Prices are plummeting FAST, and Gas Prices at the pump are dropping too, but not as fast as they should be,” Trump said.

This comes after the president demanded on Monday that gasoline retailers lower their prices “IMMEDIATELY!” Last week, he threatened a federal price-gouging investigation against them.

Trump argued in his Monday post that gas prices are still “too high” despite a dip in crude oil futures to near levels seen before the recent U.S.-Israeli conflict with Iran, and urged retailers to target an average gas price of around $2.50 per gallon, which would be less than the roughly $3-per-gallon national average seen before the conflict, depending on the date and source.

“Gasoline Retailers must get their Prices down, IMMEDIATELY! They’re too high considering that Oil is now at $68 a Barrel, and heading south. The Retailers must quickly react to this statement, and do what they know is right — DROP YOUR PRICE FOR OUR GREAT AMERICAN PEOPLE! There will be no gauging, which is totally illegal. If Retailers don’t do this, big problems lie ahead!” he said on Monday.

“Start targeting around the $2.50 a Gallon number, and California should stop charging such heavy Taxes on their Gasoline. Soon the Tax will be higher than the Product itself, and the United States will not stand for it, nor will the People of California, who are being abused by these ridiculous Taxes, and by their own Government,” he added.

TRUMP ALLEGES GAS PRICE GOUGING, CALLS FOR DOJ INVESTIGATION

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

California Gov. Gavin Newsom’s press office responded to Trump’s post on Monday by blaming the president for high fuel prices.

“REMINDER of what Trump said on March 12: ‘When oil prices go up, we make a lot of money,'” the governor’s press office wrote.

In another post, the press office wrote: “The GOP-enabled Iran war has now forced a growing $63 billion in extra fuel costs on Americans nationwide — that $243.14 per California household so far this year.”

The current national average for gas is $3.847 per gallon, with some states such as California exceeding $5 per gallon, according to AAA. AAA listed California’s average at $5.414 per gallon and Pennsylvania’s average at $3.986 per gallon on Wednesday.

This post was originally published here

Japanese and South Korean chip stocks fell hard on Thursday, dragged down by another rough day for technology shares on Wall Street the session before. South Korea’s KOSPI index dropped 6.43%, slipping under the 8,000 mark to about 7,769 points, while Japan’s Nikkei 225 fell roughly 2% and lost the 70,000 level.

The steepest losses came from the two firms that supply much of the world’s memory chips. SK Hynix fell about 7.5%, and Samsung Electronics lost 6.84%. In Japan, memory maker Kioxia dropped 10%, dipping below 80,000 yen a share, and SoftBank slid as well. Because Samsung and SK Hynix together account for close to half the value of the entire Korean market, when they drop, the whole index goes with them.

The trigger came from New York. In Wednesday’s session on Wall Street, shares of Micron Technology dived more than 10%, even though the memory chipmaker is still up about 260% for the year, while Sandisk also shed more than 10%. When the biggest American chip names sell off, Asian suppliers usually feel it at the next open, and this time was no exception.

This matters well beyond stock tickers. Memory chips are the parts that store data in nearly every phone, laptop, car and data center. Samsung, SK Hynix and Micron make most of them, and the same AI building boom that has businesses racing to buy servers is what sent these stocks soaring in the first place. The KOSPI is up roughly 95% this year, one of the best runs of any market in the world. That kind of climb leaves little room for disappointment, which is why the pullbacks have been so violent.

What spooked buyers is a growing question about whether AI spending can keep justifying the prices. Traders have also been adjusting to a more hawkish stance under new Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh, pricing in the chance of rate increases later this year. Higher borrowing costs make the debt-funded data-center buildout harder to pay for, and that weighs most on the chipmakers riding the AI wave.

Not everyone sees a crack in the story. Dan Ives of Wedbush Securities said his firm’s checks across Asia and enterprise AI demand showed “no cracks in the armor,” and argued the Korean selloff looked more like a pause after a near-100% rally than a sign of weakening demand. Peter Kim of KB Securities told CNBC that the real risk that ends chip upcycles — too much supply — is “at least a couple of years” away. Both point to the same thing: the companies are still cheap by past standards. Samsung trades at about six times forward earnings and SK Hynix at about 5.3 times, a fraction of Nvidia’s multiple.

The Korean companies, for their part, are spending like the boom is here to stay. SK Hynix CEO Kwak Noh-jung used a public briefing in Asan, south of Seoul, to lay out a plan to build AI data centers across the country in phases, starting at 5 gigawatts of capacity and scaling to 15. That came days after the South Korean government announced initiatives on Monday for Samsung and SK Hynix to invest a combined 800 trillion won in a national semiconductor project aimed at meeting demand for the high-bandwidth memory that AI servers depend on.

There is also a milestone coming for American investors. SK Hynix is set to begin trading American depositary receipts on the Nasdaq on July 10, giving U.S. buyers a direct way into a stock that has been at the center of this year’s whipsaw.

For everyday readers, the takeaway is simpler than the market swings suggest. These are the companies that make the memory inside the devices people use and the servers powering the AI tools showing up at work. When their shares lurch 7% to 10% in a session, it is a sign that the market is still arguing over how much the AI boom is really worth — not that the chips themselves have stopped selling. Foreign investors have been quick to pull money out on down days and pile back in on up days, which is why Seoul and Tokyo have swung so sharply from one morning to the next.

Whether Thursday’s drop is another quick dip or the start of something deeper will likely hinge on the next round of U.S. tech earnings and on how far the Fed leans toward raising rates. For now, the pattern of the past few months is holding: Wall Street sneezes on chips, and Asia catches the cold by morning.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

More than 13,000 air conditioning units were recalled for posing fire and burn hazards, as Americans attempt to stay cool during a heatwave for the Fourth of July weekend.

Texas-based Daikin Comfort Technologies Manufacturing, Inc. issued the recall last week for about 13,514 Amana Window-Room-Air-Conditioners and Through the Wall air conditioners or heat pumps sold nationwide, as well as about 53 that were sold in Canada.

“The heating element can remain energized during a ground fault, despite being turned off, posing a risk of fire or burn injury to consumers,” the U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission said.

FORD RECALLS 741,195 SUVS AND PICKUPS AFTER TRANSMISSION DEFECT RAISES ROLLAWAY RISK: NHTSA

No injuries have been reported thus far in connection with the products, but the company received one report of plastic on the unit melting.

The products are white, with the brand name printed on most of the units’ control covers. The model number is located on a white sticker on the front edge of the units’ base plate.

Recalled units have a model number beginning with PB, AH or AE.

The units were sold through direct sales and heating and cooling dealers nationwide from April 2025 through December 2025 for between $850 and $1,500.

They are typically installed at hotels, apartment buildings and commercial spaces.

Consumers are urged to stop using the recalled products immediately and contact Daikin Comfort Technologies Manufacturing, Inc. for a full refund.

CHICKEN CAESAR WRAPS SOLD IN 2 STATES MAY CONTAIN DEADLY LISTERIA, USDA WARNS

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

The recall was announced ahead of a dangerous heatwave that began to intensify through much of the central and eastern parts of the U.S.

About two-thirds of the country is expected to be exposed to the extreme heat during the Fourth of July weekend, according to The Weather Channel.

This post was originally published here

Scott Drake, President and CEO of CEC Entertainment, is putting kids’ birthday parties at the center of his strategy to grow Chuck E. Cheese, saying in an interview published June 18 by Pizza Marketplace that birthdays, memberships, and active play are the company’s biggest opportunities to drive future growth.

Drake took over as CEO in February, succeeding longtime chief David McKillips. He previously served as the company’s chief financial officer, where he helped restructure the company’s finances and position it for expansion. Now he wants to make Chuck E. Cheese the first place parents think of when planning a child’s birthday celebration.

That is already a massive business for the chain. Chuck E. Cheese hosts more than 500,000 birthday parties each year, more than any other indoor family entertainment venue in the United States. The company proudly brands itself as the “Birthday Capital of the Universe,” and Drake believes there is significant room to grow that business even further.

Technology is a major part of the plan. Drake said the company’s AI chatbot has already assisted roughly 440,000 guests, answering questions, helping families explore menu options, and guiding parents through the birthday booking process. The same technology will soon power a multilingual phone system capable of answering calls and booking parties around the clock without wait times.

The goal, Drake explained, is not simply to reduce labor costs but to capture bookings the moment families decide to celebrate. If a parent cannot reach someone on a busy weekend and books elsewhere, that opportunity is gone.

The company is also working to ensure Chuck E. Cheese appears prominently when parents ask AI chatbots for birthday party recommendations, reflecting a growing focus on AI-driven search and what marketers call answer-engine optimization.

Birthdays are only one part of Drake’s broader strategy.

The company’s Fun Pass membership program, introduced in May 2024, has changed how many families use Chuck E. Cheese. Drake said more than 400,000 subscriptions were sold within months of launch, eventually leading to the rollout of an annual membership. Today, more than 500,000 families have purchased some version of the program, with many now visiting regularly instead of only once a year. Memberships start at $7.99 per month, while the premium Gold tier offers discounts of up to 50% on food and beverages.

For the summer season, the company introduced its Summer Fun Pass, providing unlimited visits through Labor Day for as little as $54.99 in select markets.

Drake is also expanding the company’s investment in physical activity through a larger-format concept known as Adventure World. The first location opened in Arlington, Texas, featuring approximately 12,000 square feet of climbing attractions, sports activities, and interactive play designed to get children moving rather than sitting in front of screens. Drake said the concept has generated strong customer satisfaction while complementing the company’s traditional Fun Center locations.

Supporting these investments is a financial turnaround years in the making. The company has spent the past several years restructuring its balance sheet while investing more than $350 million to remodel and modernize nearly 500 locations. CEC Entertainment, which also owns Peter Piper Pizza, emerged from Chapter 11 bankruptcy after the pandemic and has steadily rebuilt its business.

Competition remains intense. Drake identified Dave & Buster’s along with a growing number of indoor adventure parks as key competitors but argued that Chuck E. Cheese maintains an advantage through its long-established brand, exclusive focus on younger children, and ability to operate multiple entertainment formats. He described the company’s philosophy as being “unapologetically kid-first.”

The company is also pursuing international growth, with plans to enter the United Kingdom while expanding into markets including Australia and Egypt. Drake said the company’s birthday-party model, family-friendly environment, and recognizable characters translate well internationally, while menus and attractions can be tailored to local tastes.

For families facing higher prices for dining and entertainment, Drake believes affordable memberships, value-focused birthday packages, and more activities under one roof will encourage repeat visits and strengthen customer loyalty as the company enters its next phase of growth.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Coney Island’s small businesses are receiving a major boost with the launch of a new Business Improvement District (BID) designed to strengthen one of New York City’s most recognizable commercial destinations.

The Coney Island Business Improvement District officially begins operations this month following its incorporation earlier this year by the New York City Department of Small Business Services (SBS). The organization will oversee improvements along key commercial corridors with an initial operating budget of up to $1 million.

Business Improvement Districts are nonprofit organizations funded through assessments on local commercial property owners. The funds are used to provide supplemental neighborhood services beyond those supplied by the city, including enhanced sanitation, landscaping, public safety initiatives, marketing, beautification projects, and support for local merchants.

The new district covers much of the commercial area surrounding Mermaid Avenue and Surf Avenue, serving businesses that welcome millions of visitors each year to Coney Island’s beaches, amusement parks, restaurants, entertainment venues, and boardwalk attractions.

City officials say the district is intended to strengthen the neighborhood’s economy while helping businesses operate successfully throughout the year rather than relying almost exclusively on the summer tourism season.

Among the BID’s priorities are expanded sidewalk cleaning, graffiti removal, landscaping, seasonal decorations, business promotion, and technical assistance for merchants. Organizers also hope to attract additional investment while improving the area’s appearance for both residents and visitors.

The project represents the latest addition to New York City’s growing network of Business Improvement Districts. The Coney Island BID becomes Brooklyn’s 24th BID and one of nearly 80 districts citywide, organizations that collectively invest hundreds of millions of dollars annually into neighborhood commercial corridors.

Local business leaders have welcomed the initiative, saying additional sanitation and beautification services are especially important during the busy summer months, when visitor traffic reaches its highest levels.

Business owners also expect the district to provide a stronger collective voice when advocating for neighborhood improvements and economic development. Rather than individual merchants addressing issues independently, the BID allows businesses to pool resources and coordinate investments that benefit the entire commercial district.

The city has already invested significant funding into merchant support and revitalization efforts in Coney Island over recent years. Officials say the new BID builds upon those earlier investments by establishing a permanent organization focused on long-term economic growth.

Supporters believe improved streetscapes, stronger marketing, cleaner public spaces, and coordinated programming will encourage additional businesses to invest in the neighborhood while creating a more attractive experience for visitors.

For Brooklyn’s economy, the new BID represents another investment in supporting small businesses, preserving one of New York’s most iconic tourist destinations, and encouraging year-round commercial activity in a neighborhood historically dependent on seasonal tourism.

As summer crowds continue arriving at Coney Island, the district now begins its first major test—demonstrating whether targeted local investment can translate into stronger businesses, cleaner streets, increased foot traffic, and sustained economic growth.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Through the first half of 2026, which closed Tuesday, June 30, Canada’s main stock index has once again outperformed the U.S. market, extending one of the more surprising trends investors have watched over the past two years. The S&P/TSX Composite Index in Toronto has traded near record highs around the 35,000 mark, and unlike the technology-driven rally south of the border, Canada’s gains have been powered largely by its banking sector.

While the U.S. stock market has been dominated by artificial intelligence, semiconductor companies, and a handful of mega-cap technology firms, Canada’s market has followed a very different path. Technology represents only a small portion of the TSX, while financial institutions, mining companies, and energy producers account for most of the index’s value.

Financial stocks make up roughly one-third of the S&P/TSX Composite, compared with only about one-eighth of the S&P 500. That difference has become a major advantage as Canadian banks continued producing strong earnings while precious metals and commodity-related companies also benefited from favorable market conditions.

The trend began last year and has continued into 2026. During 2025, the S&P/TSX Composite Index generated a total return of approximately 31.7%, significantly outperforming the S&P 500’s return of about 17.9%. Canadian financial stocks rose more than 35% during that period, while mining companies benefited from strong gains in gold and silver prices.

Canada’s banking system remains one of the country’s greatest competitive advantages. Unlike the United States, where thousands of banks compete across the country, Canada’s financial sector is dominated by a small group of highly regulated national institutions, including Royal Bank of Canada, Toronto-Dominion Bank, Bank of Montreal, Bank of Nova Scotia, CIBC, and National Bank of Canada. Their stable business models, consistent profitability, and long histories of dividend growth continue attracting investors seeking dependable returns.

Recent earnings reinforced that reputation. CIBC reported stronger-than-expected first-quarter results, posting adjusted earnings above analysts’ forecasts while reporting double-digit revenue growth and a substantial increase in net income. The bank also announced another dividend increase, continuing a tradition that has made Canadian banks popular among income-focused investors.

Toronto-Dominion Bank has also delivered strong shareholder returns despite ongoing regulatory issues affecting parts of its U.S. operations. Investors have remained confident in the bank’s core Canadian franchise, helping support its share price throughout the past year.

Lower energy prices have also benefited Canada’s financial sector. As crude oil retreated following the easing of tensions in the Middle East, expectations for lower inflation improved. That has reduced concerns about loan losses while providing a more stable outlook for borrowers and lenders alike. Investors generally expect the Bank of Canada to maintain a relatively steady interest-rate policy during much of the remainder of 2026, providing additional support for financial stocks.

For investors, Canada’s performance offers an important reminder about diversification. While U.S. technology companies have dominated headlines, markets built around financial institutions, commodities, and dividend-paying companies can outperform during different phases of the economic cycle. Many portfolio managers continue using Canadian equities to balance exposure to high-growth technology stocks with sectors that historically provide more stable income.

Analysts caution that maintaining this level of outperformance may become more difficult during the second half of the year. Continued strength will likely depend on corporate earnings, interest-rate expectations, commodity prices, and whether sectors such as energy and industrials begin contributing more meaningfully to market gains.

Even so, Canada’s stock market has demonstrated that investors do not need a technology-heavy index to generate impressive returns. Strong banks, disciplined regulation, reliable dividends, and resilient commodity producers have combined to make the S&P/TSX Composite Index one of the strongest-performing major equity markets for a second consecutive year.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Meta Platforms has spent the past two years pouring staggering sums into artificial intelligence, and on Wednesday it signaled a new way to earn some of that money back. Shares of the company closed up nearly 9% after news that Meta is building a cloud business to sell its excess computing power to outside customers, a plan first reported by Bloomberg and later confirmed by CNBC.

The initiative, known internally as Meta Compute, would put the social-media giant into direct competition with the established cloud providers — Amazon Web Services, Microsoft Azure, and Google Cloud. According to the reporting, Meta is weighing two approaches: selling access to AI models hosted on its own infrastructure, similar to Amazon’s Bedrock service, or renting out raw computing capacity, the model neocloud providers like CoreWeave have built entire businesses on. The plans are still early and could change.

The market’s enthusiastic reaction says a great deal about what has been worrying investors. Meta is projected to spend as much as $145 billion on AI infrastructure this year, part of a broader industry outlay expected to exceed $700 billion. Shareholders have grown increasingly concerned about that level of spending, and the stock had underperformed the broader market before Wednesday’s surge. A credible plan to generate revenue from that infrastructure immediately eased many of those concerns.

The business logic is straightforward. Meta has built enormous data-center capacity to power its own AI ambitions, but not all of that computing power is being used every hour of every day. Selling excess capacity allows the company to generate billions in additional revenue while its own internal demand fluctuates. Chief Executive Mark Zuckerberg hinted at the strategy during Meta’s shareholder meeting in May, saying cloud computing was “definitely on the table” and noting that companies regularly approach Meta seeking access to its AI models and computing resources.

For businesses developing AI applications, additional competition among cloud providers is generally positive. The AI infrastructure market has been dominated by a handful of major providers, while shortages of advanced AI chips have kept computing costs elevated. A company with Meta’s scale entering the market could expand supply, reduce pricing pressure, and make advanced AI services more accessible to startups and enterprises alike.

The announcement also reflects a broader shift across the technology industry. For the past two years, companies justified enormous AI spending largely as a defensive necessity to remain competitive. Meta is now attempting to transform those investments into a profit center rather than simply treating them as expenses. That change in strategy was welcomed by Wall Street.

There is precedent. Elon Musk’s SpaceX, following the integration of xAI, has begun leasing capacity from its massive Memphis AI data center to outside customers, including Anthropic and Google. Analysts at Bloomberg Intelligence estimate those operations could eventually generate tens of billions of dollars in annual revenue. That opportunity helps explain why Meta is pursuing a similar business.

The move, however, creates new competitive pressures. Shares of AI infrastructure providers including CoreWeave and Nebius Group weakened following the announcement, reflecting investor concern that one of their largest customers could become a direct competitor. Should Meta aggressively market its available computing power instead of simply selling occasional excess capacity, the competitive landscape for AI infrastructure could change significantly.

Many details remain unknown. Meta has not announced pricing, launch dates, or customer commitments. The initiative is reportedly being led by infrastructure chief Santosh Janardhan and company President Dina Powell McCormick, signaling that the project has support from senior leadership.

For everyday consumers, the impact is indirect but meaningful. More available AI computing capacity generally leads to lower development costs, faster innovation, and eventually less expensive AI-powered products and services. As artificial intelligence becomes woven into everyday business operations, competition among cloud providers could accelerate the rollout of new tools while helping control prices.

The broader takeaway is that Meta is no longer investing solely to support its own AI ambitions. It is attempting to turn one of the world’s largest AI infrastructure investments into a new business line capable of generating substantial long-term revenue. Investors responded enthusiastically because the strategy offers a potential path to monetize billions of dollars already committed to AI expansion.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. stocks closed mixed Wednesday, July 1, on the first day of the third quarter, as gains in banks and other value stocks lifted the Dow Jones Industrial Average to another record while a selloff in semiconductor shares pulled the Nasdaq Composite lower. Investors also weighed comments from new Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh, who signaled that the central bank remains focused on reducing inflation rather than cutting interest rates.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average gained about 0.5% to a fresh record high, extending Tuesday’s record close of 52,319.20. The S&P 500 finished little changed as strength in financial stocks offset weakness in technology, while the Nasdaq Composite declined as investors took profits in many of this year’s biggest AI winners. The small-cap Russell 2000 climbed roughly 0.6%, reflecting renewed buying in domestically focused companies. Roughly two-thirds of all U.S. stocks finished higher despite the weakness among major technology names.

Warsh dominated much of the day’s discussion after speaking at the European Central Bank’s annual forum in Sintra, Portugal. In his first major international appearance since replacing Jerome Powell as Fed chair, he emphasized that the central bank remains committed to restoring inflation to its 2% target, stating that anyone expecting the Fed to tolerate higher inflation “would be disappointed.”

The remarks reinforced the Federal Reserve’s independence from political pressure, despite repeated calls from President Donald Trump for lower interest rates. With inflation still running at 4.2% in May, traders have increasingly begun pricing in the possibility that the Fed’s next move could be another rate increase rather than a cut later this year.

Adding to investor caution, payroll processor ADP reported that private employers added just 98,000 jobs during June, a weaker-than-expected reading ahead of Thursday’s closely watched government employment report.

Market movers

Technology stocks led the decline as investors questioned whether the rapid pace of AI-related spending can continue indefinitely. Micron Technology and SanDisk each fell about 8%, while Nvidia lost roughly 3%. AI infrastructure companies experienced even steeper declines, with CoreWeave and Nebius Group posting double-digit losses.

Not every technology company struggled. Meta Platforms surged approximately 8% after unveiling plans to expand into cloud computing by offering businesses access to artificial intelligence models and computing infrastructure. Microsoft, Amazon, and Alphabet finished little changed.

Corporate news also influenced trading throughout the session.

Nike slipped about 2% despite reporting quarterly results that exceeded Wall Street expectations, as executives warned about ongoing weakness in China, where sales declined 12%. Constellation Brands edged higher after posting better-than-expected earnings.

Bloom Energy gained nearly 8% after expanding its partnership with Brookfield to finance power-generation projects serving AI data centers.

Meanwhile, Kroger declined about 2.8% following its announcement that it will acquire grocery chain Giant Eagle for approximately $1.65 billion.

Among Dow components, Microsoft, Chevron, and Apple were among the strongest performers, while Caterpillar, Walmart, and Nvidia weighed on the index.

Analysts continued highlighting opportunities in artificial intelligence despite Wednesday’s pullback. UBS raised its price target on Marvell Technology to $340, citing the company’s leadership in advanced memory technologies used inside AI data centers.

Investors are also preparing for SpaceX to join the Nasdaq-100 Index before trading begins on July 7, forcing index-tracking funds to purchase shares.

Commodities and volatility

Oil prices drifted lower as diplomatic efforts in the Middle East continued. Brent crude traded near $72 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate fell below $69, extending one of the sharpest quarterly declines since 2020.

Lower energy prices have helped reduce inflation pressures by lowering gasoline and transportation costs for consumers and businesses alike.

Gold remained under pressure as the stronger U.S. dollar and expectations for higher interest rates reduced demand for the precious metal. Market volatility increased modestly as investors balanced concerns over interest rates against elevated technology valuations.

Looking ahead

Attention now turns to Thursday’s U.S. employment report, released one day early because financial markets will be closed Friday for the Independence Day holiday.

Economists expect approximately 110,000 jobs were added during June, with the unemployment rate holding near 4.3%. A stronger-than-expected report would likely reinforce the Federal Reserve’s inflation-focused stance and further reduce expectations for near-term rate cuts.

The first trading day of the third quarter suggested investors are becoming more selective after one of the strongest quarters in years. While technology paused after its extraordinary rally, financials and value-oriented stocks picked up the slack, allowing the Dow to reach another record. Whether that rotation continues may depend on the jobs report, inflation data, and whether the AI-driven rally resumes in the weeks ahead.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

New Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh said Wednesday, July 1, that the central bank will stay independent and focus on bringing inflation down, comments that likely rule out the interest-rate cuts President Trump has repeatedly demanded. Speaking at a central bank forum in Sintra, Portugal, Warsh said that anyone expecting the Fed to tolerate inflation above its 2% target would be disappointed, adding bluntly, “We’re going to deliver price stability.”

The remarks matter to every household because the Fed’s interest-rate decisions ripple straight into the cost of mortgages, car loans, credit-card balances, and the interest people earn on savings. When the Fed wants to cool inflation, it typically keeps borrowing costs high or raises them. So Warsh’s clear signal that fighting inflation comes first means relief on loan rates may not arrive as soon as many borrowers hoped.

The comments also mark a notable shift for Warsh, who took over from Jerome Powell on May 22. While campaigning for the job last year, he had called for lower rates. Since becoming chair, he has moved firmly toward an inflation-fighting stance. Asked directly about Trump’s oft-repeated push for cheaper money, Warsh stressed the Fed’s distance from politics: “We’ve been an independent central bank for a very long time. We’re going to be an independent central bank at this moment, and you’re going to see no changes to that.”

The backdrop is stubborn inflation. Prices rose 4.2% in the year through May, a three-year high, pushed up largely by the U.S.-Iran war’s effect on gasoline. But with a peace agreement now in place, gas prices have been falling, suggesting inflation may have peaked. Warsh himself pointed to encouraging signs, noting that inflation expectations, meaning where households and markets think prices are heading, have eased over the past month in both surveys and bond prices.

That leaves the Fed with a genuine dilemma, and it cuts against the president’s wishes in a striking way. Rather than cutting, Wall Street investors now think the Fed’s next move could be a rate hike, possibly as soon as September, lifting its key rate from about 3.6% to roughly 3.9%. At the Fed’s last meeting on June 16–17, nearly half of the 19 policymakers signaled support for higher rates this year, eight favored no change, and just one penciled in a cut. Warsh, who opposes telegraphing future moves, declined to say what the Fed will actually do. “I’m not going to make a judgment now,” he said. “The tactics, the strategy, and the rest, that’s still to come.”

For businesses, the message is to plan for borrowing costs staying elevated a while longer. Companies that were counting on cheaper financing to fund expansion, hiring, or equipment purchases may need to wait. Small businesses, which often rely on variable-rate loans and credit lines, are especially sensitive to the Fed’s stance. On the flip side, savers earning healthy yields on money-market accounts and certificates of deposit could keep benefiting.

Much depends on what happens next with prices and jobs. If gas prices keep sliding and inflation cools, Warsh may be able to avoid raising rates. Hiring has picked up in recent months, and economists expect the government’s June jobs report on Thursday to show unemployment holding at a low 4.3%. A solid jobs number would ease pressure on the Fed to lower rates, since a strong labor market gives the central bank room to keep fighting inflation without worrying as much about the economy stalling.

Warsh also flagged artificial intelligence as a wild card, one he thinks could eventually help. He has set up five internal task forces to study issues including AI’s impact on productivity, and reiterated his view that over time AI will expand the economy’s capacity to produce goods and services, which would ease inflation pressures. He declined, though, to say whether the current boom in AI spending is itself inflationary right now.

The bottom line for everyday Americans is that the Fed under new leadership is prioritizing lower inflation over cheaper credit, and is publicly resisting political pressure to cut. That means the high rates on mortgages, auto loans, and credit cards that households have been living with may stick around, and could even edge higher, until Warsh is convinced inflation is genuinely under control. For anyone waiting to refinance a home or buy a car on credit, patience may be required a while longer.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Sales of nicotine pouches in the United States have surged nearly 251% since early 2023, making them one of the fastest-growing consumer products in the country and reshaping the economics of convenience stores, according to research by the CDC Foundation using retail data from Circana.

Total retail sales climbed from $145.5 million to $510.5 million, a 250.8% increase in just over two years.

Nicotine pouches are small, tobacco-free packets placed under the upper lip that deliver nicotine without smoke, vapor, or chewing tobacco. They can be used where smoking is prohibited and are available in a variety of flavors and nicotine strengths. The best-known brand is Zyn.

Much of the demand is being driven by adult smokers looking for alternatives to traditional cigarettes. While many consumers view pouches as a potential step away from smoking, public health officials note there is still limited evidence showing they are effective smoking-cessation tools.

For convenience stores, however, the business impact has been dramatic.

Traditional cigarette sales continue to decline, falling about 2.4% over the past year, although cigarettes still account for nearly 70% of nicotine-category sales. At the same time, smokeless tobacco products generated approximately $13 billion in sales during the 52 weeks ending March 22, 2026, with nicotine pouches becoming one of the fastest-growing segments.

Retailers that rely heavily on impulse purchases at checkout counters increasingly view nicotine pouches as one of their strongest growth categories.

The boom has also become a lifeline for major tobacco companies.

Philip Morris International, which acquired Swedish Match, the maker of Zyn, reported U.S. Zyn sales rising more than 10% during the first quarter. Altria continues expanding its On! pouch business, while British American Tobacco markets its Velo and Lyft brands.

Rather than replacing tobacco-company profits, nicotine pouches are increasingly replacing older smokeless products such as chewing tobacco and snuff while helping sustain overall nicotine sales.

Competition inside convenience stores has intensified.

Manufacturers are aggressively competing for shelf space through promotions, temporary discounts, and buy-one-get-one offers. Although Zyn generally sells at a 60% to 65% premium over competing brands, growing competition is beginning to pressure retail profit margins.

Regulation remains one of the industry’s biggest uncertainties.

Only two brands have received Food and Drug Administration marketing authorization: 20 Zyn products approved in January 2025 and six On! Plus products approved later that year. Those approvals provide a significant competitive advantage while many other products continue competing without formal FDA authorization.

The rapid expansion has also drawn growing criticism from health advocates.

A tobacco-industry watchdog estimates global nicotine pouch sales have increased roughly 660% since 2020 and could reach $25 billion by 2028. Researchers continue studying their long-term health effects and warn that nicotine remains harmful to brain development through approximately age 25.

Some researchers also note that many users consume nicotine pouches alongside cigarettes or vaping products rather than replacing them entirely.

For now, however, the financial story is unmistakable.

A product that barely registered on store shelves only a few years ago has rapidly become a multibillion-dollar category supporting convenience-store sales while reshaping the strategies of some of the world’s largest tobacco companies.

The next chapter will depend largely on how aggressively regulators oversee the industry, whether competition drives prices lower, and how consumers respond as the category continues expanding at one of the fastest rates in retail.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

American car buyers sent a clear message during the second quarter: they want better fuel economy without giving up the convenience of a gasoline engine. As automakers reported U.S. sales Wednesday, July 1, companies with strong hybrid lineups generally outperformed rivals that relied more heavily on fully electric vehicles.

Toyota Motor reported a 1.1% increase in second-quarter U.S. sales, driven by approximately 20% growth in hybrid and other electrified vehicles. The results reinforced Toyota’s long-held strategy of expanding hybrid offerings while many competitors focused primarily on battery-electric vehicles.

The contrast was especially noticeable at General Motors, which reported a 4.2% decline in quarterly U.S. sales, delivering 714,896 vehicles compared with 746,588 during the same period a year ago. While GM has invested billions of dollars in electric vehicles, Toyota has continued expanding its hybrid lineup, giving buyers more options at a time when many consumers remain hesitant to switch entirely to EVs.

Industry analysts say that strategy is beginning to reshape the competitive landscape. According to Cox Automotive, Toyota has narrowed the sales gap with GM to its smallest level since 2021, when Toyota briefly became America’s top-selling automaker during pandemic-related supply shortages. Aside from that unusual year, GM has led the U.S. market every year since 1931.

For consumers, hybrids have become an attractive middle ground. They deliver significantly better fuel economy than traditional gasoline vehicles without requiring charging stations or long charging times. With gasoline prices remaining elevated for much of the year and the federal $7,500 tax credit for many electric vehicles no longer available, many buyers are finding hybrids to be the most practical choice.

The broader industry produced mixed results. Stellantis, the parent company of Chrysler, reported a 5.9% increase in sales, while Nissan posted a 9.6% gain. Honda, Hyundai, and Volkswagen also reported solid performances, with Hyundai continuing to benefit from strong demand for its hybrid models. Ford, Tesla, and General Motors were among the manufacturers facing the greatest pressure.

Overall industry sales remained relatively stable, with the annual selling pace hovering near 16 million vehicles. But beneath those headline numbers, buyer preferences continue shifting toward vehicles that offer improved fuel economy without asking consumers to fully embrace electric transportation.

Tariffs are creating another challenge for manufacturers. General Motors has estimated that import duties on vehicles, steel, and aluminum could increase its costs by between $2.5 billion and $3.5 billion this year. Those higher costs could eventually be reflected in vehicle prices, adding further pressure to a market where affordability is already stretched.

That affordability challenge continues to grow. The average monthly payment for a new vehicle recently reached a record $777, while buyers are increasingly stretching loan terms to seven years or longer simply to keep monthly payments manageable.

For automakers, the second quarter offered an important lesson. Companies that maintained balanced product portfolios with gasoline, hybrid, and electric vehicles appear to be navigating today’s uncertain market more successfully than manufacturers that moved aggressively toward an all-electric future. Several automakers are now reassessing their long-term product strategies as consumer demand evolves.

For buyers, the current market offers more choices than ever before. Hybrid technology has matured significantly over the past decade, delivering better fuel economy, lower emissions, and fewer compromises than earlier generations. That combination is proving attractive to drivers looking to reduce fuel costs without changing long-established driving habits.

The second quarter ultimately belonged to hybrids. As automakers prepare new product launches and adjust future investment plans, the strongest demand continues to come from vehicles that combine electric efficiency with the familiarity of a gasoline engine. For now, that balance appears to be exactly what many American consumers are looking for.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Florida Continues to Lead the Nation in Protecting Taxpayer Dollars from Politically Biased Media Monitors

Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis signed the state’s $117.6 billion budget for the 2026–2027 fiscal year on Monday, and buried inside the spending plan is a rule that decides which companies can and cannot get paid with Florida tax dollars. For the second year in a row, the budget blocks state agencies from hiring advertising or marketing firms that rate news outlets for bias or reliability.

The target is a small but growing industry. Companies like NewsGuard, Ad Fontes Media and the Global Disinformation Index score news sites on how trustworthy they judge those sites to be. Big advertisers and ad agencies often use those scores to decide where to place ads, steering money toward outlets that rate well and away from ones that rate poorly.

Florida’s new rule says state agencies can no longer do business with any advertising agency or contractor that acts as or uses the services of media reliability and bias monitors. In plain English, if an ad firm wants Florida’s advertising business, it cannot rely on those rating systems to determine where the state’s ads are placed.

The Independent Media Council, a coalition of conservative and independent news organizations, praised the move. Spokesperson Christine Czernejewski said taxpayer-funded advertising should reach as many people as possible rather than being filtered through what she called ideological gatekeepers. The council also credited House Speaker Daniel Perez and state Sen. Ed Hooper for championing the measure.

Supporters argue the rating firms are not the neutral referees they claim to be. They point to studies, including research from the Media Research Center, which reported that NewsGuard awarded higher average ratings to left-leaning publications than to right-leaning outlets. Critics contend that a poor rating can quietly reduce a news organization’s advertising revenue without any law ever being passed.

There is significant money behind the debate. NewsGuard developed its “Misinformation Fingerprints” tool with assistance from a $750,000 grant from the U.S. Department of Defense, then marketed the technology to social media platforms, artificial intelligence developers and technology companies. That federal relationship later drew scrutiny when the U.S. House Oversight Committee opened an investigation in 2024, citing concerns about potential impacts on protected First Amendment speech.

The companies affected by the measure see the issue differently. Vanessa Otero, founder and chief executive of Ad Fontes Media, has argued that laws like Florida’s may infringe upon the free-speech rights of private businesses by discouraging constitutionally protected business practices and chilling the speech of advertising agencies. She has said Ad Fontes will continue operating under its existing model.

At its core, the dispute centers on how billions of dollars in advertising are directed. Advertising agencies have long relied on “brand safety” tools to keep clients’ advertisements away from content they consider risky, and media-rating firms have increasingly become part of that process. Florida is now removing state advertising dollars from that system, and it is not the only state moving in that direction.

West Virginia enacted a similar measure this year through its First Amendment Preservation Act, and Congress has also considered similar restrictions in recent National Defense Authorization Act legislation, reflecting growing scrutiny in Washington over the government’s relationship with media-rating firms. The private sector has shifted as well. Advertising giant Omnicom Group agreed, as part of its merger with IPG, not to engage in unlawful collusion to direct advertising away from publishers based on political or ideological viewpoints.

The Florida provision did not emerge in a vacuum. According to reporting by Florida Politics and Jason Garcia of Seeking Rents, the original proposal followed lobbying efforts by Newsmax, which receives relatively low scores from rating organizations such as NewsGuard. A low rating can discourage advertisers from placing ads with a news outlet, and Newsmax last year paid more than $100 million to settle two separate defamation lawsuits. Supporters of the Florida measure argue those issues are separate from the state’s policy, maintaining that the law is about ensuring taxpayer dollars are not allocated using ideological media-rating systems.

The provision is narrowly written. It does not apply to audience measurement companies or organizations that compile readership and viewership data. Instead, it applies only to contractors whose primary function is evaluating the factual accuracy, political bias or alleged misinformation of news organizations. Like last year’s language, the provision is included in the annual budget and must be renewed in future budgets to remain in effect.

For now, Florida’s message is clear: companies that rate the news will not receive state advertising dollars, and businesses seeking Florida’s advertising contracts will have to decide whether to continue relying on those rating services. Whether other states adopt similar policies—or whether the restrictions are ultimately challenged in court—could shape how government advertising dollars are spent for years to come.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Americans felt slightly better about the economy in June, mostly because gas prices came down. The University of Michigan said its final Index of Consumer Sentiment rose to 49.5, up from May’s all-time low of 44.8, with survey director Joanne Hsu crediting relief at the pump for the rebound.

It was the first increase since February, before the U.S.-Israeli war with Iran pushed global energy prices higher.

The improvement was real but modest, and the survey makes clear people are still unhappy. Sentiment remains about 13% below January and roughly 19% below a year ago. For the third straight month, more than half of consumers brought up high prices on their own as a drag on their finances, Hsu said.

The gas-price story is central. The national average retail gasoline price dropped to about $4.11 from $4.56 at its recent peak, according to AAA. Prices at the pump had reached near-historic highs after the conflict led to the near-closure of the Strait of Hormuz, the waterway that moves a large share of the world’s oil. That spike had driven two straight record-low sentiment readings.

Lower-income households drove the June bounce. Hsu said those consumers posted a particularly strong increase, which makes sense because gasoline takes up a bigger share of their budgets. When the price of a tank of gas falls, families living closest to the edge feel it first.

But the relief has limits, and inflation is still the top worry. Year-ahead inflation expectations edged down to 4.6% from 4.8%, while long-run expectations fell to 3.4% from 3.9%. Both are still well above the levels seen before the Iran conflict began. Hsu said consumers welcomed cheaper gas but remain worried that high prices overall will keep eroding their living standards.

A few other forces helped. The job market stayed solid, with three straight months of better-than-expected job growth and a stable unemployment rate, which likely added to the better mood. The expectations gauge climbed to its highest level in three months as fears about the long-term fallout from the war eased.

There is also a split running underneath the headline number, and it matters for businesses trying to read their customers. Hsu noted that the soaring stock market is lifting personal finances—but mainly for consumers who hold the largest stock portfolios. That leaves a familiar divide: wealthier households cushioned by market gains, and everyone else watching grocery and gas receipts.

For retailers, restaurants and service businesses, the signal is mixed. Sentiment is off the floor, lower-income shoppers have a bit more breathing room as fuel costs fall, and a steady job market keeps paychecks coming. But with the cost of living still front of mind for most households, spending is likely to stay cautious on anything that isn’t essential.

The bottom line is that one month of cheaper gas was enough to stop the slide, but not enough to make people feel good. Even with the gain, consumers remain far more downbeat than they were before the war. The next move in sentiment will likely follow the same thing that drove this one—what happens at the pump.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The 2026 FIFA World Cup is becoming a major business success for its U.S. television broadcasters, with Fox Sports and Telemundo reporting record audiences as the tournament heads into the knockout rounds.

According to Fox Sports and Nielsen, approximately 84 million Americans watched at least part of the tournament through June 25, making it the network’s strongest World Cup audience on record. Nielsen’s figure includes viewers who watched for at least one minute of tournament coverage.

Telemundo, which holds the Spanish-language U.S. broadcasting rights, said its audience is running at more than double the pace of the 2022 Qatar World Cup, setting new engagement records across its television and streaming platforms.

Individual matches have produced some of the largest audiences in U.S. soccer history.

The United States–Turkey match on June 25 averaged 15.8 million viewers on Fox despite the U.S. already having secured a place in the knockout stage.

The U.S. victory over Paraguay attracted more than 18 million viewers across Fox, FS1, and Tubi, making it the most-watched English-language men’s World Cup broadcast ever in the United States. Viewership peaked at approximately 21.5 million during the match.

Another U.S. victory over Australia, which clinched advancement to the knockout rounds, averaged roughly 14.8 million viewers.

For Fox, the ratings represent an enormous return on its investment.

The network paid approximately $485 million for the U.S. English-language World Cup broadcast rights. Given the record audiences, many media analysts now view that agreement as one of the strongest sports-rights investments in recent television history.

According to reports, the rights package may ultimately prove worth several times what Fox originally paid after the network secured favorable terms years earlier as part of broader negotiations with FIFA.

Hosting the tournament across North America has also contributed to the surge in interest.

Matches played in the United States have generated strong local attendance while the success of the U.S. Men’s National Team has created valuable prime-time television windows that continue attracting large national audiences.

The record ratings are particularly important for advertisers.

Television networks sell World Cup advertising months in advance based largely on projected audiences. As viewership continues exceeding expectations, premium advertising inventory during knockout matches becomes increasingly valuable, particularly with elimination games keeping viewers engaged until the final whistle.

For both Fox and Telemundo, the next several rounds could produce even larger audiences if the United States advances deeper into the tournament.

The broader business message extends beyond one sporting event.

For years, soccer was viewed as a niche television property in the United States. The record audiences now demonstrate that the sport has become a mainstream television attraction capable of delivering the large, national audiences advertisers traditionally associated with the NFL, college football, and other major sporting events.

For broadcasters, advertisers, and sponsors alike, the 2026 World Cup is proving that soccer has become one of the most valuable properties in American sports television.

JBizNews Sports Business Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The World Bank said Monday it will eliminate its formal climate lending targets, marking a major policy shift that follows months of pressure from the United States, the institution’s largest shareholder. While the bank extended its overall climate change policy framework indefinitely, it will no longer require a fixed percentage of its financing to be dedicated to climate-related projects.

“We will retire the 45-percent climate co-benefits target and the 35-percent target,” the World Bank Group said in a statement, adding that it will instead “complete our shift from inputs to outcomes to maximize development impact.”

In practical terms, the bank will no longer promise that a set share of its annual lending must support climate-related projects. Instead, future financing decisions will be guided by the priorities and development needs of individual member countries.

The targets had become a central part of the bank’s strategy over the past several years. Its previous five-year framework called for 35% of annual financing to generate climate benefits by 2025. World Bank President Ajay Banga later raised that goal to 45% during the 2023 United Nations climate conference.

Under that framework, the bank’s climate financing nearly doubled—from approximately $21 billion in 2021 to $39 billion in 2025—making it the world’s largest provider of international climate financing for developing nations.

The policy change represents a significant victory for the Trump administration.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent had urged the World Bank to abandon what he described as a “distortionary” climate finance target, arguing that it diverted resources from poverty reduction and economic growth. The Treasury Department welcomed the expiration of the climate targets and has encouraged the bank to place greater emphasis on expanding access to reliable energy, including natural gas projects. The United States has also withdrawn from the Paris climate agreement.

For the global economy, the decision carries significant implications because the World Bank helps finance infrastructure, energy, transportation, agriculture, manufacturing, and industrial development across emerging markets. Its lending priorities often influence what types of projects governments pursue and private investors support.

Supporters of the policy shift argue that removing rigid climate targets gives developing countries greater flexibility to finance the projects they believe are most urgently needed, including conventional energy infrastructure capable of supporting economic growth and expanding electricity access.

Critics argue the opposite.

Environmental groups warn that eliminating formal targets could gradually reduce funding for climate projects while making it more difficult to measure progress and hold the institution accountable.

“The current plan, while imperfect, provides a basis for accountability,” said Rajneesh Bhuee of the advocacy organization Recourse.

The decision also highlighted divisions among the bank’s shareholders. While the United States pressed for removing the lending targets, several European governments, joined by some Latin American countries and small island nations, favored maintaining a formal climate framework. Many of those countries continue supporting the broader international goal of mobilizing $300 billion annually in climate finance for developing economies by 2035.

Even before Monday’s announcement, the policy had faced criticism from multiple directions. Some analysts argued that much of the increase in climate financing had been directed toward projects containing only limited climate-related components, while others maintained that measurable targets remained essential regardless of imperfections.

Most economists do not expect climate lending to decline immediately. However, the absence of formal benchmarks could gradually reduce internal incentives to prioritize climate investments and make it harder for governments and investors to track how development funding is allocated.

For developing countries seeking financing, Monday’s decision signals a shift away from fixed climate commitments and toward greater flexibility based on national priorities. It also underscores the growing influence of the United States in reshaping how one of the world’s most important development institutions allocates tens of billions of dollars each year.

JBizNews Washington Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Brooklyn’s most notorious unfinished megaproject may finally be getting a last chapter. On Monday, June 29, Empire State Development, the state’s economic-development agency, along with developers Cirrus Workforce Housing and LCOR, unveiled a $5 billion plan to complete the long-stalled Atlantic Yards project, now known as Pacific Park, more than two decades after it was first announced. Governor Kathy Hochul called it one of New York’s most significant unfinished affordable-housing developments and said the state is finally moving it toward completion.

The plan calls for six new high-rise towers holding about 5,600 apartments and condos, including roughly 1,242 units, or about 21%, set aside as affordable for low- and moderate-income households. It would add about five and a half acres of public open space and feature a nearly 800-foot skyscraper connected to a 570-foot tower at the corner of Flatbush Avenue and Pacific Street, in the Prospect Heights neighborhood next to the Barclays Center.

To understand why this matters, it helps to know why the project stalled for so long. Atlantic Yards was first announced in 2003 by developer Forest City Ratner, with star architect Frank Gehry and Brooklyn’s own Jay-Z attached, and the Barclays Center opened in 2012. But the housing kept getting delayed. The project later passed to Greenland USA, which defaulted on roughly $350 million in loans. Cirrus and LCOR acquired the development rights at a foreclosure auction last October, becoming the third development team to take on the project.

The hardest and most expensive part is literally building on air. Six of the planned towers must sit on platforms constructed above the MTA’s Vanderbilt Rail Yard, where Long Island Rail Road trains continue to operate. Building those decks is a complex engineering challenge that adds an estimated $700 million to the cost and has been one of the biggest reasons the project has dragged on for more than two decades. New York State has now pledged about $700 million toward the platforms, including $175 million already approved in the latest state budget.

Here is where the business story becomes especially important for Brooklyn’s economy. Much of the construction will be financed by union pension funds, which will provide financing to the developers rather than relying primarily on traditional bank loans. Cirrus has committed to using union labor, creating the potential for years of well-paying construction jobs throughout the borough. Cirrus Chief Executive Joseph McDonnell said construction could begin by 2028, with the first affordable apartments welcoming residents as early as 2031 and full completion expected by the late 2030s.

For Brooklyn renters, the affordable housing is the centerpiece of the proposal. Housing costs throughout the borough have surged, with Prospect Heights home prices topping $1 million years ago. Adding more than 1,200 income-restricted apartments could provide meaningful relief. Critics, however, argue that too many of those units are aimed at moderate-income households instead of the lowest-income families originally promised when the state used eminent domain to assemble the site. Assemblymember Jo Anne Simon and local housing advocates say the revised plan still falls short of earlier affordability commitments.

The economic benefits extend well beyond housing. The development also includes retail and office space, along with community facilities such as an intergenerational center in the first residential building. Thousands of new residents would bring additional customers to local restaurants, retailers, and neighborhood businesses along Atlantic and Flatbush avenues, helping support an area that has lived alongside construction for years. New public open space is also intended to better connect the development with the surrounding community.

The project still has significant hurdles before construction begins. It must complete an environmental review expected to take about two years before receiving final approval from the Empire State Development board, a vote that may not occur until 2028. A memorandum of understanding between the developers and the state is due by July 31, 2026. If an agreement is not reached, the state could pursue penalties tied to previously unbuilt affordable housing commitments.

Still, the announcement represents the most meaningful progress in years on a project that became synonymous with delays. If completed, Pacific Park would deliver thousands of new homes, years of union construction jobs, expanded retail and office space, and new public parks. After more than two decades of missed deadlines, Brooklyn will now be watching to see whether Cirrus and LCOR can finally deliver what previous developers could not.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The trade barriers President Donald Trump raised to protect American industry are pushing some of the country’s biggest trading partners closer together. After more than two decades of stalled negotiations, the European Union and Mercosur — the South American bloc made up of Brazil, Argentina, Uruguay, and Paraguay — put their trade agreement into provisional effect on May 1, according to the European Commission. Officials on both sides say U.S. tariffs helped push the long-delayed deal across the finish line.

The agreement creates a trading zone of roughly 700 million people. It lowers tariffs on products including automobiles, machinery, and pharmaceuticals, saving European companies an estimated €4 billion each year. In return, exports of European agricultural products such as wine, spirits, chocolate, and olive oil are expected to rise significantly across South America.

The driving force, by many accounts, was Washington. Trump’s tariffs, including an additional 40% duty on Brazilian goods on top of existing rates, gave both blocs a stronger incentive to diversify their trading relationships. Former Brazilian diplomat Roberto Jaguaribe said uncertain trade relations with the United States naturally encourage countries to seek new partners, while former trade official Larissa Wachholz called the agreement a major turning point in Brazil’s traditionally protectionist trade policy.

The impact is already reaching smaller businesses. In Brazil, producers of cachaça — the sugarcane spirit used to make the caipirinha cocktail — see a rare opportunity to expand into Europe as tariffs fall and access to new markets improves. Distillers say exports could grow dramatically once the agreement is fully implemented.

For American businesses, the agreement presents a competitive challenge. Every tariff barrier the United States builds gives foreign competitors another reason to trade with one another instead. European and South American companies will now enjoy preferential access to each other’s markets that U.S. exporters do not receive. American manufacturers of machinery, aircraft parts, industrial equipment, and other products selling into Brazil may increasingly find themselves undercut by European rivals whose tariffs have been reduced or eliminated.

Mercosur is not stopping with Europe. Since Trump returned to office, the bloc has accelerated negotiations with other major economies, completing an agreement with four non-EU European countries while opening new talks with Canada, Japan, and the United Arab Emirates. Brazil, whose largest trading partner is China, is positioning itself at the center of an increasingly multipolar global trading system rather than relying heavily on any single country.

The agreement also extends beyond trade. Member nations pledged to uphold democratic institutions and remain committed to the Paris climate agreement, commitments European officials say have taken on added importance as the United States has stepped back from several international climate initiatives. The deal also strengthens Europe’s access to strategic raw materials, including niobium, a metal used in MRI scanners, aerospace components, and advanced technologies. The EU currently imports about 82% of its niobium from Mercosur countries.

There are still hurdles ahead. France, backed by its influential farming sector, continues to oppose portions of the agreement, and the pact will require formal approval from the European Parliament before taking full legal effect. Safeguards also allow either side to limit imports that threaten sensitive industries such as beef, poultry, and sugar.

Even so, tariffs are already being reduced on thousands of products, and businesses on both continents are moving quickly to capitalize on the new opportunities.

For Brazil, which also faces a U.S. investigation over alleged unfair trade practices, officials say there is little appetite to return to the protectionist policies of the past. The broader lesson is that global trade is not necessarily shrinking because of tariffs—it is increasingly being rerouted. As the United States becomes a more difficult market to access, many of the world’s largest economies are choosing to deepen trade with one another instead, leaving American exporters at risk of being left outside some of the world’s fastest-growing trade partnerships.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Extreme heat and severe weather have become one of the biggest financial risks facing the data centers powering the artificial-intelligence boom, insurers and operators are warning, as a record heatwave bakes Europe and strains power grids worldwide. According to insurance company Zurich, severe weather has become the leading cause of losses within its U.S. data center builders’ risk portfolio over the past three years, now accounting for roughly one-third of its losses in the sector.

“Severe weather is no longer something that can be treated as a background exposure,” said Patrick McBride, Zurich’s head of international construction. “It is one of the first things we and the owners we work with look at.” His comment captures a shift in how the industry views the weather: not as an occasional disruption, but as a core threat to a buildout costing hundreds of billions of dollars.

The trouble with extreme heat is that it hits twice. Cooling accounts for roughly 40% of a data center’s energy use even under normal conditions, and that share rises during heatwaves—precisely when air conditioners are already putting enormous pressure on electric grids.

“Data centers need the most energy exactly when the grid has the least available to give,” said Mishal Thadani, chief executive and co-founder of AI software platform Rhizome, which helps utilities identify climate vulnerabilities. He pointed to Turin, Italy, where temperatures approaching 100 degrees Fahrenheit placed underground power cables under thermal stress and contributed to repeated blackouts before additional AI facilities that each consume as much electricity as roughly 100,000 homes are even connected.

Compounding the challenge is where the industry is building. This year, 64% of global data center capacity under construction is located outside traditional hubs such as Northern Virginia, moving instead into rapidly growing markets including West Texas, Tennessee, Wisconsin, and Ohio. Land and electricity are often less expensive in those areas, but many also face elevated risks from tornadoes, hail, high winds, flooding, or wildfires.

The scale of the exposure is enormous. Climate-risk analytics firm First Street found that 79% of global data center capacity faces elevated risks from acute climate hazards. A separate analysis by MS Amlin estimated that 56% of planned U.S. data centers—representing nearly $800 billion in investment—are located in states highly exposed to hurricanes, severe storms, earthquakes, or winter weather.

For businesses, the risk ultimately comes down to money. Weather-related disruptions increase insurance claims, construction costs, repair expenses, and operational downtime. If insurers become less willing to underwrite large concentrations of expensive infrastructure in climate-vulnerable regions, premiums could rise significantly or coverage could become harder to obtain.

“It’s not a matter of if climate risks will impact the digital infrastructure revolution,” said Joe Macejak, U.S. property digital infrastructure leader at Marsh Risk. He warned that unmanaged climate risks “pose a threat to the capital stacks that are fueling the AI-driven data center revolution.”

Technology companies are responding by redesigning their facilities. Microsoft says it engineers its data centers to operate reliably across a wide range of environmental conditions through careful site selection, redundant systems, and real-time monitoring. Nvidia said its latest AI servers can operate with cooling liquid temperatures of 45 degrees Celsius, and that increasing chiller temperatures by just one degree can reduce cooling-energy costs by about 4%. Engineers are also developing more efficient liquid-cooling systems that move heat away from advanced AI chips more effectively.

The implications extend far beyond the technology industry. Modern AI infrastructure increasingly supports hospitals, banks, manufacturers, communications networks, retailers, and government agencies. A major outage caused by extreme weather can quickly ripple across the broader economy.

The artificial-intelligence boom may be creating unprecedented demand for computing power, but at its foundation the industry remains dependent on physical infrastructure—buildings, transmission lines, water, cooling systems, and reliable electricity. As climate risks intensify, the weather is becoming one of the biggest tests of whether that infrastructure can keep pace with the AI revolution.

JBizNews Technology Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. stocks pulled back Wednesday, July 1, the morning after major indexes closed out their best quarter since 2020, as investors digested a softer-than-expected read on hiring, watched Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh speak abroad, and eyed faltering peace talks in the Middle East. The retreat was modest, more of a breather than a reversal, after a run that pushed the Dow to back-to-back record highs.

In early trading, the S&P 500 slipped about 0.35%, the Dow Jones Industrial Average lost roughly 0.35%, and the tech-heavy Nasdaq Composite fell about 0.72%. The one bright spot was small companies: the Russell 2000 rose 0.46%, a sign that money was rotating out of the big technology names and into the smaller, more domestic stocks that tend to benefit when the economy looks steady. For context, the Dow closed Tuesday at a record 52,319.20 to cap a quarter in which the S&P 500 climbed more than 14% and the Nasdaq soared about 20%.

The morning’s big economic news was about jobs, and it pointed to a cooling market. Payroll processor ADP reported that private employers added just 98,000 jobs in June, fewer than economists expected and a clear slowdown. Separately, the outplacement firm Challenger, Gray & Christmas said U.S. employers announced just under 46,000 job cuts last month, roughly in line with a year earlier. Together the reports set the stage for the government’s June jobs report, which arrives Thursday, a day earlier than usual because of the July 4 holiday.

Market movers

The standout story for everyday shoppers came from the grocery aisle. Kroger shares fell about 2.8% after the supermarket giant said it would buy regional chain Giant Eagle in a $1.65 billion deal. The move comes after Kroger’s far larger $25 billion attempt to merge with Albertsons was blocked by regulators and courts in 2024. Kroger is fighting to hold down grocery prices while competing with Walmart and Amazon, and this smaller, more digestible acquisition is its way of growing without triggering another antitrust battle.

Technology was the day’s weak spot, extending a rough stretch for the market’s former darlings. The Magnificent Seven group of mega-cap tech stocks shed about $2.3 trillion in market value during June as investors questioned whether massive spending on artificial intelligence will actually turn into profits. CNBC’s Jim Cramer argued that Wall Street is now rewarding the companies that supply the AI boom, naming chipmakers like Micron, Intel, Marvell, AMD, and SanDisk, while punishing the giants footing the bill.

Analysts are still finding winners in the space. Wedbush technology analyst Dan Ives this week began coverage of newly public SpaceX with an outperform rating and a $190 price target, calling it more of an AI play than investors realize. SpaceX, which staged the largest IPO in history last month, is set to join the Nasdaq-100 index before trading opens on July 7, which will force index funds to buy the stock.

Commodities and volatility

Oil gave back its early gains and turned lower after diplomacy stumbled. Peace talks in Doha faltered Wednesday when Iran said its negotiators would not meet President Trump’s team, dimming hopes for a lasting deal and a full return to normal oil flows. Crude fell about 1%, with Brent sliding toward $72 a barrel and U.S. benchmark WTI dropping below $69. Even with the dip, oil remains far below its wartime highs, which has been the single biggest force pulling inflation lower and easing pressure on the Fed.

Much of the day’s caution centered on Warsh, who is appearing at the European Central Bank’s forum in Sintra, Portugal, alongside ECB President Christine Lagarde, Bank of England Governor Andrew Bailey, and Bank of Canada Governor Tiff Macklem. Investors are parsing his every word for hints about where interest rates head next, a question that touches everything from mortgage rates to credit-card bills.

Looking ahead

The rest of the holiday-shortened week is all about jobs. After Wednesday’s soft ADP figure, traders turn to Thursday’s June employment report for a fuller picture of whether the labor market is genuinely cooling or simply catching its breath. A reading on manufacturing activity is also due. With the SpaceX index addition looming July 7 and markets thin ahead of the long weekend, trading could stay choppy. After a quarter this strong, a pause is hardly a surprise, and many on Wall Street see the early-July softness as digestion rather than the start of a real downturn.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Spot jet fuel prices have fallen about 40% from their April peak, according to data from Airlines for America, the airline industry’s trade association. But despite the sharp decline in one of their largest operating costs, major U.S. airlines say they have little intention of lowering ticket prices as demand for travel remains strong.

Speaking to investors this spring, Delta Air Lines Chief Executive Ed Bastian said fares are currently at the “right level,” signaling that lower fuel costs will not necessarily translate into cheaper airfare for consumers.

For travelers planning summer vacations, the numbers tell the story.

According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, airfares were nearly 27% higher in May than a year earlier. Average ticket prices climbed to roughly $1,105 in early May before easing to about $980 in June, but they remain significantly above last year’s levels.

Fuel typically accounts for 20% to 25% of an airline’s operating expenses. The Argus U.S. Jet Fuel Index stood near $2.91 per gallon late last week—down sharply from April’s highs but still above prices seen earlier this year.

So why haven’t ticket prices followed fuel costs lower?

The answer is simple: supply and demand.

Airlines reduced flight schedules earlier this year when fuel prices surged, leaving fewer seats available during the busy summer travel season. At the same time, leisure travel has remained resilient, allowing carriers to maintain elevated pricing.

Independent energy analyst Tom Kloza said lower fuel prices resulted partly from airlines reducing flights, which lowered demand for jet fuel, while U.S. refineries simultaneously increased production to capitalize on earlier high prices.

Airline executives have been unusually direct about their pricing strategy.

United Airlines Chief Commercial Officer Andrew Nocella told investors that the longer travelers continue paying today’s fares, the more likely those higher prices become permanent.

Aviation analyst Michael Boyd offered an even simpler explanation: if customers continue buying tickets at current prices, airlines have little incentive to reduce them.

Additional fees appear even less likely to fall.

Industry analyst Zach Griff, publisher of the aviation newsletter From the Tray Table, said baggage fees and other ancillary charges are expected to remain elevated regardless of fuel costs because they have become an increasingly important source of airline revenue.

Some seasonal relief may arrive later this year.

Historically, airfare declines after the peak summer travel season ends, although analysts expect fall ticket prices to remain above last year’s levels despite lower fuel costs.

Airlines also argue they are still recovering from an extraordinarily difficult first half of the year.

A global jet-fuel supply crunch tied to tensions involving the United States and Iran drove operating costs sharply higher earlier this year, forcing carriers to cut flights and absorb higher expenses. According to the Bureau of Transportation Statistics, U.S. airlines collectively lost approximately $1 billion during the first quarter of 2026.

Although fuel prices have retreated, the supply chain has not fully normalized. Shipping through the Strait of Hormuz remains constrained, and aviation analysts say global fuel markets could require months to stabilize completely.

For travelers, the lesson is straightforward.

Falling oil or jet-fuel prices do not automatically lead to lower ticket prices. Airlines continue pricing flights based primarily on demand, available capacity, and overall profitability rather than daily fuel costs.

For now, travelers looking to save money are more likely to find lower fares by flying during off-peak periods later this year than by waiting for airlines to pass fuel savings along to consumers.

JBizNews Airlines Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A new report released Monday by the Cybersafety Research Center — a joint initiative of New York University and Northeastern University — found that most of the child-safety tools promoted by major social media platforms failed to work as advertised, raising new questions about online protections for young users.

The research team, led by Laura Edelson, an assistant professor of computer science at Northeastern University, tested 86 youth safety features across TikTok, Instagram, Snapchat, and YouTube. Only 35 worked as promised. The remaining 51 either failed outright, were difficult to access, or could not be triggered despite following the companies’ published instructions. The report is titled “Broken, Buried, Missing.”

Researchers created both teen and adult test accounts on each platform, evaluating whether the safety features actually functioned as described and whether young users could realistically find and use them.

The findings were stark.

Nine safety features were classified as “missing” because researchers could not activate them at all. Thirty-four were labeled “broken,” meaning they failed to work properly or could easily be bypassed. Twelve of those were both broken and deeply buried within settings menus, while another eight technically worked but were hidden where most teenagers were unlikely to find them.

Among the most troubling findings involved TikTok. Researchers said the platform is designed to prevent minors from searching for content related to eating disorders and self-harm, yet its recommendation system instead suggested pro-anorexia search terms and self-harm phrases to a teen account.

Edelson emphasized those recommendations came directly from TikTok’s own algorithm rather than from search terms entered by the research team.

The study also found every platform struggled to moderate abusive behavior.

Safety tools designed to discourage bullying or harmful interactions failed across all four services. An Instagram feature intended to prompt users to reconsider before posting abusive comments never activated when researchers used a test account to harass another user. Many moderation systems relied heavily on blocked-word lists, allowing users to bypass protections simply by misspelling offensive words.

Features intended to limit excessive screen time also performed poorly, functioning successfully only about one-third of the time during testing.

The findings carry significant business implications beyond child safety.

For years, major social media companies have cited expanding safety features as evidence they can effectively regulate themselves without additional government intervention. The report arrives as lawmakers continue debating new online child-protection legislation, with technology executives expected to face renewed congressional scrutiny later this year.

If regulators conclude existing safeguards are ineffective, technology companies could face stricter compliance requirements and additional regulatory costs.

The platforms disputed many of the findings.

A YouTube spokesperson said the company has spent more than a decade developing parental controls and cited survey data showing most parents who use its supervised experiences report greater confidence in their children’s online activity.

A TikTok U.S. spokesperson said teen accounts include more than 50 safety settings enabled by default, maintained that the company’s internal testing confirms those features function properly, and offered to demonstrate them to the researchers.

The report also highlighted several positive examples.

Instagram automatically makes new teen accounts private, while TikTok’s experience for users under age 13 restricts commenting and direct messaging.

Edelson said those approaches point toward a simpler solution: make the safest settings the default rather than expecting parents and children to locate and activate them manually.

For parents, the report serves as a reminder that enabling a safety feature does not necessarily guarantee protection. For technology companies, it adds to growing pressure to demonstrate not only that safety tools exist, but that they consistently work in real-world conditions.

JBizNews Technology Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. economy is increasingly moving along two different paths, with economists saying the stock market’s powerful rally is benefiting wealthy households far more than the average American. As of Monday, June 29, 2026, a small share of higher-income households is driving much of the nation’s discretionary spending while many middle- and lower-income families continue facing tighter budgets.

The numbers behind the divide are striking.

The S&P 500 has gained approximately 22% over the past year, 76% since 2023, and more than 327% over the past decade. Those gains have significantly increased household wealth for investors who own stocks, encouraging greater spending on travel, dining, luxury goods, and other discretionary purchases.

Michael Pearce, chief U.S. economist at Oxford Economics, said rising stock prices have become a major driver of spending among older and wealthier households, which account for more than half of discretionary consumer spending.

Because stock ownership is heavily concentrated among higher-income Americans, the spending generated by those gains is concentrated as well.

Joe Brusuelas, chief economist at RSM US, estimates that roughly 75% of the consumer spending fueled by the recent market rally comes from the nation’s top 20% of earners. He estimates the wealth effect created by higher stock prices generated approximately $53 billion in additional consumer spending over the past year.

According to the Federal Reserve Bank of Dallas, the highest-earning 20% of households now account for roughly 57% of all consumer spending in the United States.

Much of that financial strength extends beyond the stock market.

Higher-income households are also more likely to own homes and to have locked in mortgage rates below 3% during the pandemic, allowing them to benefit from rising home values while avoiding today’s higher borrowing costs.

Economists say the concentration of spending creates both opportunity and risk.

Consumer spending remains the largest driver of U.S. economic growth. If a relatively small group of wealthy households accounts for an outsized share of that spending, any significant decline in financial markets could have a broader economic impact.

Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, has described today’s economy as increasingly “K-shaped,” with wealthier Americans continuing to prosper while many others struggle with higher living costs.

Despite widespread pessimism, spending has remained surprisingly resilient.

The Bank of America Institute reports that consumer spending continues to outpace last year across many income levels even though surveys show consumer confidence remains historically weak. Economists say affluent households are spending because their investment portfolios continue reaching new highs, while many lower-income households are relying more heavily on tighter budgets and increased borrowing.

Another concern is the concentration within the stock market itself.

Technology companies now account for roughly one-third of the S&P 500’s total value, while semiconductor companies tied to artificial intelligence represent an increasingly large share of overall market gains. That means much of the recent wealth creation depends on the continued performance of a relatively small group of technology companies.

Most analysts do not believe the current rally resembles the dot-com bubble of the late 1990s, noting that today’s technology leaders are generating substantial earnings and cash flow. Still, economists caution that a meaningful market correction could reduce the wealth effect supporting consumer spending among higher-income households.

For businesses, understanding where consumer demand originates has become increasingly important. Retailers, restaurants, luxury brands, travel companies, and other discretionary businesses are benefiting disproportionately from spending by affluent consumers whose investment portfolios continue to grow.

The stock market is not the economy. But with household wealth more concentrated than ever, Wall Street’s performance is playing an increasingly important role in shaping spending patterns across Main Street.

JBizNews Markets Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The first major peace framework between Israel and Lebanon in more than four decades is already facing significant challenges after Hezbollah publicly rejected key provisions of the agreement and vowed to oppose its implementation.

The U.S.-brokered framework, signed last week at the U.S. State Department with Secretary of State Marco Rubio, outlines a phased plan under which Israeli forces would gradually withdraw from southern Lebanon while the Lebanese Armed Forces assume control of the area. A central condition of the agreement is the verified disarmament of non-state armed groups operating in southern Lebanon, including Hezbollah.

That requirement has quickly become the agreement’s greatest obstacle.

Hezbollah leader Naim Qassem dismissed the framework, saying the organization would not surrender its weapons as a condition for an Israeli withdrawal. Lebanese Parliament Speaker Nabih Berri, a close political ally of Hezbollah, also criticized the agreement, warning that it could deepen political divisions inside Lebanon.

Supporters of Hezbollah staged demonstrations following the announcement, with some protesters attempting to block major roads in Beirut before security forces restored order.

The framework represents the most significant diplomatic effort between Israel and Lebanon since the failed 1983 agreement. Both countries have endured months of conflict that displaced hundreds of thousands of civilians, damaged infrastructure, and increased regional tensions.

Israeli officials have maintained that military forces will remain in designated security areas until independent verification confirms that armed groups have been removed from southern Lebanon. Israeli leaders argue that any lasting peace requires preventing Hezbollah from rebuilding military positions near Israel’s northern border.

Within Lebanon, however, political opinion remains sharply divided.

Some political leaders view the agreement as an opportunity to restore government authority over territory long influenced by armed militias. Others argue that disarming Hezbollah is unrealistic given the group’s military strength and political influence within the country.

The economic stakes are equally significant.

Lebanon continues to face one of the world’s worst financial crises, with its banking sector largely collapsed, its currency severely weakened, and reconstruction costs expected to reach billions of dollars. International donors, including several Gulf nations, have indicated they are prepared to assist Lebanon’s recovery if security conditions improve and the agreement remains in force.

A lasting peace could reopen opportunities for foreign investment, infrastructure rebuilding, tourism, and regional trade, offering much-needed support for Lebanon’s struggling economy. Renewed conflict, however, would likely delay reconstruction efforts, discourage investment, and further strain government finances.

The agreement also carries broader implications for regional stability. Continued calm along the Israel-Lebanon border would support wider diplomatic efforts involving Iran and other Middle Eastern nations while helping maintain stability in global energy markets.

Analysts caution that implementation remains the greatest challenge. The Lebanese government has historically struggled to exert full control over Hezbollah, and many observers question whether the country’s military possesses the political support or operational capability necessary to enforce the agreement.

For now, the framework provides a pathway toward reducing one of the Middle East’s longest-running security threats. Whether that opportunity develops into a lasting peace will depend largely on political will inside Lebanon, continued international mediation, and the willingness of all parties to avoid another round of conflict.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Renault reasserted its influence over struggling Japanese automaker Nissan this week, helping remove one of the company’s most powerful board members and signaling that the decades-old alliance between the two automakers remains as politically sensitive as ever.

At Nissan’s annual shareholder meeting, investors voted against reappointing longtime outside director Motoo Nagai, ending his tenure after Renault withheld its support for his nomination.

Although Renault owns roughly 36% of Nissan’s shares, a 2023 restructuring of the alliance reduced its voting rights to about 15%. Even with that smaller voting stake, Renault’s decision to abstain from supporting Nagai, combined with opposition from proxy advisory firms and other shareholders, proved enough to remove one of Nissan’s most influential directors.

The vote marks Renault’s most significant exercise of influence at Nissan since the companies renegotiated their alliance three years ago.

Nagai played an unusually powerful role within Nissan’s governance structure.

The 72-year-old director served on the company’s nomination, compensation, and audit committees, giving him substantial influence over executive appointments and board oversight. He also supported Nissan’s unsuccessful merger discussions with Honda in 2024 and was closely involved in selecting current Chief Executive Ivan Espinosa following leadership changes inside the company.

Renault argued that Nagai’s independence had become increasingly difficult to defend.

Both Nagai and another board nominee previously worked for Mizuho Financial Group, Nissan’s largest lender, raising concerns about board independence. Proxy advisory firms Institutional Shareholder Services (ISS) and Glass Lewis also recommended shareholders vote against his reappointment, with Glass Lewis concluding that “Nominee Motoo Nagai is not independent.”

The latest dispute adds another chapter to one of the automotive industry’s longest-running corporate relationships.

Following the arrest of former alliance leader Carlos Ghosn in 2018 and his dramatic escape from Japan the following year, Renault and Nissan spent years renegotiating their partnership. Their 2023 agreement reduced Renault’s ownership stake from 43% to 15% on a voting basis in an effort to create a more balanced relationship.

This week’s vote demonstrates that Renault remains willing to exercise its influence whenever it believes major governance issues are at stake.

The governance battle comes at a difficult time for Nissan.

The automaker continues working through years of declining profitability, weaker sales in both China and the United States, and approximately ¥4.4 trillion ($27.3 billion) in debt. Credit-rating agencies have lowered Nissan’s debt to junk status, increasing pressure on management to restore profitability.

Chief Executive Ivan Espinosa, who recently succeeded Makoto Uchida, has pledged to return the company to sustained profitability by the fiscal year ending March 2027.

For investors, the boardroom fight highlights the importance of corporate governance during periods of financial stress. Leadership decisions, board independence, and shareholder influence can significantly affect the direction of companies attempting major turnarounds.

The Renault-Nissan alliance, which also includes Mitsubishi Motors, continues collaborating on manufacturing projects across Europe, India, and Latin America, suggesting neither company wants to abandon the partnership entirely.

But this week’s vote makes one point unmistakably clear: despite years of restructuring, Renault remains prepared to use its influence when it believes Nissan’s future is at stake. As Nissan works to rebuild its finances and regain competitiveness, the alliance’s internal politics are likely to remain almost as closely watched as the automaker’s financial performance.

JBizNews Auto Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Department of Justice and attorneys general from 17 states announced Tuesday that they have reached settlements with three of the nation’s largest egg producers in a long-running antitrust case alleging coordinated actions that inflated egg prices for consumers and businesses across the country.

The settlements, which still require approval from a federal judge, involve Cal-Maine Foods, Versova Holdings, and Hickman’s Egg Ranch. While the companies deny wrongdoing, they agreed to provide monetary payments and donate approximately 53 million eggs to food banks and charitable organizations as part of the resolution.

According to the government, the case centers on allegations that from 2022 through early 2025, the companies coordinated bidding activity tied to industry price benchmarks used throughout the egg market. Prosecutors argue that the conduct distorted the benchmark prices relied upon by supermarkets, restaurants, bakeries, food manufacturers, and wholesalers, ultimately increasing costs for consumers.

Federal officials say the benchmark played a major role in determining wholesale egg prices nationwide. Even modest changes in that benchmark could ripple through the supply chain, affecting contracts and retail prices across the country.

The allegations come after consumers experienced one of the sharpest increases in egg prices in modern history. During 2023, egg prices surged as the nation simultaneously dealt with widespread outbreaks of highly pathogenic avian influenza, which reduced laying-hen populations and tightened supplies. While disease outbreaks were widely recognized as a major contributor to higher prices, regulators contend that anti-competitive conduct may also have added upward pressure during parts of the period.

As part of the settlements, the companies agreed to implement stronger compliance measures designed to prevent future antitrust violations. Those measures include enhanced employee training, internal oversight programs, regular compliance reviews, and restrictions on communications regarding pricing or bidding strategies with competitors.

The companies continue to dispute the government’s claims.

Cal-Maine Foods said it believes its business practices complied with the law but decided to settle in order to avoid years of costly litigation and allow management to focus on serving customers. Other defendants similarly stated that the agreements should not be viewed as admissions of wrongdoing.

For food banks, however, the settlements will provide an immediate benefit. Millions of eggs are expected to be distributed through charitable organizations to families facing food insecurity, helping offset demand at a time when many nonprofits continue to report elevated need.

The case also sends a broader message to industries that rely on benchmark pricing. Federal and state antitrust officials said they will continue scrutinizing markets where a small number of dominant suppliers influence prices used throughout an entire industry.

For businesses, the outcome extends beyond grocery stores. Restaurants, hotels, bakeries, caterers, food processors, and institutional kitchens all purchase eggs in large quantities and often base purchasing decisions on wholesale market benchmarks. Greater confidence that those benchmarks reflect genuine market conditions can help businesses better forecast costs and manage pricing.

Egg prices themselves have eased significantly during recent months as poultry flocks recovered and supplies improved. Wholesale prices have fallen sharply from their pandemic-era highs, providing some relief to consumers and businesses alike. Still, officials say maintaining fair competition remains essential to preventing unnecessary price increases in the future.

If approved by the court, the settlements will conclude one of the most closely watched food-industry antitrust cases in recent years while reinforcing the government’s commitment to protecting competition in essential consumer markets.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

China’s manufacturing sector returned to growth in June as booming demand for high-tech exports tied to the global artificial-intelligence boom offset stubbornly weak demand at home. The official Purchasing Managers’ Index (PMI) edged up to 50.3 in June, beating economists’ forecast of 50.1 and moving back above the key 50-point threshold that separates expansion from contraction, according to data released by China’s National Bureau of Statistics. The index stood at 50.0 in May.

The PMI is one of the world’s most closely watched measures of manufacturing activity, surveying factory managers on new orders, production, employment and supplier deliveries. June’s reading marked China’s first clear return to expansion after months of sluggish factory activity.

A separate non-manufacturing PMI, which measures activity across China’s services and construction sectors, also improved, rising to 50.2 from 50.1 in May.

Much of the improvement came from one powerful source: exports tied to artificial intelligence. Chinese factories continue to benefit from soaring global demand for semiconductors, servers, data-center equipment and other AI-related hardware as governments and companies race to expand computing capacity.

Exports of automated data-processing equipment surged more than 60% from a year earlier, while shipments of chips, semiconductors and other advanced technology products continued to support factory production. The strength of those exports has helped offset concerns that geopolitical tensions in the Middle East would slow global trade.

The export boom has prompted several economists to raise their outlook for China. Bank of America increased its forecast for China’s export growth this year to 15%, citing continued investment in artificial intelligence, renewable-energy equipment and electric vehicles. Strong exports also helped China’s roughly $20 trillion economy outperform expectations during the first quarter.

Despite the encouraging headline numbers, the broader economy remains uneven.

Factories producing technology exports continue to perform well, but domestic demand remains weak. Retail sales have struggled, the country’s prolonged property downturn continues to weigh on household confidence, and more traditional manufacturing industries remain under pressure. Furniture exports, often viewed as a gauge of broader consumer demand, rose only 1.9%.

“The hope of rebalancing is fading,” Helen Qiao, China economist at Bank of America Global Research, said, pointing to the growing divide between strong exports and weak domestic consumption.

That imbalance could create new challenges later this year. Economists expect inflation pressures to weaken once higher energy prices fade, raising the risk of renewed deflation. Persistent deflation can discourage consumer spending and reduce corporate profits, making economic recovery more difficult.

There is another reason economists remain cautious.

Part of June’s strength appears to reflect companies accelerating shipments ahead of possible U.S. trade actions.

“We spotted trade frontloading in June,” said Xu Tianchen, senior economist at the Economist Intelligence Unit. “Exporters accelerated shipments due to U.S. trade policy uncertainty. Late July will be a big moment because new U.S. Section 301 tariffs are expected to take effect.”

If those tariffs are implemented, some of the current export strength could fade during the second half of the year.

Meanwhile, Beijing has largely resisted launching major stimulus measures aimed at boosting domestic demand. Officials have set a 2026 economic growth target of 4.5% to 5%, below last year’s pace, while economists see little chance of aggressive near-term policy easing. Reports indicate China’s central bank has encouraged commercial banks to expand lending, highlighting continued weakness in credit demand across the economy.

For the global economy, China’s June manufacturing rebound sends mixed signals. The world’s largest manufacturing base continues to benefit from the artificial-intelligence investment boom, supporting global supply chains and technology exports. At the same time, much of that growth remains concentrated in one fast-growing sector while domestic demand continues to lag.

Whether China can broaden its recovery beyond AI-driven exports and revive consumer spending remains one of the most important economic questions facing the global economy in the second half of the year.

JBizNews China Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics reported Tuesday, June 30, that American employers had about 7.6 million open jobs at the end of May, the highest level in two years and far more than Wall Street expected. The figure, from the government’s monthly Job Openings and Labor Turnover Survey, or JOLTS, was little changed from April but marked the second straight month of surprising strength in a labor market that many had written off as fading.

The number caught forecasters off guard. Economists had penciled in a drop of nearly 10%, to around 7.0 million, on the theory that April’s jump was a fluke and that uncertainty from the Iran war would make bosses cautious. Instead, openings held firm at a level not seen since May 2024. On paper, that is good news for anyone looking for work.

Here is the catch, and it is a big one. Even with all those help-wanted signs, workers are not moving. Hiring was flat at 5.2 million for the month. Quits, the number of people who felt confident enough to walk away from a job, stayed at about 3.1 million, and layoffs held steady at 1.7 million. In plain terms, the doors are open, but very few people are walking through them in either direction.

That stall shows up in how workers feel. The Conference Board reported Tuesday that its Consumer Confidence Index ticked up in June, helped by cheaper gasoline, but the mood about jobs got worse. The share of Americans who said jobs are “hard to get” climbed to 22.5%, the highest since January 2021. Dana Peterson, the Conference Board’s chief economist, said people’s read on the current job market softened measurably and that most expect little change over the next six months.

Why the disconnect? A job opening is not the same as a job offer. Many of those postings sit unfilled for months, some are placed by companies that are slow to actually hire, and a good chunk are concentrated in specific fields and regions rather than spread evenly. So a warehouse worker in one state can see the national headline about 7.6 million openings and still struggle to find a real offer near home.

The details bear that out. Openings grew in wholesale trade, up 71,000, in accommodation and food services, up 62,000, and in real estate, up 40,000. But they fell sharply in health care and social assistance, down 115,000, and in finance and insurance, down 69,000. By region, openings rose in the South and Midwest but dropped in the Northeast and West. Where you live and what you do matters more than the top-line number suggests.

For job seekers, the practical takeaway is patience. There are now about 1.04 job openings for every unemployed worker, the best ratio since January 2025, but still below where it sat before the pandemic. Elizabeth Renter, senior economist at NerdWallet, put it bluntly, saying the job market has not been dynamic for some time and that people hunting for new roles have faced an uphill battle for two years. For those already employed, the lack of hiring makes it harder to jump to a better-paying job, one of the main ways workers get raises.

For small businesses, the report is a mixed blessing. Steady demand for workers in restaurants, hotels, and wholesale suggests Main Street is still trying to staff up heading into summer. But flat quits mean less turnover, which cuts down on the constant scramble to replace departing employees, a headache and expense that hits small shops hardest. A calmer labor market can be easier to plan around, even if it is less exciting.

The data also lands on the desk of the Federal Reserve, and that reaches every household. The central bank watches JOLTS closely for signs of whether the job market is running too hot or cooling too fast, because that feeds its decisions on interest rates. A labor market that is stable but not overheating gives the Fed room to consider lowering rates later this year, which would eventually filter down to cheaper mortgages, car loans, and credit-card balances for ordinary families.

The bigger picture from Tuesday’s numbers is a labor market that has, in the words of some economists, turned a corner toward stability and maybe even modest growth, without the churn that defined the hiring frenzy of a few years ago. Openings are up, layoffs are low, and paychecks are still landing. What is missing is momentum. Workers are staying put because they are not yet sure the ground is solid enough to take a risk.

The next read comes soon. The Bureau of Labor Statistics is scheduled to release June’s JOLTS figures on August 4, and the closely watched monthly jobs report follows this week. Together they will show whether May’s strength was the start of a real rebound or just another month of a job market stuck in neutral.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. negotiators Jared Kushner and Steve Witkoff met Tuesday with senior Qatari officials in Doha as Washington worked to preserve the fragile ceasefire with Iran and advance negotiations toward a longer-term nuclear agreement. While U.S. officials described the discussions as constructive, Qatari officials emphasized that negotiations remain focused on technical issues and that no direct, high-level meetings between American and Iranian officials are currently taking place.

Following the meetings, a senior U.S. administration official said technical discussions are moving in a positive direction and that negotiators are making meaningful progress. However, Majed Al Ansari, spokesperson for Qatar’s Foreign Ministry, cautioned against expecting an immediate breakthrough, stressing that the current round of discussions is centered on mediation and confidence-building rather than direct political negotiations.

Qatar continues to play a central role as an intermediary between Washington and Tehran. Officials said separate working groups remain focused on nuclear issues, economic matters, and broader regional security concerns. The mediation effort also involves neighboring Oman, which has long served as a diplomatic channel between the two countries.

Negotiations follow the interim agreement reached in June that paused months of military confrontation and established a framework for continued diplomacy. Although recent exchanges around the Strait of Hormuz briefly raised concerns that the ceasefire could unravel, both sides have since reduced military activity, allowing commercial shipping to continue through one of the world’s most important energy corridors.

Public messaging from both governments remains noticeably different. The White House has maintained that discussions continue at Iran’s request, while Iranian officials insist additional negotiations depend on implementation of previous commitments before moving forward. Those differing public positions underscore the complexity of the talks despite continued diplomatic engagement behind the scenes.

For businesses and consumers, the negotiations carry significance well beyond foreign policy.

The Strait of Hormuz handles roughly one-fifth of global seaborne oil shipments, making stability in the region critical for energy markets. As shipping traffic has resumed, oil prices have retreated from recent highs, easing pressure on gasoline prices, freight costs, airline fuel expenses, and inflation more broadly.

Lower energy prices also provide some relief for businesses that rely heavily on transportation and logistics while helping reduce costs for households already facing elevated living expenses. Continued stability could strengthen supply chains and support broader economic growth if negotiations remain on track.

Financial markets are also closely monitoring developments. A sustained diplomatic process reduces the likelihood of renewed disruptions to global oil supplies, one of the key factors influencing inflation expectations and future Federal Reserve interest-rate decisions.

Despite the encouraging tone, officials acknowledge the negotiations remain delicate. Major issues surrounding Iran’s nuclear program, sanctions, and regional security have yet to be resolved, and mediators continue working to narrow significant differences between the two sides.

For now, the message emerging from Doha is one of cautious optimism. Technical negotiations continue, communication channels remain open, and commercial shipping through the Strait of Hormuz is operating normally. While significant challenges remain before any comprehensive agreement is reached, continued dialogue has helped ease immediate concerns over renewed conflict and provided welcome stability for global energy markets.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Salesforce is buying artificial-intelligence companies at a rapid pace, acquiring more than a dozen AI and data firms over roughly the past year and a half. While the strategy is designed to strengthen its AI platform, investors are increasingly questioning whether the company is moving too fast.

A Salesforce spokesperson said the company’s acquisition strategy remains “highly selective and focused on strategic fit, integration discipline, margin and cash flow parameters, and advancing our agentic AI roadmap to drive customer value,” even as the stock has struggled throughout 2026.

The largest purchase was Informatica, a data-management company acquired in a deal valued at about $8 billion.

Since then, Salesforce has continued adding companies including Fin, an AI customer-service platform formerly known as Intercom, for approximately $3.6 billion, along with Contentful, m3ter, Qualified, and several other AI- and data-focused businesses.

Altogether, Salesforce has completed more than a dozen acquisitions centered on artificial intelligence and enterprise data.

Nearly every purchase supports one objective: strengthening Agentforce, Salesforce’s AI platform introduced in September 2024.

Agentforce was designed to move beyond AI assistants by allowing autonomous AI agents to complete business tasks independently. Early customers, however, encountered challenges involving data quality, inconsistent AI performance, and a pricing model many found difficult to understand.

Rather than building every missing capability internally, Salesforce has chosen to acquire companies that solve those problems.

Informatica strengthens data management, Fin expands customer-service capabilities, Contentful improves content management, and m3ter provides usage-based billing technology.

There are signs the strategy is producing results.

Agentforce reached approximately $1.2 billion in annual recurring revenue during the first quarter, representing 205% year-over-year growth.

Salesforce also reported quarterly revenue of approximately $11.13 billion, up 13% from the previous year, demonstrating continued momentum despite its size.

Investors, however, remain cautious.

Salesforce shares have fallen roughly 33% to 37% during 2026, marking one of the company’s longest periods of sustained weakness.

RBC Capital Markets analyst Rishi Jaluria, who downgraded the stock following the Informatica acquisition, warned that the pace of acquisitions increases operational risk.

His concern centers on Salesforce’s ability to integrate numerous companies, technologies, and employees simultaneously while continuing to operate one of the world’s largest enterprise software businesses.

Investors are also watching capital allocation.

Alongside its acquisition campaign, Salesforce has authorized a $50 billion share repurchase program, raising questions about whether the company can simultaneously finance major acquisitions, reward shareholders, invest heavily in research and development, and maintain financial flexibility.

Underlying the strategy is an even larger business challenge.

Salesforce built its software empire by charging customers subscription fees based largely on the number of employees using its products.

Autonomous AI agents could eventually reduce the number of human users, forcing the company to rethink how it generates revenue.

That helps explain acquisitions such as m3ter, whose technology enables companies to bill customers based on actual AI usage rather than traditional per-user subscriptions.

Instead of charging for software seats, Salesforce is preparing to charge for the work AI agents perform.

For businesses that rely on Salesforce to manage sales, marketing, and customer service, the outcome could significantly influence both pricing models and AI capabilities over the next several years.

Chief Executive Officer Marc Benioff is betting that acquiring the industry’s strongest AI technologies will prove faster than developing them internally and ultimately position Agentforce as the leading enterprise AI platform.

Wall Street’s question is whether Salesforce can successfully integrate all of those acquisitions while maintaining profitability and staying ahead of an increasingly competitive AI market.

The answer may determine whether the company’s difficult 2026 becomes a temporary setback—or an early warning sign.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WestJet Airlines, owned by Onex Corp. and partners including Delta Air Lines, is adding capacity on flights to Houston after Canada’s national soccer team advanced to the Round of 16, triggering a rush of fans eager to follow the team into Texas.

Canada defeated South Africa 1-0 in the Round of 32 on Sunday, extending its deepest run of the tournament after already drawing international attention with a 6-0 victory over Qatar during group play.

Canada’s next match is scheduled for Saturday, July 4, with Houston expected to receive an influx of Canadian supporters.

In response, WestJet has begun adding seats on flights serving the Texas market.

The move illustrates how modern airlines increasingly adjust schedules in real time to match changing demand.

Based in Calgary, WestJet has developed the ability to shift aircraft and seating capacity quickly when major sporting events, weather disruptions, or unexpected travel trends emerge.

For the airline, Canada’s tournament success creates a valuable commercial opportunity through fuller aircraft, higher ticket prices, and increased visibility tied to national pride.

The adjustments come amid one of the airline industry’s largest logistical challenges.

The 2026 FIFA World Cup, expanded to 48 teams competing across 16 host cities in the United States, Canada, and Mexico, is expected to move more than five million travelers during the tournament.

Airlines including American Airlines, Air Canada, United Airlines, Qatar Airways, and GOL have expanded schedules, deployed larger aircraft, and introduced World Cup travel packages to capture the demand.

Industry analysts expect the tournament to generate billions of dollars in travel-related revenue, with particularly heavy traffic flowing through cities including Houston, Dallas, New York, Los Angeles, Miami, and Toronto.

For travelers, however, success on the field often translates into higher prices.

Industry forecasts suggest airfare between World Cup host cities could rise 20% to 40% during the group stage, with even larger increases during the knockout rounds as available seats become scarce.

A surprise victory such as Canada’s advancement often triggers last-minute booking surges that can quickly push fares substantially higher.

The economic impact extends well beyond airlines.

Every traveling fan also books hotel rooms, eats in restaurants, uses rideshare services, purchases merchandise, and spends money throughout the host city.

Hotels near stadiums frequently raise prices alongside airlines, while local businesses benefit from the sudden influx of visitors.

For Texas cities hosting World Cup matches, an unexpected wave of Canadian fans provides an additional boost during one of the busiest travel periods of the summer.

The unpredictability remains one of the industry’s biggest challenges.

Airlines and hotels cannot accurately forecast which teams will continue advancing, meaning demand can shift dramatically from one weekend to the next.

An unexpected elimination may leave aircraft seats and hotel rooms empty, while a surprise victory forces travel companies to react almost immediately.

Managing that volatility has become an essential part of operating during the world’s largest sporting event.

For WestJet, the calculation is straightforward.

Canadians want to support their national team as it continues its historic World Cup run, and the airline intends to fly them there.

Whether Canada’s tournament ends in the Round of 16 or continues even further, the episode demonstrates how quickly success on the field can translate into measurable business activity—filling airplanes, raising fares, and generating new spending across the travel industry.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Los Angeles City Council voted to delay its plan to raise the minimum wage for hotel and airport workers to $30 an hour, pushing the deadline from 2028 to 2030 after the hospitality industry warned the increase was already causing layoffs, hiring freezes, and canceled investment.

The proposal, often called the “Olympic Wage,” was designed to raise pay ahead of the 2028 Summer Olympics. Under the revised schedule, hotel and airport workers will still receive raises beginning July 1, when the minimum wage rises to $25 an hour, followed by $27.50 in 2027. The final increase to $30 an hour will now take effect in 2030 instead of 2028.

Hotel workers currently earn roughly $22.50 an hour, meaning the proposal still delivers substantial pay increases over the coming years, though on a slower timetable.

Hotel operators argued the original schedule was becoming financially unsustainable. Industry organizations including the American Hotel & Lodging Association and the Asian American Hotel Owners Association warned that rapidly rising labor costs had already forced hotels to reduce staffing, freeze hiring, and postpone development projects even as Los Angeles prepares for the 2026 FIFA World Cup and the 2028 Olympic Games.

An industry report released this spring found hotel construction in Los Angeles had slowed, investment was shifting to competing markets, and operators were reducing payroll expenses as wage growth outpaced revenue.

Smaller independent hotels told city officials they face the greatest pressure. One Venice Beach hotel owner testified that family-operated properties often work with thin profit margins, making higher payroll costs difficult to absorb without reducing employee hours, cutting services, or closing hotel restaurants altogether. Hotel restaurants also compete directly with nearby independent restaurants that are not required to pay the higher hotel wage.

The debate intensified when business groups successfully gathered enough signatures to place a separate measure on the November ballot repealing Los Angeles’ gross receipts tax, one of the city’s largest revenue sources.

City officials warned repealing the tax could cost approximately $860 million annually, threatening funding for public safety, homelessness programs, and other city services. Business groups indicated they would withdraw the ballot initiative if the city delayed implementation of the $30 wage.

Following the council’s vote, organizers agreed to suspend the repeal effort.

Labor unions strongly criticized the decision.

UNITE HERE Local 11 accused business organizations of using the tax repeal effort to pressure city leaders into delaying promised wage increases. Union leaders described the strategy as economic intimidation, while dozens of hotel and airport employees packed City Hall, arguing the raises had already helped workers pay medical bills, avoid eviction, and reduce the need for multiple jobs.

Four council members voted against the delay.

The dispute reflects a broader national debate over rapidly increasing service-sector wages. Cities across the country have approved significant minimum wage increases to help workers keep pace with rising housing and living costs, while employers argue that steep labor cost increases ultimately lead to higher prices, automation, reduced hiring, and fewer jobs.

Los Angeles has become one of the country’s highest-profile test cases for how aggressively cities can raise wages while remaining competitive as a tourism destination.

City leaders emphasized the vote represents a delay rather than a cancellation. Council President Marqueece Harris-Dawson called the action a “placeholder” intended to create additional time for negotiations between labor unions, hotel operators, and city officials.

Workers will still receive raises beginning this summer, while the highest wage level arrives two years later than originally planned.

For now, both sides leave with partial victories. Employees continue receiving scheduled pay increases, while hotel operators gain additional time to adjust before the full $30-an-hour mandate takes effect.

The larger question remains whether Los Angeles can successfully deliver some of the nation’s highest hospitality wages while maintaining a thriving tourism industry ahead of the World Cup and the Olympic Games.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics has taken steps to address issues that led to the release of key economic data at improper times in 2024, though a watchdog said it has more work to do in establishing safeguards.

A report by the Labor Department’s inspector general looked at a trio of incidents in which economic data was either released early or late, or methodology was shared externally before it was made available to the public. In each case, BLS leaders didn’t learn of the situation until up to an hour after they occurred.

BLS data for key reports like CPI inflation data and the benchmark revisions to the employment data that underlies the monthly jobs reports carries a great deal of significance for economic decision-makers and financial markets, and untimely or unauthorized releases could give some traders an advantage over their peers.

The report explained that the watchdog had identified shortcomings in procedures around data release processes, and the BLS inadequately emphasized the importance of equitable access to information and safeguarding internally-restricted materials. The IG said that the BLS’ deviations from policy in those cases “negatively affected its reputation and credibility.”

INFLATION ROSE AGAIN IN MAY AS ELEVATED ENERGY PRICES SQUEEZED CONSUMERS

In May 2024, the monthly consumer price index (CPI) data was published 31 minutes before it was scheduled to be released, while in August 2024 the publication of BLS’ preliminary benchmark revision to employment data was delayed for 34 minutes even though it was provided to some users who reached out to the agency.

Additionally, internal or inaccurate methodology information was shared externally three times that year before it was published.

“In response to these incidents, BLS closed gaps in IT safeguards, revised performance standards, strengthened management oversight, and training,” the IG report said.

TRUMP ORDERS TERMINATION OF LABOR STATISTICS OFFICIAL AFTER JOBS REPORT AND DOWNWARD REVISIONS

“However, we identified additional improvements BLS could make to reduce the risk of improper disclosure of essential economic information,” the inspector general added.

“BLS still needs to update its testing procedures, clarify its recently updated policies and procedures, and ensure staff’s compliance by improving buy-in, understanding of expectations, and accountability,” the IG explained, adding that it should also finalize its crisis communications plans and perform related exercises to ensure staff are prepared for such scenarios.

Acting BLS Commissioner William Wiatrowski included a letter responding to the report which said that the results of the audit are “generally consistent with the previous reviews” aimed at guarding against early or unauthorized disclosures.

TRUMP VISITS MACK TRUCKS PLANT IN BATTLEGROUND PENNSYLVANIA DISTRICT TO TOUT ECONOMIC AGENDA AS MIDTERMS LOOM

Wiatrowski explained that the IG’s report acknowledges several of the corrective measures the BLS has undertaken, saying that in some cases the report and its recommendations “fail to recognize the totality of corrective measures taken or clarifying documentation provided.”

“The OIG conclusion does not recognize that BLS has already strengthened IT testing, updated customer service policies, procedures and training, updated and disseminated the BLS Crisis Communication Plan to all BLS staff with defined roles and those staff have exercised said plan,” he added.

The report comes as the BLS is scheduled to release the June jobs report on Thursday, rather than the usual Friday due to the observance of Independence Day.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Economists polled by LSEG are projecting that the economy added 110,000 jobs in June, a figure that would mark the fourth straight month of steady job gains despite representing a deceleration from growth seen in the last three months.

This post was originally published here

NEW YORK— For two years the fear has been simple: artificial intelligence is coming for the entry-level job. The reality is more useful to understand. AI isn’t erasing the bottom rung so much as splitting workers into two groups—the ones who use it, and the ones whose work it quietly replaces.

The good news is that workers who know how to use AI tools are becoming significantly more valuable. PwC studied nearly a billion job postings worldwide and found that employees with AI skills earn a 56% wage premium over workers in similar jobs without those skills. Just a year earlier, that premium was 25%. The gap is widening quickly and extends far beyond the technology sector.

The reason is straightforward. Employees who know how to use tools such as ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Microsoft Copilot, Grok, and Perplexity can draft reports, conduct research, analyze information, summarize documents, and complete projects more efficiently. Companies get more output from the same employee, making those workers more valuable.

At the same time, companies are looking for fewer people to perform basic office tasks that software can increasingly handle on its own. The World Economic Forum says some of the fastest-shrinking occupations include data-entry clerks, administrative support positions, bank tellers, and other roles built around repetitive processes.

That distinction matters. AI is replacing tasks, not talent. Workers who know how to use the technology become more productive and often more valuable. Jobs built largely around repetitive paperwork, scheduling, data entry, and basic processing are becoming easier to automate.

The numbers support that conclusion. In a survey of nearly 1,500 employers, the Strada Institute for the Future of Work found companies were almost three times more likely to say AI is increasing entry-level hiring than reducing it. IBM has gone even further, announcing plans to expand U.S. entry-level hiring while redesigning those positions to remove repetitive work now handled by AI.

The challenge for new workers is that the traditional learning ground is changing. The Brookings Institution estimates AI could perform more than half of the tasks in a typical entry-level office job, while the World Economic Forum estimates roughly one-third of entry-level work hours are already automatable. The busywork that once helped young employees learn the ropes is disappearing.

The takeaway is simple: the safest skill is no longer doing repetitive work. It is knowing how to use the tools that do repetitive work. Workers who learn to work alongside AI are increasingly earning more, getting hired faster, and creating opportunities that did not exist a few years ago.

To help workers and businesses adapt, JBiz will host a two-day executive training program on July 13–14, 2026, at the Sheraton Eatontown Hotel in New Jersey. Led by professionals with hands-on experience using today’s leading AI platforms, the program will provide practical training on ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Microsoft Copilot, Grok, and Perplexity, helping participants understand what each platform does best and how to use them effectively in the workplace.

Participants will leave with practical skills they can begin applying immediately to improve productivity, communication, research, reporting, and day-to-day business operations.

For corporate inquiries, team registrations, group packages, and reservations Visit or Contact Esther@OJChamber.com 212-659-5270 x104.

JBizNews Desk — New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

On Monday, Strategy Inc., the company led by Michael Saylor and the world’s largest corporate holder of Bitcoin, announced a sweeping change to how it manages its capital—including, for the first time, authority to sell some of its Bitcoin. By Tuesday, Bitcoin had fallen more than 3% toward $58,000 as investors reversed an initial wave of optimism over Strategy’s financing overhaul, rattling a crypto market already on edge.

Under what it calls the Digital Credit Capital Framework, Strategy revised its capital structure to allow fundraising through Bitcoin sales of up to $1.25 billion—roughly 21,082 Bitcoin, or about 2.5% of its holdings of 847,363 Bitcoin. The company emphasized that the framework does not require it to sell any Bitcoin. But for the first time, it has formally given itself the option.

For years, Strategy followed a simple playbook: raise money by issuing stock or bonds, then use the proceeds to buy more Bitcoin. Investors came to expect that every capital raise meant additional Bitcoin purchases. Monday’s announcement altered that assumption. Once traders realized one of Bitcoin’s largest and most consistent buyers could also become a potential seller, market sentiment shifted quickly.

The reversal was dramatic. On Monday, Strategy shares surged about 12.6% to roughly $92.70, while its STRC preferred shares climbed more than 12%, and Bitcoin briefly moved back above $60,000. By Tuesday, however, much of that enthusiasm had evaporated. Strategy shares dropped nearly 10% at one point, erasing most of the previous day’s gains, while Bitcoin slipped back below the psychologically important $60,000 level.

Part of the concern centers on Strategy’s own valuation. The company now trades for less than the market value of the Bitcoin it owns, with its mNAV falling below 1, meaning investors value the company at less than its digital assets. Strategy purchased its Bitcoin at an average price of roughly $75,646 per coin, leaving the company sitting on an unrealized loss of approximately $13 billion with Bitcoin trading near current levels. When the stock trades below the value of its holdings, issuing new shares to buy additional Bitcoin becomes far less attractive.

Technical analysts also see warning signs. Matt Maley, chief market strategist at Miller Tabak + Co., said Bitcoin’s chart remains weak after breaking below key technical support earlier this year and failing to reclaim those levels. Another significant decline, he warned, could reinforce a bearish trend.

Bitcoin has already endured a difficult year. The cryptocurrency has lost more than half its value from last year’s peak above $126,000. Investor demand has weakened as well. Spot Bitcoin exchange-traded funds have recorded more than $5.1 billion in net outflows this year, while BlackRock’s IBIT is reportedly on pace for its largest month of withdrawals since launching, with more than $3 billion leaving the fund during June.

The latest selloff has also revived debate over Strategy’s business model. Ripple Chief Executive Brad Garlinghouse argued that Strategy’s debt-financed Bitcoin strategy magnifies volatility across the cryptocurrency market. Longtime Bitcoin critic Peter Schiff warned that continued weakness in Strategy’s stock could eventually pressure the company to sell Bitcoin to meet financial obligations, potentially adding further downward pressure to prices.

Not everyone shares that view. Crypto analyst Ran Neuner argued that the new framework could ultimately strengthen investor confidence because it removes uncertainty over how Strategy would respond if liquidity became necessary. Citi maintained its buy rating on the stock with a $260 price target. Meanwhile, Jeff Dorman, chief investment officer at Arca, suggested the company may eventually need to sell between $2 billion and $3 billion of Bitcoin to ease ongoing market pressure.

For his part, Michael Saylor insisted the company’s long-term strategy remains unchanged. Bitcoin continues to serve as Strategy’s primary treasury reserve asset, he said, while adding that “Digital Credit requires liquidity, discipline, and active capital management.”

For now, Bitcoin remains locked in a tense battle around the $60,000 level that traders have watched closely for weeks. The next move may depend on whether buyers regain confidence—or whether the possibility of Strategy becoming a seller turns into reality.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A growing effort is underway across Europe and the United Kingdom to reduce dependence on Visa and Mastercard, as governments and financial institutions push to build homegrown payment networks they say will strengthen economic sovereignty and lower costs.

The movement has gained urgency as policymakers increasingly view payment infrastructure as a matter of national security.

European Central Bank President Christine Lagarde has warned that Europe urgently needs its own digital payment system rather than relying so heavily on American companies.

Today, Visa and Mastercard dominate the global payments business.

Together, the two companies process roughly $24 trillion in transactions annually, including about $4.7 trillion across Europe. In the United Kingdom, approximately 95% of all card transactions travel through one of the two U.S.-based payment networks.

Every payment also generates transaction data that often flows outside national borders, something European regulators increasingly view as a strategic vulnerability.

Europe’s primary response is the European Payments Initiative (EPI) and its new digital payment platform called Wero.

Backed by many of Europe’s largest banks, Wero allows consumers to transfer money directly between bank accounts in seconds without relying on traditional credit-card networks or interchange fees.

Earlier this year, EPI reached an agreement with the EuroPA Alliance, connecting payment systems in Italy, Spain, Portugal, and several Nordic countries. The combined network already serves roughly 130 million users across 13 countries.

Cross-border person-to-person payments are expected to begin this year, with in-store payment capabilities scheduled to launch in 2027.

The United Kingdom is pursuing a similar strategy.

Major British banks have begun discussions surrounding a domestic payment platform known as DeliveryCo, supported by government officials and the Bank of England.

British regulators argue recent geopolitical tensions and cybersecurity concerns demonstrate the importance of maintaining payment systems that cannot easily be disrupted by events outside the country.

The urgency has grown following recent international sanctions and other geopolitical disputes that highlighted how quickly financial infrastructure can become part of broader political conflicts.

For merchants, however, the issue extends beyond national security.

Although Europe has already capped many interchange fees, retailers continue arguing that competition between Visa and Mastercard remains limited, keeping processing costs higher than they would like.

Bank-to-bank payment systems promise nearly instant settlement without traditional card interchange fees, offering potentially meaningful savings for businesses if consumers adopt the technology.

Building a successful alternative will not be easy.

One of Visa’s and Mastercard’s greatest advantages remains their worldwide acceptance. A Visa card issued in Europe works almost anywhere in the world, while newer regional payment systems will initially function only within participating countries.

Earlier efforts to build European payment systems have also struggled to gain widespread consumer adoption.

For the American payment giants, the challenge is significant but unlikely to become an immediate threat.

Visa generated roughly $40 billion in revenue during 2025, while Mastercard reported nearly $33 billion. Both companies continue investing heavily in Europe and are even participating in discussions surrounding Britain’s future payment infrastructure.

Most analysts expect Visa and Mastercard to remain dominant for years to come.

However, the emergence of credible alternatives could gradually increase competition, lower merchant fees, and give governments greater control over their own financial infrastructure.

For consumers, the changes may ultimately mean more payment choices and lower transaction costs.

For Visa and Mastercard, it represents one of the most serious long-term competitive challenges they have faced after decades of dominating the world’s checkout counters.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. stocks finished higher Tuesday on the final trading day of the second quarter, as technology shares helped lift the major indexes to their strongest three-month performance in years. Oliver Pursche, senior vice president and advisor at Wealthspire Advisors, said the first half of 2026 turned out far better than most on Wall Street had expected, even with geopolitical uncertainty and a volatile global backdrop.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average rose 129.74 points, or 0.25%, to 52,312. The S&P 500 gained 55.29 points, or 0.74%, to 7,495, while the Nasdaq Composite climbed 345.96 points, or 1.33%, to 26,166. Both the S&P 500 and the Nasdaq posted their best quarterly performance since 2020, while the Dow recorded its strongest quarterly gain since 2022.

It was a tale of two quarters. The S&P 500 advanced roughly 13.5% over the three-month period, driven largely by a technology sector that surged about 28%, according to Edward Jones. During June, however, investors shifted money away from many of the largest technology companies and into health care, industrial and financial stocks.

Among the developments drawing investor attention, Alphabet officially replaced Verizon in the Dow Jones Industrial Average this week, while SpaceX is expected to join the Nasdaq-100 before trading begins on July 7.

Investors also continued to monitor overseas developments. While tensions in the Middle East eased considerably during June, diplomatic efforts between the United States and Iran remained uncertain. The calmer environment nevertheless helped pull oil prices back toward levels seen before the conflict intensified earlier this year.

Interest-rate expectations remain one of Wall Street’s biggest concerns. Traders continue to monitor incoming economic data for clues about the Federal Reserve’s next move, while strategists at Bank of America told clients they believe cyclical sectors such as financials and energy could outperform during the second half of the year.

Market movers

Several companies posted notable moves on Tuesday.

AeroVironment extended its recent rally following strong quarterly results, with Chief Executive Wahid Nawabi pointing to increased global demand for advanced defense technologies.

Air Products and Chemicals climbed about 9%, while solar installer Sunrun gained roughly 5%.

On the downside, Concentrix plunged approximately 22% after reporting disappointing quarterly results and issuing weaker-than-expected guidance.

Norfolk Southern fell more than 8%, while Digital Realty Trust slipped after announcing a $3.5 billion transaction involving three data centers.

Strategy, the company best known for its large bitcoin holdings, also declined after changing its long-standing policy of never selling its cryptocurrency holdings.

After the closing bell, Nike reported fiscal fourth-quarter revenue of $10.97 billion and earnings of 72 cents per share, easily topping analysts’ expectations. The results were helped in part by a benefit related to expected tariff-cost recoveries as Chief Executive Elliott Hill continues implementing the company’s turnaround strategy.

Commodities and volatility

Oil prices continued to retreat as supply concerns eased. Brent crude traded near $73 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate hovered around $70 per barrel, both well below their recent conflict-driven highs.

Gold eased to around $4,040 per ounce, giving back some of its recent gains, while the Cboe Volatility Index (VIX) remained in the mid-teens, reflecting relatively calm market conditions.

With U.S. markets closed Friday for the Independence Day holiday, investor attention now shifts to Thursday’s closely watched June employment report, which could provide important clues about the Federal Reserve’s policy path during the second half of the year.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

New York City businesses are preparing for a possible economic windfall this week as reports swirl that Taylor Swift and Travis Kelce could marry on July 3 somewhere in Manhattan. Neither the couple nor any venue has confirmed the reports, and the location remains unknown, with speculation ranging from Madison Square Garden to Central Park and Rockefeller Center. Even so, the possibility alone has drawn attention because of Swift’s proven ability to generate significant economic activity wherever she appears.

A wedding is far smaller than a stadium concert, but Swift’s appearances have repeatedly shown they can draw thousands of fans. When she attended New York Knicks playoff games at Madison Square Garden this spring, crowds gathered outside hoping for a glimpse. Earlier this month, rumors of a wedding in Rhode Island prompted fans to travel there despite no ceremony taking place.

The economic impact of Swift’s public appearances is well documented. Her Eras Tour generated more than $2.2 billion in ticket sales, making it the highest-grossing concert tour in history. The U.S. Travel Association estimated fans spent roughly $1,300 each on hotels, airfare, restaurants, transportation, and merchandise, creating more than $5 billion in economic activity during the tour’s first U.S. leg.

Cities have taken notice. The Federal Reserve’s Beige Book cited Swift’s Philadelphia concerts as a major reason hotel revenue reached post-pandemic highs. Chicago officials credited her performances with record hotel occupancy, while six concerts in Los Angeles were estimated to generate approximately $320 million in local economic activity. Bank of America has said spending surrounding an Eras Tour weekend can rival that of one of the nation’s biggest sporting events.

If a Manhattan wedding were to occur, businesses closest to the venue would likely benefit the most. Hotels, restaurants, transportation providers, retailers, and entertainment venues often experience a surge in demand during major celebrity events. Reports indicate city officials have discussed potential security preparations and traffic planning, although no official event has been confirmed.

Fans have repeatedly shown they are willing to travel long distances, book hotel rooms, and gather outside locations simply for the chance to see Swift. The intense interest has even led prediction markets such as Polymarket to take wagers on details surrounding the rumored wedding.

Economists caution that even an event involving one of the world’s biggest celebrities would not significantly move the economy of a city as large as New York. Instead, the financial benefits would be concentrated among businesses located closest to any event site.

The timing could amplify those benefits. A July 3 celebration would coincide with the start of the busy Independence Day holiday weekend, when Midtown hotels, restaurants, and attractions are already filled with tourists. That combination could boost spending further, although extreme heat forecasts and heavy holiday travel may also create logistical challenges.

The broader lesson extends beyond celebrity culture. Cities increasingly view globally recognized entertainers as economic drivers capable of producing measurable gains in tourism, hospitality, retail spending, and local tax revenue.

Whether Taylor Swift and Travis Kelce actually exchange vows in Manhattan or not, New York’s preparations illustrate how a single celebrity event—or even the possibility of one—can quickly become a meaningful business story for the companies hoping to benefit from the attention.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

As a record number of Americans prepare to hit the road for the July 4 holiday, gasoline prices are finally beginning to ease—but not as quickly as President Donald Trump would like.

AAA expects 61.4 million Americans to travel at least 50 miles from home by car over the holiday weekend, slightly above last year’s record of 61.3 million. Drivers are paying a national average of about $3.93 per gallon, down from $4.53 a month ago, but still nearly $1 higher than before the Iran conflict and about 22% above prices a year ago.

Last week, Trump posted on Truth Social that major oil companies were failing to lower gasoline prices in line with falling crude oil prices, accused the industry of “gouging” consumers, and called on the Justice Department to investigate.

Energy analysts say the situation is more complicated.

Oil companies generally do not set the retail price drivers pay at the pump. Individual gas station owners and retailers determine those prices, and they often continue selling fuel that was refined from crude oil purchased weeks earlier at significantly higher prices.

“There is a saying that gasoline prices rise like a rocket and fall like a feather,” David Doherty of BloombergNEF said, noting that it typically takes around three weeks for major changes in crude oil prices to work their way through the supply chain. Karen Young, an energy expert at Columbia University, described Trump’s accusations of price gouging as “political theater.”

The delay is built into the energy system itself. Refineries purchase crude oil well before it is processed into gasoline. The finished fuel must then travel through pipelines, storage terminals, tanker trucks, and local distribution networks before reaching neighborhood service stations.

Today, roughly 57% of the price consumers pay for gasoline reflects the cost of crude oil, with the remainder covering refining, transportation, marketing, and federal, state, and local taxes.

Crude oil prices themselves have fallen sharply. U.S. benchmark West Texas Intermediate (WTI) crude has dropped about 27% over the past month to roughly $70.45 per barrel, only modestly above where prices stood before the conflict with Iran.

However, global energy markets have not fully normalized. Shipping traffic through the Strait of Hormuz, which normally carries about 20% of the world’s oil supply, remains below pre-conflict levels. Mines still need to be cleared in some shipping areas, and Middle Eastern oil production is gradually recovering.

The gap between falling crude prices and slower declines at the gas pump has temporarily boosted profits for some fuel retailers. Industry analysts note that convenience-store chains and gas station operators are currently enjoying stronger margins after wholesale prices dropped faster than retail prices.

Relief appears to be on the way.

Patrick De Haan of GasBuddy expects national gasoline prices to move closer to $3.70 per gallon as oil markets continue stabilizing and shipping through the Strait of Hormuz returns to normal.

The U.S. Energy Information Administration also forecasts lower fuel costs ahead, projecting retail gasoline prices will decline about 6% in 2026 as global oil production outpaces demand. The agency expects crude oil to average its lowest annual price since 2020 before rising modestly in 2027.

The issue extends beyond family vacation budgets. Energy costs accounted for more than 60% of the increase in May’s inflation report, which showed consumer prices rising 4.2% from a year earlier—the highest annual inflation rate in more than two years.

With the midterm elections approaching, the White House is eager to demonstrate that energy costs are falling. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent has also announced a 60-day waiver on sanctions covering purchases of Iranian oil in an effort to increase global supplies and ease price pressures.

For families preparing for a holiday road trip, the takeaway is straightforward. Gasoline prices are moving lower, but the process takes time. Comparing prices between stations, using fuel rewards programs, and avoiding high-priced highway exits remain some of the best ways to save money while the market gradually works the remaining war premium out of every gallon.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. stocks traded mixed Tuesday after the Dow Jones Industrial Average closed above 52,000 for the first time. Investors watched developments in the Middle East as reports of renewed U.S.-Iran talks helped ease concerns over energy supplies, while a quieter oil market helped steady sentiment after weeks of heightened volatility around the Strait of Hormuz.

The mixed trading also reflected investors taking profits in many of the technology stocks that had fueled Monday’s rally. James DePorre, a market strategist who writes for TheStreet Pro, cautioned that a sustainable rally requires broader participation across the market. He noted that rebounds driven primarily by short covering and quarter-end positioning do not necessarily signal improving market fundamentals.

By late Tuesday morning, the S&P 500 was little changed, while the Dow Jones Industrial Average slipped about 0.24%. The Nasdaq Composite gained roughly 0.29%, supported by technology shares, while the small-cap Russell 2000 traded near flat. Among popular exchange-traded funds, the Invesco QQQ Trust advanced about 1.1%, the VanEck Semiconductor ETF added nearly 0.8%, and the Roundhill Magnificent Seven ETF posted a modest gain after Monday’s sharp advance.

The holiday-shortened week leaves investors focused on several major economic events. The Institute for Supply Management’s June manufacturing report is due Wednesday, followed by Thursday’s closely watched June employment report ahead of the Independence Day holiday.

Market movers

Corporate earnings and analyst actions drove many of Tuesday’s biggest moves.

Concentrix fell roughly 22% after reporting second-quarter earnings and revenue below Wall Street expectations while issuing weaker guidance for the remainder of the year.

Norfolk Southern declined about 8%, Strategy dropped more than 7%, and Digital Realty Trust lost over 4%.

Leading the gainers, AeroVironment surged about 20%, Air Products and Chemicals climbed approximately 9%, and Sunrun gained about 5%.

Several Wall Street research firms also moved stocks.

BMO Capital Markets upgraded Casey’s General Stores to Outperform with a $950 price target.

Raymond James initiated coverage of AppLovin with a Strong Buy rating and a $640 target.

Melius began coverage of Honeywell Aerospace with a Buy rating and a $306 target.

On the downside, KeyBanc lowered its target price on McDonald’s while maintaining an Overweight rating, and Arete downgraded CrowdStrike to Neutral.

SpaceX, after a strong gain Monday, traded modestly lower Tuesday as investors continued preparing for the company’s addition to the Nasdaq-100 before trading begins on July 7.

Commodities and volatility

Oil prices remained relatively stable as traders monitored diplomatic developments in the Middle East and shipping activity through the Strait of Hormuz.

Gold eased as demand for traditional safe-haven assets moderated, while silver also traded lower during the session.

The Cboe Volatility Index (VIX) remained below last week’s highs, suggesting investor anxiety continued to ease even as markets paused following Monday’s record-setting advance.

Investors now turn their attention to Nike’s quarterly earnings after Tuesday’s closing bell and Thursday’s June jobs report, widely expected to be the week’s most important economic release. Those reports could shape expectations for future Federal Reserve policy and determine whether the market’s recent rally has room to continue into the second half of the year.

JBizNews Desk
New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Trump administration is canceling an offshore wind lease held by Duke Energy off the coast of North Carolina, the latest move in its widening campaign to halt new wind development. Under an agreement with the Department of the Interior announced Monday, Duke will voluntarily terminate its lease in the Carolina Long Bay area, valued at $129 million, and invest the same amount in additional electricity-generating capacity.

According to the company, Duke plans to redirect the refunded money into projects such as nuclear generation and grid modernization before the end of the year. Rather than developing offshore wind turbines, the utility will invest in the types of always-available power generation favored by the current administration.

The cancellation is part of a broader federal rollback of offshore wind development.

Since taking office, the administration has withdrawn offshore wind lease areas, paused permitting activity, rescinded approximately 3.5 million acres designated for offshore wind development, and suspended leases for several major projects, including Empire Wind, Revolution Wind, Sunrise Wind, Vineyard Wind 1, and Coastal Virginia Offshore Wind. Several of those projects have continued operating after receiving court injunctions while litigation proceeds.

Increasingly, the federal government has been negotiating buyouts instead of allowing projects to move forward.

In recent months, offshore wind developers have received nearly $2 billion in agreements to walk away from planned projects. Two developers—Bluepoint Wind and Golden State Wind—abandoned their projects after receiving roughly $900 million combined. Other lease areas off New Jersey and South Carolina have also been terminated.

The Duke Energy agreement adds another high-profile project to that growing list.

The policy shift reflects changing investment priorities throughout the energy sector. With federal support for offshore wind declining, more capital is flowing into nuclear power, natural gas, battery storage, and electric-grid upgrades. Investment firm Brookfield recently said it sees stronger long-term opportunities in batteries and grid infrastructure than in standalone wind and solar projects.

For utilities such as Duke Energy, those investments now offer a clearer regulatory path.

The timing is significant because U.S. electricity demand continues to climb, driven in large part by the rapid expansion of artificial-intelligence data centers. Analysts expect AI facilities alone to add enormous new demand to the nation’s electric grid over the coming decade.

Supporters of offshore wind argue the projects would have helped strengthen power supplies across the Northeast and Mid-Atlantic, particularly during periods of peak winter demand when natural-gas systems can become constrained. Critics of the cancellations warn that reducing future generating capacity could increase electricity costs if demand continues rising.

The economic effects extend beyond electricity production.

Several coastal states have invested heavily in developing offshore wind supply chains. New York announced a $300 million port investment program, the New Jersey Wind Port represents more than $600 million in development, and California authorized more than $225 million for offshore wind infrastructure. Those investments were expected to support construction, manufacturing, shipping, and related industries.

One completed project, Vineyard Wind 1, is projected to generate enough electricity to power approximately 400,000 homes while saving Massachusetts customers an estimated $1.4 billion on electricity costs over the next two decades.

President Donald Trump has opposed offshore wind projects for years, dating back to disputes over turbines proposed near one of his golf properties in Scotland. What began as campaign rhetoric has evolved into a broad federal policy reshaping where energy investment flows in the United States.

For businesses and investors, the direction has become increasingly clear: federal policy is steering capital away from offshore wind and toward nuclear power, natural gas, battery storage, and grid reliability. Whether that strategy delivers enough affordable electricity to meet rapidly growing demand remains one of the biggest questions facing America’s energy future.

JBizNews Energy Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

JPMorgan Chase announced a major leadership shake-up, naming two longtime executives as co-presidents while confirming the retirement of Marianne Lake, one of Wall Street’s most prominent executives and a longtime contender to eventually succeed Chief Executive Jamie Dimon.

According to a regulatory filing, Doug Petno, 61, and Troy Rohrbaugh, 56, were immediately promoted to the newly created co-president positions after previously serving as co-chief executives of the bank’s Commercial and Investment Bank.

Under the new leadership structure, Petno will oversee the Commercial and Investment Bank, while Rohrbaugh becomes Chief Executive of the Consumer and Community Banking division, replacing Lake.

The biggest surprise was Lake’s retirement.

A 25-year JPMorgan veteran, Lake previously served as the bank’s Chief Financial Officer beginning in 2013 before leading several of its largest business units. For years she had been widely viewed as one of the strongest internal candidates to eventually replace Dimon, making her departure one of the most significant leadership changes at the nation’s largest bank in years.

Her exit also removes one of the highest-profile women in American finance from the succession race, marking a notable shift in leadership representation at the top of Wall Street.

The changes come as Jamie Dimon, now 70, continues to tell investors that JPMorgan has multiple executives capable of becoming chief executive. Dimon has previously indicated he expects to remain CEO for approximately three more years, although he has emphasized that no formal retirement date has been set.

JPMorgan described Thursday’s moves as part of its long-term succession planning rather than an indication that Dimon’s departure is imminent.

To strengthen retention, the bank awarded both Petno and Rohrbaugh one-time restricted stock grants valued at $30 million each.

The awards exceed similar $20 million grants previously awarded to Asset & Wealth Management CEO Mary Erdoes and Chief Operating Officer Jennifer Piepszak. The stock awards vest after three years only if JPMorgan achieves an average 12% return on tangible common equity between 2026 and 2028, and the executives remain with the firm.

The bank said the grants are intended to help preserve its strongest internal succession candidates.

The announcement also reflects how JPMorgan’s succession field has narrowed over time. Several executives previously viewed as possible CEO candidates have either retired, accepted different responsibilities, or removed themselves from consideration, leaving a smaller group of potential successors.

The stakes are enormous.

With approximately $4.9 trillion in assets as of March 31, 2026, JPMorgan is the largest bank in the United States and one of the world’s most influential financial institutions. Its lending decisions, capital markets activity, investment banking operations, and consumer banking business touch millions of customers and thousands of corporations worldwide.

Who ultimately succeeds Jamie Dimon, widely regarded as one of the most influential bankers of his generation, will help shape one of the world’s most important financial institutions for years to come.

For now, Dimon remains firmly in charge. But Thursday’s announcement makes one thing clear: JPMorgan’s board is actively preparing for the eventual transition, elevating two experienced executives while ensuring they have strong financial incentives to remain at the bank when that day finally arrives.

JBizNews Wall Street Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

On Tuesday, the Tehran newspaper Hamshahri, one of Iran’s most widely read dailies, ran a front page that placed a rifle’s crosshairs over President Donald Trump’s face above the words, “Revenge is certain.” The paper is owned by the Tehran municipality and funded by the Iranian government. Its front page featured calls for retaliation from senior Iranian religious figures who blamed Israel and the United States for the killing of Iranian leaders during the four-month war the two sides are now trying to end.

Screenshot

In most years, a front-page death threat against a sitting American president would have rattled energy markets and driven oil prices sharply higher. This time, markets barely reacted. Brent crude slipped about 1% Tuesday to roughly $72.40 a barrel, while U.S. West Texas Intermediate crude traded near $70.32. For consumers, trucking companies, airlines and manufacturers, those prices matter far more than the headline in Tehran.

The reason is straightforward: traders are pricing the negotiations, not the rhetoric. President Donald Trump announced that U.S. and Iranian officials are expected to resume peace talks in Doha, Qatar, with the goal of turning the current ceasefire into a broader agreement. As long as investors believe diplomacy remains alive, the war premium built into oil prices continues to fade.

The decline has been dramatic. Brent crude has fallen roughly 30% over the past three months, its largest quarterly decline since 2020, after surging above $100 a barrel earlier in the conflict. Much of that reversal centers on one of the world’s most strategically important waterways: the Strait of Hormuz. Before the conflict, roughly one-quarter of global seaborne oil shipments and about one-fifth of the world’s liquefied natural gas moved through the narrow passage. As military tensions eased and commercial shipping gradually resumed, oil prices moved lower.

Shipping remains fragile

The recovery remains far from complete. Shipping intelligence firm Kpler reported traffic fluctuated sharply over the weekend, with significantly fewer vessels transiting the strait on Sunday than the previous day. Meanwhile, military exchanges continued despite the ceasefire. U.S. Central Command reported strikes against Iranian military targets following attacks on commercial shipping, while Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps said it responded by targeting U.S. military facilities in Kuwait and Bahrain. Every new exchange tests the durability of the ceasefire and the confidence of global shipping companies.

The next major dispute centers on control of the waterway itself. Iranian Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi has argued that Tehran should manage traffic through the Strait of Hormuz, a position rejected by the United States and its allies. Under the current interim agreement, Iran agreed not to impose transit fees for 60 days, although officials have suggested tolls could be considered afterward. The United States, Europe and Gulf Arab nations oppose any such charges, warning they would increase shipping costs and eventually raise prices worldwide.

Why businesses are watching

The stakes extend well beyond crude oil. The Persian Gulf also handles a substantial share of globally traded fertilizer and liquefied natural gas, commodities that directly affect food production, manufacturing costs and household energy bills. An open shipping lane helps keep those costs contained. Any renewed disruption could quickly ripple through supply chains and consumer prices around the world.

The message from Tehran’s front pages also appears aimed at more than foreign audiences. The rhetoric allows Iran’s hardline leadership to project strength domestically after suffering significant battlefield losses while diplomats continue pursuing negotiations abroad. Markets, however, have largely looked past the political messaging and remain focused on whether ships continue moving safely through the strait.

For businesses, the takeaway is straightforward. Oil markets are currently betting that diplomacy will hold, providing relief for transportation companies, manufacturers and consumers alike. But that optimism depends on a ceasefire that has already shown signs of strain. The next move in fuel prices may depend less on newspaper headlines than on whether commercial shipping continues to flow through one of the world’s most important energy corridors.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A matching AP-style image would pair well with this story by showing oil tankers transiting the Strait of Hormuz, with no text, logos, or branding, emphasizing commercial shipping rather than military action.

As American and Iranian negotiators prepared to meet in Doha on Tuesday, Iran made clear it has no plans to loosen its grip on the Strait of Hormuz, the narrow waterway that carries a fifth of the world’s oil. Iranian Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi said Tehran now holds sole control of the strait and warned against any move to establish new or separate arrangements for the channel. A day earlier, senior adviser Ali Akbar Velayati urged that Iran’s demand to charge passing ships be honored and suggested neighboring Oman support the proposal.

That stance sets up the central issue in the talks. The waterway runs between Iran and Oman, and at its narrowest point passes through both countries’ territorial waters. Under the memorandum of understanding that President Donald Trump and Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian signed on June 17, Iran agreed to reopen Hormuz immediately and spend 60 days negotiating a broader peace agreement. The same document bars Iran from charging tolls during that period, but Tehran has left open the possibility of imposing fees afterward—an idea the United States, Europe and the Gulf Arab states oppose.

Why it matters to everyday buyers

Hormuz is not just a military flashpoint. About 20% to 25% of the world’s seaborne oil and roughly 20% of its liquefied natural gas normally pass through the strait. Before the war began on February 28, roughly 3,000 ships crossed Hormuz each month. After Iran closed the passage and laid sea mines, traffic collapsed. World Trade Organization figures show crude tanker movements fell 95%, while liquefied natural gas carriers dropped 99%.

When that much energy stops moving, prices surge. Brent crude climbed above $126 a barrel in March, California gasoline topped $5 a gallon, and fertilizer shipments—up to 30% of the world’s traded supply also move through Hormuz—were disrupted, raising costs for farmers and consumers around the globe.

Now the trend has reversed. With the ceasefire largely holding and commercial shipping gradually resuming, oil prices have fallen sharply. On Tuesday, U.S. West Texas Intermediate crude traded near $70 a barrel, while Brent crude hovered around $73, both back near their pre-war levels. WTI has fallen roughly 30% during the quarter, marking its steepest three-month decline since 2020. Lower crude prices are beginning to filter through to gasoline stations, providing some relief for household budgets.

The sticking points

The proposed toll system remains the biggest dispute, but it is far from the only one. Secretary of State Marco Rubio has said any Iranian effort to charge transit fees would make a diplomatic agreement unworkable, maintaining that the Strait of Hormuz is an international waterway open to all vessels. Iran argues it has the right to regulate shipping through its coastal waters.

Another unresolved issue is clearing the estimated 80 sea mines still scattered throughout the channel. The June agreement assigns that responsibility to Iran within 30 days, but France and Oman said this week they are prepared to assist with demining following a visit to Paris by Oman’s ruler, Sultan Haitham bin Tarik. Tehran has objected, insisting the cleanup should remain under Iranian control.

Even if negotiators reach a broader agreement, shipping companies expect recovery to take time. Hundreds of tankers remain stranded inside the Persian Gulf, and the Abu Dhabi National Oil Company has warned that full shipping volumes may not return until 2027. War-risk insurance also remains elevated. Premiums that once averaged about 0.125% of a vessel’s value per voyage climbed as high as 0.4% during the conflict, adding roughly $250,000 to the cost of operating a single supertanker.

A fragile next step

The Doha meeting itself remains uncertain. President Donald Trump said on social media that Iran had requested the talks, but Iran’s Foreign Ministry denied Monday that negotiations with U.S. officials had been confirmed. Lead Iranian negotiator Kazem Gharibabadi also said reports of a scheduled meeting were premature. The two sides have met in person only once before, on June 21 in Switzerland.

For now, markets are responding more to the movement of ships than to diplomatic statements. As long as tankers continue crossing the strait and the ceasefire holds, energy prices are likely to remain relatively stable. But the dispute over who controls the Strait of Hormuz—and whether ships will eventually face transit fees—remains unresolved. Any breakdown in negotiations could quickly send oil prices, shipping costs and, ultimately, consumer prices higher once again.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street headed into the final session of the second quarter on Tuesday with the S&P 500 on track for its strongest three-month stretch since 2020, a rally built on the artificial-intelligence spending boom and a sharp drop in oil prices after the U.S.-Iran ceasefire. The shift in mood traces back to the weekend, when President Donald Trump said peace talks with Iran would resume Tuesday, easing the war fears that had gripped markets since fighting began February 28.

The numbers tell the story. The S&P 500 has climbed about 14% since the start of April. The Nasdaq Composite has done even better, up roughly 20% for the quarter and now home to SpaceX, the $2 trillion rocket company that joined its ranks in June. The Dow Jones Industrial Average is set for its best quarter since 2022.

On Monday, the Dow rose 307 points, or 0.59%, to a record 52,183. The S&P 500 gained 1.2% and the Nasdaq 100 jumped 2.3%. Much of that was a relief rally after a brutal stretch for chip stocks, and it carried into Tuesday, when the S&P 500 edged up 0.2% in early trading.

The gains came despite a Federal Reserve that has turned noticeably tougher on inflation. New Chairman Kevin Warsh, who took over in May, has dropped the central bank’s habit of telling markets where rates are headed and has stuck to a single message: the Fed will get inflation back to 2%. Consumer prices rose at a 4.2% annual rate in May, the highest in three years, pushed up mostly by gasoline during the Iran war.

Market movers

The biggest single name this quarter has been Micron Technology, the memory-chip maker. The company reported adjusted earnings of $25.11 a share last week, far above the $20.78 analysts had expected, and the stock jumped 17% on the news. Memory chips, once treated as a low-margin commodity, have become one of the hottest corners of the AI trade.

Alphabet, Google’s parent, had a notable week of its own. The company replaced Verizon in the Dow and climbed 5% on its first day in the blue-chip index, a sign of how far technology has pushed into a benchmark once dominated by industrial names. Tesla soared 8.5% on Monday, while Amazon rose 3.2%, Meta Platforms gained 2.2% and Nvidia added 1.3%.

Not every name shared in the gains. Apple fell 6% last week after raising prices on its MacBook and iPad lines. Nike, which reports earnings Tuesday after the close, has dropped 24% over the quarter, and analysts expect its sales to fall about 2% from a year ago. In health care, Germany’s Merck agreed to buy Bio-Techne for $73 a share, or $11.3 billion.

Strategists are split on what comes next. Brian Levitt, chief global market strategist at Invesco, said technology stocks went through a period of June gloom that could reverse as earnings season opens in July. Guy Miller, chief market strategist at Zurich Insurance Group, pointed to a bigger change: the easy-money support investors counted on at the start of the year is gone, replaced by talk of rate hikes. Bank of America now expects the Fed to raise rates three times this year.

Commodities and volatility

Oil has been the quarter’s quiet hero for consumers. Brent crude settled near $74 a barrel last week and U.S. West Texas Intermediate near $70, both down about 20% over the three months as the Strait of Hormuz gradually reopened and the U.S.-Iran ceasefire held. That decline has started to pull gasoline prices lower and take some pressure off household budgets.

Gold went the other way. The metal slipped below $4,000 an ounce to a seven-month low, hurt by the stronger dollar and the prospect of higher interest rates, which make gold less attractive to hold. The U.S. dollar is heading for its fourth straight quarterly gain, and the Japanese yen has sunk to its weakest level since 1986. The VIX, Wall Street’s fear gauge, sat near 18, well below the 30-plus readings seen during the worst of the Iran fighting in March.

Investors now turn to two events. Warsh speaks Wednesday at the European Central Bank’s forum in Sintra, Portugal, his first appearance abroad as Fed chair, alongside ECB President Christine Lagarde and other central bankers. Then comes Thursday’s June jobs report, which will shape bets on whether the Fed raises rates as soon as October. For now, the quarter ends on a high note, with cheaper fuel and a booming AI sector outweighing the worry about what the Fed does next.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Uber and Alphabet’s Waymo have ended their driverless-car partnership in Phoenix, the city where the two first tested whether longtime rivals could work together. Both companies confirmed the split on Monday, with an Uber spokesperson describing Phoenix as “our first pilot market with Waymo” and “an intentionally limited deployment, reaching just over a dozen vehicles dedicated to the program.”

The arrangement dated to a multiyear deal struck in 2023, under which Uber put a subset of Waymo’s robotaxis on its ride-hailing and food-delivery apps. The ride-hailing portion wound down last month, and the food-delivery piece had ended back in May 2025, after the program completed hundreds of thousands of trips. A Waymo spokesperson said the vehicles have already been integrated back into its own Phoenix fleet, where riders can still book them through the Waymo app.

The breakup is less a falling-out than a fork in the road. Uber and Waymo are an unusual pair — former courtroom rivals who became partners while still competing — and each is now pursuing a separate autonomous strategy. Waymo increasingly wants riders in its own app, and Uber wants to be the platform every robotaxi maker plugs into. Phoenix is where those two visions stopped overlapping.

For Waymo, the split shows growing confidence in going it alone. The Google sister company operates a fleet of about 4,000 automated vehicles in the United States, offers rides through its own app in most markets, and is expanding to new cities without Uber, launching in Dallas with Moove and Avis as fleet partners. In Phoenix, its vehicles will remain in use and will make autonomous deliveries through DoorDash, which competes directly with Uber Eats.

Uber, meanwhile, is spreading its bets. Its broader autonomous strategy now spans far beyond Waymo, with partners including Wayve, Avride, and a recently announced agreement for up to 50,000 Rivian-built robotaxis. Waymo vehicles remain available exclusively through Uber in Austin and Atlanta, and Uber says it is preparing another autonomous-vehicle partnership in Phoenix, though it has not yet identified the company. The strategy is to make Uber the front door for autonomous rides regardless of which company’s technology powers the vehicle.

The stakes are enormous because robotaxis have the potential to transform the economics of ride-hailing. Removing the human driver eliminates the industry’s largest operating cost, potentially lowering fares while increasing profit margins for whichever company controls the fleet. That explains why both companies are racing to control as much of the value chain as possible—from the self-driving technology to the customer-facing app and the vehicles themselves.

The shift also reflects an increasingly crowded autonomous-driving race. Waymo is rolling out its newest robotaxi, the Zeekr-built Ojai, and plans to launch rides through Lyft in Nashville later this year without exclusivity. Tesla, which obtained an Arizona ride-hailing permit last fall, is currently operating a limited autonomous fleet of roughly 69 vehicles in Texas. Each competitor is positioning itself in what many believe will become one of transportation’s largest future markets.

The Phoenix split also comes as the industry faces greater scrutiny over safety. Waymo recently recalled nearly 3,900 robotaxis after identifying a software issue that could allow vehicles to enter closed freeway construction zones. Incidents like that carry significant business consequences, influencing both regulatory oversight and public confidence as autonomous fleets continue expanding.

For riders in Phoenix, little changes immediately. The same driverless vehicles will continue operating on city streets—they will simply be requested through a different app.

The larger battle, however, is only beginning.

The central question facing the entire autonomous-vehicle industry is who ultimately owns the customer relationship: the company that builds the self-driving technology or the platform millions of people already use to request rides.

Phoenix has made one thing clear: Uber and Waymo now have very different answers, and the outcome of that competition will help determine how Americans book—and pay for—driverless transportation in the years ahead.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The 2026 FIFA World Cup, now underway across the United States, Canada, and Mexico, is on track to become the biggest sports betting event in American history, according to projections from leading gaming research firms. Analysts at Eilers & Krejcik Gaming estimate U.S. legal sportsbooks will take in roughly $2.82 billion in wagers during the tournament under their base-case forecast, with an upside scenario exceeding $4.3 billion. Either figure would eclipse betting volumes seen during recent Super Bowls and NCAA March Madness tournaments.

The tournament opened on June 11 and runs through the July 19 championship match at MetLife Stadium in East Rutherford, New Jersey. Along the way, matches are being played in major host cities including Los Angeles, New York/New Jersey, Dallas, Atlanta, Miami, Houston, Seattle, Philadelphia, Boston, Kansas City, San Francisco Bay Area, Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey, Toronto, and Vancouver.

For the United States, the tournament represents more than a sporting event. It has become a major economic driver for sportsbooks, host cities, tourism businesses, restaurants, hotels, and state governments.

Soccer has traditionally ranked behind football and basketball in American sports betting, but several factors have changed that equation. This is the first World Cup hosted largely on North American soil in more than three decades, the first featuring an expanded 48-team field and 104 matches, and the first offering television schedules that are convenient for U.S. audiences instead of requiring early morning viewing because of overseas time zones.

Legalized sports betting has also expanded dramatically since the U.S. Supreme Court struck down the federal sports betting ban in 2018. More than 30 states now allow legal mobile sports wagering, enabling millions of Americans to place bets directly from their smartphones.

For sportsbook operators, the World Cup represents an enormous business opportunity.

Deutsche Bank projects that FanDuel will process roughly $1.3 billion in World Cup wagers, while DraftKings is expected to handle approximately $1.1 billion. BetMGM and Caesars Sportsbook are projected to account for another $300 million to $500 million combined. ESPN Bet and Fanatics Sportsbook are also expected to benefit from increased customer activity throughout the tournament.

Unlike American football, however, soccer produces relatively thin profit margins for sportsbooks. Industry analysts estimate operators retain only about 5 to 7 percent of the total amount wagered on soccer after paying winning bettors. That makes betting volume—not higher margins—the key to profitability.

Another development this year is the growing role of federally regulated prediction markets.

Platforms such as Kalshi and Polymarket allow users to trade contracts tied to match outcomes, group winners and the eventual World Cup champion. One industry projection estimates prediction-market trading volume during the tournament could reach $2.37 billion, although that figure includes contracts that are bought and later resold. Alex Kane, chief executive of Sporttrade, estimates the equivalent betting handle is closer to $474 million.

Globally, the numbers are even larger.

Research firm H2 Gambling Capital estimates approximately $60 billion will be wagered worldwide across legal and illegal markets during the tournament. Of that total, roughly $2.9 billion is expected to come through legal U.S. sportsbooks, $2.5 billion through Mexico, $300 million through Canada, and the remaining $54 billion through betting markets across Europe, Asia and Latin America.

The surge in betting also carries significant implications for state finances.

States with legalized sports wagering tax sportsbook revenue, meaning higher betting activity generally produces additional tax collections. Depending on the jurisdiction, those funds may support education, transportation, infrastructure, public safety or state general funds. A record-breaking World Cup could therefore become one of the largest sports-related tax events ever experienced by many states.

Several factors could determine whether betting reaches the upper end of analyst forecasts.

One is the performance of the U.S. Men’s National Team. Analysts say a deep run by the American squad would likely attract millions of casual fans who otherwise would not place bets. Another is continued consumer participation. Industry surveys indicate that a majority of people planning to closely follow the tournament expect to place at least one wager, while several sportsbook operators have reported customer engagement running ahead of internal expectations.

For now, the projections remain just that—projections. Final betting figures will not be available until after the World Cup concludes in July. But with millions of dollars already flowing through sportsbooks every day and strong consumer interest across North America, analysts believe the tournament is well on its way to becoming the largest legal sports betting event the United States has ever seen.

JBizNews Desk
New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Americans preparing to hold a Fourth of July barbecue this weekend will face higher costs for their burgers and hot dogs amid stubborn inflation, a new report finds.

The American Farm Bureau Federation’s Summer Cookout Cost Survey finds that in 2026, a classic Fourth of July cookout for 10 people will cost $73.82, or about $7.38 per person. That amounts to an increase of $2.90, or 4% compared with a year ago.

The basket of goods used to measure the cost year to year includes cheeseburgers, chicken breasts, pork chops, potato chips, pork and beans, fresh strawberries, ingredients for homemade potato salad and fresh-squeezed lemonade, as well as chocolate chip cookies and ice cream.

“While this year’s total is the highest since Farm Bureau began conducting the summer cookout survey in 2016, the increase closely reflects broader inflation,” the group wrote.

INFLATION ROSE AGAIN IN MAY AS ELEVATED ENERGY PRICES SQUEEZE CONSUMERS

“The cost of the cookout basket rose about 4%, while overall inflation in the United States increased 4.2% over the 12 months ending in May,” the Farm Bureau said. “That means families are seeing higher prices at the grocery store, but this year’s cookout cost is generally moving in line with the broader economy.”

The report noted that the cost of the basket is little changed from a year ago when deflating the value using the consumer price index (CPI) inflation metric, with the cost of this year’s basket at $22.03 in 1982-84 dollars, slightly lower than the $22.06 observation using last year’s data.

That means that “while families are paying more dollars at checkout, the purchasing-power cost of the basket is nearly flat from last year,” the Farm Bureau added.

Among the food items in the basket, the report noted that several of the main proteins cost more as the two pounds of ground beef are up 5.5% to $14.06, which is the highest beef price recorded in the survey’s history. Drought has caused the size of the national cattle herd to trend to a 70-year low, while ranchers also face higher operating costs.

SUMMER STICKER SHOCK: THE 14% ‘BURGER TAX’ HITTING YOUR BACKYARD BBQ THIS WEEKEND

Chicken breasts are also 3.5% more expensive than last year, with two pounds now costing $8.06. Pork chop costs also rose 4.7% to $14.79 for three pounds, though they remain below the 2024 price despite this year’s rise.

Strawberries had some of the largest price increases in the basket of goods, with two pints costing $5.27, an increase of 12.4% from last year. The Farm Bureau attributed part of that to a damaging frost in Florida that impacted young plants this spring, as well as higher costs of labor, fuel, refrigeration and transportation.

Lemonade costs have risen 3.9% in the last year to $4.54 for 2.5 quarts, mainly due to the rise in the price of lemons, given sugar prices holding steady.

The largest increase of any item in the basket was pork and beans, which rose 13.8% to $3.06 for 32 ounces. The Farm Bureau noted higher aluminum costs contributed to the rise.

BANK OF AMERICA CARDHOLDERS CAN VISIT 250 MUSEUMS FREE DURING JULY 4 WEEKEND

Desserts were also more expensive than a year ago. The price of a pack of chocolate chip cookies rose 6.3% to $4.25, while a half-gallon of ice cream rose 5.3% to $5.99 from a year ago.

Two items tracked by the Farm Bureau declined in price, with potato salad dropping 17.8% from a year ago to $2.91 amid the decline in egg prices with the recovery of egg-laying flocks from an avian flu outbreak.

Potato prices have also contributed to a decline in both the cost of potato salad and bags of potato chips, which are down 0.8% from a year ago to $4.76 apiece.

The Farm Bureau’s analysis also noted that the cookout cost varies by region, with Americans in the West facing the highest cost at an even $80 this year, a figure which is $6 above the national average.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The other three regions in the analysis were below the national average of $73.82, with the Northeast the cheapest at $71.35, followed by the Midwest at $71.45 and the South at $72.08.

This post was originally published here

Chinese artificial intelligence systems are rapidly closing the gap with America’s leading AI models in identifying software security flaws, a development that is intensifying the technology race between Washington and Beijing and adding new pressure on the Trump administration’s AI strategy. The shift centers on GLM-5.2, a new model released this month by Chinese developer Zhipu AI, also known as Z.ai. According to researchers, the model now rivals leading U.S. systems in detecting software vulnerabilities, although it still trails top models from Anthropic and OpenAI across many broader AI tasks.

The findings, first reported Sunday by The Wall Street Journal, have drawn attention from technology companies, policymakers and national security officials as competition in artificial intelligence accelerates.

The broader story extends beyond a single model. Industry observers say the performance gap separating American and Chinese AI systems has narrowed significantly during the past year, while businesses around the world increasingly adopt lower-cost Chinese models to reduce artificial intelligence expenses.

According to OpenRouter, a platform providing access to hundreds of AI models, GLM-5.2 has already become one of the 10 most-used AI models worldwide. Benchmark testing conducted by cybersecurity company Semgrep also found that GLM-5.2 outperformed Anthropic’s Claude Opus 4 on certain software vulnerability detection benchmarks.

The rapid improvement is prompting major technology companies—including Microsoft—to evaluate whether Chinese AI models should be offered through their cloud platforms, potentially reshaping competition across the global AI marketplace.

Chinese companies have openly celebrated the progress.

This week, Chinese cybersecurity company 360 Security Technology introduced a new vulnerability-detection system it said performs at a level comparable to Anthropic’s most advanced models for identifying software flaws. Speaking at a cybersecurity conference in Beijing, 360 Security founder and Chief Executive Zhou Hongyi argued that such advanced AI capabilities “can’t remain solely in American hands,” framing artificial intelligence leadership as both a commercial and national strategic priority.

The advances arrive as Washington continues tightening restrictions surrounding advanced AI technologies.

Earlier this month, one of Anthropic’s newest general-purpose AI models became temporarily unavailable to certain foreign users after new U.S. export restrictions took effect. Access to a related model was later restored following regulatory adjustments, but the episode intensified debate over whether limiting American AI systems ultimately strengthens or weakens U.S. technological leadership.

Some policy experts argue the restrictions may unintentionally encourage greater adoption of Chinese alternatives.

Saif Khan, a technology fellow at the Institute for Progress who previously worked on export-control policy during the Biden administration, argued that restricting America’s most advanced AI models while China continues developing competing systems could ultimately benefit Beijing. He has urged policymakers to ensure American companies remain globally competitive while maintaining appropriate national security safeguards.

Administration officials say they remain closely focused on developments involving Chinese AI.

Jacob Helberg, the Under Secretary of State for Economic Affairs, recently said the government is carefully monitoring Chinese open-weight AI models as part of broader efforts to protect American technological leadership. At the same time, the Pentagon has expanded partnerships with U.S. developers, including Reflection AI, to support artificial intelligence applications for national security and classified government work.

An important distinction in the competition involves how the models are distributed.

GLM-5.2 is an open-weight model, allowing organizations to download, customize and operate the software on their own systems. By contrast, companies such as Anthropic and OpenAI generally provide access through cloud-based services while retaining control over their most advanced models. Many businesses prefer open-weight systems because they offer greater flexibility, privacy and control over sensitive data.

For businesses, the implications extend well beyond the technology sector. Cloud providers must decide which AI platforms to support, software developers must determine which models to build applications around, and corporate technology teams face increasing pressure to adopt faster and more cost-effective artificial intelligence solutions while navigating evolving geopolitical and regulatory risks.

As Chinese AI capabilities continue improving, competition between American and Chinese developers is expected to intensify, making artificial intelligence one of the defining business and technology battlegrounds of the decade.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Asian stocks headed into the final day of the quarter on track for their best three-month stretch since 2009, a remarkable run powered by the artificial-intelligence boom even as a late-June technology selloff and a weakening Japanese yen rattled investors. With the quarter ending Tuesday, the regional rally has been led by South Korea and the semiconductor companies at the center of the AI trade, according to exchange data and market strategists.

The quarter’s gains have been extraordinary, but the path has been anything but smooth. Markets pulled back sharply late last week after Apple unveiled steep price increases that shook global technology shares and triggered profit-taking across the region.

On Friday, Japan’s Nikkei 225 fell 4.5% to 69,127. Hong Kong’s Hang Seng Index dropped 1.7% to 22,684.76, the Shanghai Composite slipped 1.4% to 4,062.28, and Australia’s S&P/ASX 200 edged 0.2% higher. South Korea’s Kospi also came under pressure after its powerful run earlier in the quarter.

Stepping back from the day-to-day swings, the quarter belonged to South Korea. The Kospi posted one of its strongest performances in decades as demand surged for the memory chips powering artificial intelligence. Semiconductor leaders SK Hynix and Samsung Electronics fueled much of the rally, while global chip stocks remained on pace for one of their strongest quarters on record. Investor enthusiasm proved resilient despite the conflict involving the United States and Iran and continued concerns surrounding the Strait of Hormuz.

The other major story has been the continued weakness of the Japanese yen, which has fallen to its weakest level in roughly four decades. The U.S. dollar has traded just below 162 yen, near its highest level in approximately 40 years. A weaker yen helps Japanese exporters by making their products more competitive overseas but raises the cost of imported food, fuel, and other goods for households and businesses. Currency traders continue watching for possible intervention by Japanese authorities.

Market movers: Japanese technology and semiconductor companies experienced sharp swings throughout the quarter. Tokyo Electron, Sony Group, and Nintendo benefited from the broader AI rally, while AI-related names including SoftBank Group and memory-linked companies such as Kioxia were among those hit hardest during the recent technology pullback.

Several investment banks also adjusted their outlooks. HSBC upgraded South Korea to “neutral” from “underweight,” saying recent foreign selling had reduced downside risks by unwinding crowded positions. Barclays maintained its preference for equities heading into the third quarter, citing continued confidence in the long-term artificial-intelligence investment cycle.

Japan’s economic data also provided encouragement. Government figures showed retail sales rose 5.3% in May from a year earlier, the fastest annual increase since November 2023, supported by government stimulus measures that boosted consumer spending. The stronger retail activity offered a positive sign for an economy that has struggled with slow growth, even as the weaker yen continues to keep import prices elevated.

Commodities and volatility: Oil remained one of the quarter’s biggest variables. Prices surged when fighting intensified around the Strait of Hormuz, a key shipping route for global crude oil and liquefied natural gas, before retreating toward pre-conflict levels after the United States and Iran agreed to halt further attacks ahead of peace talks scheduled this week in Doha, Qatar. Lower oil prices are particularly welcome for energy-importing economies such as Japan and South Korea. Gold remained supported as a traditional safe-haven asset, while measures of market volatility eased after their late-week spike.

The week ahead will determine whether the quarter’s momentum carries into the second half of the year. Investors are watching the Doha negotiations, any indication of Japanese currency intervention, and a fresh round of U.S. economic data, including Friday’s monthly employment report, for clues about where global interest rates may head next.

For now, Asian markets are closing the books on a historic quarter driven by artificial intelligence, but the sharp swings of recent days are a reminder that much of the rally remains tied to a rapidly evolving technology sector where investor sentiment can change just as quickly as it rises.

JBizNews Asia Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

I’ll use the appropriate regional desk for future articles based on where the story is centered.

Americans have borrowed more money to buy stocks than at any time in history, and figures released during the week of June 24 show how far the trend has run. The Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA), the watchdog that tracks how much investors owe their brokers, reported that margin debt — money people borrow against stocks they already own so they can buy still more — reached a record $1.42 trillion in May, an 8.5% jump in a single month and a 53.7% increase from a year earlier.

Buried in the same report was another record. After subtracting the cash sitting in brokerage accounts, investors are now collectively in the red by $991.7 billion, the largest deficit ever recorded. The gap between what investors own outright and what they owe has never been wider. Measured against the size of the U.S. economy, margin debt now stands at nearly 4% of gross domestic product, compared with a long-run average closer to 1.5%.

Margin investing is simple, and that simplicity is what makes it risky. Borrowing allows investors to buy more stock than they could with their own cash alone, magnifying profits when markets rise. But it also magnifies losses when markets fall. If the value of an account drops below required levels, brokers issue margin calls demanding more cash or securities. If the investor cannot meet the call, the broker can sell shares automatically, often during periods of market stress. Those forced sales can push prices even lower, triggering additional margin calls in a chain reaction that accelerates declines.

The borrowing is not coming only from individual investors. By the start of the year, investors had poured another $250 billion into leveraged exchange-traded funds, investment products designed to deliver two or three times the daily movement of major indexes. Hedge funds have become even more aggressive. Industry data show borrowing by hedge funds has climbed to the highest level since records began in 2013, supporting market positions worth roughly eight times the amount of cash they have invested. Banks have also extended approximately $2.5 trillion in financing to nonbank financial firms that rely heavily on leverage.

On June 15, strategists at Morgan Stanley warned that investors using borrowed money may be approaching their limits. The firm said borrowing costs have risen sharply while primary dealers are carrying a record $223 billion in stock positions financed through borrowing. Morgan Stanley’s measure of market dependence on leverage has climbed nearly 50% over the past year. As borrowing becomes more expensive, highly leveraged investors may have little choice but to reduce positions if markets weaken.

What makes the current environment especially unusual is where much of the borrowed money has gone. During the past three months, only one of the 11 sectors in the S&P 500 — technology — has consistently outperformed the broader market, with semiconductor companies accounting for roughly half of that sector’s weighting. The artificial intelligence chip boom has become the market’s dominant investment theme. The Roundhill Memory ETF reached $10 billion in assets in just 43 days, the fastest growth ever recorded for an exchange-traded fund, with roughly 75% of its assets concentrated in Micron Technology, SK Hynix, and Samsung Electronics. Meanwhile, the iShares Semiconductor ETF has gained roughly 108% this year, compared with about 10% for the S&P 500, while its ten largest holdings account for more than 62% of the fund.

History offers several warnings. Margin debt reached previous peaks in March 2000, shortly before the dot-com bubble burst, and again in July 2007, just months before the global financial crisis accelerated. Heavy borrowing also fueled speculation before the stock market crash of 1929. In each case, leverage amplified both the rally and the subsequent decline.

Today’s market carries similar characteristics, with an added concentration risk. Because so much borrowed money is concentrated in technology and semiconductor stocks, a significant decline in only a handful of companies could trigger forced selling well beyond those firms themselves. The Federal Reserve, in its November 2025 Financial Stability Report, identified elevated leverage as an area warranting close attention.

None of this guarantees a market downturn. Borrowed money can continue supporting rising stock prices for extended periods, and analysts caution that margin debt alone has never been a reliable timing signal for market tops. What record leverage does mean, however, is that the market has less room for error. When record amounts of borrowed money are concentrated in one corner of the market, even a relatively small shock has the potential to spread much farther than investors expect.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Lukas Walton, an heir to the Walmart fortune, and his wife Samantha Walton have purchased a minority ownership stake in the Chicago Bulls and the United Center, the team announced Friday. The investment comes through the purchase of existing shares from limited partners and does not affect control of the franchise, which remains with the Reinsdorf family.

A person familiar with the transaction said the Waltons acquired approximately a 10% stake in both the team and the arena, although neither the purchase price nor the exact ownership percentage was officially disclosed.

The investment links one of America’s wealthiest families with one of the NBA’s most recognizable franchises.

Lukas Walton, 39, is the grandson of Walmart founder Sam Walton and is estimated by Forbes to have a net worth of approximately $45 billion. Walton and his wife reside in Chicago and said in a joint statement that they view the Bulls as one of the city’s iconic institutions.

“We are honored to join the Bulls family and support an organization that has meant so much to Chicago for generations,” the couple said.

Michael Reinsdorf, President and Chief Executive Officer of the Chicago Bulls, welcomed the Waltons, describing them as partners who share the organization’s long-term commitment to the city and its future.

The transaction also highlights the extraordinary appreciation in professional sports franchise values.

Jerry Reinsdorf purchased the Bulls in 1985 for approximately $16 million.

Today, CNBC values the franchise at roughly $6.45 billion, making it the fifth-most valuable team in the NBA.

That dramatic increase reflects decades of growth in television rights, sponsorship revenue, international fan engagement and the limited supply of major professional sports franchises.

The Walton family has become increasingly active in professional sports ownership.

Lukas Walton’s uncle, Rob Walton, led the ownership group that purchased the Denver Broncos in 2022. Members of the family also hold an ownership interest in Major League Baseball’s Arizona Diamondbacks.

The broader sports industry continues attracting investments from billionaires, private-equity firms and institutional investors as franchise values continue climbing.

The investment also extends beyond basketball.

The United Center, home to both the Chicago Bulls and the NHL’s Chicago Blackhawks, is jointly owned by the Reinsdorf and Wirtz families.

The arena sits at the center of the 1901 Project, a $7 billion redevelopment initiative designed to transform the surrounding neighborhood on Chicago’s Near West Side.

Plans include a new music venue, hotel, public gathering spaces, retail development and additional parking facilities.

By acquiring an ownership interest in both the Bulls and the arena, the Waltons gain exposure not only to the NBA franchise but also to one of Chicago’s largest ongoing real estate developments.

The timing also comes during an active offseason for the Bulls.

The organization has restructured portions of its basketball operations, hired new leadership and continues building around young talent following another lottery selection in the NBA Draft.

While the new ownership group is not expected to influence basketball decisions directly, additional long-term investment strengthens the organization’s financial position.

For investors, the deal reinforces one of the strongest trends in sports business.

Professional franchises have increasingly become sought-after long-term assets, benefiting from scarce supply, growing global audiences and expanding media rights agreements.

From an original purchase price of $16 million to an estimated valuation exceeding $6 billion, the Bulls represent one of the most successful long-term investments in professional sports history.

The Walton family’s purchase signals continued confidence that premium sports franchises and the real estate surrounding them will remain among the most valuable assets in American business.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street opened the holiday-shortened week with a broad rally Monday after the U.S. Supreme Court held that Federal Reserve Governor Lisa Cook would remain in her job for now, rejecting the Trump administration’s attempt to remove her, and after Alphabet made its debut in the Dow Jones Industrial Average. The blue-chip index, maintained by S&P Dow Jones Indices, rose 306.63 points, or 0.59%, to a record close of 52,182.74 — its first finish ever above 52,000.

The gains were even stronger among technology stocks. The Nasdaq Composite jumped 2.07% to 25,820.14, while the S&P 500 climbed 1.18% to 7,440.43. Both indexes rebounded after ending last week with sharp losses. The small-cap Russell 2000 was little changed, edging slightly higher.

Two major forces drove Monday’s rally. The first was the Supreme Court ruling, which eased investor concerns about political interference at the Federal Reserve as markets look ahead to this week’s closely watched employment report. The second was a relief rally in large technology companies after last week’s selloff tied to concerns over the growing costs of the artificial-intelligence buildout. A calmer tone in the Middle East also supported sentiment. Reports indicated the United States and Iran were standing down for now, with new talks scheduled for Tuesday in Qatar despite weekend strikes that briefly tested the truce.

Market movers

The day’s biggest story inside the Dow was Alphabet, which climbed nearly 5% during its first session as a member of the index. The company replaced Verizon, whose shares fell more than 5% after leaving the benchmark.

Comcast gained 4.4% after announcing plans to separate its media and technology businesses into two publicly traded companies.

Among the major technology companies, Tesla surged about 8%, Amazon gained 3.2%, and Meta Platforms rose 2.2%.

Semiconductor stocks staged a strong recovery following last week’s sharp decline. The VanEck Semiconductor ETF climbed more than 3%, led by Astera Labs, which jumped about 16%, KLA, up roughly 12%, and Applied Materials, which gained nearly 11%.

The sector also received support after UBS raised its price target on Marvell Technology to $340 from $230, implying roughly 27.5% upside. Analyst Timothy Arcuri cited Marvell’s leadership in Compute Express Link (CXL) technology, which helps connect memory and processors inside AI data centers.

Space companies also rallied sharply. Rocket Lab climbed about 16% after agreeing to acquire satellite operator Iridium in an $8 billion deal. Iridium shares surged roughly 25%, while other space-related companies including Viasat, Satellogic, and Planet Labs posted double-digit gains.

Not every stock participated in the rally. Super Micro Computer fell nearly 6% after reports that authorities in Taiwan searched the company’s headquarters as part of a chip-smuggling investigation.

Meanwhile, Owens Corning jumped about 14% following a Wall Street Journal report that Carlisle Companies made an unsolicited acquisition offer. Carlisle shares declined more than 5%.

Commodities and volatility

Oil prices moved higher as traders continued monitoring developments in the Middle East. Brent crude gained about 1.4%, recovering some of last week’s losses as commercial shipping continued moving through the Strait of Hormuz without major disruption.

Treasury yields remained near recent lows as investors focused on Thursday’s June employment report, which could influence expectations for future interest-rate decisions by the Federal Reserve under Chair Kevin Warsh. Market volatility eased as equities recovered throughout the session.

Although this is a shortened trading week, several major events remain ahead. The June jobs report will be released on Thursday, one day earlier than usual because U.S. markets will be closed Friday for the Fourth of July holiday.

Nike reports quarterly earnings after Tuesday’s close, with its shares down 24% for the quarter. Kevin Warsh is also scheduled to speak at a forum in Europe on Wednesday.

Meanwhile, SpaceX, following its June public listing, is scheduled to join the Nasdaq-100 Index before trading begins on July 7.

For now, the Dow’s historic close above 52,000 and the strong rebound in technology shares gave investors a positive start to the holiday-shortened week. Attention now shifts to Thursday’s jobs report, which could quickly reshape expectations for the economy and interest rates.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Kohl’s, once one of America’s most successful department-store chains, is trying to revive its business by returning to the discount-driven strategy that originally made it popular. Chief Executive Michael Bender, who took over the company in late 2025, says Kohl’s lost touch with its core customer and is now rebuilding around the proprietary brands, coupons and Kohl’s Cash rewards program that helped make the retailer a household name.

“We stopped listening to our best customers for a while,” Bender told analysts, describing the turnaround as an effort to restore the shopping experience longtime customers expected.

The retailer’s decline has been dramatic.

After going public in 1992, Kohl’s became one of the country’s fastest-growing department-store chains, with annual revenue topping $20 billion in fiscal 2019. Its stock reached more than $80 per share in 2018.

Over the following five years, however, the company lost nearly 70% of its market value as sales declined, customer traffic weakened and competition from online retailers and discount chains intensified.

Retail analysts believe many of those problems were self-inflicted.

Chuck Grom, an analyst with Gordon Haskett, said Kohl’s gradually abandoned many of the products and promotions that attracted its loyal customer base. The retailer reduced coupon offerings, eliminated popular categories including petites and fine jewelry, and shifted toward an off-price retail strategy that made it resemble competitors instead of emphasizing what made Kohl’s unique.

According to Bender, those strategic decisions ultimately weakened customer loyalty and contributed to years of sluggish sales.

The company’s recovery plan focuses on returning to the basics.

Kohl’s has restored petites to stores, repositioned its juniors apparel department closer to Sephora beauty locations, and introduced “deal bars” near store entrances featuring seasonal merchandise and everyday essentials priced below $10.

Bender has described the strategy as identifying exactly who Kohl’s serves rather than attempting to compete with every retailer across every customer segment.

Early results have shown encouraging signs.

During its most recent quarter, Kohl’s generated approximately $3 billion in revenue while posting its strongest comparable-store sales growth in four years.

Following the earnings report, the company’s stock rose roughly 20%, and shares have climbed more than 130% over the past year.

Despite that improvement, management continues projecting full-year sales ranging from flat to down about 2%, underscoring that the turnaround remains in its early stages.

Wall Street remains cautiously optimistic.

Analysts at TD Cowen said Kohl’s appears to be making sound strategic decisions but maintained a neutral rating, citing continued weakness in apparel and footwear sales while describing the retailer as a “show-me story” that still needs to demonstrate sustained improvement.

One area that continues to face challenges is the chain’s Sephora partnership.

Although Sephora beauty shops remain central to Kohl’s long-term strategy of attracting younger shoppers, sales in those departments declined during the latest quarter.

Even Bender has emphasized patience, telling investors the company has “not arrived yet” and remains in the early stages of rebuilding the business.

The outcome extends beyond Kohl’s itself.

The retailer operates squarely within the middle of the American retail market, a segment that has steadily lost ground as consumers increasingly gravitate either toward luxury retailers or low-cost discount chains.

Today, Kohl’s competes with companies including Walmart, Target, Amazon, T.J. Maxx and numerous off-price retailers, while traditional department-store rivals such as Macy’s increasingly target more upscale customers.

Whether Kohl’s can successfully rebuild a profitable national retailer serving value-conscious middle-income shoppers has become one of the more closely watched turnaround stories in the retail industry.

For now, the company has paused widespread store closures that have affected much of the department-store sector.

Kohl’s continues operating approximately 1,150 stores nationwide while experimenting with smaller-format urban locations.

Management says the overwhelming majority of existing stores remain profitable.

The company’s long-term success will ultimately depend on whether former customers decide to return.

After years of declining sales and shrinking market share, Kohl’s believes its renewed focus on value, familiar brands and aggressive promotions can restore the retailer’s position in American shopping.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Chinese self-driving technology company Momenta plans to raise as much as HK$5.89 billion, or roughly $751 million, through an initial public offering in Hong Kong, according to a filing the company submitted to the Hong Kong Stock Exchange on Monday. The company said it will sell 19.9 million shares at HK$295.60 each, with the money going toward research, advancing its self-driving systems, and speeding up the rollout of its robotaxi service.

Momenta Global, founded in 2016 and run by chief executive Cao Xudong, a former Microsoft engineer, expects to announce how the shares are divided among investors by July 7, with trading set to begin the following day. The deal is being led by China International Capital Corp. and Deutsche Bank.

The company builds the software and systems that let cars drive themselves, ranging from the assisted-driving features now common in new vehicles to fully driverless robotaxis. It supplies that technology both to mass-produced cars sold by major automakers and to robotaxi fleets, a business model that has made it one of the most closely watched names in China’s race to put autonomous vehicles on public roads.

What sets Momenta apart is the list of companies that already own a piece of it. Carmaker SAIC Motor holds about 9.45%, General Motors roughly 9.4%, Mercedes-Benz 6.39%, and Toyota 1.54%, with additional stakes held by BYD, Chery and Hyundai. Investment firms Temasek and Tencent are also backers. General Motors first put money into the company in 2021, announcing a $300 million investment to help develop self-driving technology for its vehicles in China.

That automaker backing is central to the pitch Momenta is making to public investors. The company is presenting itself as a supplier whose global carmaker relationships could help it win business abroad at a time when geopolitical tension is weighing on its main domestic rival, Huawei Technologies.

The offering is drawing well-known names as anchor buyers. Cornerstone investors for the IPO may include existing backer Mercedes-Benz, along with BlackRock and Chinese investment firm Boyu Capital.

The financial picture shows a company growing quickly but still losing large sums. Revenue rose from 743 million yuan in 2023 to 1.33 billion yuan in 2024 and 2.41 billion yuan in 2025. At the same time, the company reported a loss of 3.46 billion yuan, about $509 million, in 2025, wider than the 3.21 billion yuan loss the year before. In other words, sales are climbing fast, but the cost of developing driverless technology is climbing even faster.

The company argues it has already captured a commanding share of one part of the market. It claims about 64.5% of the global market for urban Level 2 assisted driving, the kind of system that helps steer and brake in city traffic while a human remains responsible. The harder and far more expensive goal is full autonomy, where no driver is needed at all.

Momenta is not going public in a vacuum. It follows rival self-driving firms Pony AI and WeRide, which have already tapped Hong Kong’s markets to fund their own development. The city has become the destination of choice for these listings after the broader market there roared back to life. Hong Kong share sales raised $21.6 billion in the first half of 2026, a 51% jump from a year earlier, according to LSEG data. Momenta had previously considered listing in the United States, where it confidentially filed for an IPO in 2024 before shifting its plans.

The company is also pushing beyond China. It has been building out a research hub in Germany, where it plans to begin piloting fully driverless Level 4 vehicles in 2026 in partnership with Uber.

For the automakers on its shareholder list, the listing is a chance to put a value on a bet many of them made years ago, and a sign that the self-driving software business is maturing from a research project into a public company investors can buy. For General Motors, which has scaled back its own driverless ambitions in the United States, the stake offers a foothold in China’s autonomous market through a partner rather than a wholly owned operation. Whether Momenta can turn its fast-growing sales into sustained profits remains the key question new investors will be watching.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

When Micron Technology reported its fiscal third-quarter results on Wednesday after the closing bell, Chief Executive Sanjay Mehrotra delivered a message that has become familiar this year: there are not enough memory chips to go around, and there will not be for a long time. The only American-based maker of memory said demand for the chips that feed artificial-intelligence data centers is running so far ahead of supply that the squeeze will now stretch well beyond 2027, later than the company itself had predicted just months earlier.

The numbers behind that claim were staggering. Micron posted revenue of $41.46 billion for the quarter, far above the roughly $35.6 billion Wall Street had penciled in, and adjusted earnings came in at $25.11 a share, beating estimates by more than 22 percent. Gross margin reached 84.9 percent, a company record, and management guided to a record $50 billion in revenue for the current quarter. Shares of Micron jumped roughly 15 percent after the report.

For now, the story is one of extraordinary pricing power. Micron, along with South Korea’s Samsung and SK Hynix, controls more than 90 percent of the world’s DRAM memory, and all three are pouring their best factory capacity into high-bandwidth memory, or HBM, the specialized chips stacked next to AI processors. Micron’s HBM is sold out through 2027, with demand extending into 2028. The company has signed long-term agreements with major customers worth tens of billions of dollars in committed deposits.

But underneath the record results sits a longer-term question that Micron’s own customers are starting to answer: what happens when buyers decide they would rather not depend on three suppliers who can charge whatever the shortage allows?

That is where the real threat to the memory boom lies. Across the industry, the companies that buy the most memory are quietly engineering ways to need less of it. Advanced Micro Devices recently acquired a startup called MEXT, whose technology lets cheaper NAND flash memory behave more like the scarce, expensive DRAM that Micron sells. Nvidia, the largest buyer of HBM in the world, paid about $20 billion for chip designer Groq, whose approach is built around keeping data on the processor itself and leaning less on outside memory. Smaller firms such as Hailo have designed AI chips that remove the need for DRAM altogether, cutting as much as $100 from the cost of each device.

Software is moving in the same direction. AI researchers are finding ways to compress the data their models hold in memory, shrinking the footprint of large language models without hurting performance. Published work this year has shown memory savings of roughly 25 percent on model weights and nearly 47 percent on the cache that chatbots use to track a conversation. New system designs that pool memory across machines, and emerging memory types still in the lab, all point toward the same goal of squeezing more work out of fewer chips.

None of this threatens Micron‘s next few quarters. The shortage is real, the factories take years to build, and the demand from companies like Microsoft, Amazon, Alphabet and Meta, which have all raised their capital spending plans, shows no sign of slowing. New supply from Micron’s plant in Idaho will not arrive in volume until 2028, and its massive new factory in Clay, New York, is further out still.

The danger is what these workarounds mean once that new capacity finally comes online. Memory has always been a boom-and-bust business. Prices soar when chips are scarce, factories race to expand, and prices crash when the new supply lands all at once. Mehrotra has spent this year arguing that the current shortage is different, a structural shift driven by AI rather than the usual cycle. He may be right for a while. But every dollar that customers like Nvidia and AMD spend learning to live with less memory is a dollar aimed at breaking exactly the pricing power that is making Micron so profitable today.

For ordinary buyers, the effects are already visible. The same factory capacity being funneled into AI memory used to make the chips inside phones, laptops and game consoles, and those products have grown more expensive as a result. Industry estimates put the rise in DRAM cost for a typical smartphone at 15 to 20 percent since the middle of last year.

Micron‘s quarter was, by almost any measure, the best in its history. The harder question for investors is whether the boom contains the seeds of its own slowdown, written not by a competitor’s new factory but by customers who would rather not be at the mercy of one.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Supreme Court is preparing to issue two of the most closely watched decisions of President Donald Trump’s second term, one involving his effort to remove a Federal Reserve governor and the other challenging automatic birthright citizenship. The justices are scheduled to release the final opinions of the term beginning Monday, June 29, at 10 a.m. in Washington, with seven cases still pending. As is customary, the Court has reserved several of its most significant and potentially far-reaching rulings for the final days of the term.

For the business community, the most consequential case involves Trump’s attempt to remove Federal Reserve Governor Lisa Cook. The president has sought Cook’s dismissal over allegations of mortgage fraud, which she denies. While the Court is technically deciding only whether Trump may temporarily remove her while litigation continues, the broader implications extend well beyond one appointment.

The Federal Reserve determines interest rates that directly influence mortgages, auto loans, business financing and credit card borrowing. For decades, financial markets have operated under the assumption that Federal Reserve governors cannot be removed simply because a president disagrees with monetary policy decisions. During oral arguments earlier this year, several justices appeared skeptical of Trump’s authority to remove Cook, and the Court previously declined to immediately allow her dismissal while the case proceeds.

A related dispute involving the Federal Trade Commission could prove equally significant.

That case centers on Rebecca Slaughter, a Democratic FTC commissioner whom Trump removed from office. The administration argues that the Constitution gives the president authority to dismiss senior executive branch officials regardless of statutory job protections enacted by Congress.

A ruling in Trump’s favor would require the Court to overturn a precedent that has stood for approximately 91 years, reshaping the legal foundation supporting many independent federal agencies.

Although the justices have indicated any decision may treat the Federal Reserve differently because of its unique constitutional role, a victory for the administration could significantly expand presidential authority over numerous independent agencies responsible for regulating financial markets, communications, antitrust enforcement, consumer protection and other sectors of the economy.

For investors and corporate leaders, the distinction matters. Preserving Federal Reserve independence while expanding presidential authority over other regulators would leave monetary policy insulated while giving the White House substantially greater influence over agencies that write and enforce many of the rules governing American business.

Financial markets have followed the Cook case closely because any weakening of the Federal Reserve’s independence could alter investor confidence in U.S. monetary policy, particularly as Kevin Warsh begins serving as the central bank’s chairman.

The Court is also expected to rule on Trump’s executive order seeking to limit automatic birthright citizenship.

Signed on the president’s first day back in office, the order would restrict automatic citizenship to children with at least one parent who is either a U.S. citizen or lawful permanent resident. Legal analysts estimate the policy could affect roughly 250,000 children born each year to undocumented immigrants or temporary visa holders.

Every lower court that has reviewed the order has ruled against the administration, citing the 14th Amendment and longstanding interpretations of federal immigration law that recognize citizenship for nearly everyone born on American soil.

During oral arguments in April, several justices appeared skeptical of the administration’s position. Chief Justice John Roberts, responding to arguments that modern circumstances justified a different constitutional interpretation, remarked that “it’s the same Constitution.”

The rulings arrive after a mixed term for the administration before the Court.

The justices previously struck down several of Trump’s tariff actions while also handing the administration important victories on immigration, including allowing the government to end temporary protected status for certain groups of foreign nationals. Throughout the term, the Court’s 6-3 conservative majority has generally favored broader executive authority while occasionally rejecting some of the administration’s most expansive legal arguments.

The decisions expected this week will help define the balance of power between the presidency, Congress and independent federal agencies for years to come. They could influence everything from interest-rate policy and financial regulation to immigration law and the scope of presidential authority over the executive branch.

For businesses, investors and financial markets, the rulings may prove among the most significant legal decisions of the year.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The New Zealand dollar, commonly known as the kiwi, has fallen to its weakest level in months as investors respond to a strengthening U.S. dollar and growing concerns that New Zealand’s economic recovery could lose momentum amid the global fallout from the conflict involving Iran. In recent trading, the currency dropped to approximately 57 U.S. cents, its lowest level since November, extending a series of weekly declines and creating new challenges for the country’s export-driven economy.

Currency markets often reflect investor confidence in a country’s economic outlook relative to other nations, and recent movements suggest global investors are becoming more cautious about New Zealand’s near-term prospects.

Much of the pressure originates in the United States.

Under Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh, the Federal Reserve has signaled it remains focused on containing inflation and is not rushing to lower interest rates. Higher U.S. interest rates have strengthened the U.S. dollar against many global currencies by attracting investors seeking higher returns from dollar-denominated assets.

As the U.S. dollar strengthens, smaller currencies such as the New Zealand dollar often weaken.

Domestically, New Zealand’s economic picture remains mixed.

The economy expanded 0.8% during the March quarter, representing an improvement from previous quarters, although growth came in below the Reserve Bank of New Zealand’s own forecasts. On an annual basis, economic output increased 1.5%, exceeding many economists’ expectations.

However, those figures largely reflected economic conditions before tensions in the Middle East intensified.

Economists now expect growth during the second quarter to slow significantly, with some forecasting little or no expansion as higher energy prices and weaker business confidence begin affecting economic activity.

Business surveys have also become more cautious, with manufacturers and service providers increasingly citing global uncertainty and higher energy costs as headwinds.

For New Zealand, the conflict primarily affects the economy through rising energy prices.

Higher oil costs increase transportation expenses, manufacturing costs and food prices while placing renewed upward pressure on inflation.

Annual inflation has remained near 3%, close to the upper end of the Reserve Bank of New Zealand’s target range.

That has complicated monetary policy.

The central bank previously reduced its Official Cash Rate aggressively—from earlier highs down to 2.25%—to support economic growth following a prolonged slowdown.

Now, as inflation shows signs of accelerating again, attention has shifted from whether additional rate cuts are likely to whether future interest-rate increases may eventually become necessary.

Those changing expectations continue driving currency markets.

Only weeks ago, investors expected the Reserve Bank to begin raising interest rates as early as July. As oil prices moderated and concerns about economic growth increased, those expectations eased, with markets now pricing in fewer potential rate increases than previously anticipated.

Because higher interest rates generally support a nation’s currency by attracting global investment, each adjustment in those expectations has contributed to recent weakness in the kiwi.

Economists remain divided over where the currency heads next.

Analysts at Commerzbank believe higher energy costs, persistent inflation and slowing economic growth could continue weighing on New Zealand over the coming years.

Volkmar Baur, the bank’s currency strategist, expects the Reserve Bank to implement fewer interest-rate increases than financial markets currently anticipate and believes the kiwi could remain under pressure as economic growth stays relatively weak.

By contrast, economists at ANZ maintain a more optimistic longer-term outlook, expecting the New Zealand dollar to recover gradually if the U.S. economy slows and the U.S. dollar eventually weakens.

For New Zealand households and businesses, the weaker currency produces both benefits and challenges.

A lower exchange rate makes the country’s exports—including dairy products, meat and wine—more competitive in international markets, supporting farmers and exporters.

At the same time, imported products become more expensive, increasing the cost of fuel, consumer electronics and many everyday goods while adding further inflationary pressure for consumers.

The kiwi’s recent decline illustrates how global events—from monetary policy decisions in Washington to geopolitical tensions in the Middle East—can quickly influence smaller, trade-dependent economies around the world.

With uncertainty surrounding both global energy markets and future central bank decisions, currency markets are likely to remain volatile in the months ahead.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A growing number of American renters say owning a home is no longer part of their vision of the American Dream, with many increasingly viewing renting as a lifestyle choice rather than a temporary step toward homeownership. The shift is highlighted in Zumper’s annual renter survey, which polled more than 6,000 renters nationwide. In 2021, about 27% of renters said homeownership was not part of their American Dream. In the latest survey, that figure has climbed to 34%, while approximately 60% said today’s version of the American Dream is about having the flexibility to live without owning a home.

Much of that shift reflects economic reality. Nearly three in five renters are considered cost-burdened, meaning they spend more than 30% of their income on housing. According to the survey, the average renter now spends roughly 40% of monthly income on rent alone.

With such a large share of income going toward housing, saving for a home has become increasingly difficult. Nearly three-quarters of renters reported saving 15% or less of their income each month. About one-quarter carry student loan debt, while nearly half have outstanding credit card balances. Those financial obligations often make building a down payment nearly impossible.

Economic uncertainty is also reshaping attitudes. Nearly 80% of renters said they feel uncertain or pessimistic about the economy, while roughly two-thirds believe the United States is already in a recession. About 20% reported moving specifically to lower their overall cost of living.

Against that backdrop, approximately three out of four renters said they do not believe 2025 is a good time to purchase a home. When buying appears financially out of reach, the flexibility offered by renting becomes less of a compromise and more of a deliberate financial decision.

That changing mindset is reflected in other housing research as well. Multiple industry studies have found that many financially secure renters—including individuals who would qualify for a mortgage—still prefer renting because it avoids maintenance costs, property taxes, homeowners insurance and expensive repairs. Others value the flexibility to relocate more easily or prefer investing their money elsewhere rather than tying a large portion of their savings into a home.

Many renters also say apartment communities offer amenities and social opportunities that improve their quality of life while allowing them greater freedom to travel, pursue career opportunities or reduce debt.

One of the survey’s more surprising findings involves older Americans. The likelihood of viewing homeownership as essential actually declines with age, and Baby Boomers were the generation least likely to describe owning a home as part of their American Dream. Adults 65 and older have become one of the fastest-growing renter demographics in several metropolitan areas, challenging the long-standing assumption that renting is simply a temporary stage before purchasing a home.

The trend carries significant implications for the housing industry. If more Americans intentionally choose to rent for decades—or even for life—developers may increasingly focus on building higher-quality rental communities designed for long-term residents rather than short-term tenants. The shift also influences ongoing policy debates in Washington surrounding build-to-rent neighborhoods, where single-family homes are constructed specifically as rental properties rather than homes for sale.

Supporters argue those developments provide additional housing options for families unable or unwilling to purchase a home, while critics contend they reduce opportunities for first-time buyers seeking homeownership.

None of the survey findings suggest that the dream of owning a home has disappeared. Other national surveys continue to show that most Americans still consider homeownership an important life goal. Many renters say they would purchase a home if affordability improved.

However, rapidly rising home prices and elevated mortgage costs continue placing ownership beyond the reach of many households. In numerous housing markets, a traditional 20% down payment now approaches an entire year’s median household income.

The Zumper survey illustrates a broader shift in how many Americans define financial success. For a growing number of renters, stability, flexibility and financial freedom are becoming just as important as owning a home, reshaping what the American Dream looks like for a new generation.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Venezuela’s opposition leader María Corina Machado is reportedly preparing to return to the country as soon as possible, a move that could reshape the nation’s political landscape while authorities continue responding to one of the worst natural disasters in modern Venezuelan history. According to a report citing people familiar with her plans, Machado—who has been living in exile and announced in May that she intends to seek the presidency again—believes the current moment presents a political opportunity. Her plans have not been officially confirmed, and no timetable has been announced.

The reported political developments come as Venezuela confronts the enormous economic consequences of devastating earthquakes that struck the country on June 24.

According to the U.S. Geological Survey, two powerful earthquakes measuring 7.2 and 7.5 magnitude struck north-central Venezuela near Caracas, becoming the strongest earthquakes to affect the country in more than a century.

The twin quakes caused widespread destruction across the capital region and the coastal state of La Guaira, damaging roads, homes, businesses and public infrastructure.

Government officials reported at least 1,430 deaths and more than 3,000 injuries, while tens of thousands of people remain missing or displaced. Independent organizations continue reviewing the casualty figures as rescue operations proceed.

The economic impact is expected to be severe.

The United Nations estimates that damage totals between $4.7 billion and $8.7 billion, representing roughly 4% to 8% of Venezuela’s annual economic output. The estimate includes losses to housing, commercial property and public infrastructure, although officials caution that total costs could ultimately prove significantly higher.

Researchers at Oregon State University, using satellite imagery to assess the disaster, estimate that nearly 59,000 buildings were damaged or destroyed.

For Venezuela, the destruction arrives after years of economic hardship.

The country continues struggling with the effects of prolonged recession, international sanctions and the long-term decline of its oil-dependent economy. Rebuilding damaged infrastructure will require substantial financial resources and technical expertise at a time when government finances remain under significant strain.

International assistance has begun arriving.

According to Venezuelan officials, more than two dozen countries have sent emergency aid, including humanitarian supplies, search-and-rescue teams and specialized equipment.

The government has deployed more than 14,000 military personnel to assist recovery operations in La Guaira and surrounding areas.

The United States announced $150 million in humanitarian assistance, including $100 million directed through a United Nations relief fund and an additional $50 million supporting humanitarian organizations operating inside Venezuela.

U.S. Southern Command has also deployed military assets, including Marines and a Navy vessel, to assist with delivering supplies and evaluating damage at the port of La Guaira.

Machado, speaking through a video message, expressed solidarity with earthquake victims and praised Venezuelans living abroad for organizing humanitarian assistance and financial support for affected communities.

The country’s global diaspora is expected to play an increasingly important role in recovery efforts.

Millions of Venezuelans now living in the United States, Colombia, Spain and elsewhere already send billions of dollars in remittances home each year. Those financial transfers are expected to increase as families work to rebuild homes and support relatives affected by the disaster.

The possibility of Machado’s return introduces additional uncertainty.

According to the report, some U.S. officials have privately expressed concern that renewed political confrontation could complicate ongoing humanitarian operations, while others believe political change could eventually improve Venezuela’s long-term economic outlook.

The country’s vast oil reserves mean political developments continue attracting close attention from global energy markets and international investors, particularly regarding the future of sanctions, foreign investment and reconstruction financing.

For now, however, recovery remains the immediate priority.

The United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF) has warned that millions of children living in affected regions face disrupted education, healthcare, clean water access and housing.

Reconstruction is expected to require years of sustained investment and international cooperation.

Whether or not Machado returns in the near future, Venezuela now faces the immense challenge of rebuilding communities while managing one of the largest humanitarian and economic crises in its modern history.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A proposal to rebuild much of Washington Dulles International Airport at an estimated cost of $22 billion is emerging as one of the largest airport infrastructure projects ever proposed in the United States—and a test of whether the country can still deliver massive public construction projects on time. The effort traces back to President Donald Trump, who said in December that Dulles should become a world-class airport. In May, Transportation Secretary Sean Duffy publicly outlined a roughly $22 billion modernization vision, and the Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority (MWAA) has since presented detailed concepts to airlines as discussions continue.

When Dulles opened in 1962, it represented one of America’s most ambitious airport designs. Created by renowned Finnish-American architect Eero Saarinen, the airport’s sweeping curved terminal became an architectural landmark. Yet the airport was also built around features that have become increasingly outdated, most notably the large mobile lounges that transport passengers between the main terminal and distant gates. While the airport expanded over the decades, its original layout has become increasingly inefficient as passenger traffic continued to grow.

The proposed redevelopment would preserve Saarinen’s iconic terminal while transforming nearly everything around it. Current plans call for extending the historic terminal by approximately 300 feet in both directions, constructing four new linear concourses, and expanding the underground AeroTrain system so it reaches every concourse. The modernization would finally eliminate the airport’s aging fleet of mobile lounges and replace temporary concourses originally constructed during the 1980s.

The project’s cost reflects its enormous scope. Preliminary estimates allocate roughly $6.2 billion for expanding and modernizing the main terminal, approximately $3.75 billion for extending the AeroTrain and underground infrastructure, with billions more dedicated to new concourses, passenger facilities and supporting infrastructure. Construction could begin around 2027 and continue through 2034, dramatically accelerating an earlier airport master plan that envisioned similar improvements taking two decades or more.

Supporters argue the investment goes beyond simply improving one airport. Many of the world’s leading aviation hubs—including Singapore Changi, Dubai International Airport and Hamad International Airport in Doha—have invested heavily in modern terminals, advanced passenger facilities and efficient transportation systems. By comparison, many major U.S. airports continue operating with aging infrastructure that has been expanded incrementally over decades rather than comprehensively redesigned.

Advocates believe a modernized Dulles would strengthen America’s international competitiveness, improve tourism, create faster connections through the nation’s capital and support continued growth in both passenger and cargo traffic. Even so, the estimated $22 billion price tag already includes projected inflation and financing costs while still carrying the risk of additional overruns common to projects of this size.

The biggest unanswered question remains funding.

Although the Department of Transportation owns the land occupied by Dulles, the airport itself is operated by the Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority under a lease extending through the year 2100. The authority previously approved a more modest $7 billion master plan in July 2025, while the federal government’s newer proposal envisions a much larger and faster redevelopment.

Financing such a project would likely require a combination of federal funding, municipal bonds, airline fees and potentially private investment. Some proposals have even suggested monetizing concession revenue through long-term private agreements to generate additional capital. At present, however, no comprehensive financing package has received final approval.

Airlines will also play a critical role. United Airlines, which accounts for nearly 70% of passenger traffic at Dulles, operates one of its largest hubs at the airport. Industry analysts note that moving forward without United’s support would be extremely difficult unless Congress were to provide substantially more federal funding.

Airport officials have remained cautious publicly. A spokesperson for the Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority referred questions back to the federal government, while the Department of Transportation has not publicly detailed how the project would ultimately be financed.

The stakes for the Washington region are significant. Dulles handled a record 29 million passengers during 2025, an increase of more than 6% from the previous year. A new 435,000-square-foot, 14-gate concourse serving United Airlines passengers is already scheduled to open later this year.

If completed, the larger redevelopment would generate thousands of construction jobs, reshape one of America’s most important international gateways and dramatically improve the travel experience for millions of passengers. If it fails to move forward, supporters argue it will become another example of the growing difficulty of delivering major infrastructure projects in the United States.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wayve, a London-based artificial intelligence startup, is pursuing a very different strategy in the race to autonomous driving than industry leaders Tesla and Waymo. Rather than building its own fleet of self-driving vehicles, the company wants to license its AI driving software to automakers around the world, allowing manufacturers to integrate autonomous technology directly into their own vehicles.

Chief Executive Alex Kendall believes the long-term opportunity lies not in operating robotaxi fleets but in becoming the software provider powering millions of consumer vehicles across multiple brands.

The company’s approach differs significantly from many competitors.

Instead of relying on detailed, pre-mapped roads and extensive rule-based programming, Wayve uses a single neural-network AI system that learns to drive by processing enormous amounts of real-world and simulated driving data.

The software primarily depends on cameras and radar rather than expensive lidar laser sensors used by many competing autonomous vehicle systems.

To demonstrate the flexibility of its technology, Wayve completed a 1.45 million-kilometer driving program across approximately 500 cities during 2025, including many locations the system had never previously encountered. According to the company, its vehicles relied only on the types of digital maps available to ordinary drivers rather than highly detailed custom maps.

That philosophy stands in contrast to the industry’s largest competitors.

Waymo, which originated within Google before becoming an independent company under Alphabet, develops and operates its own fleet of highly specialized robotaxis equipped with multiple lidar sensors, radar and cameras. Before launching in any city, Waymo creates highly detailed maps that allow its vehicles to navigate with exceptional precision.

The company currently operates roughly 2,500 to 3,000 autonomous vehicles across about 10 U.S. cities, providing hundreds of thousands of passenger trips each week. Earlier this year, Waymo’s valuation was estimated at approximately $126 billion.

Tesla has taken yet another approach.

Rather than licensing its software, Tesla sells both its vehicles and its Full Self-Driving (FSD) system together as an integrated package. With more than 6 million vehicles on roads worldwide, Tesla continuously gathers driving data from customers to improve its autonomous driving software.

Unlike Wayve, Tesla does not offer its technology to competing automakers.

That leaves an opportunity Wayve hopes to fill.

Kendall argues that the global automobile market—worth roughly $2 trillion annually—offers a much larger opportunity than the robotaxi market alone. He has predicted that by the 2030s, consumers will expect advanced autonomous driving features in new vehicles much the way they now expect navigation systems, backup cameras and adaptive cruise control.

If that prediction proves accurate, automakers may increasingly seek third-party suppliers capable of providing advanced driving software without developing it internally.

Despite growing interest, Wayve remains far smaller than its largest rivals.

The company was valued at approximately $8.6 billion earlier this year and has yet to demonstrate its technology through large-scale commercial deployment.

Wayve plans to begin operating pilot ride services in London and Tokyo in partnership with Uber, one of its investors. Those vehicles will initially include safety drivers behind the wheel while collecting additional driving data to continue training the company’s AI models.

Researchers continue debating whether camera-based systems alone can achieve the same level of reliability as platforms incorporating lidar and additional redundant sensors. Even Wayve acknowledges that future fully driverless deployments may require additional sensing technologies depending on regulatory requirements and operating environments.

Competition is also intensifying globally.

Chinese companies including Pony.ai, WeRide and Baidu continue expanding autonomous driving programs, while Nvidia has emerged as another major player by supplying AI hardware and autonomous driving platforms to manufacturers including Mercedes-Benz.

Those companies share a vision similar to Wayve’s: providing technology that automakers can integrate into their own vehicles rather than operating transportation services themselves.

For the automotive industry, the implications could be significant.

If companies like Wayve successfully develop affordable autonomous driving software that works across multiple vehicle brands and markets, self-driving technology could become available far more quickly in mainstream consumer vehicles.

Whether the industry’s future belongs to flexible AI systems that learn from experience or to heavily mapped, sensor-rich platforms remains one of the most important questions in autonomous transportation—and one that could reshape the global auto industry over the next decade.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Google has reportedly placed limits on how much Meta can use its Gemini artificial intelligence models after the social media giant requested more computing capacity than Google could provide, according to a report published Sunday by the Financial Times. Citing three unnamed sources, the newspaper reported that Google informed Meta around March that it could not supply the full amount of Gemini computing power the company wanted to purchase.

Neither Google nor Meta confirmed the report, and both companies declined to comment. As a result, the account remains based on unnamed sources and has not been independently confirmed by either company.

One of the most notable aspects of the report is the relationship between the two companies. Meta, which owns Facebook, Instagram and WhatsApp, is one of Google’s biggest competitors in artificial intelligence and has invested heavily in developing its own family of AI models. Yet the report says Meta has also been purchasing access to Google’s Gemini models, and its demand grew so large that it was reportedly affected more than any other Google customer when computing resources became constrained.

According to the report, the shortage delayed several of Meta’s internal AI projects and prompted company management to encourage employees to use fewer AI “tokens,” the units that measure how much computing work an artificial intelligence model performs each time it processes a request.

The report highlights one of the biggest challenges facing the AI industry today: computing power.

Large language models such as Gemini require enormous numbers of advanced computer chips operating inside massive data centers. Companies like Google make these models available to outside businesses through cloud services, charging customers based on usage. Every prompt, response and calculation consumes processing capacity.

When demand exceeds available computing resources, providers must either expand infrastructure or limit customer access until additional capacity comes online.

The reported restrictions underscore that even the world’s largest technology companies continue struggling to secure enough AI infrastructure. According to the Financial Times, several additional Google customers also experienced reduced access, although none as significantly as Meta.

The situation reflects a broader industry-wide shortage. Technology companies are collectively investing tens of billions of dollars in new data centers, advanced processors and AI infrastructure, yet demand continues to outpace supply.

For Meta, the reported limits illustrate the risks of relying on a direct competitor for critical technology. Although the company continues investing aggressively in its own AI systems and expanding its own computing infrastructure, the report suggests Meta still depended heavily enough on Google’s models that any reduction in access could slow product development.

For Google, the situation presents both an opportunity and a challenge. Selling access to Gemini has become an increasingly important business for parent company Alphabet, and attracting customers as large as Meta demonstrates strong market demand for its AI models.

At the same time, limiting a major customer’s usage illustrates that Google itself remains constrained by the pace at which it can build additional data centers and deploy new computing hardware. The company may also be prioritizing scarce computing resources for its own products and services before allocating additional capacity to outside customers.

Because the report relies entirely on unnamed sources, many details—including the precise timing and scale of the restrictions—should be viewed with caution. Reuters, which also reported on the story, said it could not independently verify the Financial Times account.

Regardless of whether the specific claims are ultimately confirmed, the broader issue is widely recognized across the technology industry. Access to high-performance AI computing has become one of the most valuable and limited resources in modern technology.

For businesses building products around artificial intelligence, securing reliable computing capacity may increasingly become just as important as choosing which AI model to use.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Panama Canal is on pace to generate more revenue than originally forecast this fiscal year after the conflict surrounding the Strait of Hormuz redirected global shipping and increased demand for one of the world’s most important trade routes. Ilya Espino de Marotta, the incoming administrator of the Panama Canal Authority, said in an interview Thursday that revenue for the fiscal year ending September 30 is expected to exceed the canal’s projected $5.2 billion, driven by stronger traffic volumes and record payments from ships seeking priority passage.

The unexpected boost demonstrates how disruptions at one global shipping chokepoint can quickly reshape trade flows—and profits—at another.

The surge began after military conflict disrupted traffic through the Strait of Hormuz, the narrow waterway that normally carries roughly 20% of the world’s seaborne oil and large volumes of liquefied natural gas.

As energy supplies from the Middle East became more uncertain, buyers in Japan, China and South Korea increasingly turned to the United States for liquefied natural gas shipments. Many of those cargoes traveled through the Panama Canal, creating a sharp increase in vessel traffic.

During the busiest period following the disruption, the canal handled approximately 40 to 41 ships per day, significantly above its projected average of about 34 daily transits for the fiscal year.

One of the largest revenue gains came from the canal’s auction system.

While most vessels reserve transit slots in advance at standard rates, ships arriving without reservations can compete for a limited number of priority crossings by participating in daily auctions. As congestion increased, bidding escalated dramatically.

According to the canal authority, the average winning bid climbed from roughly $135,000 before the conflict to approximately $385,000 during the spring. In April, one vessel reportedly paid an additional $4 million simply to move to the front of the line, although officials noted that most successful bids remained below $1 million.

An important development is that elevated traffic has continued even after shipping through Hormuz began recovering.

The canal continues averaging roughly one liquefied natural gas tanker per day, a level not seen in recent years. Following Russia’s invasion of Ukraine, Europe absorbed much of America’s LNG exports, leaving fewer shipments destined for Asia. The Middle East conflict temporarily reversed that pattern, reopening a significant Atlantic-to-Pacific energy trade route.

Officials say some of those new shipping patterns may remain in place longer than originally expected.

The canal does have physical limitations.

The world’s largest crude oil tankers—known as ultra-large crude carriers (ULCCs)—are too large to pass through the canal’s locks. As a result, the canal cannot fully replace the role of the Strait of Hormuz in global oil transportation.

Instead, much of the additional revenue has come from increased liquefied natural gas shipments, higher volumes of container traffic and premium auction fees paid by shipping companies attempting to avoid costly delays.

The strong financial performance comes as the canal prepares for new leadership.

Espino de Marotta, a Panamanian engineer and Texas A&M University graduate, will become administrator of the Panama Canal Authority in September, serving through 2033. She has worked at the canal for 41 years, helped oversee the historic canal expansion completed in 2016, and has served as deputy administrator since 2019.

She will inherit several major long-term infrastructure projects, including a new dam and reservoir, additional port facilities and a liquefied petroleum gas pipeline. Together, those investments are expected to total approximately $8.5 billion.

For the global economy, the canal’s stronger-than-expected revenue highlights how quickly geopolitical events can reshape international trade.

Approximately 5% of global maritime commerce passes through the Panama Canal, with the United States and China remaining among its largest users. The waterway serves as one of the most important transportation links connecting the U.S. East Coast with Asian markets.

When conflict forces ships onto longer or alternative routes, transportation costs eventually flow through supply chains into energy prices, shipping expenses and consumer costs around the world.

The canal’s unexpected financial windfall underscores a broader reality of global commerce: when one strategic trade route is disrupted, another often becomes even more valuable.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Christian Meunier, chairman of Nissan Americas, is leading an ambitious effort to revive one of the automotive industry’s most recognizable brands, and his strategy centers on three priorities: expanding hybrid vehicles, increasing U.S. manufacturing and restoring the prestige of the struggling luxury division Infiniti. At a strategy event in Yokohama, Japan, on April 14, Nissan unveiled a broad product roadmap for North America, and since then Meunier has argued the company lost its identity by becoming overly complicated. His goal, he says, is to simplify the brand and once again build the vehicles American consumers actually want.

The challenge is substantial. Nissan’s share of the U.S. auto market has fallen from approximately 8% to just under 4%, representing one of the industry’s sharpest declines among major manufacturers. Meunier, who returned to Nissan in January 2025 after leading Jeep at Stellantis, found a company that he described as still operating in “COVID mode,” with a largely empty headquarters in Nashville, Tennessee. One of his first decisions was requiring employees to return to the office to rebuild collaboration and company culture. Having previously spent 17 years at Nissan, including serving as head of Infiniti, Meunier returned with extensive knowledge of both the company’s strengths and its shortcomings.

The company’s product strategy forms the centerpiece of its turnaround plan. Rather than aggressively pursuing fully electric vehicles, Nissan is placing its biggest bet on hybrids. The 2027 Rogue Hybrid, powered by Nissan’s e-Power technology, is expected to reach U.S. dealerships in late 2026 with a starting price expected to exceed $35,000. A plug-in hybrid version of the Rogue is also planned, along with a redesigned Sentra sedan and a completely reimagined Leaf, which will return as a compact crossover instead of a traditional hatchback. Meunier has also emphasized his goal of manufacturing future e-Power hybrid models in the United States rather than importing them.

Perhaps the most anticipated product is the return of the Xterra, the rugged SUV discontinued in 2015. Meunier told Bloomberg the vehicle is expected to return around 2028 powered by a V6 hybrid engine built at Nissan’s assembly plant in Canton, Mississippi. Increasing production at the Mississippi facility would utilize excess manufacturing capacity while supporting jobs across the region. The same hybrid platform could eventually be adapted for additional body-on-frame models, including the Frontier pickup and Armada SUV.

Reviving Infiniti presents an even greater challenge. The luxury brand currently relies primarily on the QX60 and QX80, leaving its product lineup significantly thinner than competing premium manufacturers. Meunier has acknowledged that rebuilding Infiniti may require at least two years. Planned additions include the sporty QX65 crossover, a hybrid QX50 sharing architecture with the new Rogue, a new performance sedan recalling Infiniti’s earlier reputation for sporty driving dynamics, and an all-new electric flagship.

Meunier has frequently pointed to Lexus as a profit engine for Toyota and Audi for Volkswagen, arguing that Infiniti can eventually serve the same strategic role for Nissan, provided it first develops a compelling lineup capable of competing in the luxury marketplace.

The company is also taking a more measured approach toward electric vehicles. Although Nissan helped pioneer the modern EV market with the original Leaf in 2010, the automaker has canceled the Ariya for North America and scaled back plans to manufacture electric vehicles at its Canton facility, citing weaker-than-expected U.S. demand and the expiration of federal electric vehicle tax incentives.

That does not mean Nissan is abandoning EV technology altogether. The company continues investing in next-generation solid-state battery research, but management believes hybrid technology offers a stronger near-term opportunity. Meunier has also suggested that tariffs introduced by the Trump administration provide another incentive to expand North American production rather than relying on imports.

Financially, the company enters its turnaround with meaningful resources despite recent restructuring. Nissan has reduced approximately 15% of its global workforce and announced factory closures following years of challenges that included the dramatic departure of former Chairman Carlos Ghosn and the collapse of merger discussions with Honda.

Even so, the company reports holding roughly $20 billion in cash while targeting approximately $1 billion in annual operating expense reductions and another $900 million in manufacturing cost savings.

Ultimately, Meunier’s strategy will be judged where consumers notice it most: on dealership lots, in vehicle pricing and through renewed production at American factories that management hopes will become the foundation of Nissan’s recovery.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Some of the world’s largest bond investors are shifting money toward shorter- and medium-term U.S. Treasury securities as Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh signals that fighting inflation will remain the central bank’s top priority. The move follows Warsh’s first Federal Reserve policy meeting on June 17, where markets interpreted his comments as more hawkish than expected, prompting major asset managers to reposition their portfolios for a higher-interest-rate environment.

The strategy reflects changing expectations about where interest rates may head over the next year.

The Treasury market spans securities ranging from short-term bills maturing within months to long-term bonds lasting as long as 30 years. Following the Fed meeting, yields on shorter-term Treasuries rose sharply as investors increasingly priced in the possibility that interest rates could remain elevated—or even increase further—rather than decline.

As of Friday’s close, the 2-year Treasury yielded approximately 4.10%, the 5-year stood near 4.13%, the benchmark 10-year Treasury yielded about 4.37%, and the 30-year Treasury traded near 4.87%.

That relatively flat yield curve has encouraged many professional investors to concentrate on what bond traders call the “belly of the curve”—primarily securities maturing in roughly five to seven years.

According to George Bory, Chief Investment Strategist for Fixed Income at Allspring Global Investments, investors can currently earn attractive yields in intermediate-term Treasuries without taking on the greater price volatility associated with longer-term bonds.

Steve Laipply, Global Co-Head of iShares Fixed Income ETFs at BlackRock, described the strategy as maximizing income while minimizing additional risk, making intermediate maturities particularly attractive as investors continue directing money into bond funds.

Much of the shift reflects Warsh’s approach to monetary policy.

At his first meeting as Fed chairman, policymakers left the benchmark federal funds rate unchanged at 3.50% to 3.75%, but removed previous language suggesting future rate cuts and scaled back the detailed forward guidance investors had become accustomed to under prior Federal Reserve leadership.

Warsh also declined to submit his own individual interest-rate projection—commonly known as a “dot”—telling reporters that he did not believe such forecasts were especially helpful in guiding monetary policy.

At the same time, he announced several internal reviews examining how the Federal Reserve conducts its operations, while updated economic projections indicated policymakers no longer expect interest-rate cuts this year. Some officials now anticipate the possibility of additional increases before the end of 2026.

Persistent inflation remains the primary concern.

Price pressures accelerated earlier this year following disruptions to global energy markets during the conflict involving Iran and the Strait of Hormuz. Although energy prices have moderated, inflation continues running well above the Federal Reserve’s long-term 2% target.

Throughout his first press conference, Warsh repeatedly emphasized the Fed’s commitment to restoring price stability, reinforcing market expectations that policymakers are willing to keep interest rates elevated for an extended period if necessary.

That message contrasts with President Donald Trump’s longstanding preference for lower interest rates to support economic growth, although Trump has also stated that Warsh should operate independently in leading the nation’s central bank.

Not every corner of the bond market is attracting investor interest.

Several major investment firms, including Fidelity, have become increasingly cautious about corporate debt issued to finance the artificial intelligence boom. Technology companies have sold hundreds of billions of dollars in new bonds to fund construction of data centers and AI infrastructure.

Because many of those companies maintain strong credit ratings, their bonds currently offer only modest yields above comparable U.S. Treasury securities. Some investors worry that if AI investments ultimately produce lower-than-expected returns, corporate credit quality could weaken while today’s narrow credit spreads provide little additional protection.

For households, developments in the Treasury market extend well beyond Wall Street.

The 10-year Treasury yield serves as the benchmark for most fixed-rate mortgage loans, while shorter-term Treasury yields influence borrowing costs for auto loans, credit cards and many business loans.

If professional investors are correct that interest rates will remain elevated through 2026, Americans may continue facing relatively expensive borrowing costs for homes, automobiles and other major purchases.

The higher-rate environment also offers one important benefit.

After years of historically low yields, savers and retirees can once again earn meaningful income from relatively safe government bonds without taking excessive investment risk.

The current positioning by major bond managers suggests they expect that higher-for-longer interest-rate environment to remain in place for some time.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Several major airlines have spent millions of dollars installing luxurious new business-class seats featuring lie-flat beds, sliding privacy doors and premium suites, only to discover they cannot allow passengers to fully use them. The obstacle is federal safety certification. Bryan Bedford, administrator of the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), told reporters at an airline industry summit in Charleston, South Carolina, in late May that a growing number of next-generation premium seat designs are failing required safety testing, delaying certification and preventing airlines from offering their newest cabins as intended.

The issue has nothing to do with comfort. Instead, it centers on passenger safety during emergencies. The FAA conducts extensive human-factor testing to determine how quickly passengers can evacuate an aircraft and how effectively seats protect occupants during sudden stops or crash landings. Many of the features that travelers find most appealing—high privacy walls, sliding suite doors and fully flat sleeping positions—can complicate emergency evacuations or fail crashworthiness requirements. In addition, every premium seat must be certified separately for each aircraft model, meaning approval for one airplane does not automatically apply to another.

The result has been a growing number of expensive aircraft entering service with their most attractive features disabled.

American Airlines received its first Airbus A321XLR in July 2025, but the aircraft remained parked in the Czech Republic for months because its custom premium seats were not yet ready. Even after entering commercial service, passengers flying in the airline’s new Flagship Suite cabins were unable to close the suite doors because the FAA had not yet approved them. American permanently locked the doors in the open position while awaiting certification and compensated affected premium passengers with 5,000 AAdvantage frequent-flyer miles for each flight.

Delta Air Lines has faced even greater delays. The carrier ordered new Airbus A321neo aircraft equipped with custom lie-flat business-class suites built by French seat manufacturer Safran. The first aircraft arrived in late 2024, but remained in storage for more than a year because regulators would not approve the cabin configuration. Rather than leave multimillion-dollar aircraft grounded indefinitely, Delta removed the uncertified premium suites and replaced them with a conventional 44-seat domestic first-class cabin. Industry reports now suggest the original lie-flat configuration may not enter service until 2028, if at all, with Delta reportedly considering adopting an already-certified design similar to JetBlue’s Mint business-class product.

The certification delays extend well beyond the largest U.S. airlines.

United Airlines has begun introducing new Polaris business-class suites aboard its Boeing 787-9 Dreamliners, but passengers must keep the privacy doors open pending final regulatory approval. Germany’s Lufthansa has also experienced repeated certification delays for its highly anticipated Allegris premium cabins, forcing the airline to introduce the new interiors gradually across its fleet. Meanwhile, Air India has postponed completion of its more than $400 million wide-body cabin modernization program from the end of 2025 to approximately 2028.

Part of the challenge stems from the increasing complexity of premium airline seating itself. Rather than being designed by aircraft manufacturers such as Airbus or Boeing, most premium seats are developed by specialized suppliers including Safran and RECARO. As airlines compete to offer increasingly luxurious and private experiences, seat designs have become far more sophisticated, making certification significantly more difficult.

A Safran spokesperson said the certification process for business-class seating has become substantially more demanding in recent years because both seat designs and regulatory standards have grown increasingly complex. Despite the challenges, the company delivered roughly 2,600 business-class seats during 2025, approximately 150 more than the previous year.

For travelers, the lesson is straightforward: an airline’s announcement of a new premium cabin does not necessarily mean passengers will receive the full advertised experience. Newly delivered aircraft may still feature temporary interiors or have premium suite doors permanently locked open until regulators complete certification. Travelers booking expensive premium tickets specifically for lie-flat beds or fully enclosed suites should verify the exact aircraft configuration operating their flight rather than relying solely on promotional materials.

The delays carry significant financial consequences for airlines. Premium cabins generate some of the industry’s highest profit margins, and carriers have invested heavily in luxury seating to attract high-paying corporate and international travelers.

Bedford has urged airlines and seat manufacturers to involve regulators much earlier in the design process rather than waiting until new cabins are completed before beginning certification. Until that approach changes, airlines will continue spending millions on cutting-edge premium products that passengers cannot fully enjoy.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Comcast said Monday it will break itself into two separate public companies, spinning off its entire media and entertainment arm, NBCUniversal, and its European pay-TV business, Sky, into a standalone firm. The cable and broadband giant announced the plan in a company statement and in a note to employees from co-Chief Executives Brian Roberts and Mike Cavanagh, who told staff the company had reached another moment to embrace change after more than sixty years of growth. Investors cheered the news. Comcast shares jumped as much as 26 percent in early trading before paring gains to trade about 22 percent higher.

The split will be done as a tax-free spin-off, meaning current Comcast shareholders are expected to own stock in both companies rather than being cashed out. The company expects the separation to take about a year to complete.

When it is done, there will be two very different businesses. One will keep the Comcast name and focus on what it calls connectivity: home broadband internet, mobile phone service and business services. The other will be a pure media company built around NBCUniversal, holding the NBC and Telemundo networks, the Peacock streaming service, Bravo, Universal film and television studios, the Universal theme parks and Sky.

The leadership is also being divided. Comcast co-Chief Executive Mike Cavanagh will become Chief Executive of NBCUniversal, while former Chief Financial Officer Michael Angelakis will become Chief Executive of Comcast. Brian Roberts, who controls the company and serves as chairman, will remain actively involved with both companies, working alongside the leadership of each business.

The move comes after a difficult stretch for Comcast and its shareholders. The stock had fallen roughly 30 percent over the past year and about 17 percent since the beginning of the year before Monday’s rally, as the company grappled with the same challenge facing the broader television industry: millions of consumers continue to abandon traditional cable packages in favor of streaming services.

That second pressure is the quieter story. Comcast’s broadband business, long considered its most dependable source of profits, is now facing growing competition from multiple directions. Wireless carriers are aggressively selling home internet over their cellular networks, while satellite providers such as Starlink are attracting customers in areas cable companies have struggled to reach. By separating the broadband business from the media operation, Comcast may gain greater flexibility to pursue acquisitions, partnerships or strategic combinations within the telecommunications industry.

The same logic applies to the entertainment business. A standalone NBCUniversal would be free to pursue mergers or partnerships with other media companies as the industry continues to consolidate. Companies are racing to build larger streaming libraries, expand advertising businesses and reduce costs through scale. As an independent company, NBCUniversal could become either an acquirer or a takeover target as that consolidation accelerates.

This is not Comcast’s first effort to simplify its corporate structure. Earlier this year, the company completed the spinoff of a portfolio of cable television networks and digital assets into a separate public company. The latest transaction is far larger, effectively dividing Comcast into two major businesses with distinct strategies and investor bases.

One notable detail is that Comcast expects to retain an ownership stake of up to 19.9 percent in NBCUniversal for up to one year after the separation is completed. That means the companies will remain financially connected for a period before eventually becoming fully independent.

For customers, there will be little immediate impact. Internet subscribers, Peacock users, NBC viewers and visitors to Universal theme parks should continue receiving the same services. Over time, however, two focused companies may make different investment decisions than one large conglomerate, potentially influencing everything from broadband expansion to streaming content and pricing.

Comcast said the breakup is designed to create two focused industry leaders, each with significant scale, strong financial profiles and distinct strategic opportunities. Whether the separation ultimately delivers the long-term value suggested by Monday’s sharp stock rally will depend on how successfully each company performs once it begins operating on its own.

JBizNews Desk
New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Women across the United States are increasingly finding empty pharmacy shelves as demand for estrogen patches continues to outpace supply following a major change in federal health guidance. The shortage began after the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) removed a more than 20-year-old boxed warning from hormone therapy products last November, triggering a sharp increase in prescriptions that manufacturers have struggled to meet.

According to healthcare data firm HealthVerity, prescriptions for estrogen patches have surged 162% over the past two years, climbing to approximately 1.6 million prescriptions in May from about 594,000 in June 2024. Estrogen patches now account for nearly half of all estrogen prescriptions written in the United States.

The renewed interest marks a dramatic reversal from two decades ago.

Following publication of the Women’s Health Initiative study in 2002, millions of women stopped using hormone replacement therapy after research suggested increased risks of breast cancer, heart disease and stroke.

Subsequent research found those risks were far more limited than originally believed and primarily affected women who began hormone therapy later in life rather than during menopause.

Last year, the FDA removed the strongest warning labels from many hormone therapy products, reflecting updated medical evidence.

FDA Commissioner Marty Makary said the change released years of pent-up demand from women who had previously avoided treatment because of safety concerns.

Physicians say the patient population has also changed.

Many women now begin hormone therapy earlier—often during their 40s—and continue treatment significantly longer than previous medical recommendations, with some remaining on therapy into their 60s and 70s.

That shift has increased the number of monthly prescription refills, placing additional strain on manufacturers.

Estrogen patches have become especially popular because they deliver medication through the skin rather than the digestive system, are generally well covered by insurance and are considered by many physicians to have advantages over oral hormone therapies.

Manufacturers, however, have been unable to expand production quickly enough.

Several estradiol patch products currently appear on shortage lists maintained by the American Society of Health-System Pharmacists, while CVS has confirmed ongoing supply disruptions from manufacturers.

Drug companies acknowledge the unprecedented demand.

Sandoz said the FDA’s policy change created demand far beyond historical levels and that it has increased shipments to the United States.

Amneal Pharmaceuticals and Viatris also say they are expanding production capacity.

Even so, many manufacturers expect intermittent shortages to continue through at least late 2026, with some industry observers warning recovery could take even longer.

Interestingly, the federal government has not declared an official nationwide shortage.

The Department of Health and Human Services says all major manufacturers continue operating at full production, while the FDA has not added estrogen patches to its formal drug-shortage database.

That difference has frustrated physicians, pharmacists and patients who continue encountering empty pharmacy inventories despite the absence of an official shortage designation.

A survey conducted by telehealth provider Midi Health found that nearly one out of every two women seeking estrogen patches reported difficulty filling their prescriptions.

The shortage has also created new business opportunities.

Growing awareness of menopause care has fueled rapid expansion among telehealth providers and women’s health companies.

Hers, the women’s health division of Hims & Hers, entered the menopause treatment market about eighteen months ago and says patient interest has tripled since launch.

Drug manufacturers, pharmacies and digital healthcare companies are increasingly investing in menopause services as millions of women seek treatment previously avoided for decades.

For patients currently affected by shortages, physicians recommend contacting healthcare providers rather than discontinuing therapy without medical supervision.

Alternative treatments—including estrogen gels, sprays and oral medications—remain available through separate manufacturing supply chains and have experienced fewer shortages.

Healthcare providers emphasize that any change in hormone therapy should be made only after consultation with a physician or pharmacist familiar with the patient’s medical history.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

For most of this year, big banks were betting the euro would keep climbing against the U.S. dollar. Now that trade is unraveling. J.P. Morgan Global Research has turned bearish on the euro for the first time in a year, cutting its forecast for the EUR/USD exchange rate from around 1.20 to a range of roughly 1.13 to 1.15 over the next three quarters, and other forecasters who had called for a much stronger euro are quietly being overtaken by events. The shift follows hawkish turns by both the European Central Bank and the Federal Reserve, and it has helped drive the U.S. dollar to its highest level in more than a year.

To understand the reversal, it helps to know what was supposed to lift the euro in the first place. Currencies tend to move on the gap between interest rates set by different central banks, because higher rates attract money seeking better returns. The bullish case for the euro rested on the idea that the Fed would keep cutting rates while the ECB held steady, narrowing the rate gap and pulling money toward Europe. Investors also pointed to German government spending plans and a fading sense of American economic dominance. That story powered the euro’s rally to about 1.20 in January.

Then the script flipped. The ECB raised its key rate on June 11, its first increase since 2023, lifting the deposit rate to 2.25 percent as eurozone inflation climbed to its highest level since 2023. Days later, on June 17, the Fed, under new chairman Kevin Warsh, held rates steady but signaled it was more likely to raise them than cut them this year, with roughly half of policymakers now expecting a hike. When both central banks lean toward tighter policy at the same time, the rate-gap trade that had been driving the euro higher simply goes quiet, removing the main engine behind its climb.

The newer forces, meanwhile, favor the dollar. J.P. Morgan strategist Meera Chandan said two bearish pressures on the euro have intensified in recent weeks. First, the U.S. economy has pulled further ahead of the eurozone, with a strong American jobs market easing fears of a slowdown. Second, the market’s expectation that the Fed could hike has shifted interest-rate differentials back in the dollar’s favor. On top of that, the war in Iran hurt Europe more than the United States, worsening the region’s trade position as energy and import costs rose, while European stocks lagged behind a strong run in U.S. shares led by the technology sector.

The result is a dollar resurgence. The U.S. Dollar Index, which measures the greenback against a basket of major currencies, recently peaked near a one-year high, helped by the Fed’s hawkish stance and by easing tensions in the Middle East that sent investors back toward U.S. assets. The euro, which started the year above 1.20, has slid to around 1.14, its weakest level since the spring. A number of major banks had been targeting 1.22 to 1.25 or higher by year-end, but those forecasts were largely set before the ECB’s hike and the Fed’s pivot, leaving them out of step with how the world looks now.

For American businesses and households, a stronger dollar cuts both ways. It makes foreign travel and imported goods cheaper for U.S. consumers, a welcome offset to inflation. But it makes American exports more expensive and less competitive abroad, and it eats into the overseas profits of U.S. multinationals when foreign sales are converted back into dollars. For European companies, the mirror image applies: a weaker euro helps the continent’s exporters by making their goods cheaper in dollar terms, but it raises the cost of the energy and raw materials they buy in dollars, adding to the inflation their central bank is already fighting.

The single biggest wild card remains the Iran ceasefire and the price of oil. A durable peace and a reopened Strait of Hormuz would push energy prices down, cool inflation on both sides of the Atlantic, and could revive the case for a softer dollar and a firmer euro. But with the truce repeatedly tested, every headline can swing the currency pair sharply in either direction. For now, the consensus on Wall Street has moved from betting on a rising euro to expecting it to grind sideways or lower, a reminder of how quickly a crowded trade can reverse when the assumptions behind it change. As always with currency forecasts, the only certainty is that the next surprise will come from wherever the market is least positioned for it.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The parent company of Saks Fifth Avenue, Neiman Marcus and Bergdorf Goodman officially emerged from Chapter 11 bankruptcy on Friday, June 26, with a new corporate name, substantially less debt and a significantly smaller store footprint. Saks Global announced it has renamed its corporate parent Exemplar Luxury Group, and Chief Executive Geoffroy van Raemdonck told The Associated Press in a phone interview that the company is ready for a new chapter after several difficult years.

“Today is really a brand new day for the organization,” van Raemdonck said, describing the restructuring as a fresh start for three of America’s most recognizable luxury department store brands.

The restructuring reduced the company’s debt by nearly 75% and injected approximately $500 million in new financing, leaving the retailer with additional liquidity to support daily operations and invest in its stores. Van Raemdonck said the new corporate identity reflects a commitment to higher standards for the brands it represents, the customers it serves and the employees who work throughout the organization.

Consumers will not notice any changes to the store names. Shoppers will continue visiting Saks Fifth Avenue, Neiman Marcus and Bergdorf Goodman, while Exemplar Luxury Group will exist solely as the parent company overseeing the portfolio.

The financial reset comes with a dramatically smaller retail footprint. The company now operates 49 full-line stores consisting of 15 Saks Fifth Avenue locations, 33 Neiman Marcus stores and the single Bergdorf Goodman flagship on Manhattan’s Fifth Avenue. Meanwhile, the company’s Saks Off 5th discount business has been reduced to just 12 locations after the closure of most of its outlet stores.

The company’s financial troubles stem largely from its ambitious expansion. Saks Global completed its $2.7 billion acquisition of the Neiman Marcus Group in December 2024, betting that combining several of the nation’s premier luxury retailers would generate greater purchasing power and operating efficiencies. Instead, the combined company struggled under its debt burden and fell behind on payments owed to many of the luxury brands and vendors supplying its stores.

The company filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection in January, and a Texas bankruptcy court approved its restructuring plan in early June, allowing the retailer to complete one of the fastest major retail bankruptcies in recent years.

A newly formed board of directors will now oversee the company. Pentwater Capital Management and Bracebridge Capital, the investment firms that supported the restructuring, will each appoint two members to the seven-person board. Van Raemdonck will also serve on the board alongside two independent directors with extensive retail experience.

Those independent directors include Dave Kimbell, former Chief Executive of Ulta Beauty, who previously held executive roles at PepsiCo and Procter & Gamble and currently serves on the board of Best Buy, and Philippe Schaus, the former head of Moët Hennessy and previously Chief Executive of DFS Group, where he spent more than a decade on the executive committee of luxury giant LVMH.

Looking ahead, van Raemdonck said management’s primary objective is to clearly differentiate each of the three retail banners so they appeal to distinct luxury customers rather than competing against one another. He believes operating under one corporate umbrella will allow the company to spread investments in technology, merchandising and staffing across all three brands more efficiently than if each operated independently.

He also said the company has already begun repaying key vendors and rebuilding merchandise inventories, important steps toward restoring confidence among luxury fashion houses whose products drive customer traffic.

The broader challenge remains the luxury consumer. While many retailers continue to face cautious spending, van Raemdonck expressed confidence that affluent shoppers remain willing to spend on premium brands. He pointed to successful product launches, exclusive in-store events and luxury trunk shows that generated record sales over the past year, arguing that consumers continue responding when brands deliver compelling merchandise and experiences.

The outcome extends well beyond the company’s own balance sheet. Saks Fifth Avenue, Neiman Marcus and Bergdorf Goodman serve as anchor tenants in premier shopping districts and major malls across the country while providing an important sales channel for luxury fashion, jewelry and accessories brands. Every store closure affects employees, suppliers, designers and commercial landlords alike.

With bankruptcy now behind it, Exemplar Luxury Group begins its next chapter as a smaller, financially stronger retailer. The challenge ahead will be proving that a leaner organization with less debt can succeed where its larger predecessor struggled—delivering sustainable profits while serving an increasingly selective luxury consumer.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Russian President Vladimir Putin admitted on Sunday, June 28, that Russia is struggling to keep fuel flowing to its own citizens, a rare public concession delivered at a congress of the ruling United Russia party and at a meeting with leaders of the country’s energy industry. Putin acknowledged the long lines at gas stations and said the right grade of gasoline was not always available, blaming the strain on a wave of Ukrainian drone strikes that have battered the refineries that turn crude oil into usable fuel.

The admission is striking because Russia is one of the largest oil exporters on earth. The country still has plenty of crude to pump and sell abroad. What it is losing is the ability to process that crude at home. Refineries are the plants that convert raw oil into gasoline, diesel and jet fuel, and Ukraine has spent months targeting them rather than the oil fields themselves. The result is a country swimming in crude oil that cannot make enough finished fuel for its own drivers, farmers and airlines.

The numbers behind the shortage are large. The International Energy Agency said this past week that the disruption is unprecedented in the history of the war, estimating that more than 20 percent of Russia’s total refining capacity has been knocked offline. More than two dozen strikes have hit Russian refineries since March, including eight of the country’s ten biggest plants. The Moscow Oil Refinery, operated by Gazprom Neft, normally supplies nearly half of the capital’s fuel and processed 11.6 million metric tons of crude in 2024; after being struck twice in mid-June, it may not return to service until 2027. The Kapotnya refinery, the largest supplier to the Moscow region, is expected to stay offline until at least the end of this year, and Lukoil’s NORSI plant, Russia’s fourth-largest refinery, went dark on June 24 after a drone strike.

Putin tried to play down the severity. Citing a report from Russia’s Energy Ministry, he said gasoline reserves stood at 1.7 million metric tons, roughly in line with the same period last year, and put the decline at only 4 percent. “Right now we’re observing a certain shortage, but it’s not critical,” he said. The picture on the ground looks harder. As of June 24, at least 55 of Russia’s 83 regions were reporting either government-ordered restrictions on gasoline and diesel sales or limits imposed by private fuel stations. Roughly ten regions have introduced rationing, often capping purchases at 30 to 40 liters per vehicle. In annexed Crimea, authorities declared an emergency situation and at one point halted public gasoline sales entirely.

The clearest sign of how tight supply has become is what Russia is now doing with its exports. Putin confirmed a temporary full ban on exports of gasoline and jet fuel and said a complete ban on diesel exports was under consideration. Alexander Novak, the deputy prime minister overseeing energy, has said Moscow is reviewing fuel export agreements so they do not compete with domestic needs. For an economy that depends heavily on energy revenue, halting the export of refined products is a costly move. It means giving up sales abroad to keep enough fuel at home, an open admission that the domestic market now comes first.

The business fallout reaches well beyond the gas pump. Putin singled out the farm sector, warning that the shortages threaten the summer harvest at the moment agricultural producers need diesel most. To close the gap, the government is weighing something almost unthinkable for a major oil power: importing fuel. Officials are looking at purchases from Turkey and other Asian suppliers, and the Russian parliament has approved subsidies for imported fuel along with temporary relief for refiners. Repairs will not come quickly because refineries rely on specialized Western equipment that sanctions have made difficult to replace.

The strikes are continuing even as Putin speaks. Overnight into Sunday, Ukrainian drones hit two more refineries, one in the Krasnodar region and another near Yaroslavl. The Slavyansk plant in Krasnodar, which processes close to 4 million tons of crude a year and feeds petroleum exports through Russia’s Black Sea ports, caught fire, and falling debris killed one person. Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky described the attacks as part of an effort to weaken Russia’s ability to fund and wage the war.

Sergei Vakulenko, an energy analyst at the Carnegie Russia Eurasia Center, summed up the strain bluntly, writing that the Russian oil industry’s resilience is being stretched dangerously thin.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

After a week dominated by central-bank surprises, geopolitical headlines and renewed strength in the U.S. dollar, investors enter the new week focused on whether the economy is slowing enough to justify future interest-rate cuts—or remaining strong enough to keep borrowing costs higher for longer.

Here are the biggest themes expected to move markets:

Jobs Data Takes Center Stage

The week’s most closely watched report will be the U.S. employment data. Investors will be looking for signs that hiring is cooling without tipping into a sharp slowdown. A stronger-than-expected labor market could reinforce expectations that the Federal Reserve will keep interest rates elevated, while weaker numbers could revive hopes for future rate cuts.

Federal Reserve Speakers

Markets will also be listening closely to speeches from Federal Reserve officials for clues about the path of interest rates. Any indication that policymakers remain concerned about inflation could lift Treasury yields and the U.S. dollar while pressuring stocks.

Dollar Strength

The U.S. dollar remains near its strongest level in more than a year following the Fed’s hawkish stance. Currency markets will watch whether the dollar continues climbing against the euro, yen and other major currencies.

Oil and the Middle East

Energy markets remain highly sensitive to developments involving Iran and the Strait of Hormuz. Any disruption to shipping or changes in regional tensions could quickly move crude oil prices and influence inflation expectations worldwide.

AI and Technology Stocks

Artificial intelligence remains one of Wall Street’s biggest themes. Investors will continue monitoring semiconductor companies, cloud providers and software firms after recent reports of memory-chip shortages, rising electronics prices and growing competition among AI developers.

Corporate News

Investors will watch for additional announcements involving layoffs, restructuring plans, mergers and acquisitions, particularly in the automotive, retail and technology sectors, following major headlines involving Volkswagen, Google, Nissan, Saks, and other global companies.

Supreme Court Decisions

Markets will also keep an eye on several significant U.S. Supreme Court rulings that could affect federal regulatory authority and executive powers, with potential implications for businesses and investors.

Market Sentiment

After recent volatility, traders will be looking to see whether money continues rotating away from high-growth technology shares into financials, industrials, healthcare and other sectors that have recently outperformed.

Bottom Line: This week is expected to be driven by economic data, Federal Reserve signals, geopolitical developments, AI-related technology news and corporate earnings updates. Investors should be prepared for continued volatility as markets react to each new headline.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Ukraine intensified its long-range drone campaign against Russia on Sunday, targeting energy infrastructure in a series of attacks that Russian officials say struck a major refinery in the country’s south and further strained domestic fuel supplies.

According to Krasnodar regional Governor Veniamin Kondratyev, debris from intercepted Ukrainian drones ignited a fire at the Slavyansk-na-Kubani oil refinery, one of southern Russia’s largest refining facilities. Officials said one person was killed and another injured during the attack.

The refinery processes approximately 4 million metric tons of crude oil annually and serves as an important supplier of fuel products exported through Russia’s Black Sea ports.

The strike forms part of Ukraine’s broader strategy of targeting Russia’s energy infrastructure.

Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy said on Telegram that Ukrainian long-range operations had reached two Russian refineries overnight, describing the attacks as economic pressure designed to reduce Russia’s ability to finance the war.

Zelenskyy also claimed a refinery in Russia’s Yaroslavl region was struck during the operation. Russian authorities acknowledged drone activity in the region but did not immediately confirm damage to refinery facilities.

The repeated attacks are beginning to have measurable economic consequences.

Industry analysts estimate that more than 20% of Russia’s oil-refining capacity has been disrupted following dozens of Ukrainian drone strikes over recent months.

According to the International Energy Agency (IEA), the scale of refinery disruption is unprecedented since the conflict began.

Several of Russia’s largest refining complexes have sustained repeated attacks, including the Kapotnya refinery, a major fuel supplier serving the Moscow region, which officials expect to remain partially offline into late 2026.

The consequences are increasingly visible inside Russia.

According to reporting compiled by Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL), at least 55 of Russia’s 83 regions have reported gasoline or diesel shortages or introduced fuel-purchase restrictions.

In parts of Siberia, drivers are now limited to purchasing no more than 50 liters of fuel per visit at certain Rosneft stations, while private fuel retailers have imposed similar limits.

What began as isolated shortages near the fighting has gradually spread across regions thousands of miles from the front lines.

Russian officials are attempting to stabilize domestic supplies.

Deputy Prime Minister Alexander Novak said the government is reviewing fuel-export commitments to ensure enough gasoline and diesel remain available within Russia.

The move highlights a growing challenge for Moscow.

Russia depends heavily on energy exports for government revenue, yet maintaining domestic fuel supplies has become increasingly important as refinery capacity comes under sustained attack.

President Vladimir Putin acknowledged the difficult environment during a speech to members of the ruling United Russia Party in Moscow.

While not directly discussing the refinery strikes, Putin described Russia as facing a “difficult period” and pledged that the government would continue funding social programs, infrastructure projects, employment initiatives and support for domestic businesses.

His remarks sought to project stability despite growing pressure on key sectors of the Russian economy.

The effects extend well beyond Russia.

As one of the world’s largest exporters of crude oil and refined petroleum products, disruptions to Russian refining capacity can tighten global supplies of diesel, gasoline and other fuels.

The refinery attacks also come as global energy markets continue monitoring shipping disruptions around the Strait of Hormuz, adding another layer of uncertainty to world oil markets.

Russia’s Defense Ministry said its air-defense systems intercepted 213 Ukrainian drones overnight.

Nevertheless, Ukraine has steadily expanded both the range and frequency of its long-distance drone operations, increasing pressure on Russia’s energy infrastructure and raising new questions about the long-term resilience of one of the country’s most important economic sectors.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Federal Bureau of Investigation is warning businesses and individuals about a fast-spreading scam that can break into Microsoft 365 accounts without ever stealing a password, and without being stopped by the extra security code that millions of people rely on to stay safe. In a public service announcement issued through its Internet Crime Complaint Center, the FBI described a criminal toolkit called Kali365 that hijacks accounts for Outlook, Teams and OneDrive, and the alert has drawn renewed attention this weekend as security experts urge users to take it seriously. What makes the warning unusual is that the scam defeats multifactor authentication, the second step, often a code or app prompt, that businesses have spent years pushing everyone to turn on.

The reason it works is unsettling: the attack does not rely on a fake website or a misspelled web address. Instead, it abuses a legitimate Microsoft feature. Many people have used it without realizing it—the short code you type into a website to sign in to a streaming service on a smart TV. In this scam, the victim receives an email dressed up as a notification from a trusted file-sharing or collaboration tool, containing a code and instructions to enter it on a genuine Microsoft verification page. Because the page really is Microsoft’s own, the web address looks correct and a password manager raises no objection, so the victim has little reason to be suspicious. But entering that code can unknowingly authorize the criminal’s device, handing the attacker the digital tokens Microsoft uses to remember that someone has already logged in.

Once the attacker has those tokens, they can reach Outlook, Teams and OneDrive without a password and without ever facing another security prompt, and they can keep that access for as long as the tokens remain valid. The FBI describes the technique as a way to establish persistence, meaning the intruder can quietly stay inside an account, often blending in with normal activity. Crucially, the victim in these cases had multifactor authentication switched on. The protection still did its job in one sense—it stopped anyone from logging in as the victim—but it does nothing to stop a victim from approving access through a process Microsoft considers entirely legitimate.

For companies, that access can amount to the keys to the whole business. Kali365 is sold as “phishing-as-a-service,” a subscription product rented out to criminals much like ordinary software, distributed largely through the messaging app Telegram. The FBI says it lowers the barrier to entry, giving even unsophisticated attackers ready-made, AI-generated lures, automated campaign templates and dashboards to track their targets. Andrea Sivieri, an executive at the security firm CoreView, captured the shift by noting that attackers are no longer breaking into Microsoft 365 so much as simply logging in. There is no software flaw to patch, because nothing is technically broken.

The business stakes are high precisely because nothing about the intrusion looks like a classic hack. Once inside an inbox, a criminal can read contracts, impersonate executives and try to redirect wire transfers, a costly form of fraud known as business email compromise. Inside OneDrive and SharePoint, they can copy customer records, financial data and intellectual property, and inside Teams they can monitor internal conversations to time their next move. Security researchers documented hundreds of these attacks in April alone, striking organizations across North America and Europe in industries including manufacturing, finance, healthcare, insurance, education and government.

The good news is that the scam is avoidable once people know the warning signs. The single most important rule, security experts say, is to never enter a Microsoft sign-in code just because an email tells you to. A code should only be entered when you yourself started the sign-in on your own device. Be especially wary of unexpected requests to enter a code to view a document, voicemail, invoice or shared file you did not ask for, and treat any message that pushes you to act fast with suspicion.

For businesses, the FBI recommends stronger steps: restricting or blocking the device sign-in feature for most users through a conditional access policy in Microsoft Entra ID, blocking authentication transfers, and rolling out phishing-resistant logins such as hardware security keys, which tie access to a physical device that is far harder to trick. A Microsoft spokesperson said security teams should follow the FBI’s guidance. Anyone who believes they have been targeted can report it to the FBI at ic3.gov. In an era when multifactor authentication has become the baseline of online security, the warning is a reminder that no single safeguard is foolproof, and that a moment’s caution before typing in a code can prevent a costly breach.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

▶️ Watch Why Every Business, Office Professional, Manager, Executive, and Job Seeker Needs to Master Today’s Leading AI Platforms

Master ChatGPT, Claude, Google Gemini, Microsoft Copilot, Grok, Perplexity, Meta AI, and more—in just two intensive days.

Discover how AI is helping businesses:

  • Save hours every week
  • Increase productivity and efficiency
  • Reduce operating costs
  • Increase sales and revenue
  • Improve customer service and marketing
  • Create proposals, presentations, reports, contracts, and emails in minutes
  • Gain a competitive advantage
  • Increase employee value and career opportunities

Just as computers, Microsoft Word, Excel, email, and the internet became essential workplace skills, today’s AI platforms are quickly becoming a business necessity.

📅 July 13–14, 2026 | 10:00 AM – 5:00 PM
📍 Sheraton Eatontown Hotel | Eatontown, New Jersey

🎓 Graduate With Your JBiz AI Multi-Platform Certification

Click Here To Register Today
📞 212-659-5270 x104

Email: Info@OjChamber.com

New York Mets owner Steve Cohen and president of baseball operations David Stearns announced Friday that the club has dismissed manager Carlos Mendoza following a disappointing 34-47 start to the season and a six-game losing streak, ending his tenure midway through a campaign that began with World Series expectations. Veteran bench coach Andy Green has been named interim manager.

The move highlights the growing pressure surrounding one of baseball’s most expensive teams. The Mets opened the 2026 season with an estimated $358 million payroll, the highest in Major League Baseball, while also facing approximately $124 million in projected luxury-tax payments. Owner Steve Cohen has spent aggressively in pursuit of the franchise’s first World Series championship since 1986.

Despite that investment, results never materialized. In a statement announcing the change, Cohen acknowledged that the organization had failed to meet expectations and said fans deserved better. David Stearns added that the club had fallen well short of its goals and that a managerial change was necessary to move the team forward.

Although dismissed, Carlos Mendoza leaves with a respectable overall managerial record. Across two-and-a-half seasons, he compiled a 206-199 record and guided the Mets to the National League Championship Series during his rookie season in 2024. However, the team missed the postseason in 2025, and its dramatic decline during 2026 ultimately cost him his job.

This season’s statistics illustrate the collapse. The Mets rank near the bottom of Major League Baseball in batting average, on-base percentage and runs scored. Injuries to cornerstone players, including Francisco Lindor, combined with disappointing performances from several highly paid free agents, have left the offense among the league’s weakest. The pitching staff also recorded the worst earned-run average in baseball during June.

The business implications extend well beyond wins and losses. A franchise carrying baseball’s highest payroll and one of its largest luxury-tax bills cannot afford to drift out of playoff contention. With postseason odds falling rapidly, the front office faced mounting pressure to demonstrate to fans, sponsors and season-ticket holders that meaningful action was being taken.

Attendance and revenue are directly tied to competitiveness. Ticket sales, concessions, sponsorship agreements and regional television ratings all become more difficult to sustain when a marquee franchise sits near the bottom of the standings. Midseason managerial changes often serve not only as baseball decisions but also as business decisions intended to reassure the marketplace.

The dismissal also reflects expectations established by ownership. Steve Cohen, the hedge fund billionaire who purchased the franchise with the stated goal of winning championships, publicly identified postseason qualification as the minimum expectation entering the season. As those hopes faded, replacing the manager became the most visible step available to baseball operations.

Carlos Mendoza becomes the third manager dismissed across Major League Baseball this season, joining Alex Cora of the Boston Red Sox and Rob Thomson of the Philadelphia Phillies. He is also the first Mets manager fired during a season since 2008. Andy Green, formerly manager of the San Diego Padres, now inherits a team sitting 15 games out of first place.

The managerial change may not represent the organization’s final major move. Teams experiencing disappointing seasons frequently turn attention toward front-office decisions and roster restructuring before the trade deadline. Reports already indicate the Mets have begun moving veteran players, fueling speculation that additional transactions could follow as management evaluates the club’s long-term direction.

For a franchise that invested more heavily than any other in baseball, Friday’s announcement underscored a difficult reality: financial resources alone cannot guarantee success. Andy Green now assumes control of a team facing long postseason odds and increasing pressure to evaluate younger talent while the organization determines how aggressively it must reshape one of the sport’s most expensive rosters before the 2027 season.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SpaceX joins the FTSE Russell indexes at Friday’s close, marking the latest step in a rapid series of benchmark additions that is forcing index funds to purchase billions of dollars’ worth of shares in the newly public aerospace giant while setting up a direct battle with investors betting the stock will fall. Trading on the Nasdaq under ticker SPCX since its June 12 debut, the company is being added to major stock indexes at an unprecedented pace for a company of its size.

The company’s initial public offering shattered records. SpaceX priced its IPO at $135 per share, opened at $150, and finished its first trading day near $161, raising approximately $75 billion in the largest IPO ever completed and valuing Elon Musk’s company at more than $2 trillion.

What happens after the IPO may prove even more unusual. Because index funds are required to own the stocks included in the benchmarks they track, every major index addition automatically creates billions of dollars in mandatory buying. CRSP indexes added SPCX on June 18, FTSE Russell follows Friday, and MSCI is expected to include the company during the final days of June, with each addition bringing another wave of passive investment.

The market dynamics are amplified by the company’s exceptionally small public float. Elon Musk continues to own approximately 49% of the company, while insiders control much of the remaining stock, leaving only about 4% to 5% of shares available for public trading. That combination of limited supply and mandatory institutional buying creates conditions for unusually large price swings.

The situation has created a high-stakes contest between two groups of investors. Short sellers believe the company’s $2 trillion valuation significantly exceeds its current financial performance and are betting shares will decline. Index funds, meanwhile, have no discretion—they must buy the stock regardless of price on scheduled inclusion dates. When large mandatory purchases collide with a limited number of available shares and aggressive short sellers, volatility often increases dramatically.

Even larger buying pressure could arrive soon. Under revised Nasdaq rules, SPCX becomes eligible for inclusion in the Nasdaq-100 approximately 15 trading days after its public debut, potentially in early July. That addition alone would require major exchange-traded funds such as the Invesco QQQ Trust to purchase billions of dollars in shares. Analysts estimate total mechanical buying associated with the Nasdaq-100 and Russell 1000 could eventually reach between $22 billion and $27 billion.

One major benchmark provider has taken a different approach. S&P Dow Jones Indices declined on June 4 to accelerate SpaceX’s eligibility for the S&P 500, maintaining its longstanding requirement that companies demonstrate profitability over both the latest quarter and the previous twelve months. As a result, SpaceX is not expected to become eligible for the S&P 500 until at least mid-2027, delaying purchases by funds tracking indexes such as SPY and VOO.

The company’s rapid inclusion is also reshaping the broader index industry. Nasdaq, FTSE Russell, and CRSP modified eligibility rules to accommodate exceptionally large, low-float IPOs, while S&P Dow Jones Indices and MSCI have generally maintained more conservative standards. That divergence means investors’ exposure to SpaceX increasingly depends on which index funds they happen to own.

For millions of retirement investors, ownership will occur automatically. Anyone holding a Nasdaq-100 or total-market index fund through a 401(k) or similar retirement account will gain exposure to SpaceX without making an investment decision themselves, regardless of whether they believe the company’s valuation is justified.

Future share lockups also remain an important consideration. SpaceX structured staggered release periods allowing certain insiders to sell shares only weeks after the IPO, while restricting Elon Musk and several major investors from selling for 366 days. As those restrictions expire, the number of publicly traded shares will increase, potentially placing downward pressure on the stock even as continued index buying provides support.

The result is one of the most unusual market events in recent history: the largest initial public offering ever completed, an exceptionally small public float, billions of dollars in scheduled institutional buying, and a growing community of investors wagering that the shares remain significantly overvalued. Throughout the remainder of 2026, SPCX is likely to become one of Wall Street’s most closely watched tests of what happens when passive investment flows collide with a limited supply of publicly available stock.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

JPMorgan Chase announced Thursday, June 25, that it will significantly expand its national Community Center branch program, doubling the number of these specialized banking locations serving low- and moderate-income neighborhoods across the United States. The announcement came directly from the bank, with Diedra Porché, head of Chase’s Community and Business Development division, saying the company is deepening its commitment to increasing access to financial services in underserved communities.

As part of the expansion, Chase will hire an additional 150 community managers and increase the educational programming offered at the locations. The bank currently operates 19 Community Centers nationwide. The first opened in Harlem in 2019 as a pilot project, and its success has led the bank to steadily expand the concept.

Unlike a traditional bank branch, Community Centers are designed to function as neighborhood financial hubs. While customers can still conduct everyday banking, each location also features meeting space where financial educators, nonprofit organizations, and local community groups host free workshops throughout the year.

The classes cover practical financial topics such as household budgeting, improving credit, homeownership preparation, entrepreneurship, and small-business development. According to Chase, the community managers overseeing these centers are hired locally and are instructed to focus on education and outreach rather than selling banking products. Participants do not need to be Chase customers and are under no obligation to open an account.

The program has already grown into one of the nation’s largest community-based financial education initiatives. JPMorgan Chase estimates it has hosted approximately 14,000 workshops since launching the first Community Center six years ago. Most of the centers are located in neighborhoods where many residents are considered underbanked or unbanked, meaning they have limited or no access to traditional banking services.

The initiative also aligns with the requirements of the Community Reinvestment Act (CRA), the federal law encouraging banks to help meet the credit and banking needs of low- and moderate-income communities. While financial institutions can satisfy many of their CRA obligations through charitable giving and community investments, JPMorgan Chase Chairman and CEO Jamie Dimon has long argued that establishing permanent neighborhood branches provides greater long-term economic benefits by creating local jobs, expanding access to financing, and building lasting relationships within communities.

Dimon has personally attended the opening of nearly every Community Center since the program began, often joined by local elected officials, business leaders, and nonprofit organizations.

Beyond its community mission, Chase acknowledges that the strategy also makes sound business sense.

Although the educational programs are intentionally separated from sales efforts, the bank says Community Centers consistently generate higher rates of new account openings than many traditional branches serving similar neighborhoods. By introducing residents to financial education first, Chase often builds trust that later translates into long-term customer relationships.

For the nation’s largest bank by assets, even modest increases in new customers at each location can produce meaningful growth across a nationwide network. The approach also strengthens the bank’s standing with regulators and community leaders by demonstrating sustained investment in underserved neighborhoods.

The expansion comes at a time when much of the banking industry continues moving in the opposite direction. Thousands of traditional bank branches have closed across the country over the past decade as more customers shift to mobile banking and digital services. Rural communities and lower-income urban neighborhoods have often experienced the greatest losses in physical banking access.

Chase’s decision to expand its brick-and-mortar presence in exactly those communities represents a notable departure from the industry’s broader trend and reflects the bank’s belief that face-to-face relationships remain essential where financial trust has historically been limited.

For consumers, the benefits are immediate. Anyone living near one of these Community Centers can attend free budgeting classes, receive one-on-one financial coaching, participate in small-business workshops, and access educational resources regardless of whether they bank with Chase.

As Diedra Porché explained, the goal is to meet people where they are, provide practical financial knowledge, and help individuals and small businesses build stronger financial futures. Over time, Chase hopes those relationships will also create loyal customers, while the communities themselves benefit from new jobs, expanded financial education, and greater access to mainstream banking services.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Census Bureau reported Friday that America’s advance goods trade deficit jumped to $105.8 billion in May, up a sharp $22.7 billion from April’s revised $83.0 billion and the widest monthly gap in more than a year. The figure came in the agency’s Advance Economic Indicators Report and badly missed Wall Street forecasts, which had centered near $85 billion.

The swing was driven by both ends of the trade ledger. Goods exports fell $11.8 billion to $207.7 billion in May, while goods imports rose $10.9 billion to $313.4 billion. A drop in exports paired with a jump in imports is the textbook recipe for a wider deficit, and it landed in a single month.

The May blowout interrupts what had been a steady narrowing. Through April, the Census Bureau had logged a goods deficit that fell to $82.4 billion, with exports hitting a record $219.7 billion. For the January-April stretch, the cumulative goods gap had dropped to roughly $330 billion from about $549 billion in the same span of 2025, as the tariff-driven import rush of early 2025 unwound.

May reversed that story. The wider deficit subtracts directly from gross domestic product, because imports count against growth in the national accounts. The reading matters for the second-quarter scorecard, and forecasters had already trimmed their Q2 GDP nowcasts before the release.

The numbers also reignite the tariff debate. Companies spent much of 2025 pulling shipments forward to beat duties, then pulled back, producing the wild monthly swings now showing up in the data. A one-month surge in imports suggests some firms restocked shelves and warehouses heading into summer, even as exports softened.

The trade balance carries weight beyond economists’ spreadsheets. A weaker export month points to softer foreign demand for American-made goods, feeding into factory output, shipping volumes and manufacturing payrolls. Importers, meanwhile, continue paying tariffs at the border that often work their way through to consumer prices.

Wholesale inventories rose 0.3% in May to $944.0 billion, while retail inventories climbed 0.6% to $832.2 billion, the Census Bureau said. Building stockpiles can indicate businesses expect steady sales, though it can also signal goods are accumulating faster than consumers are buying.

The advance report provides markets with an early, near-complete look at U.S. goods trade roughly three to four weeks after the month closes. The full report, including services, will be released in early July through the comprehensive FT-900 report published jointly by the U.S. Census Bureau and the Bureau of Economic Analysis. Because the United States typically runs a surplus in services, that report often narrows the overall trade deficit.

For now, the May reading serves as another reminder that America’s trade picture remains volatile and politically charged. The Trump administration has promoted tariffs as a tool to reduce the trade deficit and bring manufacturing back to the United States. A monthly deficit this large complicates that narrative and gives critics new ammunition to argue that tariffs continue disrupting supply chains without producing a lasting reduction in the trade gap.

The next advance goods trade report, covering June, is scheduled for release in late July. Until then, May’s results leave the trade story in familiar territory: long-term improvement mixed with sharp month-to-month swings that continue to reshape expectations for economic growth, manufacturing activity and U.S. trade policy.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

China Southern Airlines said in a stock-exchange filing Friday that it will purchase seven Boeing freighter aircraft valued at approximately $3.62 billion at list prices, giving the U.S. aircraft manufacturer one of its most significant wins in China after years of limited commercial orders. The agreement includes two Boeing 777F freighters and five next-generation Boeing 777-8F freighters, along with options to purchase three additional 777-8F aircraft.

The announcement ends a lengthy drought for Boeing in one of the world’s largest aviation markets. Chinese airlines had not publicly announced a major Boeing aircraft purchase since 2017, instead directing most fleet expansion toward Airbus as trade tensions between Washington and Beijing reshaped commercial aviation. Earlier this year, China Southern itself agreed to purchase 137 Airbus aircraft valued at approximately $21.4 billion at catalog prices.

For Boeing, the new order represents another milestone in Chief Executive Kelly Ortberg’s effort to restore production, improve deliveries and rebuild relationships with international customers following years of manufacturing challenges and regulatory scrutiny. Returning to China’s aviation market has remained one of the company’s highest strategic priorities.

The published value of the agreement comes with an important qualification. Although the aircraft carry an estimated list price of $3.62 billion, large commercial aircraft transactions almost always include substantial confidential discounts. China Southern received approval from the Hong Kong Stock Exchange to keep the final purchase price confidential, arguing that disclosure would weaken its negotiating position and reveal commercially sensitive information.

The aircraft will be acquired through China Southern Air Logistics and its cargo subsidiary, China Southern Airlines Cargo, with financing provided from the airline’s own resources. If the company exercises all three purchase options, the transaction’s estimated catalog value would increase to roughly $5.24 billion.

Deliveries will occur over an extended period, reducing the airline’s near-term financial burden. The aircraft are scheduled for delivery between 2027 and 2034, although the agreement remains subject to shareholder approval and authorization from relevant Chinese regulatory authorities before becoming final.

The order also reflects continued strength in the global air cargo market. Demand for dedicated freight aircraft has remained resilient as cross-border e-commerce, express shipping and international logistics continue expanding. Boeing’s 777-8F, the company’s newest large twin-engine cargo aircraft, is expected to become one of the industry’s flagship long-haul freighters over the coming decade.

Beyond the immediate financial value, the transaction carries broader strategic importance for Boeing. Re-establishing business with one of China’s largest airlines could create opportunities for future passenger aircraft sales in a market that has increasingly favored Airbus. Each wide-body aircraft produced also supports thousands of jobs throughout Boeing’s U.S. manufacturing network and its extensive supplier base.

The order also carries geopolitical significance. At a time when broader trade relations between the United States and China remain strained, a multibillion-dollar purchase of American-built aircraft demonstrates that commercial aviation continues to offer areas where business interests can outweigh political tensions. Industry analysts caution, however, that additional orders will depend heavily on the future direction of relations between the two governments.

For China Southern, the agreement supports the airline’s strategy of expanding its cargo operations to capitalize on continued growth in global freight demand. While analysts currently maintain generally neutral ratings on the carrier, the investment reflects management’s confidence in long-term cargo market expansion despite ongoing economic uncertainty.

Although the purchase alone will not restore Boeing’s former dominance in China, it represents the company’s clearest commercial breakthrough in the country in nearly a decade. After years of limited activity, a $3.62 billion order—with the possibility of additional aircraft—signals that Boeing may once again be gaining traction in one of aviation’s most important markets.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Office of the U.S. Trade Representative is set to launch the first joint review of the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement (USMCA) on July 1, and automakers across North America are preparing for what many consider the biggest risk to the industry: potential changes to the agreement’s automotive rules of origin. Trade officials from the three countries will begin discussions to determine whether to extend the 2020 trade pact or move toward years of renegotiation.

For the North American auto industry, few events carry greater significance. Millions of vehicles and auto parts cross the borders of the United States, Mexico, and Canada every year, and the USMCA determines which products qualify for duty-free treatment.

Current requirements are already among the strictest in the world. To avoid tariffs, a qualifying vehicle must contain at least 75% North American content, satisfy a 40% to 45% labor-value requirement tied to workers earning at least $16 per hour, and source 70% of its steel and aluminum from North America. Any tightening of those standards would require automakers to significantly restructure supply chains that have evolved over decades.

The Trump administration is widely expected to advocate for stronger domestic manufacturing requirements as part of its broader effort to bring more production and industrial jobs back to the United States. Administration officials have repeatedly indicated they favor higher North American content thresholds for automobiles and automotive components.

Negotiations are already underway. The first bilateral discussions between the United States and Mexico concluded in late May, covering automotive rules of origin, steel and aluminum requirements, and broader economic security issues. Canada has not yet participated in those initial talks, as trade tensions between Ottawa and Washington continue.

Even before any agreement changes, uncertainty itself carries economic costs. Automakers typically make investment, sourcing and factory-location decisions years in advance. Suppliers, particularly smaller manufacturers, face growing challenges as compliance requirements become more demanding and documentation requirements continue expanding.

China also remains a major focus of the review. U.S. officials have expressed concern about increasing amounts of Chinese-made content entering North American supply chains. Lawmakers have also questioned Canada’s commercial relationship with Beijing, raising concerns that Chinese investment or components could circumvent existing trade rules. Several members of Congress have urged negotiators to prioritize restricting Chinese influence in North American manufacturing.

One important safeguard remains in place. Even if the three countries fail to reach agreement during the review process, the USMCA would not immediately expire. The agreement contains a 16-year sunset provision, meaning annual reviews would begin while the current framework remains in effect through 2036. Although that avoids an immediate disruption, years of uncertainty could still discourage long-term manufacturing investment.

The consequences extend well beyond manufacturers. Stricter content rules or additional tariffs could increase vehicle production costs, raise prices for consumers, reduce automobile sales and potentially affect employment throughout the North American automotive supply chain. Previous studies by the U.S. International Trade Commission found that existing USMCA rules shifted some production back to the United States, although the broader economic impact has remained relatively modest.

Despite ongoing uncertainty, manufacturers continue investing heavily in Mexico. Foreign direct investment reached record levels during 2025, with billions of dollars in additional automotive and advanced-manufacturing projects announced entering 2026. Those investments suggest many companies continue making decisions based on long-term labor costs and regional manufacturing advantages rather than waiting for the review’s outcome.

Trade advisers are offering companies one consistent recommendation: understand every link in your supply chain before negotiations intensify. For an industry built on long planning cycles, integrated production networks and narrow profit margins, the decisions made over the coming weeks could shape North American automotive manufacturing for years to come.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Federal Aviation Administration proposed a rule on Thursday that the agency said would cut the cost and time required to win approval for new aircraft and engines, according to the proposal the FAA released, a change it framed as easing red tape without lowering safety standards. “This rule would be both deregulatory and relieving by reducing the number of exemptions, special conditions, and equivalent level of safety findings required during the certification process,” the agency said.

The proposal lands as a potential boon for the companies that build planes and the parts that power them. The FAA said the change could reduce the costs and time it takes to gain approvals of new aircraft and engines, a benefit for manufacturers like Boeing and GE Aerospace. For an industry where bringing a new model to market can take years, a faster path through the regulator’s review has direct financial value.

The core of the change is procedural. The FAA wants to modernize and streamline its certification standards for transport aircraft and propulsion systems, paring back the exemptions, special conditions and equivalent level of safety findings that slow the process, which in turn would “reduce certification costs and time to certify new and changed products.” The agency said the modernization would cut certification time and costs “while maintaining or increasing safety.”

The effort has been building for some time under new leadership. FAA Administrator Bryan Bedford has pushed for reforms and disclosed earlier this year that the agency had several projects working with industry to streamline the process, while Reuters first reported the planned changes in September. The reform also dovetails with international coordination. Last week, the FAA and the European Union Aviation Safety Agency said they were making significant progress toward approving two new variants of the Boeing 737 MAX.

The backdrop explains why the proposal matters so much to planemakers. Boeing has struggled with significant delays certifying its 737 MAX 7, 737 MAX 10 and 777X models amid design, quality and safety concerns. Those holdups carry a steep price. Certification delays are expensive not just for Boeing but for airlines planning their fleets, lessors, suppliers and passengers, who must wait years for aircraft with better fuel efficiency, lower emissions and quieter engines, and they raise the risk of cost overruns.

The business read-through runs straight to airlines and, eventually, to the flying public. When a new model is stuck in review, carriers cannot retire older, thirstier jets on schedule, and the operating savings that come with newer aircraft stay out of reach. A quicker, more predictable certification pipeline lets manufacturers book deliveries sooner and gives airlines firmer timelines for the fleet planning that underpins fares, routes and capacity.

The politics here are delicate, and the agency knows it. The FAA is aware of past scrutiny following the 737 MAX accidents and 787 production issues, and is under pressure from Congress, industry and the public to show its oversight is sound. That history is why the agency has repeatedly paired the word “streamline” with a promise that safety will be maintained or improved, an assurance critics will watch closely as the proposal moves through public comment.

Supporters argue the change is about cutting redundancy, not corners. The proposal focuses on streamlining bureaucratic bottlenecks: fewer exceptional rules, clearer guidance on design changes, and greater international alignment of regulations, resulting in less redundant work. The FAA has already been expanding its use of Technical Advisory Boards, groups of internal and external experts who review certification projects early to flag risk and avoid late-stage surprises.

The same deregulatory current is running through other corners of aviation policy. In March, the FAA consolidated commercial space launch and reentry licensing under its Part 450 rule, folding four old rules into one to reduce administrative and cost burdens on industry. Thursday’s proposal extends that philosophy to the heart of commercial aviation, the long, document-heavy process of certifying the jets that carry hundreds of millions of passengers a year.

For now, the rule is a proposal, not a finished regulation, and it will pass through review and public input before taking effect. But its direction is unmistakable. The FAA is signaling that it wants to make it cheaper and faster to bring new aircraft and engines to market, a shift with real consequences for Boeing, GE Aerospace and their competitors, for the airlines that buy from them, and ultimately for the cost and quality of the seats travelers book. The central test, as ever in aviation, will be whether faster approval can be reconciled with the safety record the public expects.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Economists expect data from Eurostat on Wednesday to show euro zone inflation slowed in June for the first time since the Iran conflict erupted in late February, as energy prices retreated following the United States–Iran ceasefire memorandum and the reopening of the Strait of Hormuz. The flash estimate from the European Union’s statistics office is the next major test of whether the region’s inflation surge has peaked.

The backdrop is a four-month climb. Eurostat’s most recent flash estimate showed annual euro zone inflation accelerated to 3.2% in May, the highest reading since September 2023 and well above the European Central Bank’s 2% target. Energy prices led the increase, climbing 10.9% as markets reacted to fears of oil supply disruptions tied to the Middle East conflict.

That energy shock has since begun unwinding. Brent crude oil prices have fallen sharply following the 60-day memorandum of understanding that eased tensions and reopened the Strait of Hormuz, through which a significant share of the world’s seaborne oil supply passes. Lower crude prices typically filter through to gasoline, heating costs, transportation and manufacturing expenses within weeks, making June the first month economists expect to reflect that relief.

A lower inflation reading would carry significant implications for the European Central Bank and President Christine Lagarde, who has spent months balancing inflation concerns with slowing economic growth. The first decline since February would provide policymakers with evidence that much of the recent inflation spike was driven primarily by energy rather than by broader, persistent price pressures throughout the economy.

The underlying details, however, will matter as much as the headline number. In May, the euro zone’s core inflation rate—which excludes food and energy—rose to 2.5% from 2.2%, while services inflation accelerated to 3.5%. If June shows headline inflation cooling while core inflation remains elevated, the ECB could conclude that inflationary pressures are spreading beyond energy into wages and service-sector costs.

For households across Europe, the impact is immediate and personal. Changes in energy and food prices directly affect utility bills, grocery costs and transportation expenses, with lower-income families generally feeling those swings most sharply. A sustained decline in inflation would provide meaningful relief after months of rising living costs.

Businesses are watching just as closely. Lower inflation strengthens the case for the European Central Bank to maintain or eventually reduce interest rates, lowering borrowing costs for manufacturers, exporters, construction firms and other businesses that have spent much of the past year coping with higher financing expenses alongside elevated energy prices.

Inflation trends continue to vary across the euro area. During May, annual inflation accelerated in Spain, Italy, the Netherlands and France, while slowing in Germany, the bloc’s largest economy. National inflation reports due ahead of the overall euro zone release are expected to provide investors with an early indication of whether any slowdown is broad-based or concentrated in only a handful of countries.

The report also fits into the broader global inflation picture. A cooling trend in Europe, combined with easing energy costs, would reinforce signs that lower oil prices following the Middle East ceasefire are helping reduce inflationary pressure across major economies on both sides of the Atlantic.

Eurostat is scheduled to publish its preliminary June inflation estimate on Wednesday, followed by detailed country-by-country data in mid-July. A reading below May’s 3.2% annual rate would mark the first monthly slowdown in four months and suggest Europe’s latest inflation surge may finally be losing momentum.

Until the figures are released, the slowdown remains an expectation rather than a confirmed trend. Still, the underlying economic mechanics are straightforward: energy prices have fallen, and throughout much of 2026, Europe’s inflation rate has closely tracked movements in the oil market.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Senators Adam Schiff of California and John Curtis of Utah sent a letter Friday to Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) Chairman Michael Selig asking whether the agency is investigating allegedly deceptive advertising by prediction-market platform Polymarket, escalating congressional scrutiny of one of the fastest-growing sectors in online wagering. The bipartisan request follows reports that the company paid influencers to promote fabricated winning bets.

The allegations stem from a Wall Street Journal investigation, which found that Polymarket paid mostly college-age social media creators to produce videos showing themselves placing bets—often on websites created solely for filming—and celebrating large winnings that never actually occurred. According to the newspaper, reporters reviewed more than 1,100 videos and determined that none of the approximately $1.9 million in featured wagers represented genuine trades.

According to the report, the campaign was designed to attract new users to Polymarket’s offshore platform, which is not regulated in the United States. One widely circulated video appeared to show a student turning a $1,000 wager into $100,000, even though the trade itself was entirely fictional.

Polymarket responded by saying it is reviewing its marketing practices. A company spokesperson said the platform remains committed to operating fair and transparent prediction markets and continually evaluates how it communicates with potential customers, although the company did not directly address who authorized the campaign or how the videos were produced.

Congressional concern extends beyond the Senate. Representatives Kevin Mullin of California and Gabe Vasquez of New Mexico previously urged the Federal Trade Commission to investigate whether prediction-market companies including Polymarket and competitor Kalshi engage in deceptive marketing practices, arguing that the industry’s public messaging differs substantially from its regulatory representations.

The industry’s rapid growth has intensified regulatory interest. Prediction markets expanded into a multibillion-dollar business as users increasingly wagered on events ranging from the Super Bowl and World Cup to elections, economic data and geopolitical developments. That expansion has attracted growing attention from lawmakers concerned about consumer protection and financial regulation.

Jurisdiction remains complicated. The Commodity Futures Trading Commission regulates certain prediction markets and has approved a limited U.S.-regulated version of Polymarket’s platform. However, that domestic service currently operates on a restricted basis, while much of the company’s trading activity continues through its offshore platform. Because the alleged promotional campaign involved the international operation, regulators may face additional legal questions regarding enforcement authority.

Founded by Shayne Coplan and headquartered in New York City, Polymarket has already faced significant regulatory and legal scrutiny. Earlier this year, federal prosecutors charged a Google employee with allegedly earning more than $1.2 million through insider trading involving confidential information and prediction markets. Following that case, the company strengthened internal policies restricting trades based on non-public information.

The controversy arrives at a sensitive time for the broader prediction-market industry. Companies including Polymarket and Kalshi continue arguing in multiple court cases that their products represent financial markets rather than traditional gambling. Allegations that promotional materials portrayed fabricated winning trades could undermine those arguments and further complicate ongoing legal battles.

Congress is already considering more than a dozen proposals that would increase federal oversight of prediction markets or limit the types of contracts these platforms may offer. Bipartisan interest from senators and representatives could increase momentum for broader regulation even if the CFTC ultimately decides not to pursue formal enforcement action.

For consumers, the central issue remains confidence. Prediction markets depend on public trust that prices accurately reflect genuine market activity and independently placed wagers. Allegations that a leading platform promoted fictional wins strike directly at that foundation and raise broader questions about transparency, advertising practices and investor protection throughout the rapidly expanding industry.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

OpenAI, the company behind ChatGPT, unveiled its first custom chip on Wednesday in partnership with Broadcom, the two companies announced in a joint statement, a move that pushes the AI leader into designing the silicon that runs its own models and chips away at its heavy dependence on Nvidia. The processor, named Jalapeño, was delivered to OpenAI CEO Sam Altman and President Greg Brockman by Broadcom President and CEO Hock Tan, marking what the companies called an important step in OpenAI’s strategy to “build the full stack” behind its models and products.

The chip is built for a specific job. Jalapeño was designed for inference, the process of running pre-built AI models in response to user commands, rather than the more intensive work of training them. It is an ASIC (application-specific integrated circuit), a type of chip that industry experts say is less flexible than Nvidia’s GPUs but is also cheaper and can be tailored to specific AI tasks. In practice, that means it is purpose-built to serve products like ChatGPT and the company’s coding tools at lower cost.

The development speed was unusual, and AI itself helped. OpenAI said the chip was designed end to end in just nine months with help from its own AI models. President Greg Brockman said, “The degree to which our models have been able to accelerate it was very surprising to us.” The company described the effort as what may be the fastest ASIC development cycle ever achieved in high-performance semiconductors.

Early results carry a clear message to the market leader. The companies said Jalapeño provides better performance per watt than current state-of-the-art chips in early testing, a direct challenge to Nvidia’s dominance. Performance per watt has become one of the industry’s most important measurements because electricity is among the largest and fastest-growing costs of operating AI systems at scale. A more efficient chip can dramatically reduce the cost of delivering AI services.

The strategic logic extends beyond technology. OpenAI is one of the world’s largest buyers of Nvidia processors but competes with nearly every major AI company for access to those chips. Designing its own processors gives OpenAI greater control over its computing infrastructure while reducing reliance on outside suppliers. Even modest reductions in inference costs could significantly improve the economics of operating products used by hundreds of millions of people.

The partnership is also another major victory for Broadcom, which has quietly become one of the biggest beneficiaries of the AI boom by helping hyperscalers and frontier AI labs design custom silicon. Broadcom shares have climbed roughly 10% so far in 2026 and have increased nearly sevenfold since the end of 2022. CEO Hock Tan said the collaboration will enable “gigawatt-scale data centers” with Microsoft and other partners beginning in 2026, describing it as the beginning of a multi-generation roadmap.

The announcement is part of a broader shift taking place across the AI industry. Earlier this year, OpenAI reached agreements to use Amazon Web Services’ Trainium chips while also expanding partnerships with Advanced Micro Devices (AMD) and Cerebras, which completed its initial public offering in May. Together, those deals reflect a growing determination among leading AI companies to diversify beyond Nvidia for the most critical—and expensive—component of AI infrastructure.

The rollout will happen gradually. Initial deployments of Jalapeño are expected by the end of 2026, beginning with limited prototypes before expanding in the years ahead. The platform combines OpenAI-designed AI accelerators with Broadcom’s networking technology and Celestica’s board and rack systems to build complete AI computing platforms.

For businesses and consumers, the importance of Jalapeño is not that it will appear on store shelves, but that it could lower the cost of artificial intelligence itself. OpenAI argues that AI-assisted chip design can accelerate innovation while reducing computing expenses across the industry. Lower inference costs make advanced AI services more affordable and scalable as billions of users rely on them daily. By designing its own hardware, OpenAI is betting that controlling both the models and the chips powering them will be essential to driving down the cost of intelligence—and reducing dependence on the company that has dominated the AI hardware market for years.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

OpenAI, the company behind ChatGPT, unveiled its first custom chip on Wednesday in partnership with Broadcom, the two companies announced in a joint statement, a move that pushes the AI leader into designing the silicon that runs its own models and chips away at its heavy dependence on Nvidia. The processor, named Jalapeño, was delivered to OpenAI CEO Sam Altman and President Greg Brockman by Broadcom President and CEO Hock Tan, marking what the companies called an important step in OpenAI’s strategy to “build the full stack” behind its models and products.

The chip is built for a specific job. Jalapeño was designed for inference, the process of running pre-built AI models in response to user commands, rather than the more intensive work of training them. It is an ASIC (application-specific integrated circuit), a type of chip that industry experts say is less flexible than Nvidia’s GPUs but is also cheaper and can be tailored to specific AI tasks. In practice, that means it is purpose-built to serve products like ChatGPT and the company’s coding tools at lower cost.

The development speed was unusual, and AI itself helped. OpenAI said the chip was designed end to end in just nine months with help from its own AI models. President Greg Brockman said, “The degree to which our models have been able to accelerate it was very surprising to us.” The company described the effort as what may be the fastest ASIC development cycle ever achieved in high-performance semiconductors.

Early results carry a clear message to the market leader. The companies said Jalapeño provides better performance per watt than current state-of-the-art chips in early testing, a direct challenge to Nvidia’s dominance. Performance per watt has become one of the industry’s most important measurements because electricity is among the largest and fastest-growing costs of operating AI systems at scale. A more efficient chip can dramatically reduce the cost of delivering AI services.

The strategic logic extends beyond technology. OpenAI is one of the world’s largest buyers of Nvidia processors but competes with nearly every major AI company for access to those chips. Designing its own processors gives OpenAI greater control over its computing infrastructure while reducing reliance on outside suppliers. Even modest reductions in inference costs could significantly improve the economics of operating products used by hundreds of millions of people.

The partnership is also another major victory for Broadcom, which has quietly become one of the biggest beneficiaries of the AI boom by helping hyperscalers and frontier AI labs design custom silicon. Broadcom shares have climbed roughly 10% so far in 2026 and have increased nearly sevenfold since the end of 2022. CEO Hock Tan said the collaboration will enable “gigawatt-scale data centers” with Microsoft and other partners beginning in 2026, describing it as the beginning of a multi-generation roadmap.

The announcement is part of a broader shift taking place across the AI industry. Earlier this year, OpenAI reached agreements to use Amazon Web Services’ Trainium chips while also expanding partnerships with Advanced Micro Devices (AMD) and Cerebras, which completed its initial public offering in May. Together, those deals reflect a growing determination among leading AI companies to diversify beyond Nvidia for the most critical—and expensive—component of AI infrastructure.

The rollout will happen gradually. Initial deployments of Jalapeño are expected by the end of 2026, beginning with limited prototypes before expanding in the years ahead. The platform combines OpenAI-designed AI accelerators with Broadcom’s networking technology and Celestica’s board and rack systems to build complete AI computing platforms.

For businesses and consumers, the importance of Jalapeño is not that it will appear on store shelves, but that it could lower the cost of artificial intelligence itself. OpenAI argues that AI-assisted chip design can accelerate innovation while reducing computing expenses across the industry. Lower inference costs make advanced AI services more affordable and scalable as billions of users rely on them daily. By designing its own hardware, OpenAI is betting that controlling both the models and the chips powering them will be essential to driving down the cost of intelligence—and reducing dependence on the company that has dominated the AI hardware market for years.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The University of Michigan reported Friday that its final June consumer sentiment index rose to 49.5, up from May’s record low of 44.8 but still the second-weakest reading since the survey began in the 1970s. Joanne Hsu, director of the university’s Surveys of Consumers, said the gains were broad-based across income levels, wealth groups and political affiliations as gasoline prices eased.

The rebound snapped a three-month streak of declining confidence, but the overall level continues to paint a cautious picture of the American consumer. Even after the improvement, sentiment remains about 13% below the February 2026 reading recorded before the Iran conflict began and nearly 20% lower than a year ago, when the index stood at 60.7.

Two key components of the survey improved together. The index of consumer expectations climbed to 50.7 from 44.1 in May, a gain of roughly 15%, while the current economic conditions index increased to 47.7 from 45.8. Hsu said expected business conditions over the next five years surged approximately 16%, reflecting easing concerns about the long-term economic fallout from the Iran conflict.

Much of that improvement followed the decline in fuel prices. Brent crude oil has retreated since the United States and Iran signed a 60-day memorandum of understanding that eased tensions and reopened the Strait of Hormuz, helping push gasoline prices lower across the country. Lower-income households, which spend a greater share of their budgets on fuel, recorded some of the strongest improvements in confidence.

Inflation expectations also moved lower, an important development for the Federal Reserve. Consumers now expect inflation over the next year to average 4.6%, down from 4.8% in May, while long-term inflation expectations declined to 3.4% from 3.9%. Although both readings remain elevated compared with pre-2025 levels, the decline suggests households are becoming somewhat less concerned about future price increases.

The report arrives at an important time for retailers, restaurants and other consumer-focused businesses heading into the second half of the year. Consumer sentiment near historic lows typically leads households to postpone major purchases, seek discounts and reduce discretionary spending. Even so, June’s modest improvement could help stabilize consumer spending if confidence continues recovering through the summer.

The cost of living remains consumers’ biggest concern. Throughout the spring, a majority of respondents continued citing higher prices as the primary strain on their household finances, with gasoline costs and tariffs remaining among the most frequently mentioned pressures. Those concerns continue weighing on industries ranging from grocery retailers to automobile manufacturers and other sellers of big-ticket items.

The survey also carries implications for Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh and policymakers who continue holding the benchmark federal funds rate between 3.5% and 3.75%. Lower inflation expectations provide some encouragement that price pressures may continue easing, but historically weak confidence underscores the economic uncertainty many households continue to feel.

The University of Michigan’s survey, conducted by telephone, measures Americans’ views of their personal finances, business conditions and buying climate. Interviews for the June report took place between May 19 and early June, capturing a period when gasoline prices were beginning to decline.

The findings broadly align with the Conference Board’s consumer confidence survey, which has also shown Americans feeling somewhat better than they did in May but still remaining cautious about the economy. Together, the two widely followed surveys suggest consumers are experiencing modest relief without regaining the optimism seen before inflation accelerated.

For now, June represents a welcome improvement rather than a decisive turning point. Americans benefited from lower gasoline prices, and that relief was reflected in their outlook. Whether confidence continues improving will largely depend on the direction of energy prices, inflation and broader economic conditions throughout the summer.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

French Prime Minister Sébastien Lecornu activated the country’s highest public-health emergency level this week as a record-breaking heat wave gripped Western Europe, killing dozens, closing schools, knocking out power and forcing farmers to harvest grain at night. National weather agencies reported the hottest readings on record across France, Spain and the United Kingdom.

The numbers are extraordinary. Météo-France said the country recorded its hottest June day since records began, with Paris reaching 40.9 degrees Celsius, a new June high. The UK Met Office also confirmed Britain’s hottest June day on record, with temperatures climbing above 36 degrees Celsius on consecutive days.

The human toll mounted quickly. At least 18 people died in France from heat-related causes, including young children, while dozens of additional drowning deaths were reported as people sought relief in rivers, lakes and coastal waters. Spain also recorded its highest average daily temperature since national records began in 1950.

The economic disruption spread across multiple industries. In Paris, officials ordered early closures of the Eiffel Tower and the Louvre Museum, reducing visitor access during one of the busiest tourism periods of the year. Schools throughout several European countries either closed or shortened classroom hours, forcing many parents to remain home from work.

Power systems came under increasing strain. In Belgium, electricity prices briefly surged above one euro per kilowatt-hour during the evening peak on June 24 as conventional power plants struggled to satisfy soaring air-conditioning demand. In France, grid operator Enedis reported approximately 50,000 customers without electricity while wholesale day-ahead power prices rose sharply.

Agriculture also felt the impact. Farmers across parts of France shifted grain harvesting to overnight hours to avoid dangerous daytime temperatures, increasing labor costs while disrupting harvesting schedules throughout the agricultural supply chain.

The heat wave exposed long-standing infrastructure challenges. Much of Europe’s housing, transportation network and commercial buildings were designed for historically moderate summer temperatures rather than prolonged periods of extreme heat. Many homes, hotels and rail systems lack widespread air conditioning, creating additional pressure on the tourism and hospitality industries as temperatures continue climbing.

Scientists and weather agencies say the pattern has become increasingly common. Météo-France reports that nearly two-thirds of all French heat waves recorded since 1947 have occurred after 2000, while the UK Met Office says the number of extremely hot days has more than tripled during recent decades. This June also became the first time since 1911 that Britain experienced record-breaking temperatures during two consecutive months.

The broader economic implications extend well beyond a single week of extreme weather. Repeated heat waves contribute to higher electricity costs, lower worker productivity, reduced tourism activity, increased healthcare expenses and mounting pressure on public infrastructure. France’s activation of ORSAN Level 3 requires hospitals to increase staffing and emergency preparedness as heat-related illnesses continue rising.

European governments increasingly view extreme heat as a recurring infrastructure challenge rather than an isolated weather event. Repeated strain on electric grids, transportation systems and major tourist attractions highlights the growing investment needed to adapt cities and public services to hotter summers becoming more common across the continent.

Forecasters warned that little immediate relief remained in sight. Red heat alerts continued across much of France, while unusually warm overnight temperatures prevented buildings from cooling after sunset. For a continent whose infrastructure was largely built around milder summers, the week underscored the growing economic and human cost of adapting to a changing climate.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh used his first meeting in charge of the central bank this past week to hold interest rates steady and to make clear how he plans to run the place: by borrowing the playbook of Alan Greenspan, the legendary Fed chief who refused to raise rates during the 1990s technology boom. Speaking to reporters after the Fed left its benchmark rate in a range of 3.5 to 3.75 percent, Warsh announced he is creating five internal task forces, including one to study whether artificial intelligence is already changing how productive the American economy is.

The timing was striking. Greenspan died Monday, June 22, at the age of 100, having run the Fed from 1987 to 2006, the second-longest tenure of any chair. His death has reopened a debate that now sits at the center of Warsh’s job: when a new technology promises to make the economy more efficient, should the Fed sit tight and let it run, or raise rates to guard against inflation?

Here is the idea Warsh is reviving, in plain terms. In the late 1990s, the internet was reshaping how companies worked. Greenspan bet that this surge in productivity meant the economy could grow faster without prices spiraling, so he held rates lower than many of his colleagues wanted. Inflation stayed tame, and history largely proved him right. Warsh is making the same wager about AI. He has argued that artificial intelligence could push productivity growth back up toward 3 percent a year, roughly a full point above its long-run average, which in theory would let the economy expand at 3.5 to 4 percent without overheating.

The problem is the backdrop could hardly be more different. Inflation right now is hot. The Consumer Price Index rose to a 4.2 percent annual rate in May, the highest reading since April 2023, pushed up in part by higher oil and gas prices tied to the war with Iran. Core prices, which strip out food and energy, were up 2.9 percent. That leaves Warsh in a bind: cutting rates is hard to justify with inflation this high, yet his whole framework argues against hiking into what he sees as a productivity boom.

There is some evidence on his side. Labor productivity has climbed 2 to 3 percent a year since 2024, up from about 1.5 percent in the prior decade. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, who backed Warsh for the job, pressed the case Tuesday, June 23, in a speech at the Economic Club of New York. Bessent said he believes AI could at least double productivity and that Greenspan was correct that the 1990s tech boom did the same. He predicted inflation would fall back toward target as the Iran conflict winds down and gas prices ease, and said the administration’s financial deregulation has unlocked roughly $3 trillion in new lending capacity.

Warsh is also changing how the Fed communicates. The statement accompanying this week’s decision ran about a third shorter than those under his predecessor, Jerome Powell, and carried a more hawkish tone. Warsh has long complained that markets lean too heavily on the Fed’s forward guidance and its “dot plot” of rate projections, treating forecasts as promises. He wants investors to read the economic data themselves. Jeffrey Roach, chief economist at LPL Financial, said the shift marks a return to the Greenspan era, when Fed statements were deliberately minimal and focused on actions rather than explanations.

Not everyone is comfortable with the comparison. Greenspan’s patience in the 1990s helped inflate the dot-com bubble, and his later years saw the loose lending that fed the 2008 housing crash. Alan Blinder, who served as Greenspan‘s vice chair, called the current moment full of eerie parallels and said he hopes it does not end the same way. The deeper worry is simple: the disinflationary tailwinds Greenspan enjoyed—cheap imported goods and a shrinking federal deficit—have reversed. And unlike in the 1990s, the productivity gains from AI have not yet clearly shown up in the official numbers. If Warsh holds rates low and those gains arrive late or never, critics warn he could repeat the Fed’s 2021 mistake, when it called inflation temporary and prices later surged past 9 percent.

For everyday Americans, this is not an abstract argument. The Fed’s rate decisions flow straight into mortgage rates, car loans, credit card bills and the interest paid on savings. Warsh’s bet will determine whether borrowing costs start coming down later this year or stay elevated. As Gargi Chaudhuri, chief investment strategist for the Americas at BlackRock, put it, the real question is no longer what the Fed did this week, but how its new chair frames inflation, AI and the path ahead. Greenspan made his bet and got lucky—or got it right. Whether Warsh can do the same, no one yet knows.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The fragile ceasefire that had eased fears of a prolonged disruption to global energy markets came under renewed pressure Saturday, June 27, after the United States launched a second consecutive day of military strikes against Iranian targets following another attack on commercial shipping in the Strait of Hormuz. The latest escalation underscores how quickly the world’s most important oil corridor can shift from relative calm back into crisis, keeping businesses, energy markets and global shippers on edge.

According to U.S. Central Command (CENTCOM), President Donald Trump ordered Saturday’s operation after an Iranian drone struck the Panama-flagged oil tanker M/T Kiku while it was transiting the Strait of Hormuz. The vessel was carrying Qatari crude bound for the port of Fujairah in the United Arab Emirates.

CENTCOM said the strikes targeted Iranian surveillance infrastructure, communications systems, air defense sites, drone storage facilities and minelaying equipment. The military said Iran had been given an opportunity to comply with the ceasefire following Friday’s American strikes but instead carried out another attack on commercial shipping.

American officials said commercial traffic through the strait would continue and emphasized that U.S. forces remain “vigilant, lethal, and ready” to protect freedom of navigation through one of the world’s busiest maritime chokepoints.

Friday’s operation—the first of the two rounds of strikes—targeted Iranian missile and drone storage facilities along with coastal radar installations after an Iranian drone struck the cargo ship M/V Ever Lovely on June 25. By Associated Press count, it marked the third American military response in three weeks following Iranian drone attacks against vessels operating in the region.

President Trump confirmed Saturday’s action on Truth Social, accusing Iran of violating the ceasefire once again and warning that the United States could be forced to finish militarily what it had begun if the attacks continue. He said the Islamic Republic could cease to exist if the assaults persist. Vice President JD Vance said Friday evening that Iran should engage diplomatically if it objected to the ceasefire terms, adding that further violence would be met with force.

The renewed fighting places immediate pressure on the memorandum of understanding signed on June 17 to wind down nearly four months of conflict. Under the agreement, the United States, Iran and their allies committed to halting military operations across multiple fronts, including Lebanon, while Iran was given a 60-day window to make its best effort to allow commercial vessels to pass through the Strait of Hormuz without charge.

At its peak, roughly one-fifth of the world’s oil and natural gas shipments moved through the strategic waterway.

A central dispute remains unresolved. Iran maintains it retains authority to regulate ships that lack its approval and has threatened to impose transit fees, while the United States and Gulf allies insist the Strait of Hormuz is an international waterway that must remain open to unrestricted commercial navigation.

A maritime organization overseen by the U.S. Navy announced Saturday that it was expanding a shipping corridor near Oman’s coastline to facilitate both inbound and outbound vessel traffic, another indication that Washington intends to keep commerce flowing despite continued security threats.

Despite the renewed military exchanges, energy markets have so far remained relatively restrained. Brent crude, the global benchmark, has fallen nearly 20% from its 2026 highs as traders continue betting that the ceasefire will ultimately restore normal shipping through the strait. Prices remain only modestly above pre-war levels, though each new attack highlights how quickly market confidence could evaporate.

Analysts continue to caution that the path back to normal operations remains uncertain.

June Goh, senior oil analyst at Sparta in Singapore, said the latest tanker strike demonstrates how fragile security in the region remains and noted that tankers must resume normal movements before crude inventories can be reduced and production fully normalized.

Vandana Hari, founder of Vanda Insights, has warned that energy markets appear to be pricing in an optimistic outcome even though implementing the ceasefire may prove far more difficult than negotiating it. Tamas Varga of PVM Oil Associates said the sharp decline in Brent prices reflects growing confidence that the worst supply disruptions may be over, while analysts at UBS, led by Henri Patricot, remain more cautious, pointing to limited crude loadings within the Gulf and little concrete evidence that vessel traffic has meaningfully recovered.

Whether the memorandum ultimately survives may depend as much on political developments in Washington as on events unfolding at sea. Secretary of State Marco Rubio told Congress earlier this month that he remains optimistic Iran will negotiate over its nuclear program, while acknowledging that the ceasefire has become increasingly fragile. Meanwhile, a growing number of Republicans have joined Democrats in questioning the financial cost and broader economic consequences of the conflict, although congressional efforts to force an end to hostilities have repeatedly failed.

For businesses, Saturday’s developments reinforce that uncertainty remains the defining risk. Oil continues to flow, commercial shipping has not stopped and energy prices remain relatively stable. Yet every new drone strike, military response and threat against the Strait of Hormuz serves as a reminder that the global economy remains vulnerable to sudden disruptions that could quickly reshape fuel costs, shipping rates and supply chains worldwide.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street closed a bruising week on Friday, June 26, with investors continuing to dump many of the technology companies that have fueled the market’s historic rally over the past two years. The Nasdaq Composite fell for a fifth consecutive session, capping its steepest weekly decline in months, as mounting concerns over artificial intelligence valuations, persistent inflation, and higher interest rates drove money into more defensive sectors. The pressure intensified after the Commerce Department reported Thursday that the Personal Consumption Expenditures (PCE) price index — the Federal Reserve’s preferred measure of inflation — climbed 4.1% in May from a year earlier, its highest reading since April 2023.

By the closing bell, the Nasdaq Composite slipped 0.24% to 25,297.62. The S&P 500 eased 0.05% to 7,354.02, while the Dow Jones Industrial Average lost 44.51 points, or 0.09%, to 51,876.11.

The weekly performance painted a much sharper picture. The Nasdaq tumbled 4.6%, its worst five-day stretch in months, as investors aggressively reduced exposure to high-priced AI and semiconductor stocks. The S&P 500 lost nearly 2%, while the Dow bucked the trend, rising 0.6% as institutional investors rotated into healthcare, industrial, financial, and other value-oriented sectors viewed as better positioned if interest rates remain elevated.

Adding to investor caution, a New York Times report said OpenAI is leaning toward delaying its long-anticipated initial public offering until next year amid increasingly volatile conditions across AI-related stocks. The report renewed debate over whether investors are becoming more selective after months of soaring valuations and massive spending on artificial intelligence infrastructure.

The weakness spread well beyond U.S. markets. In Asia, South Korea’s Kospi plunged so rapidly Friday that trading was temporarily halted after triggering an exchange circuit breaker. The index ultimately closed down 5.8%, underscoring how concerns surrounding the global technology sector have rippled through markets worldwide.

Market movers

Micron Technology stood out as one of the week’s few winners. After reporting blockbuster quarterly earnings Wednesday evening, the memory-chip manufacturer beat Wall Street expectations, raised its outlook, and reaffirmed that demand for high-bandwidth memory used in AI servers continues to accelerate. Bank of America Global Research said the results reinforce the long-term strength of AI-driven memory demand.

Some of the market’s largest companies faced much heavier selling. Apple dropped 6.13% Thursday while Microsoft declined 3.23% after announcing price increases on several major consumer products, including the iPhone and Xbox, citing rising component and memory costs. Their declines weighed heavily on the broader Magnificent Seven, which collectively accounted for much of the week’s weakness in the Nasdaq.

SpaceX, trading under ticker SPCX, gained roughly 1.5% Friday ahead of its scheduled addition to the Russell 1000 Index after the market close. The stock has remained highly volatile since its June 12 debut, soaring above $200 before retreating toward the $150 range.

Meanwhile, JPMorgan Chase announced that Doug Petno and Troy Rohrbaugh have been named co-presidents, marking another significant step in CEO Jamie Dimon’s long-anticipated succession planning.

Commodities and volatility

Gold climbed about 1.1% Friday to approximately $4,092 an ounce as investors sought traditional safe-haven assets following the week’s technology selloff and renewed inflation concerns.

Oil prices moved sharply lower. Brent crude and West Texas Intermediate each fell more than 3.5% as commercial shipping continued moving through the Strait of Hormuz without major disruption and diplomatic efforts under the U.S.-brokered memorandum of understanding reduced fears of an immediate supply shock. Both benchmarks have now retreated to their lowest levels since before the Iran conflict escalated in late February.

Economic data continued sending mixed signals. The Commerce Department reported headline PCE inflation increased 0.4% during May and 4.1% over the past year, while core PCE, excluding food and energy, rose 3.4%, its highest annual pace since October 2023. Personal income and consumer spending each increased 0.7%, indicating households continue spending despite higher prices.

Separately, University of Michigan consumer sentiment director Joanne Hsu said long-term expectations for business conditions improved sharply during June as concerns surrounding the Iran conflict eased.

The latest inflation figures leave the Federal Reserve in a difficult position. Chair Kevin Warsh, who left interest rates unchanged at 3.50% to 3.75% during the June 16–17 policy meeting, has continued signaling that another rate increase remains possible later this year if inflation fails to moderate. Supporting that cautious approach, durable goods orders fell 4.5% in May while weekly jobless claims declined to 215,000, pointing to a labor market that remains resilient.

The week ahead

Markets will be closed on Friday, July 3, in observance of the Independence Day holiday, making next week’s June employment report, scheduled for Thursday, July 2, the market’s primary focus.

Investors will closely examine payroll growth, wage gains, and unemployment for fresh clues about whether the labor market is finally beginning to cool—or whether continued economic strength will give the Federal Reserve additional reason to keep interest rates higher for longer. After one of the most difficult weeks for technology stocks this year, the next round of economic data could determine whether the AI-driven selloff deepens or whether buyers step back into one of Wall Street’s biggest growth trades.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Zoox, the self-driving unit owned by Amazon, unveiled what it called a “production-intent” version of its cube-shaped robotaxi on Wednesday and said it plans to begin charging passengers for rides later this year, according to the company, marking a major step toward turning a long-running experiment into a real business. The redesign adds higher-quality touch screens, more comfortable seats and headrests, and small interior tweaks to help riders spot forgotten items like keys and phones.

The vehicle remains unlike anything most riders have used. The robotaxi is a cube-shaped, bidirectional electric pod with four-wheel steering, no steering wheel, no brake pedal and no front seat for a human driver, capable of carrying four passengers at up to 75 miles per hour. Zoox also enlarged and relocated the bidirectional reflectors that help riders and others tell the vehicle’s front from its rear.

The redesign is built for volume. Zoox said the production-intent vehicle will join its existing fleet later this year, and that it will soon begin large-scale production at its San Francisco Bay Area manufacturing hub, which opened last June and will eventually produce 10,000 vehicles a year at full scale. The line could ramp up to 100 vehicles a week to support expansion, subject to regulatory approval.

That regulatory approval is the gating factor for the whole plan. Zoox cannot charge a single rider until the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration says it can, and its petition has been in review since a public comment period closed in April. The company is seeking clearance to deploy up to 2,500 driverless vehicles for commercial operations on public roads, a step complicated by federal rules that generally require vehicles to have standard driver controls.

Zoox has built a sizable base of riders despite charging nothing so far. The company said it has served more than 500,000 riders since opening service in Las Vegas last September, and currently offers free rides in parts of Las Vegas and San Francisco while letting select users hail its robotaxis in small areas of Miami and Austin. It has also partnered with Uber to make its robotaxis available through the ride-hailing app in Las Vegas.

Even so, Zoox trails the clear market leader. Amazon acquired Zoox for $1.3 billion in 2020, but the unit is well behind Alphabet’s Waymo, which recently surpassed 500,000 weekly paid rides across 10 U.S. cities and plans to launch in London and Tokyo, its first international markets. Waymo operates a fleet of more than 3,700 robotaxis that have logged over 200 million autonomous miles. The gap between 500,000 total riders and 500,000 paid rides every week shows how much ground Zoox has to make up.

Safety remains a live question for the entire industry, and for Zoox specifically. NHTSA had logged 123 accidents involving Zoox vehicles in autonomous mode as of March 2026, and the company issued three voluntary software recalls between March and December 2025 affecting about 860 vehicles, addressing unexpected hard braking, collision-prediction failures and lane-crossing behavior near intersections. Those incidents are a factor in the agency’s ongoing review.

The business logic behind the push is straightforward. A robotaxi that gives free rides is a research project; one that charges fares is a transportation company. Zoox’s move to a production vehicle, a factory that can build at scale and a plan to start billing riders signals that Amazon intends to compete for a slice of the urban-mobility market that Waymo has been steadily commercializing. The prize is a recurring-revenue ride-hailing business with no driver to pay, the economics that have made autonomous vehicles one of the most expensive bets in technology.

For everyday riders, the practical question is when and where these vehicles will actually show up as a paid option. The production-intent vehicles will join the free-ride fleet later in 2026 as they roll off the Hayward line, with paid rides contingent on a federal ruling that NHTSA has not yet scheduled. Until that decision comes, Zoox can build cars, refine the cabin and sign up riders, but it cannot turn the meter on. The redesign unveiled this week is the company’s clearest statement yet that it intends to be ready the moment Washington gives the word.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A small aircraft crashed into Beijing’s tallest building Friday afternoon, according to witness accounts and Chinese media reports, damaging the glass façade of the CITIC Tower and forcing an evacuation in the heart of the capital’s central business district. The 528-meter skyscraper, headquarters of the state-owned CITIC Group, drew a massive response from police, firefighters and emergency medical crews as authorities sealed off surrounding streets.

The incident struck one of China’s most recognizable business landmarks. Known as China Zun because of its resemblance to an ancient ceremonial wine vessel, the 108-story tower dominates Beijing’s financial district and houses offices belonging to one of the country’s largest financial and industrial conglomerates.

Information surrounding the incident remained tightly controlled. An individual working inside the building told reporters that a small aircraft struck the tower and activated the fire alarm system, speaking anonymously because aviation accidents are considered politically sensitive in China. Initial reports indicated that at least two exterior glass panels on an upper floor sustained damage.

Witnesses described a dramatic scene. A courier working nearby said he rushed toward the area after hearing what sounded louder than fireworks and saw the aircraft embedded in the building before police pushed people back from the scene. Officers reportedly prevented bystanders from photographing the damage and instructed several people to delete images already taken.

The security implications are significant. Beijing maintains some of the strictest controlled airspace in the world, and authorities recently strengthened restrictions even further by effectively prohibiting most consumer drone activity throughout the capital without prior government approval. Under normal circumstances, unauthorized aircraft are virtually never seen over the city’s central business district.

Preliminary information suggested the aircraft may have been a small general aviation plane. Images circulating online appeared to show the registration of a domestically manufactured light sport aircraft operated by a local aviation company, while unverified flight-tracking information indicated the plane departed from an airfield near Beijing before apparently deviating significantly from its planned route.

The disruption immediately affected the surrounding business district. Evacuating one of the city’s flagship office towers during the workday halted operations for thousands of employees and tenants. Damage to the building’s exterior also raises questions regarding repair costs, insurance claims and how long portions of the skyscraper may remain inaccessible.

The symbolic impact extends beyond the immediate physical damage. CITIC Tower represents one of modern China’s premier financial landmarks, and an aircraft striking the headquarters of a major state-owned enterprise in one of the world’s most heavily monitored cities is likely to unsettle business confidence and raise broader security concerns.

Chinese authorities provided few official details. Neither the Beijing municipal government nor local police immediately released a formal explanation, and investigators had not publicly identified the cause of the crash. The limited official information is consistent with how Chinese authorities have historically handled politically sensitive incidents involving transportation and public safety.

The accident could also reshape China’s approach to general aviation. A breach involving one of the capital’s most tightly controlled airspaces may prompt even stricter regulations governing light aircraft operations, an industry Beijing has been attempting to expand as part of its broader push into the country’s developing low-altitude economy.

For now, the immediate picture remains one of a shaken financial district, a damaged landmark skyscraper and a government working to tightly control information surrounding an extraordinary event. What remains undisputed is that a small aircraft reached one of China’s most protected business districts and struck its tallest building in broad daylight.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Korea Exchange halted trading on its benchmark Kospi index on Friday, June 26, after a fresh wave of selling in artificial-intelligence and memory-chip shares tore through emerging markets and capped one of the roughest weeks for developing-nation stocks this spring. The trigger came from the United States, where the U.S. Bureau of Economic Analysis reported that May Personal Consumption Expenditures (PCE) inflation, the Federal Reserve’s preferred inflation gauge, rose 4.1% from a year earlier, a near three-year high that hardened expectations the Fed could keep interest rates higher for longer.

An MSCI gauge of emerging-market equities fell as much as 3.9% on Friday, marking its steepest one-day decline since early June. The selloff began in Asia before spreading across global markets, with investors dumping many of the AI-related stocks that had driven much of this year’s market gains.

South Korea absorbed the heaviest losses. The Kospi plunged more than 8% during the session before recovering some ground to finish down 5.81%, triggering the exchange’s sidecar trading safeguard. Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix, which together account for roughly half of the index’s weighting, each fell about 9% despite news that the companies are expected to unveil a 1,000 trillion won semiconductor investment initiative on June 29. Traders instead chose to lock in profits after months of AI-fueled gains.

Japan also came under pressure. The Nikkei 225 dropped 4.15% to 69,360.83, erasing the previous day’s advance. The biggest casualty was SoftBank Group, whose shares fell more than 14% during trading before closing down 12.53% at 6,226 yen, wiping out roughly 5.6 trillion yen in market value. Investors reacted to reports that OpenAI, in which SoftBank owns approximately a 13% stake valued near $65 billion, may delay its initial public offering until 2027 as losses continue to mount.

Selling pressure was already spreading into U.S. markets before the opening bell. In premarket trading, ON Semiconductor fell as much as 13.6%, Micron Technology dropped 4.7%, while both Advanced Micro Devices and Intel declined more than 3%. Futures also pointed lower, with Nasdaq 100 futures down 1.08% and S&P 500 futures slipping 0.44%.

The inflation report transformed what had been a technology-sector pullback into a broader global retreat. Hotter inflation reduces the likelihood of near-term interest-rate cuts, increasing borrowing costs and reducing the present value of future earnings. That dynamic tends to weigh most heavily on high-growth technology companies whose valuations depend on profits expected years into the future.

Corporate news added to the pressure. Apple raised prices on its Mac and iPad product lines to offset rising memory-chip costs, sending its shares down more than 5%. Although analysts at JPMorgan argued investors had overreacted to the move, the price increases highlighted how rising semiconductor costs are increasingly reaching consumers rather than remaining confined to the supply chain.

Market strategists largely characterized Friday’s decline as a sharp reset rather than the beginning of a prolonged downturn. Dan Ives of Wedbush Securities has repeatedly described similar pullbacks as “gut-check moments,” maintaining that the artificial-intelligence investment cycle remains in its early stages. James Reilly, senior markets economist at Capital Economics, said the latest swings reflect the growing volatility that has become common across technology shares. Foreign investors have also accelerated their selling, unloading roughly $22 billion of South Korean equities since May.

The week had already been difficult for Korean markets. On Tuesday, June 23, the Kospi tumbled 9.99%, falling from record levels to 8,203.84, as both Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix lost roughly 12% in a single trading session that local investors dubbed “Black Tuesday.” Strong quarterly results from Micron Technology released after the U.S. close on June 24 briefly improved sentiment, but Friday’s hotter-than-expected inflation report erased that optimism.

Underlying the volatility is the question of valuation. Before this week’s decline, the Kospi had surged more than 90% for the year, driven overwhelmingly by enthusiasm surrounding AI memory demand. That left investors with little margin for disappointment when inflation concerns resurfaced. Because Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix supply memory chips used in many of the world’s leading AI systems, their decline has renewed debate over whether valuations across the broader artificial-intelligence sector have become stretched, including recently public companies such as SpaceX (ticker: SPCX), whose shares have traded near $156 following their June 12 debut despite strong investor demand for the company’s bond offering.

For everyday investors, the message is straightforward. The artificial-intelligence rally that helped propel markets higher throughout the year can reverse quickly when inflation data surprises to the upside or investor sentiment suddenly shifts. South Korea’s markets will reopen Monday with traders closely watching Samsung Electronics’ planned June 29 investment announcement and any new signals from the Federal Reserve that could determine whether investors return to the AI trade or continue taking profits.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SpaceX plans to begin construction next month on an eight-mile natural gas pipeline called Starpipe to feed its South Texas launch complex, according to a filing made last month with the Texas Railroad Commission by SpaceX affiliate Lone Star Mineral Development and reviewed by Reuters, as Elon Musk’s company moves to dramatically increase the pace of its next-generation Starship rocket. The pipeline, which will end at the company town of Starbase, is expected to be in service by January 26, 2027.

The reason for the project comes down to logistics. Starship, designed to be fully reusable, burns about 630,000 gallons of liquid methane per launch, currently delivered by hundreds of tanker trucks in an hours-long process that Musk’s expansion plans have rendered impractical. Starship has completed 12 test launches since 2023, but Musk aims to ramp up to dozens, then hundreds, and eventually thousands of launches a year. Trucking fuel one tanker at a time cannot support that cadence.

The pipeline is only one piece of a larger fuel operation taking shape at Starbase. Engineering plans SpaceX filed with the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers show the company also wants to build a liquefaction facility at Starbase to process the piped natural gas into the liquid methane Starship uses. Starpipe would begin on an 83-acre site at the Port of Brownsville that SpaceX is negotiating to lease from the city for 50 years.

The scale of the infrastructure hints at ambitions well beyond current limits. The pipeline’s 16-inch diameter suggests fuel demand exceeding what Starship would require for the 25 launches a year currently approved by the Federal Aviation Administration. In other words, SpaceX is building capacity for a launch rate it is not yet cleared to fly, a sign of how aggressively the company is laying groundwork for the future.

For a space company to build its own gas pipeline is unusual, and it reflects a strategy SpaceX has used to outpace rivals: control as much of the supply chain as possible. SpaceX has spent years exploring its own drilling operations near Starbase and across Texas, and land records show it has signed more than 100 paid-up oil and gas leases with Texas property owners since 2023. SpaceX President Gwynne Shotwell told CNBC on June 12, the day the company went public, that SpaceX planned to build pipelines and process its own propellant, and was looking into drilling its own natural gas.

That vertical-integration approach is capital-intensive but has been central to the company’s edge. SpaceX’s move into gas infrastructure, normally the domain of energy and pipeline firms, underscores its longstanding strategy of controlling its supply chain, an approach that has helped it outrun competitors in rocket and spacecraft development. The same playbook that brought rocket manufacturing in-house is now being extended to the fuel itself.

There are practical hurdles and open questions. A consultant noted that gas extraction would be challenging for a company without oil and gas experience, and SpaceX may lean on existing infrastructure rather than go it alone. SpaceX could tap into Enbridge’s Valley Crossing Pipeline expansion, which would run close to Starpipe’s start point, though Enbridge did not immediately respond to a request for comment. SpaceX also did not respond to a request for comment.

The business stakes reach far beyond a single fuel line. Starship is central to SpaceX’s plans to expand its Starlink broadband network, deploy orbital AI data-center satellites, and carry astronauts to the Moon and Mars. Every one of those revenue ambitions depends on flying Starship far more often than it does today, and a faster flight rate depends on a reliable, high-volume fuel supply. Starpipe is the unglamorous link that makes the rest of the plan possible.

For the broader economy, the project is a window into how the newly public SpaceX intends to spend and build. The company went public in a historic June 2026 initial public offering, and Starpipe shows it pouring capital into the kind of heavy industrial infrastructure that turns a launch business into something closer to an integrated energy-and-aerospace operation. If the pipeline performs as designed, it would cut a major bottleneck at Starbase and move Musk’s vision of routine, high-frequency spaceflight a step closer to reality.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street opened lower Friday, June 26, as a fresh wave of selling in technology shares weighed on the major indexes, even as new economic data showed Americans are becoming more optimistic about the outlook for the economy.

The University of Michigan released its final June consumer sentiment survey Friday morning, showing confidence improved from earlier in the month. According to the report, expectations for business conditions over the next five years jumped 16%, while long-term inflation expectations eased to 3.3%, down from the prior month. Joanne Hsu, director of the survey, said concerns over the potential long-term economic impact of the recent Iran conflict have begun to fade, although overall consumer sentiment remains below where it stood before the conflict escalated.

Despite the encouraging economic data, investors focused on renewed weakness across the technology sector.

Shortly after the opening bell, the Nasdaq Composite fell about 1.1%, the S&P 500 lost roughly 0.7%, and the Dow Jones Industrial Average declined approximately 237 points, or 0.5%. The Russell 2000, which tracks smaller companies, outperformed the broader market, rising about 0.7% as investors rotated money away from mega-cap technology stocks and into other sectors.

The biggest catalyst appeared to be reports that OpenAI may postpone its widely anticipated initial public offering until 2027.

According to published reports, advisers presented OpenAI Chief Executive Sam Altman with two options: pursue an IPO next year at a valuation below $1 trillion, or wait until 2027 in hopes of achieving the trillion-dollar milestone. Altman reportedly rejected the lower valuation, believing the company should not go public until it can command a $1 trillion market value.

The report renewed concerns that valuations throughout the artificial intelligence sector have become stretched after months of rapid gains. Investors also remain focused on the enormous capital spending required to build AI infrastructure, including data centers and advanced semiconductor capacity.

The weakness spread beyond the United States.

South Korea’s stock market experienced one of its sharpest selloffs in months after the Kospi briefly plunged 8%, triggering an automatic trading halt under the country’s circuit-breaker rules. The benchmark later recovered part of its losses but still finished the session down 5.8%. Technology shares led declines throughout much of Asia as investors reassessed lofty AI-related valuations.

Market movers

Semiconductor and AI-related stocks led losses early Friday.

The Roundhill Magnificent Seven ETF, which tracks Alphabet, Amazon, Apple, Meta Platforms, Microsoft, Nvidia and Tesla, slipped in premarket trading to approximately $60.95 as investors reduced exposure to the largest technology companies.

Healthcare stocks once again provided a defensive haven.

Eli Lilly climbed nearly 6%, Johnson & Johnson advanced more than 3%, and AbbVie gained over 2%, extending the sector’s strong performance from Thursday as investors sought more stable earnings during the technology selloff.

BlackBerry shares fell roughly 3%, giving back a small portion of Thursday’s nearly 20% rally. The software company recently reported fiscal first-quarter revenue of $152.9 million, up 25.6% from a year earlier, while net income more than quadrupled. Analyst sentiment also remained positive, with Stifel initiating coverage with a Buy rating and a $12 price target, while CIBC raised its target price to $10.

Friday’s weakness followed a mixed performance on Thursday.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average finished at a record closing high of 51,920.62, gaining 71.72 points, or 0.14%, as healthcare, industrial and financial stocks offset weakness in technology.

The S&P 500 ended nearly unchanged at 7,357.49, while the Nasdaq Composite fell 0.46% to 25,358.60, marking its first four-session losing streak since February.

One bright spot was Micron Technology, whose shares surged 17% after reporting quarterly results that significantly exceeded Wall Street’s expectations. The company posted adjusted earnings of $25.11 per share, well above analysts’ consensus estimate of $20.78. Analysts at Bank of America Global Research said the results reinforced the critical role advanced memory chips continue to play in the expanding AI market.

Meanwhile, Apple dropped 6% after announcing price increases across several MacBook and iPad models, while Microsoft lost more than 3% following higher Xbox pricing. Investors attributed much of the pricing pressure to rising memory and component costs. Caterpillar gained 6%, benefiting from continued strength in industrial shares.

Commodities and volatility

Oil prices continued to decline as concerns over Middle East supply disruptions eased.

International benchmark Brent crude for August delivery fell about 2% to $73.72 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate dropped a similar amount to $70.48 per barrel after additional tankers resumed transit through the Strait of Hormuz, easing fears of prolonged shipping disruptions despite reports of an attack on a commercial vessel near the Gulf of Oman.

Gold futures rose 0.4% to $4,063.70 an ounce as investors sought traditional safe-haven assets, while silver slipped 0.9% to $58.74 an ounce.

Market volatility also edged higher as traders monitored whether the latest rotation out of high-priced technology stocks would deepen into the afternoon.

Investors now head toward the closing bell watching whether improving consumer confidence and falling oil prices can stabilize broader markets, or whether renewed concerns surrounding AI valuations will continue driving money away from the technology sector.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

JPMorgan Chase promoted two of its most senior executives, Doug Petno and Troy Rohrbaugh, into newly created co-president roles on Thursday, the bank announced, in the clearest signal yet of who stands to eventually replace longtime Chairman and CEO Jamie Dimon atop the largest bank in the United States. “The changes announced today mark an important step in our board’s thoughtful process around succession planning and development of our top leaders,” Dimon said in a statement.

The move came with a notable departure. JPMorgan said Thursday that it elevated Petno and Rohrbaugh to co-presidents while announcing the retirement of Marianne Lake, a senior executive widely seen on Wall Street as a top contender for the chief executive job. Lake had long been viewed as a potential successor, and her exit reshapes a field that has been one of the most closely watched transition stories in corporate America.

The two newly promoted leaders bring complementary résumés. Petno and Rohrbaugh had jointly served as co-CEOs of JPMorgan’s commercial and investment bank. Going forward, Petno will become sole head of that commercial and investment bank, while Rohrbaugh will move over to lead consumer and community banking, the giant retail business that touches tens of millions of everyday customers. Rohrbaugh replaces Lake as CEO of consumer and community banking; she retires after more than 25 years with the lender.

Their backgrounds reflect two different sides of the bank. Petno rose through the investment bank doing client and advisory work, including natural resources banking, while Rohrbaugh came up through the trading desks with a background in foreign-exchange derivatives and options. Handing the consumer franchise to a markets veteran, and the corporate and investment bank to a relationship banker, gives both men broad exposure ahead of any eventual handoff.

The promotions are widely read as a tell about the board’s thinking. Analysts noted that even with retention bonuses for other contenders, the promotion of Petno and Rohrbaugh is a signal that the board is leaning toward them. “Elevating Petno and Rohrbaugh into president-level roles that have historically served as the springboard for the CEO job,” analysts at Keefe, Bruyette & Woods wrote, while Lake’s retirement reshapes the field.

The bank also moved to keep its remaining senior talent in place. JPMorgan disclosed Thursday that Chief Operating Officer Jennifer Piepszak, 55, and asset and wealth management CEO Mary Erdoes, 58, each received $20 million equity-based retention awards. The awards vest only after three years, require the bank to hit an average return on tangible common equity of at least 12% between 2026 and 2028, and the executives must remain employed, with no vesting for retirement or government service. The bank said the awards were meant to “preserve top qualified internal succession candidates.”

The timing question still hangs over the firm. Dimon, 70, has repeatedly said the board has multiple executives capable of becoming CEO, and two people with knowledge of his thinking said he currently expects to remain CEO for roughly three more years, though that could change. He has also left open the possibility of staying on as chairman indefinitely. After more than two decades running the bank, Dimon is regarded as the most influential figure in American banking, and his eventual exit is treated by investors and policymakers as a market event in itself.

Why this matters beyond Wall Street is straightforward. JPMorgan is the largest bank in the country, a lender whose decisions on credit, deposits, mortgages and small-business lending ripple through the broader economy. The people positioned to run it set the tone for how a vast share of American consumers and companies borrow and bank. A leadership change at the top, even one telegraphed years in advance, carries weight for everyone who holds a JPMorgan account or competes with one.

For now, the picture is clearer than it has been in years. Insiders described the dual promotion as setting up a long-awaited horse race to succeed Dimon. Two executives are out front, two more have been paid to stay, and one long-presumed front-runner has stepped away. The next chapter at JPMorgan will be written by whichever of them the board ultimately chooses, on a timeline that, as ever, only Jamie Dimon seems to control.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Grocery prices are still climbing at close to their fastest pace in years, keeping pressure on household budgets even as the broader economy’s inflation story is dominated by energy. According to the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, whose Consumer Price Index for May was released Wednesday, June 10, the food-at-home index — the cost of groceries — rose 2.7% over the prior 12 months. That followed a 2.9% annual increase in April, which was the sharpest grocery inflation rate since August 2023, leaving food-at-home prices hovering near a three-year high.

The strain is uneven across the store. Fresh produce led the way, with the fruits and vegetables category up about 6.1% over the year, while nonalcoholic beverages rose 5.8%, pushed higher by global coffee prices. Beef remained a sore spot, with farm-level cattle prices up nearly 18% from a year earlier amid tight supplies. One bright spot for shoppers was dairy, where prices fell 1.0% over the year and cheese dropped 2.9% in May alone, giving grocers room to run promotions.

The figure sits below restaurant inflation. Prices for food away from home — meals at restaurants and takeout — rose 3.5% over the year, according to the same report. That gap has narrowed in 2026, an important shift for grocers and restaurants alike as families weigh whether to eat out or cook at home.

For context, food-at-home prices rose just 1.2% in 2024 and 2.3% in 2025, both below the long-run average. The U.S. Department of Agriculture now expects grocery prices to climb about 3.2% across 2026, faster than the 20-year historical pace of 2.6%, and warns the war in Iran could push prices higher still by raising gasoline, transportation and production costs in the months ahead.

The business and consumer fallout is already visible. Grocery inflation running ahead of its recent trend pressures the margins of chains like Kroger and Albertsons, fuels the political push against “surveillance pricing,” and helps explain why a growing share of shoppers are trading down to store brands or financing grocery runs with buy now, pay later loans. While the Federal Reserve, now led by Chair Kevin Warsh, focuses on an energy-driven jump in headline inflation to 4.2%, the steadier grind in grocery aisles is the number families feel most directly every week.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.